Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Save this PDF as:
 WORD  PNG  TXT  JPG

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Molded Case Circuit Breakers"

Transcription

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Circuit Breakers.1 Introduction Product Overview V4-T- Typical Applications V4-T- Eaton Molded Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies V4-T-3. Series G Globally Accepted Breakers Product Overview V4-T-4 Product Selection Overview V4-T-6 Product Selection Guide V4-T-7 Technical Data and Specifications V4-T-9 Dimensions and Weights V4-T-14 EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T Series C North American Standards and Special Application Breakers Product Overview V4-T-116 Standards and Certifications V4-T-117 Quick Reference V4-T-118 G-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-11 F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) V4-T-135 J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) V4-T-153 K-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-161 L-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-185 M-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-11 N-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T- R-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-37 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-56 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T-67 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4) V4-T-69 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-70 Internal Accessories V4-T-73 External Accessories V4-T Definite Purpose Optimized Solution for HVAC/R and Pumping Applications Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breakers V4-T Metering and Communications Power Monitoring and Metering with Modbus RTU PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module V4-T Specialty Specialty Breakers Engine Generator Circuit Breakers V4-T-343 Direct Current Circuit Breakers V4-T-349 PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers V4-T-363 E Mining Service Breakers V4-T-37 Classic Mining Breakers V4-T-398 Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFR V4-T-41.7 Handle Mechanisms Handle Mechanisms Series G V4-T-415 Handle Mechanisms Series C V4-T-47 Learn Online Drawings Online Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-1

2 .1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Introduction Series G E-Frame and Series C F-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Overview Series G vs. Series C Eaton s Electrical Sector, under the Eaton brand, offers the widest variety of molded case circuit breakers available today. Designed for electrical and machinery OEMs serving a range of industries and applications, these proven designs incorporate the latest in innovation with the high reliability that has been our hallmark since the advent of the circuit breaker in the 190s. The Series C family ranges from amperes, and includes thermal-magnetic breakers, electronic trip breakers, molded case switches, motor circuit protectors, and specially designed breakers for engine generator, DC and mining applications. The new Series G line features an average 35% size reduction, common field-installable internal accessories, and advanced trip unit functionality that eliminates the need for rating plugs. These breakers meet the requirements of UL, CSA, IEC, CCC and CE, allowing the OEM to standardize on a design that meets the needs of their global customer base. Application Description Eaton molded case circuit breakers cover the widest range of applications in the industry: Electrical OEMs Machinery OEMs Navy breakers: UL 489 Supplement SB MIL-C MIL-C ABS/NVR Mining breakers up to 1100 Vac Earth leakage DC breakers Vdc Engine generator breakers amperes Current limiting breakers Typical Applications Machine Tool Control Panels and Motor Control Centers Designed for these equipment requirements, including new world-class accessories. Panelboards As both main and branch circuit protection devices. Contents Description Introduction Series G Series C Definite Purpose PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module Specialty Breakers Learn Online Drawings Online Feeder Pillars In distribution systems to provide main and branch circuit protection. Switchgear In distribution systems to provide main and branch circuit protection up to 500 amperes (RG-Frame). Busbar Trunking Tap-Offs In busbar trunking tap-offs to provide circuit protection. Typical Eaton Applications Switchboard Page V4-T-4 V4-T-116 V4-T-333 V4-T-340 V4-T-343 Individual Enclosures Completely assembled in enclosures to meet specific customer requirements. Additional Applications Special versions of each Eaton frame are available to provide safe equipment control and protection in mining and other applications. Contact your Eaton agent or distributor for additional information. Panelboard Individual Circuit Breaker Enclosure Busbar Trunking Tap-Off Machine Tool Control Panel V4-T- Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Introduction.1 Eaton Molded Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies Applications Panelboards Switchboards Motor Control Centers Ampere Enclosed Bus Enclosed Frame Range 1A A 1A-LX A-LX 3A 3E 4 4B 4D 5P PRL-C PRL-i PRL-C/i Freedom IT. Control Plugs Breaker Series G EG JG 0 50 LG NG RG Series C FD/ED 15 5 JD KD LD MDL ND RD amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for EG. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for LG amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-3

4 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Series G, Amperes for UL, CSA and IEC Applications Product Overview Series G, Amperes for UL, CSA and IEC Applications Eaton Series G molded case circuit breakers provide increased performance in considerably less space than standard circuit breakers or comparable fusible devices. The G signifies global applications: Series G circuit breakers are marked with UL, CSA, CE, IEC and KEMA KEUR listings. Other advantages include: Field-fit accessories Common accessories through 630 amperes Electronic trip units from 0 to 500 amperes UL-listed and IEC-rated, 30 ma ground fault/earth leakage modules Built-in ground fault protection down to 0 amperes The EG, JG and LG frames are designed around space-saving footprints. The NG and RG use the proven Eaton Series C ND and RD designs. The Series G family includes five frame sizes in ratings from 15 to 500 amperes. Series G offers a choice of several interrupting capacities up to 00 ka at 480 volts AC (00 ka at 40 volts AC). Series G molded case circuit breakers are also available in direct current options. Please see Specialty Breakers Section.6 for more details. Standard calibration is 40 C. For applications in high ambient temperature conditions, 50 C factory calibration is available on thermal-magnetic breakers (not UL). Contents Description Page Series G Standards and Certifications V4-T-5 Product Selection Overview V4-T-6 Product Selection Guide V4-T-7 Technical Data and Specifications V4-T-9 Dimensions and Weights V4-T-14 EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 Learn Online Drawings Online The Most Logically Designed Contact Assembly The flexibility and outstanding performance characteristics of Eaton circuit breakers are made possible by the best contact designs in circuit breaker history. Our technology creates a highspeed blow-open action using the electromechanical forces produced by high-level fault currents. Eaton circuit breakers are operated by a toggle-type mechanism that is mechanically trip-free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held closed against short circuit currents. Tripping due to overload or short circuits is clearly indicated by the position on the handle. This remarkably fast and dependable contact action is designed to enhance safety. Thorough In-Plant Testing The quality, dependability and reliability of every Eaton Circuit Breaker is ensured by a thorough program of inplant testing. Two calibration tests are conducted on every pole of every circuit breaker to verify the trip mechanism, operating mechanism, continuity and accuracy. Current Limiting Characteristics Circuit breakers are current limiting because of their high repulsion contact arrangement and use of state-of-the-art arc extinguishing technology. Eaton offers one of the most complete lines of current limiting breakers in the industry. The industrial breakers are available in current limiting versions with interrupting capacities up to 00 ka at 480 V without fuses in the same physical size as standard and high interrupting capacity breakers. V4-T-4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Operating Mechanisms Eaton circuit breakers have a toggle handle operating mechanism, which also serves as a switching position indicator. The indicator shows the positions of: ON, OFF and TRIPPED. The toggle handle snaps into the TRIPPED position if the breaker is tripped by one of its overcurrent, short circuit, shunt or undervoltage releases. Before the circuit breaker can be reclosed following a trip-out, the toggle handle must be brought beyond the OFF position (RESET). The circuit breaker can then be reclosed. As an additional switching position indicator for EG- to RG-Frame circuit breakers, there are two windows on the right and on the left of the toggle handle, in which the switching state is indicated by means of the colors red, green and white corresponding to the ON, OFF and TRIPPED positions respectively. Positions of the Toggle Handle Drive OFF Reset ON Tripped Standards and Certifications Eaton Series G circuit breakers meet applicable UL 489 and IEC standards. Molded case circuit breakers from Eaton are designed to conform with the following international standards: Australian Standard AS 184 and AS molded case circuit breakers British Standards Institution Standard EN International Electromechanical Commission Recommendations IEC circuit breakers Japanese T-Mark standard molded case circuit breakers National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standards Publication No. AB molded case circuit breakers South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SANS 156, Standard Specification for molded case circuit breakers Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 947., Safety Regulations for circuit breakers Union Technique de l Electricite Standard NF C 63-10, low voltage switchgear and control gear circuit breaker requirements Verband Deutscher Elektrotechnike (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, low voltage switchgear and control gear, circuit breakers Global Third-Party Certification Certification marks ensure product compliance with the total standard via the third party witnessing of tests by globally recognized independent certification organizations. KEMA is a highly recognized, independent international organization that offers certification and inspection facilities for equipment in many industries. The KEMA- KEUR mark is the highest certification an electrical product can receive from KEMA. Our IEC molded case circuit breakers are KEMA tested and certified. These breakers are also listed in accordance with UL 489, as well as CSA C. No KEMA, UL and CSA provide ongoing follow-up testing and inspections to ensure that Eaton molded case circuit breakers continue to meet their exacting standards. ISO Certification Eaton circuit breakers are manufactured in ISO certified facilities. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-5

6 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection Overview Electronic Trip Units (Digitrip RMS Trip Units) Multi-Function Electronic Trip Units for All Applications True rms Sensing Digitrip RMS trip units use Eaton s microprocessor-based intelligence to provide true rms sensing, permitting increased accuracy and reliable system protection. True rms sensing is not susceptible to nuisance tripping when waveforms containing high harmonic currents are present. Digitrip RMS 310+ Digitrip RMS 310+ electronic trip units are available with Eaton Series G circuit breakers JG, LG, NG and RG, as well as Series C FD, KD, LD and MDL circuit breakers. Digitrip 310+ trip units are equipped with an integrated I r switch that allows users to modify the continuous current rating of the breaker without having to replace a rating plug. This provides further flexibility for coordination in systems. The trip units may be used in 50 Hz or 60 Hz applications. The Digitrip 310+ offers true rms sensing, is front adjustable and has an optional local display of current and cause of trip. Curve Shaping When selectively coordinated systems are called for, Digitrip RMS 310+ will provide a cost-effective solution for a variety of applications. The standard Digitrip RMS 310+ includes an adjustable short time pickup setting encompassing an I t ramp function that provides the basic LS curve shaping function. Digitrip 310+ trip units also include selectable long time delay (t LD ) and pickup settings (I r ). A rating plug is not required. The optional Digitrip RMS 310+ LSI and LSIG provide additional flat response short time delay adjustments and an instantaneous setting to provide LSI curve shaping capability. Digitrip RMS 310+ LSG and LSIG units are available with ground fault pickup and flat response ground fault delay. Ground fault alarm options are available with trip and no trip functionality as a means to notify users of a ground fault condition with the option to maintain the breaker online. Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units can effectively coordinate with both sophisticated upstream power breakers as well as downstream thermalmagnetic breakers, making Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units the cost-effective reliable choice for selectively coordinated systems. Thermal Memory All Digitrip RMS trip units incorporate a long delay. Thermal memory prevents the system from cumulative overheating due to repeated overcurrent events that may occur in quick succession. Field Testing A field test kit is available for Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units. Arcflash Reduction Maintenance Mode (ARMS) ARMS is an available feature on KD, LG, LD, MDL, NG and RG frames with 310+ electronic trip units. This feature increases worker safety by providing an accelerated instantaneous trip unit to reduce arc flash. Additionally, LG, NG and RG frames with the ARMS feature include a fully adjustable instantaneous setting. Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip units are available with Eaton R-Frame circuit breakers 800 through 500 amperes. Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units provide unparalleled system protection with the added convenience of a local display. Curve Shaping Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip units are available with up to nine curve shaping choices achieved by adjusting up to seven switches on the front of the unit for optimum system coordination. Maximum curve shaping flexibility is provided by dependent long and short delay adjustments that are long delay pickup (I r ) based, depicted on the front of the unit by the blue portion of the time-current curve. Additional coordination capability can be provided by utilizing the short delay and ground fault zone selective interlocking features available on these trip units. System Diagnostics Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 models of trip units provide long delay, short delay, instantaneous, and ground fault cause of trip LEDs on the front of the unit. Their display shows a magnitude of trip information, as well as remote signal contacts, for improved system alarming. System Monitoring Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units have the capability to monitor phase currents, as well as neutral or ground currents. This information is displayed on a large digital display mounted on the unit. Digitrip RMS 910 trip units can also provide the user with power and energy monitoring capability. Peak power demand, present power demand, and total energy, as well as forward and reverse energy can be monitored with this unit. Digitrip RMS 910 trip units have the additional capability of monitoring line-to-line voltage, as well as system power factor. Both parameters are displayed in the digital display window and are supported by LEDs to indicate which parameter is being displayed. Harmonics Monitoring Digitrip RMS 910 trip units are capable of displaying values of current harmonics in the digital display window. Percentage of harmonic content can be monitored for each phase, up to the 7th harmonic. Additionally, a total harmonic distortion value can be calculated and displayed. Communications Digitrip RMS 910 units have built-in communications options to allow all protection, monitoring, and control information to be transmitted back to a central location via the Eaton PowerNet system. Field Testing Integral field testing capability is provided on all 610 and 910 trip units. No additional test set is needed to perform both trip and no trip field testing. V4-T-6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Product Selection Guide Electronic Trip Units Digitrip RMS 310+, 610 and 910 I n = Rating plug rating. I r = Long delay setting trip units have selectable settings instead of a rating plug trip units have adjustable long delay times of 4 seconds, except NG 310+ for 800 A frame, for which it is 14 seconds details are included by frame in Pages V4-T-44 (JG), V4-T-6 (LG), V4-T-7 (NG), and V4-T-83 (RG). 4 JG/LG: X 14X (I n ); NG: X 8X (I n ); RG: X 9X (I n ); 500 ampere RG-Frame X 6X% x (I n ). 5 LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG 310+ trip units include an independently adjustable Instantaneous (I i ) setting. 6 LS, LSG only. 7 Not to exceed 100 amperes. RMS 310+ RMS 610 RMS 910 RG JG Breaker Type Series G frame(s) JG-, LG-, NG- and RG-Frames RG-Frame RG-Frame Ampere rating A A A Interrupting rating at 415 V 35, 70, 100 ka 70, 100 ka 70, 100 ka Trip Unit Sensing rms sensing Yes Yes Yes Protection and Coordination Protection Ordering options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG Fixed rating plug (I n ) 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Long delay Adjustable l r switch Yes Yes No No Long delay setting VAR/frame VAR/frame x (l n ) x (l n ) Long delay time I t at 6x 10 seconds 10 seconds 4 seconds 4 seconds Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes High load alarm 1.05 l r 1.05 l r 0.85 x I r 0.85 x I r Short delay Short delay setting VAR/frame 4 VAR/frame % S1 and S x (I r ) % S1 and S x (I r ) Short delay time I t 100 ms No 100, 300, 500 ms 100, 300, 500 ms Short delay time flat No I 300 ms ms ms Short delay time ZSI No Yes Yes Yes Instantaneous Independent adjustable Inst. setting No Yes 5 Yes Yes Instantaneous setting No VAR/frame % M1 and M x (l n ) % M1 and M x (l n ) Discriminator No No Yes 6 Yes 6 Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground fault Ground fault setting VAR/Frame 7 VAR/Frame % x (l n ) % x (l n ) 7 Ground fault delay I t at 0.6x No No 100, 300, 500 ms 100, 300, 500 ms Ground fault delay flat I 300 ms I 300 ms ms ms Ground fault ZSI No Yes Yes Yes Ground fault thermal memory No No Yes Yes LG/NG Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-7

8 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Digitrip RMS 310+, 610 and 910, continued 1 Using cause of trip module (catalog number TRIP-LED). RG 310+ trip units include integrated cause of trip LEDs. 3 Using ammeter or remote ammeter/cause of trip display (catalog number DIGIVIEW and DIGIVIEWR06). 4 Test kit available for field testing 310+ trip units (catalog number MTST30V). RMS 310+ RMS 610 RMS 910 RG LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG, LSIG (A) LSI (A), LSIG System Diagnostics Cause of trip LEDs Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes Yes Magnitude of trip information No No Yes Yes Remote signal contacts No No Yes Yes System Monitoring Digital display Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes Yes Current Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes Yes Voltage No No No Yes Power and energy No No No Yes Power quality harmonics No No No Yes Power factor No No No Yes System Communications PowerNet No No No Yes Field Testing Testing method Test set 4 Test set 4 Integral Integral JG LG/NG V4-T-8 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

9 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Technical Data and Specifications Ratings Frames EG, JG and LG EG JG LG Maximum rated current (amperes) 15, , 630 Breaker type 3 B B E S S H H C E S H C U X E S H C U X of poles 1, 3, 4, 3, 4 1, 3, 4 1, 3, 4 3, 4, 3, 4, 3, 4, 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 Breaker Capacity (ka rms) Vac Hz NEMA, 40 Vac UL, CSA 480 Vac Vac /50 Vdc IEC Vac I cu I cs Vac I cu I cs Vac I cu I cs /50 Vdc 5 I cu I cs Ampere range A A A Trip Units F = Fixed A = Adjustable T = Thermal M = Magnetic Thermal magnetic FT-FM AT-FM 1 15 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG. 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 3 Breaker type C, U and X are current limiting per UL EG breaker rated 600/347 Vac. 5 Two poles in series Vdc only for single-pole breakers. 7 Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available. FT-AM AT-AM Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310) FT-AM AT-AM Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310) Interchangeable Built-in Fixed thermal Adjustable thermal Magnetic Fixed Adjustable Adjustable Electronic LS RMS 7 LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG Utilization category A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-9

10 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Frames NG and RG NG Maximum rated current (amperes) 800, , , , 000, , 000, 500 Breaker type S H C S U H C of poles, 3, 4, 3, 4, 3, , 4 3, 4 Breaker Capacity (ka rms) AC Hz NEMA, 40 Vac UL, CSA 480 Vac Vac IEC Vac I cu I cs Vac I cu I cs Vac I cu I cs Vdc I cu I cs Ampere range A A A 1600 A 800 A A A Trip units Electronic Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310+) (Digitrip RMS 310+ and 910) Interchangeable 5 5 Built-in Electronic 4 LI 6 6 LS LSI LIG 6 6 LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG Utilization category A A A A A A A 1 NG 1600 ampere frame is not UL or CSA listed. Not KEMA-KEUR listed. 3 IEC H.5 Annex H is not KEMA-KEUR tested. 4 Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available. 5 RG 310+ are interchangeable with the exception of: FROM not ground fault equipped TO ground fault equipped 6 Available only on Digitrip 910 trip units. RG V4-T-10 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

11 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. General Specifications All Series G Frames EG JG LG NG RG Maximum rated current I n depending on the version 160 A 1 50 A 400, 630 A 800, 100, 1600 A , 000, 500 A Rated insulation voltage U, according to IEC Main conducting paths 500 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac Auxiliary circuits 500 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp Main conducting paths 6 kv 8 kv 8 kv 8 kv 8 kv Auxiliary circuits 4 kv 4 kv 4 kv 4 kv 4 kv Rated operational voltage U e IEC 415 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac NEMA 600Y/347 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac UL and CSA listed Yes 1 Yes Yes Yes 3 Yes Permissible ambient temperature 0 to 70 C 0 to 70 C 0 to 70 C 0 to 70 C 0 to 70 C Permissible load for various ambient temperatures close to the circuit breaker, related to the rated current of the circuit breaker Circuit breakers for plant protection At 40 C 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% At 50 C 96% 9% 96% 94% 96% 91% 91% 91% At 55 C 93% 87% 94% 90% 93% 86% 85% 85% At 60 C 91% 83% 9% 87% 90% 8% 81% 81% At 70 C 86% 73% 88% 80% 84% 70% 70% 70% Circuit breakers for motor protection At 40 C 100% 100% At 50 C 100% 100% At 55 C 100% 100% At 60 C 100% 100% At 70 C 90% 90% Circuit breakers for starter combinations and isolating circuit breakers At 40 C 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% At 50 C 100% 100% 100% 91% 91% At 55 C 96% 96% 95% 85% 85% At 60 C 91% 8% 90% 81% 81% At 70 C 86% 88% 84% Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (DC) Not for circuit breakers for motor protection (Time constant t = 10 rms) Two conducting paths in series For EG to LG up to 50 Vdc 4 ka max. 4 ka max. 4 ka max. 6 6 NEMA (time constant t = 8 rms) Two conducting paths in series 50 Vdc 1 15 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG. 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the NG. 4 Thermal overload release set to the lower value. 5 Thermal overload release set to the upper value. 6 Not suitable for DC switching. 4 ka max. 4 ka max. 4 ka max. 6 6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-11

12 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G All Series G Frames, continued EG JG LG NG RG Main switch characteristics according to IEC in combination with lockable rotary drives Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Rated short circuit breaking capacity according to For rated short circuit breaking capacity, see Page V4-T-9. IEC (at AC 50/60 Hz) Endurance (operating cycles) 10,000 10,000 8,000 3,000 3,000 Maximum switching frequency 300 1/h 40 1/h 40 1/h 60 1/h 60 1/h Conductor cross sections and terminal types for main conductors Box terminals Box terminals Box terminals Flat bar terminals Flat bar terminals Flat bar terminals Solid or stranded.5 to 95 mm 50 to 150 mm 95 to 40 mm Finely stranded with end sleeve.5 to 50/70 mm 35 to 10 mm 70 to 150 mm Busbar 600 A Optional Optional Tightening torque for box terminals 5.6 Nm 0 Nm 4 Nm 31 Nm 31 Nm Tightening torque for busbar connection pieces 5.6 Nm 15 Nm 30 Nm 6 Nm 50 Nm 0 Nm Conductor cross sections for auxiliary circuits with terminal connection or terminal strip Solid 0.75 to.5 mm 0.75 to.5 mm 0.75 to.5 mm Up to x4 mm Up to x4 mm Finely stranded with end sleeve 0.75 to.5 mm 0.75 to.5 mm 0.75 to.5 mm Up to x.5 mm Up to x.5 mm With brought-out cable ends 0.8 (AWG 18) mm 0.8 (AWG 18) mm 0.8 (AWG 18) mm 0.8 (AWG 18) mm Tightening torque for fitting screws 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm Power loss per circuit breaker at maximum rated current l n (the power losses of the undervoltage releases ( r releases) must be observed if necessary) at three-phase symmetrical load) 400 A: 600 A: For plant protection 40 W 45 W 65 W 10 W 87/10 W 0/70/400 W As isolating circuit breaker 40 W 45 W 65 W 10 W 87/10 W 0/70/400 W For starter combinations 40 W 45 W 65 W 10 W For motor protection 45 W 65 W 10 W Permissible mounting position 90 Arc spacing suitable for reverse-feed applications Yes (except HMCPE) Yes Yes Yes Yes Auxiliary Switches Rated thermal current l th 6A 6A 6A 6A 6A Rated making capacity 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A AC-14 AC-14 AC-14 AC-15 AC-15 Rated operational voltage 30/400/600 V 30/400/600 V 30/400/600 V 600 V 600 V Rated operational current 6/3/0.5 A 6/3/0.5 A 6/3/0.5 A 6A 6A DC-13 DC-13 Rated operational voltage 15/50V 15/50V 15/50V 15/50V 15/50V Rated operational current 0.5/0.15 A 0.5/0.15 A 0.5/0.15 A 0.5/0.5 A 0.5/0.5 A Backup fuse 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A Miniature circuit breaker 6/4 A 6/4 A 6/4 A 6/4 A 6/4 A V4-T-1 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

13 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. All Series G Frames, continued EG JG LG NG RG Releases Undervoltage releases ( r releases) Response voltage: Drop (breaker tripped) U s 35 70% 35 70% 35 70% 35 70% 35 70% Pickup (breaker may be switched on) U s % % % % % Power consumption in continuous operation at: 50/60 Hz 1 Vac 1.9 VA.9 VA 50/60 Hz 4 Vac 0.7 VA 3.9 VA 3.9 VA.4 VA 3.1 VA 50/60 Hz Vac VA VA VA VA VA 50/60 Hz Vac VA VA VA VA VA 50/60 Hz Vac VA VA VA VA VA 50/60 Hz Vac. 3.9 VA VA VA VA VA 50/60 Hz Vac VA VA VA 1 Vdc.6W 3.4W 4 Vdc 0.70 W 3.1W 3.1W 3.6W 4.3W Vdc W.0 3.1W.0 3.1W W W Vdc W 1.6.W 1.6.W.9 3.6W W 0 50 Vdc W 3.1 4W 3.1 4W W W Maximum opening time 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms 6 ms 6 ms Shunt Trips Shunt trips ( f releases) Response voltage: Pickup (breaker tripped) U s % % % % % Power consumption in (short time) at: 50/60 Hz 4 Vac VA VA VA VA 61 VA 50/60 Hz Vac VA VA VA 4 50 VA VA 50/60 Hz Vac 50/60 Hz Vac VA VA VA VA VA 50/60 Hz Vac VA VA VA VA 50/60 Hz Vac VA 50/60 Hz Vac VA VA 19 4 VA VA 1 4 Vdc 9 10 W W W W 396 W Vdc W W W W W Vdc W W W W W 0 50 Vdc 40 58W W W W Maximum load duration Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Maximum opening time 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms 6 ms 6 ms Molded Case Switch (with High Magnetic Trip) Unfused kaic at 480 Vac (415 Vac) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70) Self-protected, will trip above 150 for EG15; 1600 for EG /6300 1,500 0,000 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-13

14 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Series G Frame EG, JG and LG EG JG LG H W D H W D H W D Single-pole 5.50 (139.7) 1.00 (5.4).99 (76.0) Two-pole 5.50 (139.7).00 (50.8).99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 4.13 (105.0) 3.57 (87.4) Three-pole 5.50 (139.7) 3.00 (76.).99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 4.13 (105.0) 3.57 (87.4) (58.0) 5.48 (140.0) 4.09 (104.0) Four-pole 5.50 (139.7) 4.00 (101.6).99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 5.34 (135.6) 3.57 (87.4) (58.0) 7. (183.0) 4.09 (104.0) Series G Frame NG and RG NG RG H W D H W D Single-pole Two-pole Three-pole (406.0) 8.5 (10.0) 5.50 (140.0) (406.0) (394.0) 9.75 (9.0) Four-pole (406.0) (80.0) 5.50 (140.0) (406.0) 0.00 (508.0) 9.75 (9.0) Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) Series G Frame EG, JG and LG EG JG LG NG RG Single-pole 0.85 (0.39) Two-pole 1.57 (0.71) 11.3 (5.13) Three-pole.8 (1.04) 5.06 (.30) T/M 5.31 (.41) ETU Four-pole.85 (1.9) 6.76 (3.07) T/M 7.1 (3.3) ETU 1.36 (5.61) T/M (5.9) ETU 16.7 (7.39) T/M 16.9 (7.68) ETU 46.8 (1.3) (47.0) 6.0 (8.3) (54.0) V4-T-14 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

15 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) Product Description EG breaker is HACR rated. Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) Selection V4-T-16 Product Selection V4-T-17 Accessories V4-T-6 Technical Data and Specifications V4-T-7 Dimensions and Weights V4-T-7 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module..... V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-15

16 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Series G EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) E Frame Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA Performance 600Y/ B E S H C K Molded case switch 1 Cannot be UL rated. Available only as 15 and 160 A sizes. of Poles 1 = One = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four neutral 0% protected 7 = Four neutral 100% protected E G H FF G Amperes Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric end caps E = Imperial end caps G = Line/load standard B = Bolt-on Metric Imperial Metric Trip Unit FF = Fixed fixed AF = Adjustable thermal fixed magnetic KS = Molded case switch V4-T-16 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

17 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Product Selection Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) IC Rating at 415/480 Volts EG-Frame EG-Frame 18/18 Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 C 1 Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3 Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 1 16, 3, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings. Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side. Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 15 EGB1015FFG EGB015FFG EGB3015FFG EGB4015FFG 16 EGB1016FFG EGB016FFG EGB3016FFG EGB4016FFG 0 EGB100FFG EGB00FFG EGB300FFG EGB400FFG EGB400AFG 5 EGB105FFG EGB05FFG EGB305FFG EGB305AFG EGB405FFG EGB405AFG 30 EGB1030FFG EGB030FFG EGB3030FFG EGB4030FFG 3 EGB103FFG EGB03FFG EGB303FFG EGB303AFG EGB403FFG EGB403AFG 35 EGB1035FFG EGB035FFG EGB3035FFG EGB4035FFG 40 EGB1040FFG EGB040FFG EGB3040FFG EGB3040AFG EGB4040FFG EGB4040AFG 45 EGB1045FFG EGB045FFG EGB3045FFG EGB4045FFG 50 EGB1050FFG EGB050FFG EGB3050FFG EGB3050AFG EGB4050FFG EGB4050AFG 60 EGB1060FFG EGB060FFG EGB3060FFG EGB4060FFG 63 EGB1063FFG EGB063FFG EGB3063FFG EGB3063AFG EGB4063FFG EGB4063AFG 70 EGB1070FFG EGB070FFG EGB3070FFG EGB4070FFG 80 EGB1080FFG EGB080FFG EGB3080FFG EGB3080AFG EGB4080FFG EGB4080AFG 90 EGB1090FFG EGB090FFG EGB3090FFG EGB4090FFG 100 EGB1100FFG EGB100FFG EGB3100FFG EGB3100AFG EGB4100FFG EGB4100AFG 110 EGB1110FFG EGB110FFG EGB3110FFG EGB4110FFG 15 EGB115FFG EGB15FFG EGB315FFG EGB315AFG EGB415FFG EGB415AFG 160 EGB3160FFG EGB3160AFG EGB4160FFG EGB4160AFG Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-17

18 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G EG-Frame 5/5 Single-Pole Unavailable EG-Frame EG-Frame 5/5 Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 C 1 Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3 Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 1 16, 3, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings. Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side. Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 15 EGE015FFG EGE3015FFG EGE4015FFG 16 EGE016FFG EGE3016FFG EGE4016FFG 0 EGE00FFG EGE300FFG EGE400FFG EGE400AFG 5 EGE05FFG EGE305FFG EGE305AFG EGE405FFG EGE405AFG 30 EGE030FFG EGE3030FFG EGE4030FFG 3 EGE03FFG EGE303FFG EGE303AFG EGE403FFG EGE403AFG 35 EGE035FFG EGE3035FFG EGE4035FFG 40 EGE040FFG EGE3040FFG EGE3040AFG EGE4040FFG EGE4040AFG 45 EGE045FFG EGE3045FFG EGE3050AFG EGE4045FFG 50 EGE050FFG EGE3050FFG EGE4050FFG EGE4050AFG 60 EGE060FFG EGE3060FFG EGE4060FFG 63 EGE063FFG EGE3063FFG EGE3063AFG EGE4063FFG EGE4063AFG 70 EGE070FFG EGE3070FFG EGE4070FFG 80 EGE080FFG EGE3080FFG EGE3080AFG EGE4080FFG EGE4080AFG 90 EGE090FFG EGE3090FFG EGE4090FFG 100 EGE100FFG EGE3100FFG EGE3100AFG EGE4100FFG EGE4100AFG 15 EGE15FFG EGE315FFG EGE315AFG EGE415FFG EGE415AFG 160 EGE3160FFG EGE3160AFG EGE4160FFG EGE4160AFG V4-T-18 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

19 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. EG-Frame EG-Frame 40/35 Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3 Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 C 1 Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 1 16, 3, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings. Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side. Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 15 EGS1015FFG EGS015FFG EGS3015FFG EGS4015FFG 16 EGS1016FFG EGS016FFG EGS3016FFG EGS4016FFG 0 EGS100FFG EGS00FFG EGS300FFG EGS400FFG EGS400AFG 5 EGS105FFG EGS05FFG EGS305FFG EGS305AFG EGS405FFG EGS405AFG 30 EGS1030FFG EGS030FFG EGS3030FFG EGS4030FFG 3 EGS103FFG EGS03FFG EGS303FFG EGS303AFG EGS403FFG EGS403AFG 35 EGS1035FFG EGS035FFG EGS3035FFG EGS4035FFG 40 EGS1040FFG EGS040FFG EGS3040FFG EGS3040AFG EGS4040FFG EGS4040AFG 45 EGS1045FFG EGS045FFG EGS3045FFG EGS4045FFG 50 EGS1050FFG EGS050FFG EGS3050FFG EGS3050AFG EGS4050FFG EGS4050AFG 60 EGS1060FFG EGS060FFG EGS3060FFG EGS4060FFG 63 EGS1063FFG EGS063FFG EGS3063FFG EGS3063AFG EGS4063FFG EGS4063AFG 70 EGS1070FFG EGS070FFG EGS3070FFG EGS4070FFG 80 EGS1080FFG EGS080FFG EGS3080FFG EGS3080AFG EGS4080FFG EGS4080AFG 90 EGS1090FFG EGS090FFG EGS3090FFG EGS4090FFG 100 EGS1100FFG EGS100FFG EGS3100FFG EGS3100AFG EGS4100FFG EGS4100AFG 15 EGS115FFG EGS15FFG EGS315FFG EGS315AFG EGS415FFG EGS415AFG 160 EGS3160FFG EGS3160AFG EGS4160FFG EGS4160AFG Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-19

20 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G EG-Frame EG-Frame 70/65 Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3 Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 C 1 Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 1 16, 3, 63A are not UL listed ratings. Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side. Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 15 EGH1015FFG EGH015FFG EGH3015FFG EGH4015FFG 16 EGH1016FFG EGH016FFG EGH3016FFG EGH4016FFG 0 EGH100FFG EGH00FFG EGH300FFG EGH300AFG EGH400FFG EGH400AFG 5 EGH105FFG EGH05FFG EGH305FFG EGH305AFG EGH405FFG EGH405AFG 30 EGH1030FFG EGH030FFG EGH3030FFG EGH4030FFG 3 EGH103FFG EGH03FFG EGH303FFG EGH303AFG EGH403FFG EGH403AFG 35 EGH1035FFG EGH035FFG EGH3035FFG EGH4035FFG 40 EGH1040FFG EGH040FFG EGH3040FFG EGH3040AFG EGH4040FFG EGH4040AFG 45 EGH1045FFG EGH045FFG EGH3045FFG EGH4045FFG EGH4050AFG 50 EGH1050FFG EGH050FFG EGH3050FFG EGH3050AFG EGH4050FFG 60 EGH1060FFG EGH060FFG EGH3060FFG EGH4060FFG 63 EGH1063FFG EGH063FFG EGH3063FFG EGH3063AFG EGH4063FFG EGH4063AFG 70 EGH1070FFG EGH070FFG EGH3070FFG EGH4070FFG 80 EGH1080FFG EGH080FFG EGH3080FFG EGH3080AFG EGH4080FFG EGH4080AFG 90 EGH1090FFG EGH090FFG EGH3090FFG EGH4090FFG 100 EGH1100FFG EGH100FFG EGH3100FFG EGH3100AFG EGH4100FFG EGH4100AFG 15 EGH115FFG EGH15FFG EGH315FFG EGH315AFG EGH415FFG EGH415AFG V4-T-0 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

21 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. EG-Frame 100/100 Current Limiting (Single-Pole and Two-Pole Unavailable) EG-Frame EG-Frame 100/100 Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 C 1 Molded Case Switches , 3, 63A are not UL listed ratings. Adjustable thermal is not UL listed. 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. 4 Molded case switches may open above 150 A. Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% Protected Neutral 3 Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 15 EGC3015FFG EGC7015FFG 16 EGC3016FFG EGC7016FFG 0 EGC300FFG EGC300AFG EGC700FFG EGC700AFG 5 EGC305FFG EGC305AFG EGC705FFG EGC705AFG 30 EGC3030FFG EGC7030FFG 3 EGC303FFG EGC303AFG EGC703FFG EGC703AFG 35 EGC3035FFG EGC7035FFG 40 EGC3040FFG EGC3040AFG EGC7040FFG EGC7040AFG 45 EGC3045FFG EGC7045FFG 50 EGC3050FFG EGC3050AFG EGC7050FFG EGC7050AFG 60 EGC3060FFG EGC7060FFG 63 EGC3063FFG EGC3063AFG EGC7063FFG EGC7063AFG 70 EGC3070FFG EGC7070FFG 80 EGC3080FFG EGC3080AFG EGC7080FFG EGC7080AFG 90 EGC3090FFG EGC7090FFG 100 EGC3100FFG EGC3100AFG EGC7100FFG EGC7100AFG 15 EGC315FFG EGC315AFG EGC715FFG EGC715AFG EGK315KSG EGK715KSG EGK3160KSG EGK7160KSG Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-1

22 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G EG Bolt-On Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit and Mounting Hardware) EG-Frame EG-Frame EG-Frame 18 kaic at 480 Vac Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 C EG-Frame 35 kaic at 480 Vac 1 For bulk pack 4, add suffix BP4 and order quantities of 4. For bulk pack 1, add suffix BP1 and order quantities of 1. 3 For bulk pack 8, add suffix BP8 and order quantities of 8. Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic EGB1015FFB EGB015FFB EGB3015FFB 0 EGB100FFB EGB00FFB EGB300FFB 5 EGB105FFB EGB05FFB EGB305FFB 30 EGB1030FFB EGB030FFB EGB3030FFB 35 EGB1035FFB EGB035FFB EGB3035FFB 40 EGB1040FFB EGB040FFB EGB3040FFB 45 EGB1045FFB EGB045FFB EGB3045FFB 50 EGB1050FFB EGB050FFB EGB3050FFB 60 EGB1060FFB EGB060FFB EGB3060FFB 70 EGB1070FFB EGB070FFB EGB3070FFB 80 EGB1080FFB EGB080FFB EGB3080FFB 90 EGB1090FFB EGB090FFB EGB3090FFB 100 EGB1100FFB EGB100FFB EGB3100FFB 110 EGB1110FFB EGB110FFB EGB3110FFB 15 EGB115FFB EGB15FFB EGB315FFB Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 C Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic EGS1015FFB EGS015FFB EGS3015FFB 0 EGS100FFB EGS00FFB EGS300FFB 5 EGS105FFB EGS05FFB EGS305FFB 30 EGS1030FFB EGS030FFB EGS3030FFB 35 EGS1035FFB EGS035FFB EGS3035FFB 40 EGS1040FFB EGS040FFB EGS3040FFB 45 EGS1045FFB EGS045FFB EGS3045FFB 50 EGS1050FFB EGS050FFB EGS3050FFB 60 EGS1060FFB EGS060FFB EGS3060FFB 70 EGS1070FFB EGS070FFB EGS3070FFB 80 EGS1080FFB EGS080FFB EGS3080FFB 90 EGS1090FFB EGS090FFB EGS3090FFB 100 EGS1100FFB EGS100FFB EGS3100FFB 110 EGS1110FFB EGS110FFB EGS3110FFB 15 EGS115FFB EGS15FFB EGS315FFB V4-T- Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

23 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. EG-Frame EG-Frame 65 kaic at 480 Vac Maximum Continuous Amps at 40 C Load Terminals 1 For bulk pack 4, add suffix BP4 and order quantities of 4. For bulk pack 1, add suffix BP1 and order quantities of 1. 3 For bulk pack 8, add suffix BP8 and order quantities of 8. Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic EGH1015FFB EGH015FFB EGH3015FFB 0 EGH100FFB EGH00FFB EGH300FFB 5 EGH105FFB EGH05FFB EGH305FFB 30 EGH1030FFB EGH030FFB EGH3030FFB 35 EGH1035FFB EGH035FFB EGH3035FFB 40 EGH1040FFB EGH040FFB EGH3040FFB 45 EGH1045FFB EGH045FFB EGH3045FFB 50 EGH1050FFB EGH050FFB EGH3050FFB 60 EGH1060FFB EGH060FFB EGH3060FFB 70 EGH1070FFB EGH070FFB EGH3070FFB 80 EGH1080FFB EGH080FFB EGH3080FFB 90 EGH1090FFB EGH090FFB EGH3090FFB 100 EGH1100FFB EGH100FFB EGH3100FFB 110 EGH1110FFB EGH110FFB EGH3110FFB 15 EGH115FFB EGH15FFB EGH315FFB Maximum Breaker Amps Terminal, Body Material Wire Type Metric Wire Range mm AWG Wire Range Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals Aluminum Cu/Al.5 50 #14 1/0 3TA15EF Aluminum Cu/Al #6 3/0 3TA150EF (Package of Three Terminals) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-3

24 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information EG-Frame 3T15EF 3TA15EF 3TA150EF 3TA160EFK EFRTWK, Two-Pole Metric EF3RTWK, Three-Pole Metric EF4RTWK, Four-Pole Metric EFRTDK, Two-Pole Imperial EF3RTDK, Three-Pole Imperial EF4RTDK, Four-Pole Imperial Control Wire Terminal Kit GCWTK Multiwire Connectors Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amps Terminal Body Material Wire Type Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals Metric Wire Range mm AWG Wire Range (Package of Three Terminals) 15 Steel Al 4 6 #14-3/0 3T15EF 1 15 Steel Cu.5 95 #14-3/0 3T15EF 1 15 Aluminum Cu/Al.5 50 #14-1/0 3TA15EF 160 Aluminum Cu/Al #6-3/0 3TA150EF 160 Aluminum Cu/Al #3-50 3TA160EFK 160 Aluminum Cu/Al #3-50 4TA160EFK EG-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have line and load terminals as standard equipment. Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer. Caution: Collar must surround conductor. Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Endcap kits are used on the E-Frame breaker line side to connect busbar or similar electrical connections. Includes hardware. 1 Standard line and load terminals. Four-pole kit with four terminals. V4-T-4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

25 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Control Wire Terminal Kit Control wire terminal kit Package of 1 priced individually For use with steel or stainless steel standard line and load terminals only. Interphase Barriers Interphase barriers Package of 1 priced individually The interphase barrier is available for extended insulation between circuit breaker poles. Specify quantity when ordering. Base Mounting Hardware DIN Rail Mounting DIN rail adapter single-pole DIN rail adapter two-pole DIN rail adapter three- or four-pole Metal DIN rail adapter three-pole Metric base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required separately, order S/N 8703C80G08. Note: English mounting hardware kit can be supplied separate. number is BMHE #6 3 x 3 inches for two-, three- and four-pole. Singlepole mounting hardware metric order 8703C80G11. English hardware 8703C80G1. Both sold in quantities of 100. Terminal Shields The terminal shield is available for line terminal areas in threeand four-pole circuit breakers. Special terminal shields are also available for use when an electrical (solenoid) operator is mounted on the circuit breaker. The standard style number by pole for each terminal shield is for a package of 10 and is priced per each package. Special terminal shields are packaged individually. Terminal Shields IP30 Protection of Poles 565B38G01 EIPBK EF1DIN EGDIN EF34DIN EGGDDIN 3 EFTS3K 4 EFTS4K Terminal End Covers (Gas Barrier) The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity (one per circuit breaker) when ordering. Terminal End Covers Conductor Opening Diameter Inches (mm) 6.35 (0.5) EEC3K (0.41) EEC4K Multiwire Connectors Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals. They are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, terminal shield insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side (OFF) end. EG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) 1 Maximum Amperes Wires per Terminal Wire Size Range AWG Cu Note 1 For four-pole kit, change 3 at beginning of catalog number to 4. Kit TA15E3K TA15E6K Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-5

26 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. EG-Frame Accessories Reference Single- Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-109 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T-109 Shunt trip standard V4-T-109 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-110 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T-5 Control wire terminal kit V4-T-5 Multiwire connectors V4-T-5 Base mounting hardware V4-T-5 Terminal shields V4-T-5 Terminal end covers V4-T-5 Interphase barriers V4-T-5 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-107 Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-107 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-107 Walking beam interlock requires two breakers V4-T-107 Plug-in adapters V4-T-107 Electrical operator V4-T-107 Handle mechanisms V4-T-415 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-105 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available V4-T-6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

27 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Technical Data and Specifications UL 489/IEC Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Ratings Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1 Circuit Breaker Type of Poles 10 I cu I cs I cu I cs Y/ 347 I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs EGB , 3, EGE15, 3, EGS , 3, EGH , 3, EGC15 5 3, EGB160 3, EGE160 3, EGS160 3, UL 489 Current Limiting Data Frame Circuit Ip (ka) I T (10 6 A S) EGC 40 V/00 ka EGC 480 V/100 ka EGC 600 Y/35 ka Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) EG-Frame of Poles Width Height Depth (5.4) 5.50 (139.7).99 (75.9).00 (50.8) 5.50 (139.7).99 (75.9) (76.) 5.50 (139.7).99 (75.9) (101.6) 5.50 (139.7).99 (75.9) EG-Frame Front Cover Cutout C L Breaker 0.14 (3.6) R 1.85 (47.0) 0.90 (.9) 1.30 Dia (11.9) (33.0) 0.94 (3.9) C L Handle Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) EG-Frame Front View Three-Pole 3.00 (76.) 3.03 (77.0) of Poles EG Breaker Type EGB (0.68).0 (0.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.8) 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. IEC only. 3 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 4 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at 4 ka. 5 Current limiting per UL 489. Side View.77 (70.4) 5.50 (139.7) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-7

28 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 10.6 (60.6) 4.75 (10.6) 0.55 (14.0) 0.50 (1.7) 1.00 (5.4) 1.00 (5.4) (38.1) (1.7) 1.49 (37.8).00 (50.8) 3-Pole.98 (75.7) 3.98 (101.1) 8.59 (18.) 4.78 (11.4) 0.70 (17.8) 0.90 (.9) 0.35 (8.9) 0.09 (.9) 0.78 (19.8).75 (69.9) 3.01 (76.5) 3.17 (80.5) EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module 0.56 (14.) 4.17 (105.9) 3.61 (91.7) 9.66 (45.4) 3.00 (76.) 1.00 (5.4) 1.00 (5.4) 1.00 (5.4) 0.50 (1.7) 3.0 (81.3) 4.17 (105.9).75 (69.9) 0.09 (.3) 0.41 (10.4) 0.78 (19.8) V4-T-8 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

29 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) Product Description JG breaker is HACR rated. Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) Selection V4-T-30 Product Selection V4-T-31 Accessories V4-T-4 Technical Data and Specifications V4-T-43 Dimensions and Weights V4-T-45 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module..... V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-9

30 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Series G JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) Trip Unit JT J Frame Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA Performance E S H C U X K Molded case switch Trip of Poles = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four Neutral 0% Protected 9 = Four Neutral 100% Protected 1 Bxx features cannot be combined with other Bxx features. B1 and B available with LSG and LSIG trip units. J G S 3 50 FA G C of Poles = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four Neutral 0% Protected 9 = Four Neutral 100% Protected Amperes T/M ETU Amperes JT FA B0 Trip Unit AA = Adj. adj. FA = Fixed adj. KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 3 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG Rating Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated F01 = Freeze tested for 70ºF ( 57ºC) F0 = Freeze tested for ºF ( 30ºC) Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric end caps E = Imperial end caps G = Line/load standard W = Without terminals Metric Imperial Metric Trip Unit AA = Adj. adj. FA = Fixed adj. KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 3 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG NN = Frame only (50 A only; no trip unit) Features (ETU Only) 1 Blank= No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking V4-T-30 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

31 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Product Selection Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) IC Rating at 415/480 Volts JG-Frame JG-Frame JG-Frame IEC/CE/UL/CSA 5/5 Maximum Continuous Amperes JG-Frame IEC/CE/UL/CSA 40/35, Two-Pole Magnetic Range 1 EC-EN only. Adjustment is 0.8 and for 0 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic JGE070FAG JGE3070FAG JGE4070FAG JGE090FAG JGE3090FAG JGE4090FAG JGE100FAG JGE3100FAG JGE3100AAG JGE4100FAG JGE4100AAG JGE15FAG JGE315FAG JGE315AAG JGE415FAG JGE415AAG JGE150FAG JGE3150FAG JGE4150FAG JGE3160AAG JGE4160AAG JGE175FAG JGE3175FAG JGE4175FAG JGE00FAG JGE300FAG JGE300AAG JGE400FAG JGE400AAG JGE5FAG JGE35FAG JGE45FAG JGE50FAG JGE350FAG JGE350AAG JGE450FAG JGE450AAG Maximum Continuous Amperes Magnetic Range Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic JGS070FAG JGS3070FAG JGS4070FAG JGS090FAG JGS3090FAG JGS4090FAG JGS100FAG JGS3100FAG JGS3100AAG JGS4100FAG JGS4100AAG JGS15FAG JGS315FAG JGS315AAG JGS415FAG JGS415AAG JGS150FAG JGS3150FAG JGS4150FAG JGS3160AAG JGS4160AAG JGS175FAG JGS3175FAG JGS4175FAG JGS00FAG JGS300FAG JGS300AAG JGS400FAG JGS400AAG JGS5FAG JGS35FAG JGS45FAG JGS50FAG JGS350FAG JGS350AAG JGS450FAG JGS450AAG Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-31

32 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G JG-Frame JG-Frame IEC/CE/UL/CSA 70/65 Maximum Continuous Amperes Magnetic Range 1 EC-EN only. Adjustment is 0.8 and for 0 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic 1 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Magnetic JGH070FAG JGH3070FAG JGH4070FAG JGH090FAG JGH3090FAG JGH4090FAG JGH100FAG JGH3100FAG JGH3100AAG JGH4100FAG JGH4100AAG JGH15FAG JGH315FAG JGH315AAG JGH415FAG JGH415AAG JGH150FAG JGH3150FAG JGH4150FAG JGH3160AAG JGH4160AAG JGH175FAG JGH3175FAG JGH4175FAG JGH00FAG JGH300FAG JGH300AAG JGH400FAG JGH400AAG JGH5FAG JGH35FAG JGH45FAG JGH50FAG JGH350FAG JGH350AAG JGH450FAG JGH450AAG V4-T-3 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

33 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 100/100, 150/150 JG-Frame JG-Frame JG-Frame IEC/CE/UL/CSA 100/100, Current Limiting Maximum Continuous Amperes JG-Frame IEC/CE/UL/CSA 150/150, Current Limiting Magnetic Range 1 EC-EN only. Adjustment is 0.8 and for 0 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic JGC3070FAG JGC4070FAG JGC3080AAG JGC4080AAG JGC3090FAG JGC4090FAG JGC3100FAG JGC3100AAG JGC4100FAG JGC4100AAG JGC315FAG JGC315AAG JGC415FAG JGC415AAG JGC3150FAG JGC4150FAG JGC3160AAG JGC4160AAG JGC3175FAG JGC4175FAG JGC300FAG JGC300AAG JGC400FAG JGC400AAG JGC35FAG JGC45FAG JGC350FAG JGC350AAG JGC450FAG JGC450AAG Maximum Continuous Amperes Magnetic Range Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic JGU3070FAG JGU4070FAG JGU3080AAG JGU4080AAG JGU3090FAG JGU4090FAG JGU3100FAG JGU3100AAG JGU4100FAG JGU4100AAG JGU315FAG JGU315AAG JGU415FAG JGU415AAG JGU3150FAG JGU4150FAG JGU3160AAG JGU4160AAG JGU3175FAG JGU4175FAG JGU300FAG JGU300AAG JGU400FAG JGU400AAG JGU35FAG JGU45FAG JGU350FAG JGU350AAG JGU450FAG JGU450AAG Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-33

34 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 00/00 JG-Frame JG-Frame IEC/CE/UL/CSA 00/00, Current Limiting Maximum Continuous Amperes Molded Case Switches 3 Magnetic Range 1 EC-EN only. Adjustment is 0.8 and for 0 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. 3 Molded case switches will trip above 500 amperes. Three-Pole Four-Pole Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic JGX3070FAG JGX4070FAG JGX3080AAG JGX4080AAG JGX3090FAG JGX4090FAG JGX3100FAG JGX3100AAG JGX4100FAG JGX4100AAG JGX315FAG JGX315AAG JGX415FAG JGX415AAG JGX3150FAG JGX4150FAG JGX3160AAG JGX4160AAG JGX3175FAG JGX4175FAG JGX300FAG JGX300AAG JGX400FAG JGX400AAG JGX35FAG JGX45FAG JGX350FAG JGX350AAG JGX450FAG JGX450AAG JGK350KSG JGK750KSG V4-T-34 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

35 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Frame IC Rating at 415/480 Volts Maximum Amperes 5/5 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% 50 JGE50NN JGE350NN JGE450NN 40/35 50 JGS50NN JGS350NN JGS450NN 70/65 50 JGH50NN JGH350NN JGH450NN 100/100 Current Limiting Per UL JGC350NN JGC450NN 150/150 Current Limiting Per UL JGU350NN JGU450NN 00/00 Current Limiting Per UL JGX350NN JGX450NN 5/5 100% Rated Per UL JGE350NNC 40/35 100% Rated Per UL JGS350NNC 70/65 100% Rated Per UL JGH350NNC Ampere Rating Range Range JT070FA JT3070FA JT4070FA JT3080FA JT3080AA JT4080AA JT090FA JT3090FA JT4090FA JT100FA JT3100FA JT3100AA JT4100FA JT4100AA JT15FA JT315FA JT315AA JT415FA JT415AA JT150FA JT3150FA JT4150FA JT3160AA JT4160AA JT175FA JT3175FA JT4175FA JT00FA JT300FA JT300AA JT400FA JT400AA JT5FA JT35FA JT45FA JT50FA JT350FA JT350AA JT450FA JT450AA 3 1 Standard line and load terminals. Components 100% rated frame. 3 Adjustable thermal trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-35

36 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 310+ Electronic Trip Units See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-44. JG 310+ Electronic Trip Units Ampere Rating Three-Pole 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories LS LSI LSG LSIG 1 For use on a three-pole breaker used in a four-wire system if ground fault protection for the neutral is required. Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection. Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 JT JT30503 JT JT JGFCT JT JT31003 JT JT JGFCT JT JT31603 JT JT JGFCT JT35033 JT3503 JT35035 JT35036 JGFCT50 Four-Pole 3 50 JT JT40503 JT JT JT JT41003 JT JT JT JT41603 JT JT JT45033 JT4503 JT45035 JT45036 Description Electronic portable test kit Trip unit tamper protection wire seal External neutral sensor (50 A) External neutral sensor (160 A) External neutral sensor (100 A) External neutral sensor (80 A) Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication Breaker-mount ammeter module Remote-mount ammeter module MTST30V 5108A03H01 JGFCT50 JGFCT160 JGFCT100 JGFCT050 TRIP-LED DIGIVIEW DIGIVIEWR06 V4-T-36 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

37 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Complete Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Units See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-44. IEC/UL/CSA 5/5 Ampere Rating Three-Pole IEC/UL/CSA 40/35 IEC/UL/CSA 70/65 LS LSI LSG LSIG 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection. Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 JGE305033G JGE30503G JGE305035G JGE305036G JGFCT JGE310033G JGE31003G JGE310035G JGE310036G JGFCT JGE316033G JGE31603G JGE316035G JGE316036G JGFCT JGE35033G JGE3503G JGE35035G JGE35036G JGFCT50 Four-Pole 50 JGE405033G JGE40503G JGE405035G JGE405036G 100 JGE410033G JGE41003G JGE410035G JGE410036G 160 JGE416033G JGE41603G JGE416035G JGE416036G 50 JGE45033G JGE4503G JGE45035G JGE45036G Ampere Rating Three-Pole LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 JGS305033G JGS30503G JGS305035G JGS305036G JGFCT JGS310033G JGS31003G JGS310035G JGS310036G JGFCT JGS316033G JGS31603G JGS316035G JGS316036G JGFCT JGS35033G JGS3503G JGS35035G JGS35036G JGFCT50 Four-Pole 3 50 JGS405033G JGS40503G JGS405035G JGS405036G 100 JGS410033G JGS41003G JGS410035G JGS410036G 160 JGS416033G JGS41603G JGS416035G JGS416036G 50 JGS45033G JGS4503G JGS45035G JGS45036G Ampere Rating Three-Pole LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 JGH305033G JGH30503G JGH305035G JGH305036G JGFCT JGH310033G JGH31003G JGH310035G JGH310036G JGFCT JGH316033G JGH31603G JGH316035G JGH316036G JGFCT JGH35033G JGH3503G JGH35035G JGH35036G JGFCT50 Four-Pole 50 JGH405033G JGH40503G JGH405035G JGH405036G 100 JGH410033G JGH41003G JGH410035G JGH410036G 160 JGH416033G JGH41603G JGH416035G JGH416036G 50 JGH45033G JGH4503G JGH45035G JGH45036G Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-37

38 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G IEC/UL/CSA 100/100, Current Limiting Per UL 489 Ampere Rating Three-Pole IEC/UL/CSA 150/150, Current Limiting Per UL 489 IEC/UL/CSA 00/00, Current Limiting Per UL 489 LS LSI LSG LSIG 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection. Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 JGC305033G JGC30503G JGC305035G JGC305036G JGFCT JGC310033G JGC31003G JGC310035G JGC310036G JGFCT JGC316033G JGC31603G JGC316035G JGC316036G JGFCT JGC335033G JGC3503G JGC35035G JGC35036G JGFCT50 Four-Pole 50 JGC405033G JGC40503G JGC405035G JGC405036G 100 JGC410033G JGC41003G JGC410035G JGC410036G 160 JGC416033G JGC41603G JGC416035G JGC416036G 50 JGC435033G JGC4503G JGC45035G JGC45036G Ampere Rating Three-Pole LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 JGU305033G JGU30503G JGU305035G JGU305036G JGFCT JGU310033G JGU31003G JGU310035G JGU310036G JGFCT JGU316033G JGU31603G JGU316035G JGU316036G JGFCT JGU335033G JGU3503G JGU35035G JGU35036G JGFCT50 Four-Pole 3 50 JGU405033G JGU40503G JGU405035G JGU405036G 100 JGU410033G JGU41003G JGU410035G JGU410036G 160 JGU416033G JGU41603G JGU416035G JGU416036G 50 JGU435033G JGU4503G JGU45035G JGU45036G Ampere Rating Three-Pole LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 JGX305033G JGX30503G JGX305035G JGX305036G JGFCT JGX310033G JGX31003G JGX310035G JGX310036G JGFCT JGX316033G JGX31603G JGX316035G JGX316036G JGFCT JGX35033G JGX3503G JGX35035G JGX35036G JGFCT50 Four-Pole 50 JGX405033G JGX40503G JGX405035G JGX405036G 100 JGX410033G JGX41003G JGX410035G JGX410036G 160 JGX416033G JGX41603G JGX416035G JGX416036G 50 JGX45033G JGX4503G JGX45035G JGX45036G V4-T-38 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

39 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. JG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) IC Rating at 415/480 Volts JG-Frame JG-Frame IEC/CE/UL/CSA 5/5 Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Maximum Continuous Amperes Magnetic Range Adjustable Magnetic JGE3070FAGC JGE3090FAGC JGE3100FAGC JGE315FAGC JGE3150FAGC JGE3175FAGC JGE300FAGC JGE35FAGC JGE350FAGC JG-Frame IEC/CE/UL/CSA 40/35 Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Maximum Continuous Amperes Magnetic Range Adjustable Magnetic JGS3070FAGC JGS3090FAGC JGS3100FAGC JGS315FAGC JGS3150FAGC JGS3175FAGC JGS300FAGC JGS35FAGC JGS350FAGC JG-Frame IEC/CE/UL/CSA 70/65 Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Maximum Continuous Amperes Magnetic Range Adjustable Magnetic JGH3070FAGC JGH3090FAGC JGH3100FAGC JGH315FAGC JGH3150FAGC JGH3175FAGC JGH300FAGC JGH35FAGC JGH350FAGC Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-39

40 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G JG 100% Rated 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breaker See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-44. IEC/UL/CSA 5/5 Ampere Rating IEC/UL/CSA 40/35 IEC/UL/CSA 70/65 Note LS LSI LSG LSIG 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 JGE305033GC JGE30503GC JGE305035GC JGE305036GC JGFCT JGE310033GC JGE31003GC JGE310035GC JGE310036GC JGFCT JGE316033GC JGE31603GC JGE316035GC JGE316036GC JGFCT JGE35033GC JGE3503GC JGE35035GC JGE35036GC JGFCT50 Ampere Rating LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 JGS305033GC JGS30503GC JGS305035GC JGS305036GC JGFCT JGS310033GC JGS31003GC JGS310035GC JGS310036GC JGFCT JGS316033GC JGS31603GC JGS316035GC JGS316036GC JGFCT JGS35033GC JGS3503GC JGS35035GC JGS35036GC JGFCT50 Ampere Rating LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 JGH305033GC JGH30503GC JGH305035GC JGH305036GC JGFCT JGH310033GC JGH31003GC JGH310035GC JGH310036GC JGFCT JGH316033GC JGH31603GC JGH316035GC JGH316036GC JGFCT JGH35033GC JGH3503GC JGH35035GC JGH35036GC JGFCT50 V4-T-40 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

41 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information JG-Frame T50FJ TA50FJ Endcap Kit Control Wire Terminal Kit Load and Line Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes JG-Frame circuit breakers include aluminum terminals TA50FJ as standard. When optional stainless steel only terminals are required, order by catalog number. Endcap Kits Terminal Body Material Wire Type Metric Wire Range mm Standard Pressure Type Terminals 50 Stainless steel Cu #4 350 (1) T50FJ 1 Endcap kits are used on J50-Frame breaker to connect busbar or similar electrical connections. Includes hardware. Control Wire Terminal Kit For use with aluminum or copper terminals only. Rear Fed Terminals AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors 50 Aluminum Cu/Al #8 350 (1) TA50FJ 1 of Poles Metric Imperial 3 FJ3RTWK FJ3RTDK 4 FJ4RTWK FJ4RTDK Description Package of 14 (priced individually) Maximum Amperes Wire Size Range AWG Cu FJCWTK 50 #4 350 kcmil TA50JGRF 3TA50JGRF Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit. number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal. Rear Fed Terminals Base Mounting Hardware Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required separately, order 66A546G0. Terminal Shields IP30 Location of Poles Line or Load, 3 FJTS3K 4 FJTS4K Interphase Barriers of Poles 3 FJIPBK 3 4 FJIPBK4 3 Multiwire Connectors Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware, insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side (OFF) end. JG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) Maximum Amperes Wires per Terminal 1 Individually packed. Standard line and load. 3 Individually priced. Wire Size Range AWG Cu Multiwire Connectors Kit TA50FJ TA50FJ6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-41

42 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. JG-Frame Accessories Reference Two- and Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T-109 Shunt trip standard V4-T-109 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-110 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T-41 Control wire terminal kit V4-T-41 Rear fed terminals V4-T-41 Multiwire connectors V4-T-41 Base mounting hardware V4-T-41 Interphase barriers V4-T-41 Padlockable handle block V4-T-107 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-107 Key interlock kit V4-T-107 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-107 Electrical operator V4-T-107 Plug-in adapters V4-T-107 Handle mechanisms V4-T-415 Earth leakage/ground fault protector V4-T-9 Drawout cassette V4-T-115 Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T-36 Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T-106 Cause of trip LED module V4-T-106 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-105 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application, UL 489 supplement SA and SB 1 Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available Note 1 Contact Eaton. V4-T-4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

43 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Technical Data and Specifications UL 489/IEC Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Ratings Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Circuit 1 Breaker Type of Poles I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs JGE50, 3, JGS50, 3, JGH50, 3, JGC50 4 3, JGU50 4 3, JGX50 4 3, UL 489 Current Limiting Data Frame Circuit Ip (ka) I T (10 6 A S) JGC 40 V/00 ka JGC 480 V/100 ka JGC 600 V/35 ka JGU 40 V/00 ka JGU 480 V/150 ka JGU 600 V/50 ka JGX 40 V/00 ka JGX 480 V/00 ka JGX 600 V/50 ka JG 310+ Specifications Description Specification Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ Breaker Type Frame designation JG Frames available 50 A, 100 A, 160 A 50 A Continuous current range (A) 0 50A Ground fault pickup (A) 10 50A Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kaic) 35, 65, 100, 150, % rated Yes Protection Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) No Interchangeable trip unit Yes High load alarm (suffix B0) 5 Yes Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B1) 5 Yes Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B) 5 Yes Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG Cause of trip indication Yes Thru-cover accessories Yes 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. 4 Current limiting per UL Bx suffixes cannot be combined with Bx suffixes. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-43

44 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G JG 310+ Adjustability Specifications JG Frame 310+ Settings 50 A 100 A 160 A 50 A I r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) I r (All 310+) A B C D E F G H (= I n ) t r = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 (All 310+) Position Position Position Position Position Position Position I sd (x I r ) = short delay pickup Position 1 x x x x (All 310+) Position 3x 3x 3x 3x Position 3 4x 4x 4x 4x Position 4 5x 5x 5x 5x Position 5 6x 6x 6x 6x Position 6 7x 7x 7x 7x Position 7 8x 8x 8x 8x Position 8 10x 10x 10x 10x Position 9 14x 14x 14x 14x t sd = short delay time I t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x (LS, LSG) t sd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst Inst (LSI, LSIG) Position Position I g = gound fault pickup (amperes) Position (LSG, LSIG) Position Position Position Position Position t g = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst Inst (LSG, LSIG) Position Position Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (I i ) setting 1 N/A Maintenance Mode pickup (.5 x I n ) (amperes) N/A 1 Not available for JG. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units. Maintenance Mode not available for JG frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG, and RG. V4-T-44 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

45 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) JG-Frame of Poles Width Height Depth, (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7) (135.6) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7) JG-Frame 0.63 (16.0) 0.8 (7.1) 3.06 (77.7) 0.50 (1.7) Front Cover Cutout C L Breaker 4.00 (101.6) 1.5 (31.8) 0.19 (4.8) R.05 (5.1) 1.06 (7.0) C L Handle Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) Front View Three-Pole 4.13 (104.9) JG-Frame of Poles Breaker Type, 3 4 JGC 6.00 (.70) 8.00 (3.60) JGE 6.00 (.70) 8.00 (3.60) JGH 6.00 (.70) 8.00 (3.60) JGS 6.00 (.70) 8.00 (3.60) JGU 6.00 (.70) 8.00 (3.60) JGX 6.00 (.70) 8.00 (3.60) 3.95 (100.3) Side View 3.44 (87.4) 7.00 (177.8) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-45

46 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 1.38 (35.1) 4-Pole 5.50 (139.7) 3-Pole 4.13 (104.9) 0.69 (17.5).06 (5.3) 3.57 (90.7) 5.50 (139.7) 1.5 (31.8) 0.63 (16.0).05 (5.1) 3.9 (99.6) 5.50 (139.7) 7.00 (177.8) 3.9 (99.6) R 0.19 (4.8) 0.8 (7.1) 1.88 (47.8) 4.93 (15.) 6.97 (177.0) 11.5 (85.8) 11.5 (85.8) 0.50 (139.7) 1.06 (6.9) RESET TEST 4.5 (108.0) 3.37 (85.6) 3.31 (84.1) 3.69 (93.7) 4.78 (11.4) 3.57 (90.7) 3.81 (96.8).05 (5.1) 4.09 (103.9) V4-T-46 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

47 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. LG-Frame ( Amperes) LG-Frame ( Amperes) Product Description LG breaker is HACR rated. Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) Selection V4-T-48 Product Selection V4-T-49 Accessories V4-T-60 Technical Data and Specifications V4-T-61 Dimensions and Weights V4-T-63 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module..... V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-47

48 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Series G LG-Frame ( Amperes) Trip Unit LT L Frame Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA Performance E S H C U X K Molded case switch Trip of Poles 3 = Three 4 = Four neutral 0% protected 8 = Four neutral 0/60% protected 9 = Four neutral 0/100% protected 1 Bxx features cannot be combined with other Bxx features. B1 and B available with LSG and LSIG trip units. L G S FA G C of Poles 3 = Three 4 = Four Neutral 0% protected 6 = Four Neutral 60% protected 7 = Four Neutral 100% protected 8 = Four Neutral 0 60% protected 9 = Four Neutral protected Amperes LT FA B0 Amperes Rating Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated (for LGE, LGS and LGH only) Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric end caps E = Imperial end caps G = Line/load standard W = Without terminals Metric Imperial Metric Trip Unit AA = Adj. adj. FA = Fixed adj. KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 3 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG 38 = 310+ electronic ALSI 39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG NN = Frame only (630 A only; no trip unit) Trip Unit AA = Adj. adj., thermal-magnetic FA = Fixed adj., thermal-magnetic KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 3 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG 38 = 310+ electronic ALSI 39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG Features (ETU Only) 1 Blank= No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking V4-T-48 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

49 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Product Selection Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) LG-Frame LG-Frame LG-Frame LG-Frame 630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 35 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac 1 Ampere Rating Three-Pole Four-Pole (0%) 3 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 LG-Frame 630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 50 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac 1 LG-Frame 630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 70 kaic at 415, 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 1 Replace suffix G with W for no line and load terminals. For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0 60% and 9 = 0 100%. Neutral is on LH side. 4 30/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic LGE350FAG LGE350AAG LGE450FAG LGE450AAG 300 LGE3300FAG LGE4300FAG 30 LGE330AAG LGE430AAG 350 LGE3350FAG LGE4350FAG 400 LGE3400FAG LGE3400AAG LGE4400FAG LGE4400AAG 500 LGE3500FAG LGE3500AAG LGE4500FAG LGE4500AAG 600 LGE3600FAG LGE4600FAG LGE3630AAG LGE4630AAG Ampere Rating Three-Pole Four-Pole (0%) 3 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic LGS350FAG LGS350AAG LGS450FAG LGS450AAG 300 LGS3300FAG LGS4300FAG 30 LGS330AAG LGS430AAG 350 LGS3350FAG LGS4350FAG 400 LGS3400FAG LGS3400AAG LGS4400FAG LGS4400AAG 500 LGS3500FAG LGS3500AAG LGS4500FAG LGS4500AAG 600 LGS3600FAG LGS4600FAG LGS3630AAG LGS4630AAG Ampere Rating Three-Pole Four-Pole (0%) 3 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic LGH350FAG LGH350AAG LGH450FAG LGH450AAG 300 LGH3300FAG LGH4300FAG 30 LGH330AAG LGH430AAG 350 LGH3350FAG LGH4350FAG 400 LGH3400FAG LGH3400AAG LGH4400FAG LGH4400AAG 500 LGH3500FAG LGH3500AAG LGH4500FAG LGH4500AAG 600 LGH3600FAG LGH4600FAG LGH3630AAG LGH4630AAG Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-49

50 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) LG-Frame LG-Frame LG-Frame LG-Frame 630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489 IC Rating: 100 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac 1 Ampere Rating Three-Pole Four-Pole (0%) 3 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic LG-Frame 630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489 IC Rating: 150 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac 1 LG-Frame 630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489 IC Rating: 00 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac 1 1 Replace suffix G with W for no line and load terminals. For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. 3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0 60% and 9 = 0 100%. Neutral is on LH side. 4 30/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic LGC350FAG LGC350AAG LGC450FAG LGC450AAG 300 LGC3300FAG LGC4300FAG 30 LGC330AAG LGC430AAG 350 LGC3350FAG LGC4350FAG 400 LGC3400FAG LGC3400AAG LGC4400FAG LGC4400AAG 500 LGC3500FAG LGC3500AAG LGC4500FAG LGC4500AAG 600 LGC3600FAG LGC4600FAG LGC3630AAG LGC4630AAG Ampere Rating Three-Pole Four-Pole (0%) 3 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic LGU350FAG LGU350AAG LGU450FAG LGU450AAG 300 LGU3300FAG LGU4300FAG 30 LGU330AAG LGU430AAG 350 LGU3350FAG LGU4350FAG 400 LGU3400FAG LGU3400AAG LGU4400FAG LGU4400AAG 500 LGU3500FAG LGU3500AAG LGU4500FAG LGU4500AAG 600 LGU3600FAG LGU4600FAG LGU3630AAG LGU4630AAG Ampere Rating Three-Pole Four-Pole (0%) 3 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 45 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic LGX350FAG LGX350AAG LGX450FAG LGX450AAG 300 LGX3300FAG LGX4300FAG 30 LGX330AAG LGX430AAG 350 LGX3350FAG LGX4350FAG 400 LGX3400FAG LGX3400AAG LGX4400FAG LGX4400AAG 500 LGX3500FAG LGX3500AAG LGX4500FAG LGX4500AAG 600 LGX3600FAG LGX4600FAG LGX3630AAG LGX4630AAG V4-T-50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

51 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Molded Case Switches 1 Ampere Rating Frame IC Rating at 415/480 Volts Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 Molded case switches will trip above 6300 amperes. For two-pole applications, use two outer poles amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 4 Adjustable thermal, adjustable magnetic trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. 5 Neutral protection is indicated by the third character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0 60% and 9 = 0 100% % rated frame. of Poles LGK3400KSG 4 LGK4400KSG LGK3630KSG 4 LGK4630KSG Maximum Amperes 3 35/ LGE3630NN LGE4630NN LGE3630NNWC 50/ LGS3630NN LGS4630NN LGS3630NNWC 70/ LGH3630NN LGH4630NN LGH3630NNWC 100/100 Current Limiting Per UL LGC3630NN LGC4630NN 150/150 Current Limiting Per UL LGU3630NN LGU4630NN 00/00 Current Limiting 630 LGX3630NN LGX4630NN Ampere Rating Three-Pole Four-Pole (0%) 5 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 4 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic 4 50 LT350FA LT350AA LT450FA LT450AA 300 LT3300FA LT4300FA 30 LT330AA LT430AA 350 LT3350FA LT4350FA 400 LT3400FA LT3400AA LT4400FA LT4400AA 500 LT3500FA LT3500AA LT4500FA LT4500AA 600 LT3600FA LT4600FA 630 LT3630AA LT4630AA Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-51

52 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-6. Ampere Rating Three-Pole 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories LS LSI LSG LSIG 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 3 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 4 Four-pole LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection. Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 LT35033 LT3503 LT35035 LT35036 LGFCT LT LT34003 LT LT LGFCT LT LT36003 LT LT LGFCT LT LT36303 LT LT LGFCT600 Four-Pole LT45033 LT4503 LT45035 LT LT LT44003 LT LT LT LT46003 LT LT LT LT46303 LT LT Description Electronic portable test kit Trip unit tamper protection wire seal External neutral sensor (630 A) External neutral sensor (600 A) External neutral sensor (400 A) External neutral sensor (50 A) Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication Breaker-mount ammeter module Remote-mount ammeter module MTST30V 5108A03H01 LGFCT630 LGFCT600 LGFCT400 LGFCT50 TRIP-LED DIGIVIEW DIGIVIEWR06 V4-T-5 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

53 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. IC Rating at 415/480 V Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) 1 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-6. IC Rating: 35 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac Ampere Rating IC Rating: 50 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac IC Rating: 70 kaic at 415 Vac, 65 kaic at 480 Vac LS LSI LSG LSIG 1 Replace suffix G with W for no line and load terminals. Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 5 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 6 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection. Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG Three-Pole 3 50 LGE35033G LGE3503G LGE35035G LGE35036G LGFCT LGE340033G LGE34003G LGE340035G LGE340036G LGFCT LGE360033G LGE36003G LGE360035G LGE360036G LGFCT LGE363033G LGE36303G LGE363035G LGE363036G LGFCT600 Four-Pole 5 50 LGE45033G LGE4503G LGE45035G LGE45036G 400 LGE440033G LGE44003G LGE440035G LGE440036G 600 LGE460033G LGE46003G LGE460035G LGE460036G LGE463033G LGE46303G LGE463035G LGE463036G Ampere Rating LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG Three-Pole 3 50 LGS35033G LGS3503G LGS35035G LGS35036G LGFCT LGS340033G LGS34003G LGS340035G LGS340036G LGFCT LGS360033G LGS36003G LGS360035G LGS360036G LGFCT LGS363033G LGS36303G LGS363035G LGS363036G LGFCT600 Four-Pole LGS45033G LGS4503G LGS45035G LGS45036G 400 LGS440033G LGS44003G LGS440035G LGS440036G 600 LGS460033G LGS46003G LGS460035G LGS460036G LGS463033G LGS46303G LGS463035G LGS463036G Ampere Rating LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG Three-Pole 3 50 LGH35033G LGH3503G LGH35035G LGH35036G LGFCT LGH340033G LGH34003G LGH340035G LGH340036G LGFCT LGH360033G LGH36003G LGH360035G LGH360036G LGFCT LGH363033G LGH36303G LGH363035G LGH363036G LGFCT600 Four-Pole LGH45033G LGH4503G LGH45035G LGH45036G 400 LGH440033G LGH44003G LGH440035G LGH440036G 600 LGH460033G LGH46003G LGH460035G LGH460036G LGH463033G LGH46303G LGH463035G LGH463036G Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-53

54 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G IC Rating at 415/480 V Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) 1 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-6. IC Rating: 100 kaic at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 Ampere Rating Three-Pole 3 IC Rating: 150 kaic at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 IC Rating: 00 kaic at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 LS LSI LSG LSIG 1 Replace suffix G with W for no line and load terminals. Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. 5 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. 6 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection. Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 50 LGC35033G LGC3503G LGC35035G LGC35036G LGFCT LGC340033G LGC34003G LGC340035G LGC340036G LGFCT LGC360033G LGC36003G LGC360035G LGC360036G LGFCT LGC363033G LGC36303G LGC363035G LGC363036G LGFCT600 Four-Pole LGC45033G LGC4503G LGC45035G LGC45036G 400 LGC440033G LGC44003G LGC440035G LGC440036G 600 LGC460033G LGC46003G LGC460035G LGC460036G LGC463033G LGC46303G LGC463035G LGC463036G Ampere Rating Three-Pole 3 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 50 LGU35033G LGU3503G LGU35035G LGU35036G LGFCT LGU340033G LGU34003G LGU340035G LGU340036G LGFCT LGU360033G LGU36003G LGU360035G LGU360036G LGFCT LGU363033G LGU36303G LGU363035G LGU363036G LGFCT600 Four-Pole 5 50 LGU45033G LGU4503G LGU45035G LGU45036G 400 LGU440033G LGU44003G LGU440035G LGU440036G 600 LGU460033G LGU46003G LGU460035G LGU460036G LGU463033G LGU46303G LGU463035G LGU463036G Ampere Rating Three-Pole 3 LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 50 LGX35033G LGX3503G LGX35035G LGX35036G LGFCT LGX340033G LGX34003G LGX340035G LGX340036G LGFCT LGX360033G LGX36003G LGX360035G LGX360036G LGFCT LGX363033G LGX36303G LGX363035G LGX363036G LGFCT600 Four-Pole 5 50 LGX45033G LGX4503G LGX45035G LGX45036G 400 LGX440033G LGX44003G LGX440035G LGX440036G 600 LGX460033G LGX46003G LGX460035G LGX460036G LGX463033G LGX46303G LGX463035G LGX463036G V4-T-54 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

55 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. LG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) LG-Frame LG-Frame 630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 35 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac 1 Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Ampere Rating 50 LGE350FAGC 300 LGE3300FAGC LGE3350FAGC 400 LGE3400FAGC 500 LGE3500FAGC 600 LGE3600FAGC LG-Frame 630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 50 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac 1 Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Ampere Rating 50 LGS350FAGC 300 LGS3300FAGC LGS3350FAGC 400 LGS3400FAGC 500 LGS3500FAGC 600 LGS3600FAGC LG-Frame 630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA) IC Rating: 70 kaic at 415, 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1 Three-Pole Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Ampere Rating 50 LGH350FAGC 300 LGH3300FAGC LGH3350FAGC 400 LGH3400FAGC 500 LGH3500FAGC 600 LGH3600FAGC Replace suffix G with W for no line and load terminals. For two-pole applications, use two outer poles. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-55

56 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G LG 100% Rated Electronic Breaker Per UL 489 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-6. IEC/UL/CSA 35 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac Ampere Rating IEC/UL/CSA 50 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac IEC/UL/CSA 70 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac LS LSI LSG LSIG 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 LGE35033GC LGE3503GC LGE35035GC LGE35036GC LGFCT LGE340033GC LGE34003GC LGE340035GC LGE340036GC LGFCT LGE360033GC LGE36003GC LGE360035GC LGE360036GC LGFCT LGE363033GC LGE36303GC LGE363035GC LGE363036GC LGFCT600 Ampere Rating LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 LGS35033GC LGS3503GC LGS35035GC LGS35036GC LGFCT LGS340033GC LGS34003GC LGS340035GC LGS340036GC LGFCT LGS360033GC LGS36003GC LGS360035GC LGS360036GC LGFCT LGS363033GC LGS36303GC LGS363035GC LGS363036GC LGFCT600 Ampere Rating LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 50 LGH35033GC LGH3503GC LGH35035GC LGH35036GC LGFCT LGH340033GC LGH34003GC LGH340035GC LGH340036GC LGFCT LGH360033GC LGH36003GC LGH360035GC LGH360036GC LGFCT LGH363033GC LGH36303GC LGH363035GC LGH363036GC LGFCT600 V4-T-56 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

57 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-6. Series G LG circuit breakers are available with the Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System integrated into the electronic trip units helping to improve safety by providing a LG with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing time. The Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System unit utilizes a separate analog trip circuit that provides faster interruption times than the standard (digital) instantaneous protection. Work locations downstream of a circuit breaker with an Arcflash Reduction LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System ALSI ALSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Ampere Rating IEC/UL/CSA 35 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac 50 LGE35038G LGE365039G LGFCT LGE340038G LGE340039G LGFCT LGE360038G LGE360039G LGFCT LGE363038G LGE363039G LGFCT600 IEC/UL/CSA 50 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac 50 LGS35038G LGS365039G LGFCT LGS340038G LGS340039G LGFCT LGS360038G LGS360039G LGFCT LGS363038G LGS363039G LGFCT600 IEC/UL/CSA 70 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac 50 LGH35038G LGH365039G LGFCT LGH340038G LGH340039G LGFCT LGH360038G LGH360039G LGFCT LGH363038G LGH363039G LGFCT600 IEC/UL/CSA 100 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL LGC35038G LGC365039G LGFCT LGC340038G LGC340039G LGFCT LGC360038G LGC360039G LGFCT LGC363038G LGC363039G LGFCT600 IEC/UL/CSA 150 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL LGU35038G LGU365039G LGFCT LGU340038G LGU340039G LGFCT LGU360038G LGU360039G LGFCT LGU363038G LGU363039G LGFCT600 IEC/UL/CSA 00 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL LGX35038G LGX365039G LGFCT LGX340038G LGX340039G LGFCT LGX360038G LGX360039G LGFCT LGX363038G LGX363039G LGFCT600 LG Electronic Trip Units with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System ALSI ALSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 1 Ampere Rating 50 LT35038 LT35039 LGFCT LT LT LGFCT LT LT LGFCT LT LT LGFCT600 Note 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required. Maintenance System unit can have a significantly lower incident energy level, reducing arc flash potential to the system. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-57

58 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Base Mounting Hardware Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required separately, order 66A4560G03. Terminal Covers End Cap Kits (MIO Metric Nuts) Control Wire Terminal Kit Terminal Spreaders Terminal Extensions Handle Extension Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors Metric Wire Range (mm ) Interphase Barrier Rear Fed Terminals of Terminals Included 400 Aluminum Cu/Al (1) (1) 3 3TA631LK Aluminum Cu/Al (1) (1) 4 4TA631LK Copper Cu (1) (1) 3 3T631LK Copper Cu (1) (1) 4 4T631LK Aluminum Cu/Al 500 () () 1 TA63L 630 Aluminum Cu/Al 500 () () 3 3TA63LK Aluminum Cu/Al 500 () () 4 4TA63LK Copper Cu 500 () () 3 3T63LK Copper Cu 500 () () 4 4T63LK Aluminum Cu/Al (1) (1) 1 TA350LK 400 Copper Cu (1) (1) 1 T350LK Description Three-pole terminal cover 3 Four-pole terminal cover 3 of Poles LTS3K LTS4K 3 L3RTWK 4 L4RTWK Description Terminal Body Type Three-pole kit Aluminum 3TA63LKW Four-pole kit Aluminum 4TA63LKW Three-pole kit Copper 3T63LKW Four-pole kit Copper 4T63LKW of Poles 3 LGTEW3 4 LGTEW4 of Poles 3 LGTES3 4 LGTES4 Description Handle extension HEXLG Package of Interphase barrier Maximum Amperes Wire Size Range AWG Cu Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit. number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal. Multiwire Connectors Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware, insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side (OFF) end. LG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) 1 Includes LTS3K (three-pole) or LTS4K (four-pole) terminal covers. Standard terminal included with complete breaker. 3 Included in TA63IL, T63IL, TA63L kits listed above. IPB kcmil TA350LKRF kcmil 3TA350LKRF () kcmil TA63LKRF () kcmil 3TA63LKRF Maximum Amperes Wires per Terminal Wire Size Range AWG Cu Kit /0 3TA600L6K V4-T-58 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

59 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. StrandAble Multiwire Terminals Field-installed multiwire terminals are UL listed for nearly any class of rigid- or fine-strand wire without the use of additional fittings. Used on the load side of the circuit breaker to distribute the load to multiple devices without the use of a power distribution block. StrandAble multiwire terminals are available in three-pole kits that include the necessary hardware and shielding. LG Frame StrandAble Multiwire Terminal LG Frame StrandAble Multiwire Terminals (Three-Pole Kits) Maximum Amperage Wire Class Wire Range Shield Included Terminals and Terminal Cover for the LG Breaker Includes LTS3K (Three-Pole) or LTS4K (Four-Pole) Terminal Covers Note: Extended terminal covers add.13 inches (54.0 mm) to breaker length. Kit 600 B & C (6) 1 /0 Interphase barrier 3TA600L6SWKI D, G, H, I, K, M (6) 8 1/0 B & C (6) 1 /0 Terminal shield 3TA600L6SWKS D, G, H, I, K, M (6) 8 1/0 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-59

60 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Accessories Base Mounting Hardware Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required separately, order 66A4560G03. Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. LG-Frame Accessories Reference Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T-109 Shunt trip standard V4-T-109 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-110 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T-58 Handle extension V4-T-58 Terminal cover V4-T-58 Rear fed terminals V4-T-58 Multiwire connectors V4-T-58 Padlockable handle block V4-T-107 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-107 Key interlock kit V4-T-107 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-107 Electrical operator V4-T-107 Plug-in adapters V4-T-107 Rear connecting studs V4-T-107 Handle mechanisms V4-T-415 Earth leakage/ground fault protector V4-T-9 Drawout cassette V4-T-115 Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T-5 Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T-106 Cause of trip LED module V4-T-106 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-105 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1 Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available Note 1 Contact Eaton. V4-T-60 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

61 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity Ratings UL 489/IEC Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type UL 489 Current Limiting Data LG 310+ Specifications of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka rms Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics LGE630 3, LGS630 3, LGH630 3, LGC , LGU , LGX , Frame Circuit Ip (ka) I T (10 6 A S) LGC 40 V/00 ka LGC 480 V/100 ka LGC 600 V/50 ka LGU 40 V/00 ka LGU 480 V/150 ka LGU 600 V/65 ka LGX 40 V/00 ka LGX 480 V/00 ka LGX 600 V/65 ka Description Specification Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ Breaker Type Frame designation LG Frames available 50 A, 400 A, 600 A Continuous current range (A) A Ground fault pickup (A) A Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kaic) 35, 65, 100, 150, % rated Yes Protection Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) Yes Interchangeable trip unit Yes High load alarm (suffix B0) 5 Yes Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B1) 5 Yes Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B) 5 Yes Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Cause of trip indication Yes Thru-cover accessories Yes 1 DC rating apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. 4 Current limiting per UL Bx suffixes cannot be combined with Bx suffixes. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-61

62 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G LG 310+ Adjustability Specifications LG Frame 310+ Settings 50 A 400 A 600 A I r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) I r (All 310+) A B C D E F G H (= I n ) t r = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 (All 310+) Position Position Position Position Position Position Position I sd (x I r ) = short delay pickup Position 1 x x x (All 310+) Position 3x 3x 3x Position 3 4x 4x 4x Position 4 5x 5x 5x Position 5 6x 6x 6x Position 6 7x 7x 7x Position 7 8x 8x 8x Position 8 10x 10x 10x Position 9 1x 1x 1x t sd = short delay time I t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x (LS, LSG) t sd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) 1 Position 1 Inst Inst Inst (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) Position Position I g = gound fault pickup (amperes) Position (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position Position Position Position Position t g = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position Position Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (I i ) setting (ALSI, ALSIG) Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (.5 x I n ) (ALSI, ALSIG) 1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units. Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 4 Vdc circuit. Yes.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 1x Fixed.5x.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 1x.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 1x V4-T-6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

63 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) LG-Frame of Poles Width Height Depth, (139.) (57.3) 4.09 (103.9) 4 7. (183.4) (57.3) 4.09 (103.9) LG-Frame Note: TA63IL, T63IL, T63L, TA63L terminals add 1.19 inches (30. mm) to line or load side of LG. LTS3K or LTS4K terminal covers add.13 inches (54.1 mm) to line or load side of LG. R 0.5 (6.4).00 (50.8).69 (68.3) C L 5.38 (136.7).43 (61.7) Breaker 3.16 (80.3) 1.9 (48.8) Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) LG-Frame Breaker Type Two- and Three-Pole Four-Pole LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU, LGX 16 (7.3) 0 (9.1) 1 DC rating apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. 4 Three-poles in series. 750 Vdc ratings available (four-pole in series, not UL listed). Contact Eaton. 5 IEC rating is 300 ka at 40 Vac. 6 Current limiting per UL (139.) 5.58 (141.7) Three-Pole 4.06 (103.1) (57.3) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-63

64 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 5.16 (131.1) 3.44 (87.4) 1.7 (43.7) 4.31 (109.5) 4.06 (103.1) 3.98 (101.1) 3.44 (87.4) 1.7 (43.7) 0.86 (1.8) 4.73 (10.1) 5.58 (141.7) 5.58 (141.7) 4.73 (10.1) (347.7) 8.44 (14.4) (57.3) (390.7) (390.7) 8.44 (14.4) (347.5) 3-Pole 5.48 (139.) 4-Pole 7. (183.4) 4-Pole.75 (69.9) 3-Pole.74 (69.6) 3.97 (100.8) 4.30 (109.) 4.55 (115.6) 5.43 (137.9) 4-Pole 7. (183.4) 3-Pole 5.48 (139.) 4-Pole.75 (69.9) 3-Pole.74 (69.6) V4-T-64 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

65 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. NG-Frame (100 Ampere) NG-Frame ( Amperes) Product Description All Eaton NG-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use All NG-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) Selection V4-T-66 Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information V4-T-67 Accessories V4-T-70 Technical Data and Specifications V4-T-71 Dimensions and Weights V4-T-73 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module..... V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-65

66 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. NG Circuit Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Frame NG Performance at 480 Vac S = 50 kaic H = 65 kaic C = 100 kaic U = 150 kaic 1 K = Molded case switch A only. Neutral inn left pole on GN; right pole on NG. 3 Breakers do not ship with lugs. Trip units are factory installable only. Amperes 080 = = 100 Poles = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four; neutral 0% protected 7 = Four; neutral 100% protected 9 = Four; neutral 0/60/100% adjustable protection NG H ZG E C Trip Unit 33 = 310+ Electronic LS 3 = 310+ Electronic LSI 35 = 310+ Electronic LSG 36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG 38 = 310+ Electronic ALSI with maintenance mode 39 = 310+ Electronic ALSIG with maintenance mode KS = Molded case switch Rating Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated Terminations 3 M = Metric tapped line/load conductors E = Imperial tapped line/load conductors Feature Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking V4-T-66 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

67 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, 50 ka l cu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-7. Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 Molded Case Switches 789j of Poles Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit with Imperial Tapped Conductors LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG 1 For AC use only. NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 C or 50 C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40 C labeling. 3 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 4 Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pole; GN, neutral in left pole. 5 Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four); no neutral protection available with LSG or LSIG trip units. 6 Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four). 7 Non-UL listed NG 150 with 150 ampere trip unit is also available. 8 For AC use only. Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes. 9 For two-pole applications, use outer poles of three-pole molded case switch. j Add M to above catalog numbers for metric tapped line/load conductors. Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG NGS08033E NGS0803E NGS08035E NGS08036E 3 NGS308033E NGS30803E NGS308035E NGS308036E NGS308038E NGS308039E NGFCT10 4 NGS408033E NGS40803E NGS408035E 4 NGS408036E 4 NGS408038E NGS408039E NGS708033E NGS70803E NGS708038E 4 6 NGS908033E NGS90803E NGS908038E NGS1033E NGS103E NGS1035E NGS1036E 3 NGS31033E NGS3103E NGS31035E NGS31036E NGS31038E NGS31039E NGFCT10 4 NGS41033E NGS4103E NGS41035E 4 NGS41036E 4 NGS41039E NGS71033E NGS7103E NGS71038E 4 6 NGS91033E NGS9103E NGS91038E U e Maximum 690 Vac Ampere Rating Three-Pole Four-Pole 800 MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK3080KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK4080KSE 100 MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK310KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK410KSE 150 MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK315KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK4315KSE Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-67

68 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Type NGH High Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, 65 ka l cu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-7. Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 Type NGC Very High Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, 100 ka l cu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-7. Type NGU Ultra High Capacity U e Max. 600 Vac, 150 ka at 480 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-7. of Poles Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG 1 For AC use only. NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 C or 50 C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40 C labeling. 3 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 4 Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pole; GN, neutral in left pole. 5 Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four); no neutral protection available with LSG or LSIG trip units. 6 Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four). Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG NGH08033E NGH0803E NGH08035E NGH08036E 3 NGH308033E NGH30803E NGH308035E NGH308036E NGH308038E NGH308039E NGFCT10 4 NGH408033E NGH40803E NGH408035E 4 NGH408036E 4 NGH408038E NGH408039E NGH708033E NGH70803E NGH708038E 4 6 NGH908033E NGH90803E NGH908038E 100 NGH1033E NGH103E NGH1035E NGH1036E 3 NGH31033E NGH3103E NGH31035E NGH31036E NGH31038E NGH31039E NGFCT10 4 NGH41033E NGH4103E NGH41035E 4 NGH41036E 4 NGH41039E NGH71033E NGH7103E NGH71038E 4 6 NGH91033E NGH9103E NGH91038E Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 of Poles Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG NGC08033E NGC0803E NGC08035E NGC08036E 3 NGC308033E NGC30803E NGC308035E NGC308036E NGC308038E NGC308039E NGFCT10 4 NGC408033E NGC40803E NGC408035E 4 NGC408036E 4 NGC408038E NGC408039E NGC708033E NGC70803E NGC708038E 4 6 NGC908033E NGC90803E NGC908038E 100 NGC1033E NGC103E NGC1035E NGC1036E 3 NGC31033E NGC3103E NGC31035E NGC31036E NGC31038E NGC31039E NGFCT10 4 NGC41033E NGC4103E NGC41035E 4 NGC41036E 4 NGC41039E NGC71033E NGC7103E NGC71038E 4 6 NGC91033E NGC9103E NGC91038E Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 of Poles Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG NGU308033E NGU30803E NGU308035E NGU308036E NGU308038E NGU308039E NGFCT10 V4-T-68 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

69 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals N-Frame circuit breakers do not include terminals as standard. When copper or Cu/Al terminals are required, order by catalog number. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Base Mounting Hardware Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. Base Mounting Hardware 3 Terminal Shield Terminal Shield Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire ( of Conductors) AWG Wire 1 Conductor Extension Kit Conductor Extension Kit 4 Keeper Nut Not required on NG-Frame. Terminals are threaded. Handle Extension Included with breaker. Additional handle extensions are available. Handle Extension Interphase Barriers The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance between circuit breaker poles for special termination applications. Barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that are installed in the molded slots between the terminals. (Field installation only.) Interphase Barriers Metric Wire Range mm Metric 1 Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals 700 Aluminum Cu/Al () TA700NB TA700NB1M 1000 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0 400 (3) TA1000NB TA1000NB1M 100 Aluminum Cu/Al 4/0 500 (4) TA100NB TA100NB1M 100 Aluminum Cu/Al (3) TA101NB TA101NB1M Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 700 Copper Cu /0 500 () T700NB T700NB1M 1000 Copper Cu 3/0 500 (3) T1000NB T1000NB1M 100 Copper Cu 3/0 400 (4) T100NB T100NB3M Description Electronic portable test kit Trip unit tamper protection wire seal External neutral sensor (100 A) External neutral sensor (800 A) Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication Breaker-mount ammeter module Remote-mount ammeter module of Poles Three- and four-pole Three- and four-pole Description Three-pole terminal shield Description Imperial hardware: x 1.5 pan-head steel screws and lock washers Metric hardware: M8 pan-head steel screws and lock washers MTST30V 5108A03H01 NGFCT10 NGFCT10 TRIP-LED DIGIVIEW DIGIVIEWR06 BMH5 BMH5M NTS3K Description Three-pole both ends Metric Three-pole both ends English Description Single handle extension Description Interphase barriers A4G A4G0 HEX5 IPB5 1 Single terminals individually packed. Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 3 Metric hardware included with breaker. 4 Included as standard on 100% rated 100 A breakers only. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-69

70 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. NG-Frame Accessories Reference Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T-109 Shunt trip standard V4-T-109 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-110 External Accessories Base mounting hardware V4-T-69 Interphase barriers V4-T-69 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-107 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-107 Key interlock kit V4-T-107 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-107 Electrical operator V4-T-107 Plug-in adapters V4-T-114 Rear connecting studs V4-T-107 Handle mechanisms V4-T-415 Drawout cassette V4-T-115 Handle extension V4-T-69 Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T-106 Cause of trip LED module V4-T-106 Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T-106 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-105 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/Naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1 Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available Note 1 Contact Eaton. V4-T-70 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

71 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity Ratings UL 489/IEC Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Circuit Breaker Type NG-Frame Digitrip Specifications NG 310+ Specifications of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) (UL) I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs NGS 1, 3, NGH, 3, NGC, 3, NGU 3, Description Specification Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ Breaker Type Frame designation NG Frames available 800 A, 100 A Continuous current range (A) A Ground fault pickup (A) A Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kaic) 35, 65, 100, % rated Yes Protection Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) Yes Interchangeable trip unit No High load alarm (suffix B0) Yes Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B1) Yes Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B) Yes Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Cause of trip indication Yes Thru-cover accessories No amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 100 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG. Bx suffixes cannot be combined with Bx suffixes. 690 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-71

72 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G NG 310+ Adjustability Specifications NG Frame 310+ Settings 800 A 100 A I r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) I r (All 310+) A B C D E F G H (= I n ) t r = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 (All 310+) Position 4 4 Position Position Position Position Position Position I sd (x I r ) = short delay pickup Position 1 x x (All 310+) Position 3x 3x Position 3 4x 4x Position 4 5x 5x Position 5 6x 6x Position 6 7x 7x Position 7 8x 8x Position 8 9x 9x Position 9 9x 9x t sd = short delay time I t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x (LS, LSG) t sd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) 1 Position Position I g = gound fault pickup (amperes) Position (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position Position Position Position Position t g = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position Position Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (I i ) setting (ALSI, ALSIG) 1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units. Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 4 Vdc circuit. Yes.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 18x Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (.5 x I n ) Fixed.5x.5x (ALSI, ALSIG).5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 1x V4-T-7 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

73 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) NG-Frame of Poles Width Height Depth (09.6) (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) (8.6) (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) NG-Frame Front Cover Cutout Front View Three-Pole Side View R.5 (6.4) 3.44 (87.4) BREAKER 1.50 (38.1) 1.91 (48.5) 3.68 (93.5) 9.5 (35.0) (406.4) 6.38 (16.1) 3.19 (81.0) 8.5 (09.6) 5.50 (139.7) Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) NG-Frame Complete Breaker Breaker Type Three-Pole Four-Pole NGS, NGH, NGC 45 (0.4) 58 (6.3) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-73

74 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G RG-Frame ( Amperes) RG-Frame ( Amperes) Product Description Eaton s RG-Frame circuit breakers are available as frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug and terminals All R-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) Selection V4-T-75 Product Selection V4-T-76 Accessories V4-T-81 Technical Data and Specifications V4-T-8 Dimensions and Weights V4-T-84 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 V4-T-74 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

75 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. 70 ka at 415 Vac and 65 ka at 480 Vac RG Circuit Breaker With 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Frame RG Performance at 480 Vac H = 65 kaic C = 100 kaic K = Molded case switch Poles 3 = Three 4 = Four RG 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Amperes 160 = = = 500 RT Type Poles 3 = Three RG Circuit Breaker with OPTIM 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit Type RGH 65K RGC 100K Poles 3 = Three 4 = Four RG H ZG E C Trip Unit 33 = 310+ Electronic LS 3 = 310+ Electronic LSI 35 = 310+ Electronic LSG 36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG 38 = 310+ Electronic LSI w/ Maintenance Mode 39 = 310+ Electronic LSIG w/ Maintenance Mode KS = Molded case switch RT ZG Amperes 160 = = = 500 Amperes 16 = = = 500 Trip Unit 33 = 310+ Electronic LS 3 = 310+ Electronic LSI 35 = 310+ Electronic LSG 36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG 38 = 310+ Electronic LSI w/ Maintenance Mode 39 = 310+ Electronic LSIG w/ Maintenance Mode RGH 3 16 T9 W Trip Function Digitrip 610 T61 = LI T6 = LSI T63 = LS T64 = LIG T65 = LSG T66 = LSIG Digitrip 910 T91 = LI T9 = LSI T93 = LS T94 = LIG T95 = LSG T96 = LSIG Rating Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated (except 500 A) Terminations M = Metric tapped line/load conductors E = Imperial tapped line/load conductors W = No terminals Feature Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking Feature Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking Modification Suffix R = Ground fault remote RES trip E = 100% protection (new design 310) RES trip unit P = 100% prot. neut. 4P RES trip unit V3 = Electronic trip without ambient temperature marked on trip unit W = w/o terms K = Molded case switch Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-75

76 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection 70 ka at 415 Vac and 65 ka at 480 Vac Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity U e Maximum 690 Vac, 70 ka I cu at 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-83. Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C ka at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity U e Maximum 690 Vac, 70 ka I cu at 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-83. of Poles Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Rating Plugs 1 For SCR application, use 000 ampere frame. Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. 3 Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add R to catalog number, for example, RGH316035RW. 4 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 5 No neutral protection available on four-pole breakers with LSG or LSIG trip units. 6 Unprotected left pole neutral. Add P to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add E for 60% protected, for example, RGH416033PW, RGH416033EW. RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix M for metric threading. Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 4 LS LSI LSG 3 LSIG 3 ALSI ALSIG RGH316033E RGH31603E RGH316035E RGH316036E RGH316038E RGH316039E RGFCT160A RGH30033E RGH3003E RGH30035E RGH30036E RGH30038E RGH30039E RGFCT00A RGH35033E RGH3503E RGH35035E RGH35036E RGH35038E RGH35039E RGFCT50A Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 of Poles Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Rating Plugs LS LSI LSG 35 LSIG 35 ALSI ALSIG RGH416033E RGH41603E RGH416038E RGH40033E RGH4003E RGH40038E RGH45033E RGH4503E RGH45038E V4-T-76 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

77 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. 100 ka at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity U e Maximum 690 Vac, 100 ka I cu at 415 Vac See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-83. Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity U e Maximum 690 Vac, 100 ka I cu at 415 Vac, continued See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-83. Molded Case Switches 7 of Poles Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Rating Plugs 1 For SCR application, use 000 ampere frame. Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. 3 Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add R to catalog number, for example, RGH316035RW. 4 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 5 No neutral protection available on four-pole breakers with LSG or LSIG trip units. 6 Unprotected left pole neutral. Add P to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add E for 60% protected, for example, RGH416033PW, RGH416033EW. 7 Molded case switch will trip above 17,500 amperes. RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix M for metric threading. Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 4 LS LSI LSG 3 LSIG 3 ALSI ALSIG RGC316033E RGC31603E RGC316035E RGC316036E RGC316038E RGC316039E RGFCT160A RGC30033E RGC3003E RGC30035E RGC30036E RGC30038E RGC30039E RGFCT00A RGC35033E RGC3503E RGC35035E RGC35036E RGC35038E RGC35039E RGFCT50A Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 of Poles Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Rating Plugs LS LSI LSG 35 LSIG 35 ALSI ALSIG RGC416033E RGC41603E RGC416038E RGC40033E RGC4003E RGC40038E RGC45033E RGC4503E RGC45038E Ampere Rating of Poles RGK3160KSE RGK300KSE RGK4160KSE RGK400KSE Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-77

78 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C of Poles Long Delay Pickup Long Delay Time Short Time Range Short Time Delay Instantaneous Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs Order as Individual Component 1 L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) 1 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. Not to exceed 100 ampere ground fault pickup. RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required. Digitrip RMS Interchangeable Rating Plug (Order as Individual Component) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Fixed Rating Plug x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r 6 x M1 and M 0.5 I.0 n 4 Seconds 6 x I r ms x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r ms 6 x M1 and M x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r 6 x M1 and M x I n ms x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r ms x I n ms x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r ms 6 x M1 and M x I n ms Ampere Rating Type RGH with Digitrip 610 High Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, 70 ka I cu at 415 Vac RGH316T61WP44 RGH316T63WP44 RGH316T6WP44 RGH316T64WP44 RGH316T65WP44 RGH316T66WP RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A15 Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A RGH30T61WP49 RGH30T63WP49 RGH30T6WP49 RGH30T64WP49 RGH30T65WP49 RGH30T66WP RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A160 Includes 000 A rating plug 000 RP6R0A RGH35T61WP53 RGH35T63WP53 RGH35T6WP53 RGH35T64WP53 RGH35T65WP53 RGH35T66WP RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Type RGC with Digitrip 610 Very High Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, 100 ka I cu at 415 Vac RGC316T61WP44 RGC316T63WP44 RGC316T6WP44 RGC316T64WP44 RGC316T65WP44 RGC316T66WP RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A15 Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A RGC30T61WP49 RGC30T63WP49 RGC30T6WP49 RGC30T64WP49 RGC30T65WP49 RGC30T66WP RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A160 Includes 000 A rating plug 000 RP6R0A RGC35T61WP53 RGC35T63WP53 RGC35T6WP53 RGC35T64WP53 RGC35T65WP53 RGC35T66WP RP6R5A RP6R5A00 Includes 500 A rating plug 500 RP6R5A50 V4-T-78 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

79 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C of Poles Long Delay Pickup Long Delay Time Short Time Range Short Time Delay Instantaneous Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs Order as Individual Component 1 L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) 1 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. Not to exceed 100 ampere ground fault pickup. RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required. Digitrip RMS Interchangeable Rating Plug (Order as Individual Component) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Fixed Rating Plug x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r 6 x M1 and M 0.5 I.0 n 4 Seconds 6 x I r ms x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r ms 6 x M1 and M x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r 6 x M1 and M x In ms x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r ms x In ms x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r ms 6 x M1 and M x In ms Ampere Rating Type RGH with Digitrip 910 High Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, 70 ka I cu at 415 Vac RGH316T91WP44 RGH316T93WP44 RGH316T9WP44 RGH316T94WP44 RGH316T95WP44 RGH316T96WP RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A15 Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A RGH30T91WP49 RGH30T93WP49 RGH30T9WP49 RGH30T94WP49 RGH30T95WP49 RGH30T96WP RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A160 Includes 000 A rating plug 000 RP6R0A RGH35T91WP53 RGH35T93WP53 RGH35T9WP53 RGH35T94WP53 RGH35T95WP53 RGH35T96WP RP6R5A RP6R5A00 Includes 500 A rating plug 500 RP6R5A50 Type RGC with Digitrip 910 Very High Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, 100 ka I cu at 415 Vac RGC316T91WP44 RGC316T93WP44 RGC316T9WP44 RGC316T94WP44 RGC316T95WP44 RGC316T96WP RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A15 Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A RGC30T91WP49 RGC30T93WP49 RGC30T9WP49 RGC30T94WP49 RGC30T95WP49 RGC30T96WP RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A160 Includes 000 A rating plug 000 RP6R0A RGC35T91WP53 RGC35T93WP53 RGC35T9WP53 RGC35T94WP53 RGC35T95WP53 RGC5T96WP RP6R5A RP6R5A00 Includes 500 A rating plug 500 RP6R5A50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-79

80 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals R-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/Al terminals as standard and copper only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation is required. Must have terminals for 100% rated and or freeze testing requirements. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type RG Rear Connector Exploded View AWG/kcmil Wire Range/ of Conductors TA000RD Wire Terminal Note: Order one TA000RDM kit per three poles. number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker. Metric Wire Range mm Hardware Wire Terminals 1600 Aluminum Cu/Al Metric (4) TA1600RDM Copper Cu Metric (4) T1600RDM Aluminum Cu/Al Metric 600 (6) TA000RDM Rear Connectors 000 Copper Metric B016RDM Copper Metric B016RDLM Copper Metric B500RDM 1 Conductor (Viewed from Rear of Circuit Breaker and Cut Away for Clarity) Rear Connector (Cu) B016RDM B016RDLM (For 100% Application) (For 1600 A and 000 A Frames) B500RDM for 500 A Breaker Line/Load Conductors Conductor (Viewed from Front of Circuit Breaker) Securing Hardware Securing Hardware Cu Only Terminal T1600RDM 3 (For 1600 A Frame Only) OR Al/Cu Terminal TA1600RDM 3 (For 1600 A Frame Only) Base Mounting Hardware Supplied by customer. Handle Extension Included with breaker. Additional handle extensions are available. Handle Extension Description Single handle extension Wire Seal The wire seal can be used to secure the cover on the trip unit to prevent adjustments after settings are confirmed. Wire Seal Description Wire seal HEX6 5108A03H01 1 Order one per pole single terminals individually packed. Order one TA000RD kit per three poles. number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker. 3 For use with 500 A Frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 500 A frame is ordered. RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required. V4-T-80 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

81 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. RG-Frame Accessories Reference Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-109 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T-109 Shunt trip standard V4-T-109 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-110 External Accessories Base mounting hardware V4-T-80 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-107 Key interlock kit V4-T-107 Electrical operator V4-T-107 Handle mechanisms V4-T-415 Handle extension V4-T-80 Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T-106 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-105 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1 Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Description Electronic portable test kit MTST30V Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01 External neutral sensor (500 A) RGFCT50A External neutral sensor (000 A) RGFCT00A External neutral sensor (1600 A) RGFCT160A Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication 3 Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 1 Contact Eaton. Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately. 3 Cause-of-trip indication LEDs integrated in RG 310+ trip units. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-81

82 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Technical Data and Specifications UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Type of Poles RGH 3, RGC 3, IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Type of Poles RGH 3, 4 I cu I cs RGC 3, 4 I cu I cs RG 310+ Specifications Description Specification Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ Breaker Type Frame designation RG Frames available 1600 A, 000 A, 500 A Continuous current range (A) A Ground fault pickup (A) A Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kaic) 65, % rated Yes Protection Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) Yes Interchangeable trip unit Yes High load alarm (suffix B0) Yes Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B1) Yes Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B) Yes Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Cause of trip indication Yes Thru-cover accessories No 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. Bx suffixes cannot be combined with Bx suffixes. See Page V4-T-74 for trip unit specifications. V4-T-8 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

83 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. RG 310+ Adjustability Specifications RG Frame 310+ Settings 1600 A 000 A 500 A I r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) I r (All 310+) A B C D E F G H (= I n ) t r = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 (All 310+) Position Position Position Position Position Position Position I sd (x I r ) = short delay pickup Position 1 x x x (All 310+) Position 3x 3x x Position 3 4x 4x x Position 4 5x 5x 3x Position 5 6x 6x 4x Position 6 7x 7x 5x Position 7 8x 8x 6x Position 8 8x 8x 6x Position 9 9x 9x 6x t sd = short delay time I t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x (LS, LSG) t sd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) 1 Position Position I g = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position Position Position Position Position t g = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position Position Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (I i ) setting (ALSI, ALSIG) 1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units. Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 4 Vdc circuit. Yes.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 8x, 11x.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 8x, 9x Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (.5 x I n ) Fixed.5x.5x.5x (ALSI, ALSIG).5x, 4x, 6x, 7x Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-83

84 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) RG-Frame of Poles Width Height Depth (393.7) (406.4) 9.75 (47.7) (508.0) (406.4) 9.75 (47.7) (368.3) 0.16 R (4.1) Front Cover Cutout C L Breaker 7.5 (184.) Front View 3-Pole Side View.5 (57.) 9.70 (46.4) 5.10 (19.5) C L Handle 7.75 (196.9) (381.0) (406.4) 8.5 (09.6).44 R (11.) Tee Connectors May Be Rotated (330.) 4 Holes 0.44 Dia. (11.) 6.57 (166.9) (333.5) (393.7) 9.00 (8.6) 6.75 (171.5) Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) RG-Frame Complete Breaker Breaker Type of Poles Three-Pole Four-Pole 1600 Amperes RGH, RGC 10 (46.3) 135 (61.) 000 Amperes RGH, RGC 10 (46.3) 135 (61.) 500 Amperes RGH, RGC 135 (61.) 18 (8.6) V4-T-84 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

85 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Motor Circuit 480 Vac, Protectors Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information V4-T-86 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module..... V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-85

86 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information EG-Frame 480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum 1 Continuous Amperes Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes MCP Trip Setting 3 MCP 3 A HMCPE003A0C B C D.0. 7 E F A HMCPE007C0C B C D E F A HMCPE015E0C B C D E F A HMCPE030H1C B C D E F UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 3 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. V4-T-86 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

87 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. EG-Frame 480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum, continued 1 Continuous Amperes Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes JG-Frame 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum 1 MCP Trip Setting 3 MCP 50 A HMCPE050KC B C D E F A HMCPE070MC B C D E F A HMCPE100R3C B C D E F A HMCPE100T3C B C D E F Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes) MCP HMCPJ50D5L HMCPJ50F5L HMCPJ50G5L HMCPJ50J5L HMCPJ50K5L HMCPJ50L5L HMCPJ50W5L 1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 3 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 4 Settings above 10 x I n are for special applications. Where the ampere rating of the disconnecting means cannot be less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-87

88 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G LG-Frame 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum 1 Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes) MCP HMCPL600L6G HMCPL600N6G HMCPL600R6G HMCPL600X6G HMCPL600Y6G HMCPL600P6G HMCPL600M6G 1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters. 800 and 100 ampere, 600 Vac maximum motor circuit protectors are available as Series C HMCP product. V4-T-88 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

89 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Series G Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Product Description Application Description Eliminates need for separate overload relay Can be used with contactor to eliminate need for overload relay and still create manual motor control Meets requirement for motor branch protection, including: Disconnecting means Branch circuit short circuit protection Overload protection Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Product Selection V4-T-90 Technical Data and Specifications V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module..... V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 Features and Benefits Phase unbalance protection Phase loss protection Hot trip/cold trip High load alarm Pre-detection trip relay option Class 10, 15, 0, 30 protection Standards and Certifications IEC UL % rated UL 508 CSA C. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-89

90 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Product Selection JGMP s 35 kaic 65 kaic Continuous Amperes 50 JGMPS050G JGMPH050G 100 JGMPS100G JGMPH100G 160 JGMPS160G JGMPH160G 50 JGMPS50G JGMPH50G JGMP FLA le Dial Setting Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H LGMP s 50 kaic 65 kaic Continuous Amperes 50 LGMPS50G LGMPH50G 400 LGMPS400G LGMPH400G 600 LGMPS600G LGMPH600G LGMPS630G LGMPH630G LGMP FLA le Dial Setting Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker. For pre-trip alarm option, order Style 571B31G0. For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T-67. V4-T-90 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

91 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Technical Data and Specifications JGMPS and JGMPH Rating and Ampere Range Maximum Rated Current 50 A Breaker Type Breaker Capacity (ka rms) AC Hz JGMPS JGMPH IEC Vac I cu I cs Vac I cu I cs Vac I cu 1 14 I cs 6 7 NEMA UL Vac Vac Vac 5 35 of poles 3 3 Ampere range LGMPS and LGMPH Rating and Ampere Range Maximum Rated Current 630 A 1 Breaker Type Breaker Capacity (ka rms) AC Hz LGMPS LGMPH IEC Vac I cu I cs Vac I cu I cs Vac I cu 0 5 I cs NEMA UL Vac Vac Vac 5 35 of poles 3 3 Ampere range amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker. For pre-trip alarm option, order Style 571B31G0. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-91

92 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G 30 ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules Contents Description EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) LG-Frame ( Amperes) NG-Frame ( Amperes) RG-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module Product Selection Dimensions Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination Special Features and Accessories Motor Operators Clockwise from Left: Plug-In Blocks JG, LG, EG MCCBs Shown with Drawout Cassette Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module 30 ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module Product Description Eaton offers three- and fourpole 30 ma ground fault (earth leakage) protection modules for Series G E-, J- and L-frame molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs). Separate UL listed and IEC rated devices are available for each frame. The modules are bottom mounted and are available for each frame circuits up to: EG: 15 amperes JG: 150 (UL), 160 (IEC) or 50 amperes LG: 400, 600 (UL) or 630 (IEC) amperes The module is completely self contained, including a current sensor, relay and power supply inside the device. Current pickup settings are selectable from 0.03 to 10 amperes for all devices, except for the UL listed module, for which settings are selectable from 0.03 to 30 amperes. Time delays are also selectable from Instantaneous to 1.0 second for pickup settings of 0.10 amperes and above. The current pickup setting of 0.03 amperes defaults to an Instantaneous time setting regardless of the time dial s position. Two alarm contacts are included with each device, which can be wired externally for remote indication. Both of these are also indicated by an LED on the front of the device: 1. 50% pre-trip: alarms when the earth leakage current reaches 50% of the set pickup setting value.. 100% after trip: alarms when the breaker reaches the set pickup setting value and the breaker trips. UL-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate IEC-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate Page V4-T-15 V4-T-9 V4-T-47 V4-T-65 V4-T-74 V4-T-85 V4-T-89 V4-T-93 V4-T-94 V4-T-96 V4-T-101 V4-T-104 V4-T-11 V4-T-114 V4-T-115 V4-T-9 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

93 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Product Selection EG-Frame EG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, Vac, 50/60 Hz) 1 Ampere Rating of Poles 15 3 ELEBN315G LG-Frame LG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, Vac, 50/60 Hz) Ampere Rating of Poles ELLBN3400W 15 4 ELEBN415G ELLBN4400W ELLBN3600W ELLBN4600W EG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, Vac, 50/60 Hz) Ampere Rating of Poles 15 3 ELEBE315G 15 4 ELEBE415G LG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, Vac, 50/60 Hz) Ampere Rating of Poles ELLBE3400W ELLBE4400W JG-Frame JG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, Vac, 50/60 Hz) ELLBE3630W ELLBE4630W Ampere Rating of Poles ELJBN3150W ELJBN4150W 50 3 ELJBN350W 50 4 ELJBN450W JG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, Vac, 50/60 Hz) Ampere Rating of Poles ELJBE3160W ELJBE4160W 50 3 ELJBE350W 50 4 ELJBE450W Note 1 Shunt trip and undervoltage release cannot be used in an EG breaker connected to an earth leakage module. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-93

94 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Assembled Breaker and Earth Leakage Module Frame Height Width Depth Three-Pole EG 10.5 (60.3) 3.00 (76.).98 (75.8) JG 11.5 (85.8) 4.13 (104.9) 3.57 (90.7) LG (390.7) 5.48 (139.) 4.06 (103.1) Four-Pole EG 10.5 (60.3) 4.00 (101.6).98 (75.8) JG 11.5 (85.8) 5.50 (139.7) 3.57 (90.7) LG (390.7) 7.3 (183.6) 4.06 (103.1) EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 10.6 (60.6) 8.59 (18.) 4.78 (11.4) 4.75 (10.6) 0.55 (14.0) 0.70 (17.8) 0.90 (.9) 0.35 (8.9) 0.09 (.9) 0.50 (1.7).75 (69.9) 1.00 (5.4) 1.00 (5.4) (38.1) (1.7) 0.78 (19.8) 3.01 (76.5) 1.49 (37.8).00 (50.8) 3.17 (80.5) 3-Pole.98 (75.7) 3.98 (101.1) V4-T-94 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

95 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 3.9 (99.6) 1.38 (35.1) 4-Pole 5.50 (139.7) 3-Pole 4.13 (104.9) 0.69 (17.5).06 (5.3) 5.50 (139.7) 7.00 (177.8) 11.5 (85.8) 3.57 (90.7) 3.9 (99.6) 5.50 (139.7) 1.5 (31.8) R 0.19 (4.8) 0.50 (139.7) 0.8 (7.1) 0.63 (16.0).05 (5.1) 1.88 (47.8) 4.93 (15.) 1.06 (6.9) 6.97 (177.0) 11.5 (85.8) RESET TEST 4.5 (108.0) 3.37 (85.6) 3.31 (84.1) LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module 5.16 (131.1) 3.44 (87.4) 1.7 (43.7) 3.69 (93.7) 4.78 (11.4) 3.57 (90.7) 3.81 (96.8) 4.31 (109.5) 4.06 (103.1) 3.98 (101.1).05 (5.1) 4.09 (103.9) 3.44 (87.4) 1.7 (43.7) 0.86 (1.8) 4.73 (10.1) 5.58 (141.7) 5.58 (141.7) 4.73 (10.1) (347.7) 8.44 (14.4) (57.3) (390.7) (390.7) 8.44 (14.4) (347.5) 3-Pole 5.48 (139.) 4-Pole 7. (183.4) 4-Pole.75 (69.9) 3-Pole.74 (69.6) 3.97 (100.8) 4.30 (109.) 4.55 (115.6) 5.43 (137.9) 4-Pole 7. (183.4) 3-Pole 5.48 (139.) 4-Pole.75 (69.9) 3-Pole.74 (69.6) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-95

96 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Modules Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Product Overview Power demand continues to grow in new and existing facilities. To meet increased demand, larger utility supplies, spot networks and large facility transformers are installed. The increased capacity of the electrical source results in increased fault currents in excess of 100 ka short-circuit protection. Eaton manufactures non-fused current limiting modules with interrupting capacities up to 00 ka at 600 Vac or 70 ka at 690 Vac. Unlike fused current limiters with a one-time use, a current limiter module provides an automatic reset of the module after a shortcircuit event. Resetting the molded-case circuit breaker is the only action required to restore critical power to the system; there is no time wasted with sourcing the correct replacement fuses or module to bring system back online. Product Description The current limiting breaker modules use a unique contact design to enhance the system protection similar to that of the circuit breaker. When high short-circuit current is flowing through the contacts of these modules, the design results in very high interrupting capacities and improved current limiting characteristics. Application Description High-performance breakers are most commonly applied when very high fault levels are available and with applications where the current limiting capability is used upstream of the final load to limit current. Typical loads include lighting, power distribution, and motor control applications. Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Product Selection V4-T-97 Technical Data and Specifications V4-T-98 Dimensions and Weights V4-T-98 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 Features and Benefits Superior system protection: Auto reset improves system uptime and eliminates the need for finding replacement parts No fuses to replace, reducing the overall cost of ownership and the waste created by fuses Overloads, by using inverse time current tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker Low-level short circuits, by using instantaneous and/or short-time delay tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker High-level short circuits, by using ultra-high-speed, blow-apart contacts of the current limiting module in series with the circuit breaker contacts Let-through currents, by improved opening speed of the contacts, the resultant rapid rise of arc voltage introduces impedance into the system Standards and Certifications IEC UL 489 CSA C. V4-T-96 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

97 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Product Selection EG-Frame Series G High Performance Family Offering 480 Vac 600 Vac 415 Vac (IEC) 690 Vac (IEC) Type Product Amperes (UL) (UL) I cu I cs I cu I cs EGC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only With limiter JG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only With limiter JG 3P electronic Breaker only With limiter LG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only LG3P electronic Breaker only EG IC Rating 150 kaic at 415 and 480 Vac UL Listed (NEMA/IEC Rated) Base Molded Case Circuit Breaker Breaker with Line Side Mounted Current Limiter Breaker with Load Side Mounted Current Limiter Line and Load Terminations Included EGC3015FFG EGC3015FFGQ01 EGC3015FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC3016FFG EGC3016FFGQ01 EGC3016FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC300FFG EGC300FFGQ01 EGC300FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC305FFG EGC305FFGQ01 EGC305FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC3030FFG EGC3030FFGQ01 EGC3030FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC303FFG EGC303FFGQ01 EGC303FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC3035FFG EGC3035FFGQ01 EGC3035FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC3040FFG EGC3040FFGQ01 EGC3040FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC3045FFG EGC3045FFGQ01 EGC3045FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC3050FFG EGC3050FFGQ01 EGC3050FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC3060FFG EGC3060FFGQ01 EGC3060FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC3063FFG EGC3063FFGQ01 EGC3063FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC3070FFG EGC3070FFGQ01 EGC3070FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC3080FFG EGC3080FFGQ01 EGC3080FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC3090FFG EGC3090FFGQ01 EGC3090FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK EGC3100FFG EGC3100FFGQ01 EGC3100FFGQ0 T15EF EIPBSK Interphase Barrier Included for Limiter 1 600Y/347V. Two interphase barriers included on line end mounted limiter; () line end of limiter. Four interphase barriers included on load end mounted limiter; () line end of breaker () load end of limiter. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-97

98 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Current Limiting Data Frame Circuit Ip (ka) I T (10 6 A S) EGC Q 40 V/150 ka EGC Q 480 V/150 ka EGC Q 600 V/100 ka Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lbs (kg) EG 9.66 (45.7) 3.00 (76.).98 (75.8).91 (1.3) HMCP 9.66 (45.7) 3.00 (76.).98 (75.8) 4.18 (1.90) EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module 3.00 (76.) 1.00 (5.4) 1.00 (5.4).75 (69.9) 1.00 (5.4) 0.56 (14.) 0.09 (.3) 0.41 (10.4) 0.50 (1.7) 0.78 (19.8) 4.17 (105.9) 3.61 (91.7) 3.0 (81.3) 4.17 (105.9) 9.66 (45.4) V4-T-98 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

99 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. JG Frame JG IC Rating 00 kaic at 600 Vac and 70 kaic at 690 Vac Ampere Rating Series G HMCP Line and Load Terminals Magnetic Range UL Listed, IEC Rated Breaker With Line Side Mounted Current Limiter 1 UL Listed, IEC Rated Breaker With Load Side Mounted Current Limiter 1 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJIPBK. Four interphase barriers provided, () line end of breaker, () load end of limiter. 3 Line and load terminals included with products listed above. IEC Rated Breaker With Line Side Mounted Current Limiter 1 IEC Rated Breaker With Load Side Mounted Current Limiter Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic JGH3070FAGQ01 JGH3070FAGQ JGH3090FAGQ01 JGH3090FAGQ JGH3100FAGQ01 JGH3100FAGQ0 JGH3100AAGQ01 JGH3100AAGQ JGH315FAGQ01 JGH315FAGQ0 JGH315AAGQ01 JGH315AAGQ JGH3150FAGQ01 JGH3150FAGQ JGH3160AAGQ01 JGH3160AAGQ JGH3175FAGQ01 JGH3175FAGQ JGH300FAGQ01 JGH300FAGQ0 JGH300AAGQ01 JGH300AAGQ JGH35FAGQ01 JGH35FAGQ0 Electronic Trip LS 50 JGH35033GQ01 JGH35033GQ0 Electronic Trip LSI 50 JGH3503GQ01 JGH3503GQ0 Electronic Trip LSG 50 JGH35035GQ01 JGH35035GQ0 Electronic Trip LSIG 50 JGH35036GQ01 JGH35036GQ0 Ampere Rating Motor Circuit Protector with Line Side Mounted Current Limiter Breaker with Load Side Mounted Current Limiter 50 HMCPJ50D5LQ01 HMCPJ50D5LQ0 50 HMCPJ50F5LQ01 HMCPJ50F5LQ0 50 HMCPJ50G5LQ01 HMCPJ50G5LQ0 50 HMCPJ50J5LQ01 HMCPJ50J5LQ0 50 HMCPJ50K5LQ01 HMCPJ50K5LQ0 50 HMCPJ50L5LQ01 HMCPJ50L5LQ0 Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Metric Wire Range mm AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors Wire Type Standard Pressure Type Terminals 50 Aluminum Cu/Al #8 350 (1) TA50FJ 3 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-99

100 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Current Limiting Data Frame Circuit Ip (ka) I T (10 6 A S) JGH Q 40 V/00 ka JGH Q 480 V/00 ka JGH Q 600 V/00 ka Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lbs (kg) JG + limiter (331.7) 4.13 (104.9) 3.44 (87.4) 9.87 (4.48) HMCP (331.7) 4.13 (104.9) 3.44 (87.4) 9.87 (4.48) JG-Frame With Current Limiter Module 4.41 (11.0) 4.1 (104.6) 3.34 (84.8) (331.7) 4.13 (104.9) 3.44 (87.4) V4-T-100 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

101 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination Product Description Eaton s Electrical Sector introduces new high-magnetic withstand molded case circuit breakers, specifically designed for critical operations and selective coordination requirements. The highmagnetic withstand LHH and NHH frames continue the legacy of circuit breaker innovation for which Eaton is recognized throughout the world. The LHH and NHH breakers are equipped with 15 to 400 ampere trip units with high-magnetic capability. This design enables the breakers to withstand up to 90 times rated current before opening under shortcircuit conditions. The LHH and NHH circuit breakers incorporate a higher level of instantaneous pickup, thus allowing for higher current levels of selective coordination. Standard molded case circuit breakers typically are furnished with a magnetic pickup or electronic instantaneous adjustment or instantaneous override set at 10 times (10x) the continuous trip rating. Features, Benefits and Functions Eaton s new LHH and NHH molded case circuit breakers are furnished with a higher level of magnetic pickup or electronic instantaneous settings as indicated in table on Page V4-T-103. These higher levels of magnetic pickup and electronic instantaneous values in turn allow the system designer to obtain selective coordination at fault current levels up to these higher ratings. Greater values of selective coordination are available based on manufacturer tested combinations using the LHH and NHH as line-side breakers and standard breakers as load-side devices. Refer to IA010000E to determine the maximum fault values that selective coordination achieves. When the line-side and load-side molded case circuit breaker trip ratings are chosen to coordinate in the overload range, they also can be selectively coordinated in the fault range up to the values listed in the table on Page V4-T-103 or IA010000E. For overcurrents protected by circuit breakers on the load-side of the LHH or NHH, only the effected load-side Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module..... V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination Product Selection V4-T-10 Technical Data and Specifications V4-T-103 Dimensions V4-T-103 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 circuit breaker will open, while the line-side LHH and/ or NHH circuit breakers remain closed, thus providing continuity of power to the other critical loads supplied by the LHH or NHH circuit breakers. Benefits of Using the LHH and NHH Molded Case Circuit Breakers Customer expectations and codes are driving product development to protect customers critical operations. NEC 005 and 008 requires circuits with elevators, emergency systems, legally required standby systems, health care essential systems and critical operation power systems to be selectively coordinated. Simply stated, only the closest protective device directly protecting the circuit having an overcurrent (overload or fault) condition should open. All other overcurrent protective devices within these systems shall remain closed. Similarly, backup power system designs of a critical nature that are not code mandated may also require overcurrent protective devices to be selectively coordinated as much as practicable to provide a higher level of uptime. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-101

102 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Proven Technology and Performance The LHH is based on the Series G L-Frame circuit breaker, sharing the same small footprint and field-fit accessories as the L-Frame breaker. The NHH is based on the Series G N-Frame circuit breaker and shares the same footprint and accessories as the N-Frame breaker. NHH accessories must be factory installed. The LHH incorporates a thermal-magnetic trip unit with fixed thermal and fixed magnetic settings. The NHH has an OPTIM electronic trip unit with LSI adjustment capabilities. The instantaneous setting is adjustable from A or may be turned off to default to the frame override of 14,000 A. A hand-held OPTIMizer must be used with the NHH to adjust short-time delay and instantaneous, however, the long delay pickup is fixed and cannot be adjusted. The LHH and NHH breakers are available in Eaton s panelboards and switchboards. Standards and Certifications UL CSA Product Selection LHH LHH and NHH s Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit LSI Electronic Trip Unit Ampere Rating LHH Frame NHH Frame 15 LHH315FFG 150 LHH3150FFG NHH3150T5X LHH3175FFG NHH3175T5X15 00 LHH300FFG NHH300T5X15 5 LHH35FFG NHH35T5X15 50 LHH350FFG NHH350T5X LHH3300FFG NHH3300T5X LHH3350FFG NHH3350T5X LHH3400FFG V4-T-10 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

103 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Technical Data and Specifications Three-pole 65 kaic at 480 Vac ampere LHH ampere NHH Trip units: LHH thermal-magnetic NHH LSI electronic trip unit No rating plugs required Factory-sealed breakers LHH uses same internal and external accessories as standard Series G L-Frame circuit breaker NHH uses same internal and external accessories as standard Series G N-Frame circuit breaker LHH and NHH Electrical Characteristics Short-Circuit Current Ratings (ka rms) AC Hz Breaker Type Description LHH NHH Max. rated current (amperes) NEMA UL Vac Vac Vac Vac 4 IEC Vac Vac Vac /50 Vdc of poles 3 3 Ampere range A A Continuous Current Ratings Continuous Current Rating (I r ) Magnetic Trip Point Continuous Current Multiplier Instantaneous Trip Point Continuous Current Multiplier Short Delay Pickup 15 A 500 A 0x 150 A 500 A 16x 14,000 A 93x A 175 A 4000 A x 14,000 A 80x A 00 A 4000 A 0x 14,000 A 70x A 5 A 6000 A 6x 14,000 A 6x A 50 A 6000 A 4x 14,000 A 56x A 300 A 6000 A 0x 14,000 A 47x A 350 A 6000 A 17x 14,000 A 40x A 400 A 6000 A 15x Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Dimensions Weight in Description Height Width Depth Lbs (kg) LHH (57.3) 5.48 (139.) 4.09 (103.9) 1.36 (5.6) NHH (406.4) 8.5 (09.5) 5.50 (139.7) (1.) L-Frame R 0.5 (6.4).00 (50.8).69 (68.3) N-Frame 5.38 (136.7).43 (61.7) Breaker 3.16 (80.3) Front Cover Cutout 3.44 (87.4) R 0.5 (6.4) 1.50 (38.1) 6.38 (16.1) C L C L 1.9 (48.8) Breaker 1.91 (48.5) 3.68 (93.5) 3.19 (81.0) 5.48 (139.) 5.58 (141.7) Three-Pole Front View Three-Pole 8.5 (09.6) 9.5 (35.0) 4.06 (103.1) (57.3) Side View 5.50 (139.7) (406.4) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-103

104 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Special Features and Accessories Eaton s molded case circuit breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They are described by NEMA as,... a device for closing and interrupting a circuit between separable contacts under both normal and abnormal conditions, and furthermore as,... a breaker assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating material. The National Electrical Code (NEC) describes them as, A device designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overload of current, without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating. So designed, Eaton circuit breakers protect conductors against overloads and conductors and connected apparatus, such as motors and motor starters, against short circuits. In low voltage distribution systems, there are many varied applications of molded case circuit breakers. Eaton offers the most comprehensive family of molded case circuit breakers in the industry. This section of circuit breakers includes: Thermal-magnetic trip breakers Electronic rms trip breakers Molded case switches Motor circuit protectors Current limiting breakers Special application breakers Modified Breakers Eaton breakers can be ordered with internal accessories installed. These modified breakers will be subject to an addition charge. Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories Internal Accessories V4-T-106 External Accessories and Test Kit V4-T-107 Accessories V4-T-109 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 Special Calibration Special non-ul listed calibrations are available for certain ambient temperatures other than 40 C and for frequencies other than 50/60 Hz or DC. Reduced interrupting ratings will apply for 400 Hz applications. Add suffix H01 to breaker catalog number for 400 Hz rating 50 ºC Calibration Note: Breakers equipped with electronic trip units can operate reliably in ambient temperatures of 50 C. Add suffix V3 to NG MCCBs to remove standard 40 C labeling. Add suffix V to catalog number for complete thermal magnetic breaker when ordering listed ampere ratings for breakers to be used in 50 ºC ambients. 50 ºC ambient MCCBs are not UL listed. Contact Eaton for availability. Calibrations and Treatment Description Special calibration Moisturefungus treatment Frame EG JG LG NG RG V4-T-104 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

105 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Moisture-Fungus Treatment All Eaton circuit breaker cases are molded from glasspolyester, which does not support the growth of fungus. Any parts that are susceptible to the growth of fungus will require special treatment. Order by description. Add suffix J01 to breaker catalog number Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers The circuit breakers may be ordered with freeze testing. This option uses special lubrication and mechanical operation is verified at 40 C. Add suffix F01 to catalog number 57 F, F0 30 F Marine Applications E- to R-Framed circuit breakers can be supplied to meet the following marine specifications: U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46; ABS American Bureau of Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV; and Lloyds These specifications generally require molded case circuit breakers to be supplied with 50 C ambient, and plug-in adapter kits. When plug-in adapter kits are used, no terminals need be supplied (switchboard applications). Circuit breakers can also be supplied to meet UL 489 Supplement SA (Marine use) and UL 489 Supplement SB (Naval Use). UL 489 Supplement SA applies to vessels over 65 feet (19.8m) in length. Requirements include 40 C ambient calibration, special labeling, and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. (No 50 C.) Add suffix H08 Or you can choose to add 50ºC ambient but then there is no UL mark. Add suffix VH08 UL 489 Supplement SB requires partial 50 C ambient calibration, vibration testing, special nameplating and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. Eaton chooses to always fully calibrate to 50 C ambient. ( Naval labeled per UL but no UL mark due to 50 C label.) Add suffix VH09 Certified Test Reports Eaton breakers can be ordered with certified test reports at the time of order entry. Test report documents the thermal and magnetic or electronic tripping characteristics of the individual breaker. Breaker and test report must be ordered together. Add suffix 1 to breaker catalog number and enter separate line item on order for certified test report. Standards and Certifications Molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards: Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Standard UL 489, molded case circuit breakers and circuit breaker enclosures National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Publication No. AB1-1993, molded case circuit breakers Australian Standard AS 184, molded case circuit breakers British Standards Institution Standard BS 475: Part 1, switchgear and control gear Part 1: circuit breakers Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Standard C. No. 5, service entrance and branch circuit breakers International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC , circuit breakers Japanese T-Mark Standard molded case circuit breakers South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SABS 156, Standard Specification for molded case circuit breakers Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 157-1, safety regulations for circuit breakers Union Technique de l Electricite Standard NF C 63-10, low voltage switchgear and control gear circuit breaker requirements Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, low voltage switchgear and control gear, circuit breakers Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application. Molded case circuit breakers equal or exceed Federal Specification Classification W-C-375b requirements for the particular class associated with the circuit breaker frame being considered. Open breakers do not have service entrance ratings. Service entrance rating is part of the enclosure. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-105

106 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Internal Accessories Alarm Lockout The alarm switches operate when the circuit breaker is tripped by a short circuit or overcurrent, but also when it is tripped by a shunt trip or undervoltage release. Auxiliary Switches Auxiliary switches are used for signaling and control purposes. The various functions of the auxiliary switches (changeover) are shown on Page V4-T-108. Shunt Trips The shunt trip is used for remote tripping. The coil of the shunt trip is rated only for short-time operation. It is not permissible with the circuit breaker open to apply a continuous opening command to the shunt trip in order to prevent the breaker from closing. This means that interlocking circuits with continuous commands may not be set up with shunt trips. Undervoltage Releases The circuit breaker cannot be closed until the undervoltage release is energized. If the release is not energized, the circuit breaker can only perform an idle switching operation. Frequent idle switching actions should be avoided as they shorten the endurance of the circuit breaker. Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display The Cause of Trip Display can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides breaker information through an LCD screen, such as cause of trip, phrase current, ground current and low loads. The display is ideal for troubleshooting common trips such as ground fault, long delay, and instantaneous/short delay. The DIGIVIEW version will provide a local display at the breaker without additional wiring by connecting directly onto the trip unit. The DIGIVIEWR06 version has a 6 foot cable that allows users to mount the display on the outside of an enclosure door and connect to the trip unit that is contained inside the enclosure. The DIGIVIEWR06 is NEMA 3R rated. Cause of Trip Display/ Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display DIGIVIEW DIGIVIEWR06 Cause of Trip LED Module The Cause of Trip LED Module can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides a cause of trip indication via LED. The Cause of Trip LED Module connects directly onto the trip unit. When the breaker trips, the module indicates the cause of trip (long delay, short delay, instantaneous and ground) via LED indication. The module is reset after the breaker is reset. Electronic Portable Test Kit The electronic portable test kit provides a means to complete field tests using secondary injection on all 310+ trip units. The same test kit is also capable of secondary injection testing on Magnum and Series NRX low voltage power circuit breakers' 50 and 1150 trip units. Electronic Portable Test Kit MTST30V Wire Seal The wire seal can be used to secure the cover of the trip unit to prevent adjustments after settings are confirmed. Wire Seal 5108A03H01 Cause of Trip LED Module TRIP-LED V4-T-106 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

107 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. External Accessories and Test Kit External Accessories Description Fit Type Frame EG JG LG NG RG Non-padlockable handle block Field EFHB LKD4 Padlockable handle block Field EFPHB Padlockable handle block Field EFPHBOFF FJPHBOFF LBHPOFF off-only Padlockable handle lock hasp Field EFPLK FJPHL LPHL PLK5 HLK6 Padlockable handle lock hasp Field EFPHLOFF FJPHLOFF LPHLOFF PLK55OFF HLK6OFF off-only Kirk key interlock kit 1 Field KYKJG KYKLG KYK4 KYK6 Castell key interlock kit 3 Field CTKJG CTKLG CTK4 CTK6 Slide bar interlock 4 Field EFSBI FJSBI LGSBI SBK5 Walking beam interlock 4 Three-pole EG3WBI JG3WBI LG3WBI WBL5 WBL6 Four-pole EG4WBI JG4WBI LG4WBI WBL5 Electrical operator 5 10 Vac MOPEG40C MOPJG10C MOPLG10C EOP5T07 EOP6T08K 40 Vac MOPEG40C MOPJG40C MOPLG40C EOP5T11 EOP6T11K 4 Vdc MOPEG48D MOPJG4D MOPLG4D EOP5T1 48 Vdc MOPEG48D EOP5T EOP6T1K 15 Vdc MOPEG10C MOPJG10C MOPLG10C EOP5T6 0 Vdc MOPJG40C MOPLG40C 50 Vdc MOPJG40C MOPLG40C Plug-in adapters Three-pole PAD3E PAD3J PAD3L PAD53 Four-pole PAD4E PAD4J PAD4L Wohner busbar adapter Field top EG-BUS-T JG-BUS-TB LG-BUS-TB Field bottom EG-BUS-B JG-BUS-TB LG-BUS-TB Series G MCCB Frames EG, JG, and LG to mount to the SASY 60 mm Wohner Classic System UL file # E19713 No line side wiring required Compact design Up to 630 A MCCB UL508 tested and certified Reverse feed possible using Wohner system with Eaton breakers Wohner Busbar Adapter Wohner Busbar Adapters Breaker Frame Busbar Adapter Connection Point EG EG-BUS-T Top EG EG-BUS-B Bottom JG JG-BUS-TB Top or bottom LG LG-BUS-TB Top or bottom 1 Provision only. See Page V4-T-318 for bolt projection dimensions. 3 Castell bolt mounting hole must be 10 mm. 4 Requires two breakers. 5 Contact Eaton for availability of operators for EG- and NG-Frames before December 004. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-107

108 V4-T-108 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Accessory Configurations for EG RG Circuit Breakers Internal Accessory Configurations Contact Making by the Auxiliary and Alarm Switches as a Function of the Switching Position of the Circuit Breaker = For N and R-Frame Circuit Breakers Only

109 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Accessories Field Fit Kit s Alarm Lockout Description Pole Location EG, JG and LG NG RG 1 Auxiliary Switch Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Lockout 1 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch. Part number for JG and LG is ALM1M1BJPK. 3 Part number for JG and LG is ALMMBJPK. 4 Part number for JG and LG is AUXALRMJPK. Frame Make/Break Left A1L5LPK Right ALM1M1BEPK A1L5RPK A1L6RPK Make/ Break Left AL5LPK Right ALMMBEPK 3 AL5RPK AL6RPK Description Pole Location For Use in Frame Contact Type Make/Break Right EG Silver ALM1M1BEPK Make/ Break Right EG Silver ALMMBEPK Make/Break Right JG and LG Silver ALM1M1BJPK Make/ Break Right JG and LG Silver ALMMBJPK Make/Break Right EG Gold ALM1M1BEEPK Make/ Break Right EG Gold ALMMBEEPK Make/Break Right JG and LG Gold ALM1M1BEJPK Make/ Break Right JG and LG Gold ALMMBEJPK Frame Description Pole Location EG, JG and LG NG RG 1 1A, 1B Left A1X5PK Right AUX1A1BPK A1X5PK A, B Left AX5PK Right AUXABPK AX5PK AX6RPK 3A, 3B Left A3X5LPK Right A3X5RPK 4A, 4B Left Right A4X6RPK Description Pole Location For Use in Frame Contact Type 1A, 1B Right EG/JG/LG Silver AUX1A1BPK A, B Right EG/JG/LG Silver AUXABPK 1A, 1B Right EG/JG/LG Gold AUX1E1BPK A, B Right EG/JG/LG Gold AUXEBPK Frame Description Pole Location EG, JG and LG NG RG 1 Left AA115LPK Right AUXALRMEPK 4 AA115RPK Description Pole Location For Use in Frame Contact Type 1A/1B & 1M/1B Right EG Silver AUXALRMEPK 1A/1B & 1M/1B Right JG and LG Silver AUXALRMJPK 1A/1B & 1M/1B Right EG Gold AUXALRMEEPK 1A/1B & 1M/1B Right JG and LG Gold AUXALRMEJPK Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-109

110 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Shunt Trip Standard Shunt Trip Low Energy Shunt Trip Standard Undervoltage Release Mechanism a ST Pole Frame Description Location EG, JG and LG 1 NG RG Vac Left SNT4860CPK SNT5LP05K Right SNT6P05K Vac Left SNT10CPK SNT5LP11K Right SNT6P11K Vac Left SNT480CPK 3 Right 0 50 Vdc or Vac SNT5LP14K SNT6P14K Vac SNT5LP18K SNT6P18K 1 Vdc Left SNT01CPK Right 4 Vac/dc Left SNT04CPK SNT5LP03K Right SNT6P03K Vdc Left SNT4860CPK SNT5LP3K Right SNT6P3K Vdc Left SNT15DPK SNT5LP6K Right SNT6P6K 50 Vdc Left SNT50DPK Right Pole Frame Description Location EG, JG and LG NG RG Left LST5LPK Right LST6RPK Pole Frame Description Location EG, JG and LG 1 NG RG Vac Left UVR10APK UVH5LP08K Right UVH6RP08K Vac Left UVR40APK UVH5LP11K Right UVH6RP11K 4 Vdc Left UVR04DPK UVH5LP1K 4 Right UVH6RP1K 4 4 Vac Left UVR04APK UVH5LP1K 4 Right UVH6RP1K Vdc Left UVR048DPK UVH5LP3K Right UVH6RP3K Vac Left UVR048APK UVH5LP05K Right UVH6RP05K 10 Vdc Left UVR15DPK UVH5LP6K Right UVH6RP6K 0 50 Vdc Left UVR50DPK UVH5LP8K Right UVH6RP8K Vac Left UVR480APK UVH5LP9K Right UVH6RP9K Vac Left UVR600APK Right 1 Vdc Left UVH5LP0K Right UVH6RP0K 1 Vac Left UVH5LP0K Right UVH6RP0K 1 LH cavity not available for EG frame with earth leakage module. All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch Vdc, 50/60 Hz. 4 4 Vdc only use UVH5LP03K (NG) UVH6RP03K (RG) for 4 Vac. V4-T-110 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

111 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Technical Data and Specifications Note: Gold-plated contacts are well suited for switching low voltages and currents. Lead wires on accessories containing goldplated contacts are marked with a yellow stripe. Series G Gold Contact Accessory Switch Electrical Ratings Max. Voltage (Ue) Frequency Max. Current (l n ) Dielectric Withstand Voltage (Ul) 15 V 50/60 Hz 0.1 A 00 V 30 V DC 0.5 A 00 V 5 V DC 5 ma 00 V Series G Silver Contact Accessory Switch Electrical Ratings Max. Voltage (Ue) Frequency Max. Current (l n ) Dielectric Withstand Voltage (Ul) 600 V 50/60 Hz A 00 V 15/50 V 50/60 Hz 5 A 00 V 15 V DC 1 A 00 V Series GJ Frame: Terminal Extension Kits Extension Orientation Edgewise Right Angle Spreader Straight Three-pole FJTEE3 FJTER3 FJTEW3 FJTES3 Four-pole FJTEE4 FJTER4 FJTEW4 FJTES4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-111

112 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G Series G Motor Operators Motor Operators Product Description Eaton s motor operator mechanism enables local and remote ON, OFF and reset switching of a circuit breaker. The motor operator is mounted on the circuit breaker cover within the dimensions of the circuit breaker. The robust motor operators offer various voltages to maximize customer flexibility. Standard load transfer switching can be accomplished through the use of two circuit breakers fitted with motor operators and a mechanical interlock. Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators Features, Benefits and Functions V4-T-113 Standards and Certifications V4-T-113 Product Selection V4-T-113 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 V4-T-11 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

113 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Features, Benefits and Functions The motor operator provides special features for ease of customer use and status indication. The motor operator allows the circuit breaker to be opened, closed or reset remotely The motor operator contains a motor connected to a cam drive mechanism. The cam drives a slide mechanism to operate the circuit breaker handle Internal limit switches and relays are used to control motor operation to prevent overdriving the circuit breaker handle and motor overload conditions Manual Operating Key A key is provided to manually operate the circuit breaker A special pull-out locking mechanism provides a method for padlocking the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position The locking device will accept three padlock shackles with a maximum diameter of 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) each The cover provides visual status of the circuit breaker: ON, OFF or TRIPPED. A PUSH-TO-TRIP button allows the user to manually trip the breaker Turn the Key (clockwise only) Product Selection Motor Operators Frame Voltage Frequency Inrush Current Series G E-Frame Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPEG40C Vdc DC 1A MOPEG40C 4/48 Vdc DC 3A MOPEG48D Series C F-Frame Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPFD40C Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPFD10C 0 50 Vdc DC 1A MOPFD40C Vdc DC 1A MOPFD10C 4 Vdc DC 3A MOPFD4D Series G J-Frame Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPJG40C Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPJG10C 0 50 Vdc DC 1A MOPJG40C Vdc DC 1A MOPJG10C 4 Vdc DC 3A MOPJG4D Series G L-Frame Vac 50/60 Hz A MOPLG40C Vac 50/60 Hz A MOPLG10C 0 50 Vdc DC A MOPLG40C Vdc DC A MOPLG10C 4 Vdc DC 6A MOPLG4D Circuit Breaker Status Indication Window PUSH-TO-TRIP Button Standards and Certifications The motor operators are UL and CSA listed, and CE marked. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-113

114 . Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G LG Breaker with Plug-In Block Plug-In Blocks Product Description Plug-in adapters simplify installation and front removal of circuit breakers. Plug-ins are available for rear connection applications on three- and four-pole circuit breakers. Trip on drawout interlock kits are included. Stabs for EG, JG and LG plugins rotate 90 for flexible installation. Use terminal shields for IP30 protection. Product Selection Plug-In Blocks Breaker Frame of Poles Contents Note 1 Included with plug-in block. Trips the breaker when breaker is removed from plug-in block. Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks Drawout Cassette V4-T-115 EG-, JG- and LG-Frame Plug-In Blocks EG 3 PAD3E EG 4 PAD4E JG 3 PAD3J JG 4 PAD4J LG 4 PAD4L Trip-On Drawout Interlock Kit 1 EG 3, 4 PIILEG JG 3, 4 PIILJG LG 3, 4 PIILLG Terminal Shields IP30 EG 3 EFTS3K EG 4 EFTS4K JG 3 FJTS3K JG 4 FJTS4K LG 3 LTS3K LG 4 LTS4K V4-T-114 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

115 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series G. Drawout Cassettes Contents Description Page EG-Frame (15 15 Amperes) V4-T-15 JG-Frame (63 50 Amperes) V4-T-9 LG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-47 NG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-65 RG-Frame ( Amperes) V4-T-74 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) V4-T-85 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) V4-T ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module..... V4-T-9 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module V4-T-96 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination V4-T-101 Special Features and Accessories V4-T-104 Motor Operators V4-T-11 Plug-In Blocks V4-T-114 Drawout Cassette Drawout Cassette Product Description The drawout cassette is available for use with JG, LG and NG, three- and four-pole breakers. The cassettes consist of two separate components: the movable mechanism, which attaches to the breaker, and the stationary mechanism, which houses in the cassette. For the JG, LG and NG drawout cassettes, all necessary parts for installation are included in the one catalog number. Features Features of the drawout cassettes for the JG, LG and NG include: Trip on drawout breaker will trip if it is in the ON position when withdrawn from the cassette Secondary terminal block the drawout cassettes include a secondary terminal block for easier access when wiring low voltage accessories, including shunts and undervoltage releases Product Selection JG Drawout Cassette LG Drawout Cassette JG, LG and NG Drawout Cassettes Breaker Frame of Poles JG 3 JG3DOM 4 JG4DOM LG 3 LG3DOM 4 LG4DOM The drawout mechanism has three primary positions: Connected the breaker is fully connected to the primary stabs and secondary contacts Disconnected both the primary stabs and the secondary contacts are disconnected Withdraw the breaker can be removed from the cassette NG 3 NG3DOM 4 NG4DOM Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-115

116 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family Product Overview Eaton s molded case circuit breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They are described by NEMA as,... a device for closing and interrupting a circuit between separable contacts under both normal and abnormal conditions, and furthermore as,... a breaker assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating material. The National Electrical Code (NEC) describes them as, A device designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overload of current, without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating. So designed, Eaton circuit breakers protect conductors against overloads and conductors and connected apparatus, such as motors and motor starters, against short circuits. In low voltage distribution systems, there are many varied applications of molded case circuit breakers. Eaton offers the most comprehensive family of molded case circuit breakers in the industry. This section of circuit breakers includes: Thermal-magnetic trip breakers Electronic rms trip breakers Molded case switches Motor circuit protectors Current limiting breakers Special application breakers Modified Breakers Eaton breakers can be ordered with internal accessories installed. These modified breakers will be subject to an addition charge. Special Calibration Special non-ul-listed calibrations are available for certain ambient temperatures other than 40 C and for frequencies other than 50/60 Hz or DC. Reduced interrupting ratings will apply for 400 Hz applications. Contents Description Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Learn Online Drawings Online 50 C Calibration Add suffix V to catalog for complete breaker, listed above, when ordering listed ampere ratings for breakers to be used in 50 C ambients. (No UL label.) Moisture-Fungus Treatment All circuit breaker cases are molded from glass-polyester which does not support the growth of fungus. Any parts which are susceptible to the growth of fungus will require special treatment. Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers The circuit breakers may be ordered with freeze testing. This option uses special lubrication and mechanical operation is verified at 40 C. Marine Applications E- to R-Framed circuit breakers can be supplied to meet the following marine specifications: U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46; ABS American Bureau of Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV; Lloyds; and ABS/NVR Page V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 These specifications generally require molded case circuit breakers to be supplied with 50 C ambient, and plug-in adapter kits. When plug-in adapter kits are used, no terminals need be supplied (switchboard applications). Circuit breakers can also be supplied to meet UL 489 Supplement SA (Marine use) and UL 489 Supplement SB (Naval Use). UL 489 Supplement SA applies to vessels over 65 feet (19.8 m) in length. Requirements include 40 C ambient calibration, special labeling, and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. (No 50 C.) Suffix H08 Or you can choose to add 50 C ambient but then there is no UL mark. Suffix VH08 UL 489 Supplement SB requires partial 50 C ambient calibration, vibration testing, special nameplating and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. Eaton chooses to always fully calibrate to 50 C ambient. ( Naval labeled per UL, and UL now allows 50 C label here.) Suffix VH09 V4-T-116 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

117 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Certified Test Reports Eaton breakers can be ordered with certified test reports at the time of order entry. Test report documents the thermal and magnetic or electronic tripping characteristics of the individual breaker. Breaker and test report must be ordered together. Add suffix 1 to breaker catalog number and enter separate line item on order for certified test report. Standards and Certifications Molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards: Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Standard UL 489, molded case circuit breakers and circuit breaker enclosures National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Publication No. AB1-1993, molded case circuit breakers Australian Standard AS 184, molded case circuit breakers British Standards Institution Standard BS 475: Part 1, switchgear and control gear Part 1: circuit breakers Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Standard C. No. 5, service entrance and branch circuit breakers International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC , circuit breakers Japanese T-Mark Standard molded case circuit breakers South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SABS 156, Standard Specification for molded case circuit breakers Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 157-1, safety regulations for circuit breakers Union Technique de l Electricite Standard NF C 63-10, low voltage switchgear and control gear circuit breaker requirements Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, low voltage switchgear and control gear, circuit breakers Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application. Molded case circuit breakers equal or exceed Federal Specification Classification W-C-375b requirements for the particular class associated with the circuit breaker frame being considered. Open breakers do not have service entrance ratings. Service entrance rating is part of the enclosure. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-117

118 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Quick Reference Industrial Circuit Breakers G-Frame Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C No. of Poles Volts Type of Trip 1 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 50 Vdc. 3 Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems up to 70 A. Federal Specification W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) AC (ka) DC (ka) Page AC DC 10 10/ GHB N.I.T.U. 11a V4-T-16 GHB , /50 N.I.T.U. 11a10b, 11b V4-T-16 GHB N.I.T.U. 1b, 14b V4-T-16 GHB , 3 480Y/77 15/50 N.I.T.U. 15b V4-T-16 HGHB N.I.T.U. 1c, 13a, 13b V4-T-16 GHBS , 480Y/ V4-T1-34 GBHS , 600Y/347 N.I.T.U. 10 V4-T1-34 GDB /50 N.I.T.U V4-T-14 GDB N.I.T.U V4-T-14 GD /50 N.I.T.U. 13b V4-T-13 GD N.I.T.U. 13b V4-T-13 GHC N.I.T.U. 1c, 13a V4-T-131 GHC , /50 N.I.T.U. 13b 65 1 V4-T-131 GHC N.I.T.U. 1c, 13a V4-T-131 GHC , 3 480Y/77 15/50 N.I.T.U. 13b V4-T-131 HGHC N.I.T.U V4-T-131 V4-T-118 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

119 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 F-Frame Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C No. of Poles Volts Type of Trip 1 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 50 Vdc. 3 Not defined in W-C-375b. 4 Current limiting. 5 Check with Eaton for availability. Federal Specification W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) AC (ka) DC (ka) Page AC DC 10 10/ EDB 100 5, N.I.T.U. 10 V4-T-135 EDS 100 5, N.I.T.U V4-T-135 ED 15 5, N.I.T.U. 1b V4-T-135 EDH 100 5, N.I.T.U. 14b V4-T-135 EDC 100 5, N.I.T.U V4-T-135 EHD N.I.T.U. 13a V4-T-135 EHD , N.I.T.U. 13b V4-T-135 FDB , N.I.T.U. 18a V4-T-135 FDB N.I.T.U V4-T-135 FD N.I.T.U. 13a V4-T-135 FD 15 5, N.I.T.U. a V4-T-135 FD N.I.T.U V4-T-135 FDE N.I.T.U V4-T-135 HFD N.I.T.U. 13a V4-T-135 HFD 15 5, N.I.T.U. a V4-T-135 HFD N.I.T.U V4-T-135 HFDE N.I.T.U V4-T-135 FDC , N.I.T.U. 4a V4-T-135 FDC N.I.T.U V4-T-135 FDCE N.I.T.U V4-T-135 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-119

120 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C J-Frame Circuit Breaker Type K-Frame L-Frame M-Frame 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 50 Vdc. 3 Current limiting. Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C No. of Poles Volts Type of Trip 1 Federal Specification W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) AC (ka) DC (ka) Page AC DC 10 10/ JDB 70 50, N.I.T.U. a V4-T-156 JD 70 50, 3, I.T.U. a V4-T-155 HJD 70 50, 3, I.T.U. a V4-T-155 JDC , 3, I.T.U. a V4-T-155 Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C No. of Poles Volts Type of Trip 1 Federal Specification W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) AC (ka) DC (ka) Page AC DC 10 10/ DK , N.I.T.U. 14b V4-T-167 KDB , N.I.T.U. 3a V4-T-167 KD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-164, V4-T-165, V4-T-169, V4-T-17 CKD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-166, V4-T-175, V4-T-177 HKD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-164, V4-T-165, V4-T-169, V4-T-17 CHKD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-166, V4-T-175, V4-T-177 KDC , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-164, V4-T-165, V4-T-169, V4-T-17 Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C No. of Poles Volts Type of Trip 1 Federal Specification W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) AC (ka) DC (ka) Page AC DC 10 10/ LDB , N.I.T.U. 3a V4-T-190 LD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-188, V4-T-189, V4-T-194 CLD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-190, V4-T-00 HLD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-188, V4-T-189, V4-T-194 CHLD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-190, V4-T-00 LDC , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-188, V4-T-189, V4-T-196 CLDC , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-190, V4-T-0 Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C No. of Poles Volts Type of Trip 1 Federal Specification W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) AC (ka) DC (ka) Page AC DC 10 10/ MDL , I.T.U. 3a V4-T-13, V4-T-15 CMDL , I.T.U. 3a V4-T-15 HMDL , I.T.U. 3a V4-T-13, V4-T-15 CHMDL , I.T.U. 3a V4-T-15 V4-T-10 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

121 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) Selection Technical Data and Specifications F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-1 V4-T-1 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 G-Frame ( Amperes) Product Description All two- and three-pole circuit breakers are of the common trip type. On all three-phase delta (40 V) Grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton Single-pole circuit breakers, 15 and 0 amperes. Switching duty rated (SWD) for fluorescent lighting applications All G-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use HACR rated Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-11

122 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame GD GDB GHB GHC GHQ Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type Circuit Breaker Type HGHB HGHC GHBGFEP GHCGFEP of Poles of Poles 1 = 1 pole = poles 3 = 3 poles Terminal Types For line and load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size given below Terminal Types Circuit Breaker Amperes Terminal Type Material Screw Head Type Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range (mm ) 5 Standard 15 0 Clamp (plated steel) Slotted Cu/Al Pressure (aluminum body) Slotted Cu/Al 10 1/ Optional GD, GHB, GHC Pressure (steel body) Slotted Cu HID suffix only applies to the GHB and GHC single-pole, 15 0 A circuit breakers. Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems up to 70 A. 3 Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum. 4 Two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 5 Not UL listed sizes. GD K Trip Amperes K = Molded case switch D = Ring type terminals C = Steel collars V = 1 F (50 C) Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Y/ GDB, GD GD GHQ GHB GHB, HGHB GHC GHC, HGHC Suffix J01= Fungus proofed R01= Shock tested F01= Freeze tester HID= High intensity discharge 1 V4-T-1 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

123 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Typical G-Frame Circuit Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units ( Amperes) Product Description Standards and Certifications Cable in, cable out Includes mounting hardware and BMHE Product Selection UL/CSA Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 480 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Includes Binding 14 kaic at 480 Vac kaic at 480 Vac Head Screws and Clamps Includes Line and Load Terminals 10 3 x 0.31 Two-Pole Three-Pole Three-Pole 15 GD015 GD3015 GD3015D 0 GD00 GD300 GD300D 5 GD05 GD305 GD305D 30 GD030 GD3030 GD3030D 35 GD035 GD3035 GD3035D 40 GD040 GD3040 GD3040D 45 GD045 GD3045 GD3045D 50 GD050 GD3050 GD3050D 60 GD3060 GD3060D 70 GD3070 GD3070D 80 GD3080 GD3080D 90 GD3090 GD3090D 100 GD3100 GD3100D Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-13

124 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type GDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 480 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc 14 kaic at 480 Vac Includes Line and Load Terminals Maximum Continuous Two-Pole Three-Pole Ampere Rating at 40 C 15 GDB015 GDB GDB00 GDB300 5 GDB05 GDB GDB030 GDB GDB035 GDB GDB040 GDB GDB045 GDB GDB050 GDB GDB GDB GDB GDB GDB3100 Type GD Molded Case Switches Type GD Molded Case Switches Three-Pole 480 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C (Includes Line and Load Terminals) 60 GD3060K 60 GD3060KC GD3100K 100 GD3100KD 1 Includes line and load steel terminals. Includes binding head screws and clamps 10 3 x Molded case switches may open above 1300 amperes. V4-T-14 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

125 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) GD-Frame, Three-Pole Front View Off 3.00 (76.) Side View.63 (66.7) 4.88 (13.8) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-15

126 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Typical GHB Contents Types GHB and HGHB Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit Breakers ( Amperes) Standards and Certifications These breakers meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-375b as follows: Type GHB, 10 and 40 V: Single-pole: Class 11a Two-, three-pole: Classes 10b, 11b, 1b, 14b, 15b UL/CSA Type GHB, 77 and 480Y/77V: Single-pole: Classes 1c, 13a Two-, three-pole: Class 13b Type HGHB 77V Type GHQ 77V Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 V4-T-16 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

127 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Product Selection Typical GHB Type GHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 77/480 Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc Maximum 77/480 Vac Maximum, 15/50 Vdc Maximum Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Type HGHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 77/480 Vac Maximum, 15/50 Vdc Maximum 3 15 GHB GHB015 4 GHB GHB GHB00 4 GHB GHB105 GHB05 GHB GHB1030 GHB030 GHB GHB1035 GHB035 GHB GHB1040 GHB040 GHB GHB1045 GHB045 GHB GHB1050 GHB050 GHB GHB1060 GHB060 GHB GHB1070 GHB070 GHB GHB1080 GHB080 GHB GHB1090 GHB090 GHB GHB1100 GHB100 GHB Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc Maximum Continuous Single-Pole Ampere Rating at 40 C 15 HGHB HGHB HGHB HGHB Y/77 V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for three-phase delta (480 V). Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems from 15 through 70 amperes; 80 through 100 amperes devices are not suitable for DC application. 3 Use two outside poles. 4 Uses (4.83) 3 screw type clamp terminals. 5 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 0 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated and 0 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-17

128 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) GDB-Frame, Three-Pole Front View 3.00 (76.) Max. Side View.63 (66.7) 4.00 (101.6) V4-T-18 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

129 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Single-Phase (requires two poles) Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors ( Amperes) Product Description Standards and Certifications amperes, 77 V, These circuit breakers meet 50/60 Hz the requirements of UL 489 Operational voltage and UL V to 305 V Product Selection Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 15 GHBGFEP GHBGFEP GHBGFEP GHBGFEP GHBGFEP GHBGFEP1060 Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity Ratings Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles) 77 Vac, 30 ma Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Type of Poles 77 Vac (50/60 Hz) GHBGFEP 1 14,000 Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-19

130 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) GHB-Frame, Three-Pole Front View 3.00 (76.) Side View.63 (66.7) 4.00 (101.6) V4-T-130 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

131 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Typical GHC Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 Types GHC and HGHC Circuit Breakers ( Amperes) Product Description amperes 10, 40, 77, 480Y/77V, 50/60 Hz, 15, 15/50 Vdc Single-, two- and three-pole Cable in, cable out Does not include mounting hardware Standards and Certifications These breakers meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-37b as follows: Type GHC, 77 and 480Y/ 77V: Single-pole: Classes 1c, 13a Two-, three-pole: Class 13b UL/CSA Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-131

132 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 77 Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc Maximum 1 480Y/77 Vac Maximum, 15/50 Vdc Maximum Type HGHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 1 15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems from 15 through 70 ampere; 80 through 100 ampere devices are not suitable for DC application. 3 Uses screw type clamp terminals. 4 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 0 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated and 0 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated. 480Y/77 Vac Maximum, 15/50 Vdc Maximum 15 GHC GHC015 3 GHC GHC GHC00 3 GHC GHC105 GHC05 GHC GHC1030 GHC030 GHC GHC1035 GHC035 GHC GHC1040 GHC040 GHC GHC1045 GHC045 GHC GHC1050 GHC050 GHC GHC1060 GHC060 GHC GHC1070 GHC070 GHC GHC1080 GHC080 GHC GHC1090 GHC090 GHC GHC1100 GHC100 GHC Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc Maximum Continuous Single-Pole Ampere Rating at 40 C 15 HGHC HGHC HGHC HGHC1030 V4-T-13 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

133 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Single-Phase (requires two-pole spaces) Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Type GHCGFEP Cable-In/Cable-Out 30 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors ( Amperes) Product Description amperes, 77 V, 50/60 Hz Operational voltage V Product Selection Standards and Certifications These circuit breakers meet the requirements of UL 489 and UL Type GHCGFEP 30 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles) 77V, 30 ma 15 GHCGFEP GHCGFEP GHCGFEP GHCGFEP GHCGFEP GHCGFEP1060 Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Type of Poles 77 Vac (50/60 Hz) GHCGFEP 1 14,000 Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-133

134 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Special Purpose Circuit Breakers Special Purpose GHC Circuit Breakers ( Amperes) Product Selection Product Description Eaton s Type GHC circuit breakers have binding head screw-type terminals on line and load side. These circuit breakers with screw-type terminals ( ) will be marked Special purpose breaker not for general use. To order this special breaker, use the catalog number from the tables on this page. Contents Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Vac Maximum, 480Y/77 Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc Maximum 1 15/50 Vdc Maximum Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Type GHB and GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units for HID Lighting Applications 1 Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems from 15 through 70 amperes; 80 through 100 amperes devices are not suitable for DC application. Use two outside poles. Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T Y/77 Vac Maximum, 15/50 Vdc Maximum 5 GHC105D GHC05D GHC305D 30 GHC1030D GHC030D GHC3030D 35 GHC1035D GHC035D GHC3035D 40 GHC1040D GHC040D GHC3040D 45 GHC1045D GHC045D GHC3045D 50 GHC1050D GHC050D GHC3050D 60 GHC1060D GHC060D GHC3060D 70 GHC1070D GHC070D GHC3070D 80 GHC1080D GHC080D GHC3080D 90 GHC1090D GHC090D GHC3090D 100 GHC1100D GHC100D GHC3100D 77 Vac Maximum Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Single-Pole Cable-in 15 GHC1015HID 0 GHC100HID Bolt-on 15 GHB1015HID 0 GHB100HID V4-T-134 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

135 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Typical F-Frame Breaker F-Frame Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-136 V4-T-138 V4-T-149 V4-T-150 V4-T-15 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) Product Description All Eaton s F-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated All circuit breakers 10 through 30 amperes are suitable for HID (high intensity discharge) use All F-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-135

136 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology Circuit Breaker Type EHD FDB FD HFD FDC of Poles 1 = 1 pole = poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles Trip Amperes (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) 00 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) 5 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) Circuit Breaker Type EDB EDS ED EDH EDC FDC L EDC 3 00 L of Poles = poles 3 = 3 poles Trip Amperes Suffix E = 100% protected (four-pole only) neutral pole EH = 50% protected (four-pole only) K = High magnetic molded case switch L = Line and load terminals S = Stainless steel terminals V = 50 C calibration W = Without terminals Y = Line terminals only Z = Aluminum terminals ( 100 amperes) Suffix L = Line and load terminals W = Without terminals Y = Line terminals only Z = Aluminum terminals (100 amperes) V4-T-136 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

137 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 10+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology Performance at 480 Vac FDE = 35 kaic HFDE = 65 kaic FDCE = 100 kaic of Poles 3 = 3 poles HFDE 3 5 L Trip Units FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology Performance at 480 Vac FDE = 35 kaic HFDE = 65 kaic FDCE = 100 kaic Trip Unit 1 = 10+ LI = 10+ LSI HFDE ZG W of Poles 3 = 3 poles Trip Units 080 Trip Unit Trip Unit Features = 310+ LSI ZG = Zone 5 33 = 310+ LS selective 35 = 310+ LSG 36 = 310+ LSIG interlocking Blank = No option Features W = Without terminals L = Line and load terminals Blank = Load side terminals only Features W = Without terminals L = Line and load terminals Blank = Load side terminals only Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-137

138 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection Type ED Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 40 Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 65 kaic at 40 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 15 ED015 ED ED00 ED300 5 ED05 ED ED030 ED ED035 ED ED040 ED ED050 ED ED060 ED ED100 ED ED15 ED ED150 ED ED175 ED ED00 ED300 5 ED5 ED35 Type EDH Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 40 Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 100 kaic at 40 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C EDH100 EDH EDH15 EDH EDH150 EDH EDH175 EDH EDH00 EDH300 5 EDH5 EDH35 V4-T-138 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

139 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Type EDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 40 Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 00 kaic at 40 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C EDC100 EDC EDC15 EDC EDC150 EDC EDC175 EDC EDC00 EDC300 5 EDC5 EDC35 Type EDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 40 Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) kaic at 40 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 100 EDB100 EDB EDB110 EDB EDB15 EDB EDB150 EDB EDB175 EDB EDB00 EDB300 5 EDB5 EDB35 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-139

140 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type EDS Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 40 Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 4 kaic at 40 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Type EHD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 1 Not UL listed. 5 kaic interrupting rating. UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 40.83(d). 100 EDS100 EDS EDS110 EDS EDS15 EDS EDS150 EDS EDS175 EDS EDS00 EDS300 5 EDS5 EDS35 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 77 Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc 480 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc 14 kaic at 77 Vac 14 kaic at 480 Vac Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 10 1 EHD1010 EHD010 EHD EHD1015 EHD015 EHD EHD100 EHD00 EHD300 5 EHD105 EHD05 EHD EHD1030 EHD030 EHD EHD1035 EHD035 EHD EHD1040 EHD040 EHD EHD1045 EHD045 EHD EHD1050 EHD050 EHD EHD1060 EHD060 EHD EHD1070 EHD070 EHD EHD1080 EHD080 EHD EHD1090 EHD090 EHD EHD1100 EHD100 EHD3100 V4-T-140 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

141 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Type FDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 Not UL listed. 5 kaic interrupting rating. UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 40.83(d). 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc 14 kaic at 600 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 10 1 FDB010 FDB3010 FDB FDB015 FDB3015 FDB FDB00 FDB300 FDB400 5 FDB05 FDB305 FDB FDB030 FDB3030 FDB FDB035 FDB3035 FDB FDB040 FDB3040 FDB FDB045 FDB3045 FDB FDB050 FDB3050 FDB FDB060 FDB3060 FDB FDB070 FDB3070 FDB FDB080 FDB3080 FDB FDB090 FDB3090 FDB FDB100 FDB3100 FDB FDB110 FDB3110 FDB FDB15 FDB315 FDB FDB150 FDB3150 FDB4150 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-141

142 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type FD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 Not UL listed. 5 kaic interrupting rating. UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 40.83(d). 77 Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc 35 kaic at 77 Vac 35 kaic at 480 Vac Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 10 1 FD FD1015 FD015 FD3015 FD FD100 FD00 FD300 FD400 5 FD105 FD05 FD305 FD FD1030 FD030 FD3030 FD FD1035 FD035 FD3035 FD FD1040 FD040 FD3040 FD FD1045 FD045 FD3045 FD FD1050 FD050 FD3050 FD FD1060 FD060 FD3060 FD FD1070 FD070 FD3070 FD FD1080 FD080 FD3080 FD FD1090 FD090 FD3090 FD FD1100 FD100 FD3100 FD FD1110 FD110 FD3110 FD FD115 FD15 FD315 FD FD1150 FD150 FD3150 FD FD175 FD3175 FD FD00 FD300 FD400 5 FD5 FD35 FD45 V4-T-14 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

143 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Type HFD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Note 1 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 40.83(d). 77 Vac Maximum, 15 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc 65 kaic at 77 Vac 65 kaic at 480 Vac Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 15 HFD HFD015 HFD3015 HFD HFD100 1 HFD00 HFD300 HFD400 5 HFD105 HFD05 HFD305 HFD HFD1030 HFD030 HFD3030 HFD HFD1035 HFD035 HFD3035 HFD HFD1040 HFD040 HFD3040 HFD HFD1045 HFD045 HFD3045 HFD HFD1050 HFD050 HFD3050 HFD HFD1060 HFD060 HFD3060 HFD HFD1070 HFD070 HFD3070 HFD HFD1080 HFD080 HFD3080 HFD HFD1090 HFD090 HFD3090 HFD HFD1100 HFD100 HFD3100 HFD HFD1110 HFD110 HFD3110 HFD HFD115 HFD15 HFD315 HFD HFD1150 HFD150 HFD3150 HFD HFD175 HFD3175 HFD HFD00 HFD300 HFD400 5 HFD5 HFD35 HFD45 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-143

144 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type FDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc 100 kaic at 480 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 15 FDC015 FDC3015 FDC FDC00 FDC300 FDC400 5 FDC05 FDC305 FDC FDC030 FDC3030 FDC FDC035 FDC3035 FDC FDC040 FDC3040 FDC FDC045 FDC3045 FDC FDC050 FDC3050 FDC FDC060 FDC3060 FDC FDC070 FDC3070 FDC FDC080 FDC3080 FDC FDC090 FDC3090 FDC FDC100 FDC3100 FDC FDC110 FDC3110 FDC FDC15 FDC315 FDC FDC15 FDC3150 FDC FDC175 FDC3175 FDC FDC00 FDC300 FDC400 5 FDC5 FDC35 FDC45 V4-T-144 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

145 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Types FDE, HFDE and FDCE 310+ Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-151. Maximum Ampere Rating Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only Standard LS Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Types FDE, HFDE, and FDCE 10+ Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 10+ Trip Electronic Trip Units Amperage Settings Optional LSI LSG LSIG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units Amperage Settings Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 35 kaic at 480 Vac / 18 kaic at 600 Vac 80 FDE FDE30803 FDE FDE CTF FDE FDE31603 FDE FDE CTF160 5 FDE3533 FDE353 FDE3535 FDE3536 CTF5 65 kaic at 480 Vac / 5 kaic at 600 Vac 80 HFDE HFDE30803 HFDE HFDE CTF HFDE HFDE31603 HFDE HFDE CTF160 5 HFDE3533 HFDE353 HFDE3535 HFDE3536 CTF5 100 kaic at 480 Vac / 5 kaic at 600 Vac 80 FDCE FDCE30803 FDCE FDCE CTF FDCE FDCE31603 FDCE FDCE CTF160 5 FDCE3533 FDCE353 FDCE3535 FDCE3536 CTF5 Maximum Ampere Rating Digitrip RMS 10+ Trip Unit Only Standard Optional LI Adjustable Instantaneous LSI Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay 35 kaic at 480 Vac / 18 kaic at 600 Vac 100 FDE31001 FDE FDE FDE351 FDE35 65 kaic at 480 Vac / 5 kaic at 600 Vac 100 HFDE31001 HFDE HFDE HFDE351 HFDE kaic at 480 Vac / 5 kaic at 600 Vac 100 FDCE31001 FDCE FDCE FDCE351 FDCE35 Circuit Breaker Type Frame Ratings FDE, HFDE, FDCE 5 100, 110, 15, 150, 175, 00, 5 FDE, HFDE, FDCE , 80, 90, 100, 110, 15, 150 FDE, HFDE, FDCE , 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 FDE 310+ Electronic Breaker with Zone Selective Interlocking Ampere LSI w/zsi LSIG w/zsi Rating 35 kaic at 480 Vac / 18 kaic at 600 Vac 80 FDE30803ZG FDE308036ZG 160 FDE31603ZG FDE316036ZG 5 FDE353ZG FDE3536ZG 65 kaic at 480 Vac / 5 kaic at 600 Vac 80 HFDE30803ZG HFDE308036ZG 160 HFDE31603ZG HFDE316036ZG 5 HFDE353ZG HFDE3536ZG 100 kaic at 480 Vac / 5 kaic at 600 Vac 80 FDCE30803ZG FDCE308036ZG 160 FDCE31603ZG FDCE316036ZG 5 FDCE353ZG FDCE3536ZG Circuit Breaker Type Frame Ratings FDE, HFDE, FDCE 5 100, 110, 15, 150, 160, 175, 00, 5 FDE, HFDE, FDCE , 70, 80, 90, 100, 15, 150, 160 FDE, HFDE, FDCE 80 15, 0, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 1 For 10+ trip unit, 150 A not available with LSI trip unit; entire range is covered by 100 A and 5 A frames. Contact the product line for availability. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-145

146 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Molded Case Switches Eaton s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Two-Pole Note Molded case switches will open above 1800 amperes. components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Complete Circuit Breaker with Load Side Terminals Only 480 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc 100 EHD100K FD100K HFD100K 150 FD150K HFD150K 5 FD5K HFD5K Three-Pole 100 EHD3100K FD3100K HFD3100K 150 FD3150K HFD3150K 5 FD35K HFD35K Four-Pole 100 FD4100K HFD4100K 150 FD4150K HFD4150K 5 FD45K HFD45K V4-T-146 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

147 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. Except as noted, terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B. Unless otherwise specified, F-Frame circuit breakers are factory equipped with load terminals only. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Ordering Information F-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have load terminals only as standard equipment. When standard line-end terminals (same as standard load-end terminals) are required, add Suffix L to the circuit breaker catalog number. When nonstandard or optional line and/ or load terminals are required, order by style number. Specify if factory installation is required. 1 Use on FDE, HFDE and FDCE electronic trip only. Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers. 3 Includes terminal shield kit. Adds approximately 3 inches (76.) to breaker height. Available for use on three-pole breaker only. 4 Replacement use only. Terminal Body Material AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range mm Package of Three Terminals Wire Type Standard Pressure Type Terminals 0 (EHD) Steel Cu/AI T0FB 100 Steel Cu/AI 14 1/ T100FB 5 Aluminum Cu/AI 4 4/ TA5FD Optional Pressure Terminals 50 Aluminum Cu/AI TA50FB 100 Aluminum Cu/AI 14 1/ TA100FD 00 Stainless steel Cu 4 4/ T150FB 5 Copper Cu 4 4/ T5FD 5 Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil TA5FDK3 3 5 Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil TA5FDK 3 4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-147

148 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Line and Load Terminals Screw Conductor Washer Conductor Conductor Wire Clamp Screw Extrusion 3T0FB 3T100FB, 3T150FB 3TA5FD Assemble wire clamp to bottom of conductor as shown. Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer. Caution: Collar must surround conductor. Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion on collar. Install clip with legs on top of conductor and snap end around bottom of collar. Collar Conductor Washer Screw 3TA50FB 3TA100FD 3TA5FDK3 (Up to 150 mm ) Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Collar Conductor Collar Washer Screw Nut Collar slides onto conductor and is held in position by a screw and lockwasher. Collar Clip Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Terminal shield must be used with this collar. Note: For 185 mm, use 3TA5FDK1. Same illustration for 3TA5FDK V4-T-148 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

149 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Accessories Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Allowable Accessory Combinations FD Frame Accessories Reference Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 1 Four-Pole Description Page Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) Alarm lockout switch (make only) V4-T-75 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-75 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-75 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-77 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-77 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T-79 Shunt trip standard V4-T-81 Shunt trip low energy V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-87 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T-310 Keeper nut V4-T-310 Control wire terminal kit V4-T-311 Multiwire connectors V4-T-31 Rear fed terminals V4-T-31 Base mounting hardware V4-T-31 Terminal shields V4-T-314 Terminal end covers V4-T-315 Interphase barriers V4-T-315 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-316 Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-316 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-317 Cylinder lock V4-T-317 Key interlock kit V4-T-318 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-319 Walking beam interlock requires two breakers V4-T-319 Electrical (solenoid and motor) operators V4-T-30 Plug-in adapters V4-T-31 Rear connecting studs V4-T-33 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T-34 Handle mechanisms V4-T-47 LFD current limiter V4-T-36 IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T-36 Cause of trip display V4-T-37 Remote mount cause of trip display V4-T-37 Cause of trip LED V4-T-37 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available Note 1 Internal accessories are listed with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for factory installation. They are not listed with UL for field installation. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-149

150 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1 Type of Poles EDB, 3 10 EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, EHD , FDB, 3, FD , 3, FDE HFD , 3, HFDE FDC 5, 3, FDCE IEC (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings (P1) Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1 Type of Poles 0, , EDB, 3 10 EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, EHD , FDB, 3, FD , 3, HFD , 3, FDC, 3, and 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories UL 489 Current Limiting Data Frame Circuit Ip (ka) I T (10 6 A S) Description number FDC 40 V/00 ka Electronic portable test kit MTST30V FDC 480 V/100 ka Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01 FDC 600 V/35 ka External neutral sensor (80 A) 7 CTF080 External neutral sensor (160 A) 7 CTF160 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. External neutral sensor (5 A) 7 CTF5 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Compact external neutral sensor (80 A) 7 CTFD080 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. Compact external neutral sensor (160 A) 7 4 Electronics available on three-pole only, no DC rating for FDE, HFDE, FDCE. CTFD160 5 Current limiting. Compact external neutral sensor (5 A) 7 CTFD5 6 Check with Eaton for availability. 7 Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED Neutral sensor required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired; sold separately. Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 V4-T-150 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

151 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 FDE 10+ and 310+ Specifications Description Digitrip RMS 10+ Digitrip RMS 310+ Breaker type Frame designation FD FD Frames available 100 A, 150 A, 5 A 80 A, 160 A, 5 A Continuous current range (A) 40 5 A 15 5 A Ground fault pickup (A) N/A 16 5 A Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kaic) 35, 65, , 65, 100 Protection Ordering options LI, LSI LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System No No (or Maintenance Mode) Interchangeable trip unit No No High load alarm (suffix B0) No No Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B1) No No Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B) No No Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) No LSI, LSIG Cause of trip indication No Yes Thru-cover accessories No No Test kit available Yes Yes FDE 10+ Adjustability Specifications FD Frame 10+ settings 100 A 150 A 5 A I r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) (all 10+) I r A B C D E F G (= I n ) I i (x I n )= Instantaneous pickup I i (10+ LI version) J x K.5x L 3x M 3.5x N 4x O 5x P 6x Q 8x R 10x S 1x Fixed instantaneous override (all 10+) Isd (x Ir) / tsd = SD profile I sd / t sd (10+ LSI version) J x / 150 N/A x / 150 K x / 300 N/A x / 300 L x / I t N/A x / I t M 4x / Inst N/A 4x / Inst N 4x / 150 N/A 4x / 150 O 4x / I t N/A 4x / I t P 6x / Inst N/A 6x / Inst Q 6x / 300 N/A 6x / 300 R 10x / 150 N/A 10x / 150 S 10x / 300 N/A 10x / 300 FDE 310+ Adjustability Specifications FD Frame 310+ Settings 80 A 160 A 5 A I r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) I r (All 310+) A B C D E F G H (= I n ) t r = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 (All 310+) Position Position Position Position Position Position Position I sd (x I r ) = short delay pickup Position 1 x x x (All 310+) Position 3x 3x 3x Position 3 4x 4x 4x Position 4 5x 5x 5x Position 5 6x 6x 6x Position 6 7x 7x 7x Position 7 8x 8x 8x Position 8 10x 10x 10x Position 9 1x 1x 1x t sd = short delay time I t (milliseconds) (LS, LSG) t sd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) (LSI, LSIG) I g = gound fault pickup (amperes) (LSG, LSIG) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x Position 1 Inst Inst Inst Position Position Position Position Position Position Position Position t g = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst (LSG, LSIG) Position Position Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (I i ) setting 1 Maintenance Mode pickup (.5 x I n ) (amperes) 1 Not available for FD. Independently adjustable I i setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units. Maintenance Mode not available for FD frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG and RG. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-151

152 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) FD Frame of Poles Width Height Depth (35.1) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0).75 (70.0) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0) (105.0) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0) (139.7) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0) FD Frame, Three-Pole Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) FD Frame Front View On Off 4.13 (104.9) 6.00 (15.4) of Poles Breaker Type ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC 3 (1.4) 4.5 (.0) EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC (0.9) 3 (1.4) 4.5 (.0) 6 (.7) FDE, HFDE, FDCE 4.5 (.0) Side View 3.38 (85.7) V4-T-15 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

153 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Typical J-Frame Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-154 V4-T-155 V4-T-158 V4-T-159 V4-T-160 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) Product Description All Eaton s J-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated J-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers J-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-153

154 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame Trip Unit Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type JDB JD HJD JDC Trip Unit Type JT = Thermal-magnetic of Poles = poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles JD 3 50 F Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating of Poles = poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles JT 3 50 T Trip Unit Rating/ Plug Ampere Rating Suffix C = Non-aluminum terminals F = Frame only K = High magnetic molded case switch V = 50 C calibration W= Without terminals X = Load side terminals only Y = Line side terminals only Suffix T =Trip unit thermal-magnetic fixed thermal adj. magnetic V = 50 C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only) V4-T-154 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

155 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Product Selection Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Two-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5 10 times continuous ampere rating. Individually packed. 3 Fully rated neutral pole with no protection. 4 Neutral is in right pole. High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only 1 For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T-157 for Optional Terminals 70 JD070 HJD070 JDC070 JT070T TA50KB 90 JD090 HJD090 JDC090 JT090T 100 JD100 HJD100 JDC100 JT100T 15 JD15 HJD15 JDC15 JT15T 150 JD150 HJD150 JDC150 JT150T 175 JD175 HJD175 JDC175 JT175T 00 JD00 HJD00 JDC00 JT00T 5 JD5 HJD5 JDC5 JT5T 50 JD50 HJD50 JDC50 JT50T Three-Pole 70 JD3070 HJD3070 JDC3070 JT3070T TA50KB 90 JD3090 HJD3090 JDC3090 JT3090T 100 JD3100 HJD3100 JDC3100 JT3100T 15 JD315 HJD315 JDC315 JT315T 150 JD3150 HJD3150 JDC3150 JT3150T 175 JD3175 HJD3175 JDC3175 JT3175T 00 JD300 HJD300 JDC300 JT300T 5 JD35 HJD35 JDC35 JT35T 50 JD350 HJD350 JDC350 JT350T Four-Pole JD415 HJD415 JDC415 JT315T TA50KB 150 JD4150 HJD4150 JDC4150 JT3150T 175 JD4175 HJD4175 JDC4175 JT3175T 00 JD400 HJD400 JDC400 JT300T 5 JD45 HJD45 JDC45 JT35T 50 JD450 HJD450 JDC450 JT350T Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-155

156 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac Two-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac JD50F HJD50F JDC50F Three-Pole JD350F HJD350F JDC350F Four-Pole JD450F HJD450F JDC450F Type JDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non- Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed Application Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Two-Pole 600 Vac Rated, 50 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only 70 JDB070W JDB JDB090W JDB JDB100W JDB JDB15W JDB JDB150W JDB JDB175W JDB JDB00W JDB00 5 JDB5W JDB5 50 JDB50W JDB50 Three-Pole 70 JDB3070W JDB JDB3090W JDB JDB3100W JDB JDB315W JDB JDB3150W JDB JDB3175W JDB JDB300W JDB300 5 JDB35W JDB35 50 JDB350W JDB350 Molded Case Switches Eaton s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Two-Pole 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Only Without Line and Load Terminals Suitable for Reverse Feed Use 1 Individually packed. Molded case switches may open above 500 amperes. components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Standard Terminals Only See PageV4-T-157 for Optional Terminals 50 JD50KW JDB50KW TA50KB 1 HJD50KW HJDB50KW Three-Pole 50 JD350KW JDB350KW TA50KB 1 HJD350KW HJDB350KW Four-Pole 50 JD450KW JDB450KW TA50KB 1 HJD450KW HJDB450KW V4-T-156 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

157 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Eaton s line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C. No. 65, or Electrical Bulletin Slotted Screw T50KB Terminal Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Collar Terminal Body Material Nut Unless otherwise specified, J- Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. The bottom of the standard TA50KB terminal contains a recess that is positioned over the J-Frame circuit breaker terminal conductor. TA50KB Terminal (Standard) Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors Ordering Information J-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper-only terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required. Metric Wire Range mm Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 50 Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil TA50KB Optional Cu Pressure Terminals 50 Stainless Steel Cu kcmil T50KB Collar Slotted Screw Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-157

158 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. JD Frame Accessories Reference Two-, Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-75 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-77 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-77 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T-79 Shunt trip standard V4-T-8 Shunt trip low energy V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-89 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T-310 Plug nut V4-T-311 Control wire terminal kit V4-T-311 Multiwire connectors V4-T-31 Base mounting hardware V4-T-313 Terminal shields V4-T-314 Interphase barriers V4-T-315 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-316 Padlockable handle block V4-T-316 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-317 Cylinder lock V4-T-317 Key interlock kit V4-T-318 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-319 Electrical (solenoid) operator V4-T-31 Plug-in adapters V4-T-31 Rear connecting studs V4-T-33 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T-34 Handle mechanisms V4-T-47 Handle extension V4-T-44 IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T-36 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available V4-T-158 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

159 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type IEC (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings UL 489 Current Limiting Data 1 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. 3 Current limiting. of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC JDB, JD, 3, HJD, 3, JDC 3, 3, Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC JD, 3, HJD, 3, JDC, 3, Frame Circuit Ip (ka) I T (10 6 A S) JDC 40 V/00 ka JDC 480 V/100 ka JDC 600 V/35 ka Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-159

160 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) JD Frame of Poles Width Height Depth, (105.0) (54.0) 4.06 (104.1) (139.7) (54.0) 4.06 (104.1) JD-Frame, Three-Pole 0.34 R (8.7 R) 3.94 (100.0) 0.7 (18.) 0.50 (1.7) Diameter 3 Megger Holes if Required Front View Cutout 0.19 R (4.8) R 1.56 (39.7) C L Handle C L Breaker.75 (69.9) 3.50 (88.9) 0.78 (19.8).9 (74.) 0.88 (.) 3.33 (84.5) 1.38 (34.9) 1.75 (44.5) (54.0) Front View 4.13 (104.8) ON OFF Side View 4.06 (103.) Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) JD Frame Breaker Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole JDB 11.5 (5.1) 1.50 (5.7) JD 11.5 (5.1) 1.50 (5.7) 13.5 (6.0) 9.00 (4.1) (4.5) (4.8).00 (0.9).00 (0.9).5 (1.0) HJD 11.5 (5.1) 1.50 (5.7) 13.5 (6.0) 9.00 (4.1) (4.5) (4.8).00 (0.9).00 (0.9).5 (1.0) JDC 1.5 (5.6) (6.1) 14.5 (6.5) (4.5) (5.0) (5.).00 (0.9).00 (0.9).5 (1.0) V4-T-160 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

161 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Typical K-Frame Circuit Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-16 V4-T-164 V4-T-180 V4-T-181 V4-T-184 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 K-Frame ( Amperes) Product Description All Eaton K-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated K-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers K-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-161

162 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. K-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frames 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type DK KD KDB HKD KDC Trip Unit Type KT = Thermal-magnetic of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole KD F KT F 1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F or HKD3400F. Ampere rating available with electronic trip unit only. Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating Suffix C = Copper terminals E = 50% protected neutral pole (four-pole electronic trip unit circuit breaker only) F = Frame only (400 A only) K = High-magnetic molded-case switch V = 50 calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only) W = Without terminals X = Load terminals only Y = Line side terminals only Blank = Standard load and line side terminals Suffix T = Trip unit only V4-T-16 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

163 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 K-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology Circuit Breakers Performance at 480 Vac KDB = 35 kaic HKDB = 65 kaic CKDB = 35 kaic 100% rated CHKDB = 65 kaic 100% rated 310+ Electronic Trip Units 3 Trip Unit Type KES K-Frame with OPTIM Trip Unit Technology OPTIM Circuit Breakers of Poles 3 = Three-pole of Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type KD HKD KDC CKD CHKD Ampere Rating KDB F T36 ZG W Frame Designation F Trip Unit T33 = 310+ Electronic LS T3 = 310+ Electronic LSI T35 = 310+ Electronic LSG T36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG T38 = 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode T39 = 310+ Electronic ALSIG with Maintenance Mode Ampere Rating of Poles 3 = Three-pole KES LSIG ZG 1 Cannot combine BX suffixes with BX suffixes. Not available in four-pole configurations. 3 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F, HKD3400F, etc. Feature Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking Trip Unit LS = 310+ Electronic LS LSI = 310+ Electronic LSI LSG= 310+ Electronic LSG LSIG= 310+ Electronic LSIG ALSI= 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode ALSIG= 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating KD 3 15 T5 7 W Trip Model T5 = Model 550 T10 = Model 1050 Trip Type = LSI 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA Terminals W = No terminals L = Line and load Feature Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking Suffix W = Without terminals Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-163

164 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Two-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5 10 times continuous ampere rating. Individually packed. 3 TA400K, 3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only 1 For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T-179 for Optional Terminals 100 KD100 HKD100 KDC100 KT100T TA300K 15 KD15 HKD15 KDC15 KT15T TA300K 150 KD150 HKD150 KDC150 KT150T TA300K 175 KD175 HKD175 KDC175 KT175T TA300K 00 KD00 HKD00 KDC00 KT00T TA300K 5 KD5 HKD5 KDC5 KT5T TA300K 50 KD50 HKD50 KDC50 KT50T TA350K 300 KD300 HKD300 KDC300 KT300T TA350K 350 KD350 HKD350 KDC350 KT350T TA350K 400 KD400 HKD400 KDC400 KT400T TA400K 3 Three-Pole 100 KD3100 HKD3100 KDC3100 KT3100T TA300K 15 KD315 HKD315 KDC315 KT315T TA300K 150 KD3150 HKD3150 KDC3150 KT3150T TA300K 175 KD3175 HKD3175 KDC3175 KT3175T TA300K 00 KD300 HKD300 KDC300 KT300T TA300K 5 KD35 HKD35 KDC35 KT35T TA300K 50 KD350 HKD350 KDC350 KT350T TA350K 300 KD3300 HKD3300 KDC3300 KT3300T TA350K 350 KD3350 HKD3350 KDC3350 KT3350T TA350K 400 KD3400 HKD3400 KDC3400 KT3400T 3TA400K 3 Four-Pole 100 KD4100 HKD4100 KDC4100 KT3100T TA300K 15 KD415 HKD415 KDC415 KT315T TA300K 175 KD4175 HKD4175 KDC4175 KT3175T TA300K 00 KD400 HKD400 KDC400 KT300T TA300K 5 KD45 HKD45 KDC45 KT35T TA300K 50 KD450 HKD450 KDC450 KT350T TA350K 300 KD4300 HKD4300 KDC4300 KT3300T TA350K 350 KD4350 HKD4350 KDC4350 KT3350T TA350K 400 KD4400 HKD4400 KDC4400 KT3400T 4TA400K 3 V4-T-164 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

165 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac Two-Pole Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-18. Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Three-Pole Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Four-Pole 45 High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac KD400F HKD400F KDC400F Three-Pole KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F Four-Pole KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F Max. Cont. Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Standard Options LS LSI LSG LSIG Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection 1 For AC use only. Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units. 4 Trip unit includes protected neutral pole. Use corresponding three-pole trip unit if protected neutral pole is not required. 5 Fully rated neutral pole protection is standard. For 50% rated protection on neutral pole, add Suffix E to four-pole trip unit catalog number. Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 15 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES315LS KES315LSI KES315LSG KES315LSIG LGFCT15 See Page 50 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES350LS KES350LSI KES350LSG KES350LSIG LGFCT50 V4-T KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG LGFCT400 Max. Cont. Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Standard Options LS LSI LSG LSIG Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 15 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES415LS KES415LSI See Page 50 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES450LS KES450LSI V4-T KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4400LS KES4400LSI Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-165

166 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type KDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-18. Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Type HKDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T % Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 75 C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. 100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers Three-Pole See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-18. of Poles 1 For AC use only. Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units. Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1 Standard LS Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Optional LSI LSG LSIG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 15 3 KDB315FT33W KDB315FT3W KDB315FT35W KDB315FT36W LGFCT15 See Page 50 3 KDB350FT33W KDB350FT3W KDB350FT35W KDB350FT36W LGFCT50 V4-T KDB3400FT33W KDB3400FT3W KDB3400FT35W KDB3400FT36W LGFCT400 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C of Poles Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1 Standard LS Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Optional LSI LSG LSIG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 15 3 HKDB315FT33W HKDB315FT3W HKDB315FT35W HKDB315FT36W LGFCT15 See Page 50 3 HKDB350FT33W HKDB350FT3W HKDB350FT35W HKDB350FT36W LGFCT50 V4-T HKDB3400FT33W HKDB3400FT3W HKDB3400FT35W HKDB3400FT36W LGFCT400 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 35 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 65 kaic at 480 Vac Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only Standard Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Options Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 15 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES315LS KES315LSI KES315LSG KES315LSIG LGFCT15 See Page 50 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES350LS KES350LSI KES350LSG KES350LSIG LGFCT50 V4-T CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG LGFCT400 V4-T-166 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

167 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for reverse feed application. Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Two-Pole 40 Vac Rated, 50 Vdc 600 Vac Rated, 50 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals With Line Terminals Only With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only Without Line and Load Terminals With Standard Line and Load Terminals 100 KDB100W KDB KDB15W KDB KDB150W KDB KDB175W KDB KDB00W KDB00 5 KDB5W KDB5 50 DK50W DK50Y DK50 KDB50W KDB DK300W DK300Y DK300 KDB300W KDB DK350W DK350Y DK350 KDB350W KDB DK400W DK400Y DK400 KDB400W KDB400 Three-Pole 100 KDB3100W KDB KDB315W KDB KDB3150W KDB KDB3175W KDB KDB300W KDB300 5 KDB35W KDB35 50 DK350W DK350Y DK350 KDB350W KDB DK3300W DK3300Y DK3300 KDB3300W KDB DK3350W DK3350Y DK3350 KDB3350W KDB DK3400W DK3400Y DK3400 KDB3400W KDB3400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-167

168 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Molded Case Switches Eaton s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Two-Pole Note Molded case switches may open above 4000 amperes. components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals. Suitable for Reverse Feed Use 400 DK400K KD400K KDB400K HKD400K HKDB400K Three-Pole 400 DK3400K KD3400K KDB3400K HKD3400K HKDB3400K Four-Pole 400 KD4400K KDB4400K HKD4400K HKDB4400K V4-T-168 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

169 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) ➀ S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 KD315T5W KD315T56W KD315T57W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 KD350T5W KD350T56W KD350T57W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A KD3400T5W KD3400T56W KD3400T57W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-169

170 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 HKD315T5W HKD315T56W HKD315T57W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 HKD350T5W HKD350T56W HKD350T57W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A HKD3400T5W HKD3400T56W HKD3400T57W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 V4-T-170 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

171 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 15 KDC315T5W KDC315T56W KDC315T57W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 KDC350T5W KDC350T56W KDC350T57W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A KDC3400T5W KDC3400T56W KDC3400T57W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-171

172 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 KD315T106W KD315T107W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 KD350T106W KD350T107W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A KD3400T106W KD3400T107W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 V4-T-17 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

173 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 HKD315T106W HKD315T107W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 HKD350T106W HKD350T107W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A HKD3400T106W HKD3400T107W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-173

174 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 15 KDC315T106W KDC315T107W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 KDC350T106W KDC350T107W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A KDC3400T106W KDC3400T107W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 V4-T-174 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

175 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number (refer to Page V4-T-93). Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CKD315T5W CKD315T56W CKD315T57W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 CKD350T5W CKD350T56W CKD350T57W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A CKD3400T5W CKD3400T56W CKD3400T57W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-175

176 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CHKD315T5W CHKD315T56W CHKD315T57W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 CHKD350T5W CHKD350T56W CHKD350T57W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A CHKD3400T5W CHKD3400T56W CHKD3400T57W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 V4-T-176 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

177 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CKD315T106W CKD315T107W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 CKD350T106W CKD350T107W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A CKD3400T106W CKD3400T107W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-177

178 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CHKD315T106W CHKD315T107W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 CHKD350T106W CHKD350T107W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A CHKD3400T106W CHKD3400T107W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 V4-T-178 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

179 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Guide Line and Load Terminals Eaton s line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C. No. 65, or Electrical Bulletin Unless otherwise specified, K-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. 1 Individually packed. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 3 Two-pole kit. 4 Three-pole kit. 5 Four-pole kit. 6 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers. Ordering Information K-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/ AI terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required. TA401K TA400K, T400K TA350K, T350K TA300K, T300K T400KCW, TA400KCW, TA401KCW TA40K, T40K Line and Load Terminals Terminals with Maximum Terminal AWG Wire Terminal Control Wire Termination Breaker Body Wire Range/No. Metric Wire Amperes Material Type Conductors Range mm Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 5 Aluminum Cu/AI (1) TA300K Aluminum Cu/AI (1) TA350K Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0 50 () TA400K 3 TA400KCW Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0 50 () TA400K 4 3TA400KCW Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0 50 () TA400K 56 4TA400KCW 56 Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 5 Copper Cu (1) T300K Copper Cu (1) T350K Copper Cu 3/0 50 () T400K 3 T400KCW Aluminum Cu/AI /0 50 () or /0 500 (1) Tab is 1/4 x.03 3T400K 4 3T400KCW 4 4T400K 5 4T400KCW TA401K 3 TA401KCW TA401K 4 3TA401KCW TA401K 56 4TA401KCW Aluminum Cu/AI (1) TA40K 3 3TA40K 4 4TA40K Copper Cu (1) T40K 3 3T40K 4 4T40K 56 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-179

180 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. KD Frame Accessories Reference Two-Pole 1 Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T-79 Shunt trip standard V4-T-8 Shunt trip low energy V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-90 PowerNet or zone interlock kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T-93 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T-310 Keeper nut V4-T-310 Control wire terminal kit V4-T-311 Terminal adapter V4-T-311 Multiwire connectors V4-T-31 Rear fed terminals V4-T-31 Base mounting hardware V4-T-313 Terminal shields V4-T-315 Interphase barriers V4-T-315 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-316 Padlockable handle block V4-T-316 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-317 Cylinder lock V4-T-317 Key Interlock kit V4-T-318 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-319 Walking beam interlock requires two breakers V4-T-319 Electrical (solenoid) operator V4-T-30 Plug-in adapters V4-T-31 Rear connecting studs V4-T-33 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T-34 Handle mechanisms V4-T-47 Handle extension V4-T-44 IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T-36 Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T-36 OPTIM System Components Three Poles Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T-37 Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T-37 Auxiliary power module V4-T-37 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available 1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on KES or OPTIM trip units. Standard internal accessories cannot be mounted in right pole on any K-Frame OPTIM trip unites. Special OPTIM ground fault and zone interlock accessories are available for field installation in the right pole of K-Frame 550 OPTIM trip units. Factory installed a/b and bell/aux are available for factory installation. K-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 1050 trip units include aux-bell alarm in the right pole. V4-T-180 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

181 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Description Electronic portable test kit MTST30V Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01 External neutral sensor, 400 A LGFCT400 3 External neutral sensor, 50 A LGFCT50 3 External neutral sensor, 15 A LGFCT15 3 Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 4 Technical Data and Specifications NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Type of Poles DK, KDB, 3, KD, 3, HKD, HKDB, 3, KDC 7, 3, CKD CHKD IEC (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Type of Poles DK, KDB, 3, KD, 3, HKD, HKDB, 3, KDC, 3, UL 489 Current Limiting Data Frame Circuit Ip (ka) I T (10 6 A S) KDC 40 V/00 ka KDC 480 V/100 ka KDC 600 V/50 ka Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. MTST30V applies to Vac. 3 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers. 4 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated. 5 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 6 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. 7 Current limiting. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-181

182 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 310+ Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ Breaker Type Frame K Frames available 15 A, 50 A, 400 A Continuous current range (A) A Ground fault pickup (A) A Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kaic) 35, 65, % rated Yes Protection Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG Interchangeable trip unit Yes High load alarm, trip (suffix B0) 1 Yes Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B1) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B) LSG, LSIG, ALSIG Zone selective interlock (suffix ZG) 1 LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW) Thru-cover accessories No 310+ Adjustability Specifications K-Frame 310+ Settings 15A 50 A 400 A I r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) (All 310+) Ir \ In A (=Ir) B (=Ir) C (=Ir) D (=Ir) E (=Ir) F (=Ir) G (=Ir) H (=Ir=In) t r = long delay time (seconds) (All 310+) I sd (x I r) = short delay pickup (amperes) Position 1 x x (All 310+) Position 3 3x 3x Position 3 4 4x 4x Position 4 5 5x 5x Position 5 6 6x 6x Position 6 7 7x 7x Position 7 8 8x 8x Position x 10x Position 9 1 1x 1x t sd = short delay time I t (milliseconds) Fixed (LS and LSG) t sd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) Position 10 Position I g (x I n) = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position Position Position Position Position t g = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position 10 Position Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting Maintenance Mode pickup (.5 x I n ) (amperes) (310+ with Maintenance Mode ALSI and ALSIG) Fixed Bx suffixes cannot be combined with Bx suffixes. Not available for KD. Independently adjustable I i setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units. V4-T-18 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

183 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 rms sensing Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame K K Ampere range A A Interrupting rating at 480 volts 35, 65, 100 (ka) 35, 65, 100 (ka) Protection Ordering options LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG Fixed rated plug (I n ) Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable rating plug (I n ) No No Long delay pickup x (I n ) x (I n ) Long delay time I t 4 seconds 4 seconds Long delay time I 4 t 1 5 seconds 1 5 seconds Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes High load alarm x I r x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short delay pickup % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short delay time I t ms ms Short delay time flat ms ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator Yes Yes Instantaneous override Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground fault alarm 0 100% x (I s ) 0 100% x (I s ) Ground fault pickup 0 100% x (I s ) 0 100% x (I s ) Ground fault delay I t ms ms Ground fault delay flat ms ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes Remote signal contact ground alarm Yes 1 Yes Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included System Monitoring Digital display Yes Yes Current Yes Yes Power and energy No Yes Power quality harmonics No Yes Power factor No Yes Communications PowerNet Yes 3 Yes Testing Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor Rating I n = Rating Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting 1 Zone interlock kit. By OPTIMizer/BIM. 3 Eaton s PowerNet kit. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-183

184 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) KD Frame of Poles Width Height Depth, (149.7) (57.3) 4.10 (104.1) 4 7. (183.4) (57.3) 4.10 (104.1) KD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole 0.19 R (4.8 R) 0.34 R (8.7 R) Front Cover Cutout C L Handle 1.31 (33.3).63 (66.7) (60.7) (11.5) 3.75 (95.3) 0.83 (1.0) 1.64 (41.7) 1.5 (31.8) Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg) KD Frame Front View 5.49 (139.4) Note 1 Weights shown are for thermal-magnetic trip units. Three-pole electronic trip units weigh.5 lbs (1.1 kg). ON OFF (57.) Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit 1 Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole DK 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.) KDB 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.) KD 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7) HKD, HKDB 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7) KDC 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7) Side View 4.31 (109.6) V4-T-184 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

185 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Typical L-Frame Circuit Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-186 V4-T-188 V4-T-04 V4-T-06 V4-T-10 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 L-Frame ( Amperes) Product Description All Eaton L-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated L-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers L-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use Standards and Certifications CE marked Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-185

186 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. LD-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1 Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type LDB LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 Trip Unit Type LT = Thermal-magnetic of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole LD F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating LT T Trip Unit Rating/Plug Ampere Rating Note 1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc. Suffix C = Copper terminals F = Frame only (600 A only) K = High magnetic molded case switch V = 50 C (thermal-magnetic trip units only) W = Without terminals X = Load side terminals only Y = Line side terminals only Suffix T = Trip unit thermal-magnetic fixed thermal adjustable magnetic V = 50 C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only) V4-T-186 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

187 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 LD-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology 310+ Circuit Breakers Performance at 480 Vac LDB = 35 kaic HLDB = 65 kaic LDCB = 100 kaic CLDB = 35 kaic, 100% rated CHLDB = 65 kaic, 100% rated CLDCB = 100 kaic, 100% rated 310+ Electronic Trip Units Trip Unit Type LES of Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole of Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole Amperes 600 Designation F Amperes 600 LD-Frame with OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Technology OPTIM Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC of Poles 3 = Three-pole LDB F T36 BZG W 1 Not available in four-pole configurations. Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc. Trip Unit T33 = 310+ Electronic LS T3 = 310+ Electronic LSI T35 = 310+ Electronic LSG 1 T36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG 1 T38 = 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode T39 = 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1 LES LSIG BZG Trip Unit LS = 310+ Electronic LS LSI = 310+ Electronic LSI LSG = 310+ Electronic LSG 1 LSIG = 310+ Electronic LSIG 1 ALSI = 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode ALSIG = 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1 LD 3 15 T5 7 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating 15 (Available on Model 1050 only) 50 (Available on Model 1050 only) Trip Type = LSI (550 only) 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA Trip Model T5 = Model 550 T10 = Model 1050 Terminals W = No terminals Features Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip 1 B = Ground fault alarm, no trip 1 ZG = Zone selective interlocking Features Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip 1 B = Ground fault alarm, no trip 1 ZG = Zone selective interlocking Suffix W = Without terminals Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-187

188 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 1 Two-Pole Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Frame Only 1 Magnetic trip range 5 10 times continuous ampere rating. Individually packed. 3 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 4 Neutral is in right pole. Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Factory Assembled Circuit Circuit Consisting of Frame, Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Trip Unit and Terminals Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T-03 for Optional Terminals 300 LD300 HLD300 LDC300 LT300T TA60LD 350 LD350 HLD350 LDC350 LT350T TA60LD 400 LD400 HLD400 LDC400 LT400T TA60LD 450 LD450 HLD450 LDC450 LT450T TA60LD 500 LD500 HLD500 LDC500 LT500T TA60LD 600 LD600 HLD600 LDC600 LT600T TA603LDK 3 Three-Pole 300 LD3300 HLD3300 LDC3300 LT3300T TA60LD 350 LD3350 HLD3350 LDC3350 LT3350T TA60LD 400 LD3400 HLD3400 LDC3400 LT3400T TA60LD 450 LD3450 HLD3450 LDC3450 LT3450T TA60LD 500 LD3500 HLD3500 LDC3500 LT3500T TA60LD 600 LD3600 HLD3600 LDC3600 LT3600T 3TA603LDK 3 Four-Pole LD4300 HLD4300 LDC4300 LT4300T TA60LD 350 LD4350 HLD4350 LDC4350 LT4350T TA60LD 400 LD4400 HLD4400 LDC4400 LT4400T TA60LD 450 LD4450 HLD4450 LDC4450 LT4450T TA60LD 500 LD4500 HLD4500 LDC4500 LT4500T TA60LD 600 LD4600 HLD4600 LDC4600 LT4600T 4TA603LDK 3 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac Two-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac LD600F HLD600F LDC600F Three-Pole LD3600F HLD3600F LDC3600F Four-Pole LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F V4-T-188 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

189 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-18. Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Three-Pole Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Electronic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-18. Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Less Terminals Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 75 C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T % Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with 310+ Interchangeable Trip Units 1 For AC use only. Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units. 4 Neutral is in right pole. Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Standard LS Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Optional LSI LSG LSIG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 600 LD3600F HLD3600F LDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG LGFCT600 See Page V4-T-180 Four-Pole LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F LES4600LS LES4600LSI See Page V4-T-180 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C of Poles Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1 Standard LS Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Optional LSI LSG LSIG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information LDB3600FT33W LDB3600FT3W LDB3600FT35W LDB3600FT36W LGFCT600 See Page HLDB3600FT33W HLDB3600FT3W HLDB3600FT35W HLDB3600FT36W V4-T LDCB3600FT33W LDCB3600FT3W LDCB3600FT35W LDCB3600FT36W Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Three-Pole Circuit Breaker Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only Standard LS Adjustable Short Independently Time Pickup with Adjustable Short I t Short Delay Time Pickup and Ramp Delay Optional LSI LSG LSIG Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 600 CLD3600F CHLD3600F CLDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG LGFCT600 See Page V4-T-180 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-189

190 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type LDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating Two-Pole 600 Vac Rated, 50 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only 300 LDB300W LDB LDB350W LDB LDB400W LDB LDB450W LDB LDB500W LDB LDB600W LDB600 Three-Pole 300 LDB3300W LDB LDB3350W LDB LDB3400W LDB LDB3450W LDB LDB3500W LDB LDB3600W LDB3600 Molded Case Switches Eaton s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Two-Pole 1 Factory sealed suitable for reverse feed application. Molded case switch will trip above 6000 amperes. components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Standard Terminals Only Circuit Breaker Only without Line and Load See Page V4-T-03 for Terminals Optional Terminals 600 LD600WK TA603LDK 600 LDB600WK 1 TA603LDK 600 HLD600WK TA603LDK Three-Pole 600 LD3600WK 3TA603LDK 600 LDB3600WK 1 3TA603LDK 600 HLD3600WK 3TA603LDK Four-Pole 600 LD4600WK 4TA603LDK 600 LDB4600WK 1 4TA603LDK 600 HLD4600WK 4TA603LDK V4-T-190 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

191 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals. Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 LD315T5W LD315T56W LD315T57W ORPL15A070 ORPL15A090 ORPL15A100 ORPL15A110 ORPL15A15 50 LD350T5W LD350T56W LD350T57W ORPL05A15 ORPL05A150 ORPL05A175 ORPL05A00 ORPL05A5 ORPL05A LD3400T5W LD3400T56W LD3400T57W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A LD3600T5W LD3600T56W LD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-191

192 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 HLD315T5W HLD315T56W HLD315T57W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 HLD350T5W HLD350T56W HLD350T57W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A HLD3400T5W HLD3400T56W HLD3400T57W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A HLD3600T5W HLD3600T56W HLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 V4-T-19 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

193 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA Ampere Rating 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 15 LDC315T5W LDC315T56W LDC315T57W ORPL15A070 ORPL15A090 ORPL15A100 ORPL15A110 ORPL15A15 50 LDC350T5W LDC350T56W LDC350T57W ORPL05A15 ORPL05A150 ORPL05A175 ORPL05A00 ORPL05A5 ORPL05A LDC3400T5W LDC3400T56W LDC3400T57W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A LDC3600T5W LDC3600T56W LDC3600T57W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-193

194 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals. Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 LD315T106W LD315T107W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 LD350T106W LD350T107W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A LD3400T106W LD3400T107W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A LD3600T106W LD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. V4-T-194 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

195 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 HLD315T106W HLD315T107W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 HLD350T106W HLD350T107W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A HLD3400T106W HLD3400T107W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A HLD3600T106W HLD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-195

196 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 15 LDC315T106W LDC315T107W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 LDC350T106W LDC350T107W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A LDC3400T106W LDC3400T107W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A LDC3600T106W LDC3600T107W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 V4-T-196 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

197 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals. 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CLD315T5W CLD315T56W CLD315T57W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 CLD350T5W CLD350T56W CLD350T57W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A CLD3400T5W CLD3400T56W CLD3400T57W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A CLD3600T5W CLD3600T56W CLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-197

198 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CHLD315T5W CHLD315T56W CHLD315T57W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 15 ORPL15A15 50 CHLD350T5W CHLD350T56W CHLD350T57W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A CHLD3400T5W CHLD3400T56W CHLD3400T57W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A CHLD3600T5W CHLD3600T56W CHLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 V4-T-198 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

199 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CLDC315T5W CLDC315T56W CLDC315T57W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 CLDC350T5W CLDC350T56W CLDC350T57W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A CLDC3400T5W CLDC3400T56W CLDC3400T57W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A CLDC3600T5W CLDC3600T56W CLDC3600T57W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-199

200 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CLD315T106W CLD315T107W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 CLD350T106W CLD350T107W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A CLD3400T106W CLD3400T107W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A CLD3600T106W CLD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 V4-T-00 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

201 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C OPTIM LSIG LSIA Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CHLD315T106W CHLD315T107W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 CHLD350T106W CHLD350T107W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A CHLD3400T106W CHLD3400T107W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A CHLD3600T106W CHLD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-01

202 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug Ampere Rating Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CLDC315T106W CLDC315T107W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 CLDC350T106W CLDC350T107W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A CLDC3400T106W CLDC3400T107W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A CLDC3600T106W CLDC3600T107W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 V4-T-0 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

203 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Eaton s line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C. No. 65M. Unless otherwise specified, Terminals TA401LD or TA603LD Terminal (Step-Type Terminal Requires Terminal Cover and Warning Label. See Inset.) Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes L-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. The wire connecting terminal is secured with two panhead, slotted screws and lockwashers that can be checked for the correct torque loading or retightened from the front of the circuit 1 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Individually packed. Terminal Body Material Wire Type Pan-Head Screws and Lockwashers AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors TA450LD or TA60LD or T60LD Terminal Circuit Breaker Line Terminal Cover Metric Wire Range mm breaker before installation of the conductors. (Applies to all styles.) The circuit breaker line/load terminal conductors are positioned in the conducting holes in the wire connecting terminal and are secured with recessed socket screws that are tightened to the correct torque loading from the front of the circuit breaker. Pan-Head Screws and Lockwashers (Installed before Cable Clamping Screws) Terminal Ordering Information L-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper terminals are required, order by catalog. Specify if factory installation is required. Terminal Cover Warning Label Terminals with Control Wire Termination Poles Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0 600 (1) Two-pole kit 1 TA401LDK 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0 600 (1) Three-pole kit 1 3TA401LDK 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0 600 (1) Four-pole kit 1 4TA401LDK 450 Aluminum Cu/AI 4 4/0 () 5 95 TA450LD 500 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0 350 () TA60LD TA60LDCW 600 Aluminum Cu/AI () Two-pole kit 1 TA603LDK TA603LDKCW 600 Aluminum Cu/AI () Three-pole kit 1 3TA603LDK 3TA603LDKCW 600 Aluminum Cu/AI () Four-pole kit 1 4TA603LDK 4TA603LDKCW Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 600 Copper Cu () T60LD T60LDCW Retainer Screws Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-03

204 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. LD Frame Accessories Reference Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 3 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T-80 Auxiliary switch (A, B) and alarm switch combination V4-T-80 Shunt trip standard 4 V4-T-8 Shunt trip low energy 4 V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism 4 V4-T-91 Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T-93 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T-310 Control wire terminal kit V4-T-311 Base mounting hardware V4-T-313 Terminal shields V4-T-315 Interphase barriers V4-T-315 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-316 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-317 Key interlock kit V4-T-318 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-319 Walking beam interlock requires two breakers V4-T-319 Electrical (motor) operator V4-T-30 Plug-in adapters V4-T-3 Rear connecting studs V4-T-33 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T-34 Handle mechanisms V4-T-47 Handle extension V4-T-44 Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T-36 Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available 1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations. 3 OPTIM model 1050 is factory sealed and does not have the right pole space available for accessories. 4 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES or OPTIM trip units. Standard non-tripping internal accessories can be mounted in the left or right poles of LES and 550 OPTIM trip units. V4-T-04 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

205 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 LD Frame Accessories, continued Description Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Reference Page 1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations. 3 MTST30V applies to Vac. 4 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers. 5 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated. Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Four-Pole Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral OPTIM System Components Three Poles Ground fault alarm unit V4-T-36 Potential transformer module V4-T-36 Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T-37 Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T-37 Auxiliary power module V4-T-37 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application Description Electronic portable test kit MTST30V 3 Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01 External neutral sensor LGFCT600 4 Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 5 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-05

206 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Circuit Breaker Type IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 UL 489 Current Limiting Data 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum. 3 Two-pole circuit breaker or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating thermal-magnetic trip unit only % rated breakers. 5 Current limiting. of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC LDB, LD, 3, CLD 4, 3, HLD, HLDB, 3, CHLD 4, 3, LDC, LDCB 5, 3, CLDC 45, 3, Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Circuit Breaker Type of Poles I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs LDB, LD, 3, CLD 4, 3, HLD, HLDB, 3, CHLD 4, 3, LDC, LDCB, 3, CLDC 4, 3, Frame Circuit Ip (ka) I T (10 6 A S) LDC 40 V/00 ka LDC 480 V/100 ka LDC 600 V/50 ka V4-T-06 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

207 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Specifications 310+ Adjustability Specifications Description Specification LD Frame Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ Description Specification Breaker Type 310+ settings 600 A I Frame designation LD r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) I r (All 310+) A 50 Frames available 600 A Continuous current range (A) A B 300 Ground fault pickup (A) A C 315 Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kaic) 35, 65, 100 D % rated Yes E 400 Protection F 450 Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG G 500 Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG H (= I n ) 600 (or Maintenance Mode) t r = long delay time (seconds) Interchangeable trip unit Yes (All 310+) 4 4 High load alarm (suffix B0) 1 Yes 7 7 Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B1) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG 1 1 Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW) 0 0 Thru-cover accessories No 4 4 I sd (x I r ) = short delay pickup Position 1 x (All 310+) Position 3x Position 3 4x Position 4 5x Position 5 6x Position 6 7x Position 7 8x Position 8 8x Position 9 8x t sd = short delay time I t (milliseconds) Fixed (LS and LSG) t sd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) Position 10 Position I g (x I n ) = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 10 (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position 180 Position 3 40 Position Position Position t g = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position 10 Position Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting Maintenance Mode pickup (.5 x I n ) (amperes) (310+ with Maintenance Mode ALSI and ALSIG) Fixed Bx suffixes cannot be combined with Bx suffixes. Not available for LD. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-07

208 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 rms sensing Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame L L Ampere range A A Interrupting rating at 480 volts 35, 65, 100 (ka) 35, 65, 100 (ka) Protection Ordering options LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG Fixed rated plug (I n ) Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable rating plug (I n ) No No Long delay pickup x (I n ) x (I n ) Long delay time I t 4 seconds 4 seconds Long delay time I 4 t 1 5 seconds 1 5 seconds Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes High load alarm x I r x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short delay pickup % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short delay time I t ms ms Short delay time flat ms ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator Yes Yes Instantaneous override Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground fault alarm 0 100% x (I s ) 0 100% x (I s ) Ground fault pickup 0 100% x (I s ) 0 100% x (I s ) Ground fault delay I t ms ms Ground fault delay flat ms ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor Rating I n = Rating Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting Note 1 Zone interlock kit. V4-T-08 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

209 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Digitrip OPTIM Specifications, continued Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes Remote signal contact ground alarm Yes 1 Yes Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included System Monitoring Digital display Yes Yes Current Yes Yes Power and energy No Yes Power quality harmonics No Yes Power factor No Yes Communications PowerNet Yes 3 Yes Testing Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor Rating I n = Rating Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting 1 Zone interlock kit. By OPTIMizer/BIM. 3 Eaton s PowerNet kit. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-09

210 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions and Weights Dimensions in Inches (mm) LD Frame of Poles Width Height Depth, (09.6) (73.1) 4.06 (103.1) (79.4) (73.1) 4.06 (103.1) LD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole CL Handle Front Cover Cutout 3.44 (87.3) 1.7 (43.7) 3.64 (9.5) Breaker CL 0.5 (6.4) R 7.8 (184.9) 3.8 (83.3) 1.33 (33.7).9 (58.) 1.50 (38.1) 0.19 R (4.8) R Front View 8.5 (09.6) (73.1) Side View Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg) LD Frame Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole LD, HLD, LDC 18 (8.) 0 (9.1) 5 (11.3) 14 (6.4) 15 (6.8) 0 (9.1) 3 (1.4) 4 (1.8) 5 (.3) LDB 18 (8.) 0 (9.1) 5 (11.3) 3.81 (96.8) 8.1 (08.6) V4-T-10 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

211 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Typical M-Frame Circuit Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-1 V4-T-13 V4-T-18 V4-T-19 V4-T-1 V4-T-56 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 M-Frame ( Amperes) Product Description All Eaton M-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated MDL-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers MDLB, HMDLB-Frame circuit breakers with noninterchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use Standards and Certifications CE marked Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-11

212 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. MDL Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 MDL Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology 310+ Circuit Breaker 310+ Electronic Trip Unit 1 Note Performance at 480 Vac MDLB = 50 kaic HMDLB = 65 kaic CMDLB = 50 kaic, 100% rated CHMDLB = 65 kaic, 100% rated Trip Unit Type MES Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type MDL, MDLB HMDL, HMDLB Trip Unit Type MT of Poles 3 = Three-pole of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole Amperes 800 Designation F of Poles 3 = Three-pole Amperes 800 MDL F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., MDL3800F, HMDL3800F, etc MT T Trip Unit Rating/ Plug Ampere Rating Suffix F = Frame only (800 A only) K = High magnetic molded case switch V = 50 C (thermal-magnetic trip units only) W = Without terminals X = Load side terminals only Y = Line side terminals only T V MDLB F T36 B1 W Trip Unit T33 = 310+ Electronic LS T3 = 310+ Electronic LSI T35 = 310+ Electronic LSG T36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG T38 = 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode T39 = 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode MES ALSIG B1 Trip Unit LS = 310+ Electronic LS LSI = 310+ Electronic LSI LSG = 310+ Electronic LSG LSIG = 310+ Electronic LSIG ALSI = 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode ALSIG = 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode Suffix = Thermal-magnetic = 50 C (thermal-magnetic trip units only) Terminals W = No terminals Features Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking Features Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking V4-T-1 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

213 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Product Selection Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Two-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Three-Pole Note 1 Two terminals are required per pole. Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Frame Only High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Frame Only Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames Magnetic Trip Range is 5 10 Up Through 600 A; 4 8 on 700 and 800 A x Continuous Ampere Rating Standard Terminals Only 1 See Page V4-T-17 for Optional Terminals 300 MDL300 MDL800F HMDL300 HMDL800F MT300T TA700MA1 350 MDL350 HMDL350 MT350T TA700MA1 400 MDL400 HMDL400 MT400T TA700MA1 450 MDL450 HMDL450 MT450T TA700MA1 500 MDL500 HMDL500 MT500T TA700MA1 600 MDL600 HMDL600 MT600T TA700MA1 700 MDL700 HMDL700 MT700T TA700MA1 800 MDL800 HMDL800 MT800T TA800MA Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Frame Only High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Frame Only Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames Magnetic Trip Range is 5 10 Up Through 600 A; 4 8 on 700 and 800 A x Continuous Ampere Rating Standard Terminals Only 1 See Page V4-T-17 for Optional Terminals 300 MDL3300 MDL3800F HMDL3300 HMDL3800F MT3300T TA700MA1 350 MDL3350 HMDL3350 MT3400T TA700MA1 400 MDL3400 HMDL3400 MT3400T TA700MA1 450 MDL3450 HMDL3450 MT3450T TA700MA1 500 MDL3500 HMDL3500 MT3500T TA700MA1 600 MDL3600 HMDL3600 MT3600T TA700MA1 700 MDL3700 HMDL3700 MT3700T TA700MA1 800 MDL3800 HMDL3800 MT3800T TA800MA Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-13

214 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Two-Pole 1 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Three-Pole 1 1 Factory sealed for reverse feed application. Two terminals are required per pole. Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T-17 for Optional Terminals 300 MDLB300 HMDLB300 TA700MA1 350 MDLB350 HMDLB350 TA700MA1 400 MDLB400 HMDLB400 TA700MA1 450 MDLB450 HMDLB450 TA700MA1 500 MDLB500 HMDLB500 TA700MA1 600 MDLB600 HMDLB600 TA700MA1 700 MDLB700 HMDLB700 TA700MA1 800 MDLB800 HMDLB800 TA800MA Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T-17 for Optional Terminals 300 MDLB3300 HMDLB3300 TA700MA1 350 MDLB3350 HMDLB3350 TA700MA1 400 MDLB3400 HMDLB3400 TA700MA1 450 MDLB3450 HMDLB3450 TA700MA1 500 MDLB3500 HMDLB3500 TA700MA1 600 MDLB3600 HMDLB3600 TA700MA1 700 MDLB3700 HMDLB3700 TA700MA1 800 MDLB3800 HMDLB3800 TA800MA V4-T-14 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

215 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as Individual Components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-0. Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Three-Pole Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Standard LS Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Types MDLB and HMDLB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units 4 100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 75 C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T % Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Three-Pole 1 For AC use only. Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units or breakers. 4 Factory sealed, suitable for reverse feed application. CMDLB and CHMDLB are also available. Optional LSI LSG LSIG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 800 MDL3800F HMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG LGFCT600 See Page V4-T-18 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Factory-Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals LS LSI LSG LSIG Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac 800 MDLB3800FT33W MDLB3800FT3W MDLB3800FT35W MDLB3800FT36W LGFCT600 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 800 HMDLB3800FT33W HMDLB3800FT3W HMDLB3800FT35W HMDLB3800FT36W LGFCT600 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Standard LS Independently Adjustable Short Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Time Pickup and Short Delay Ramp Delay Options LSI LSG LSIG Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 800 CMDL3800F CHMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG LGFCT600 See Page V4-T-18 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-15

216 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Molded Case Switches Eaton s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Two-Pole 1 MDLB and HMDLB are suitable for reverse feed applications. Molded case switch may trip above 6000 amperes. components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Circuit Breaker Only without Line and Load Terminals 800 MDL800WK MDLB800WK 1 HMDL800WK Three-Pole 800 MDL3800WK MDLB3800WK 1 HMDL3800WK V4-T-16 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

217 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals M-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/ AI terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required. TA700MA1 TA800MA TA801MA Line and Load Terminals Terminals with Control Maximum Terminal AWG Wire Terminal Wire Termination Breaker Body Wire Range/No. Amperes Material Type Conductors Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 700 Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil () TA700MA1 TA700MA1CWT 800 std. Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0 400 kcmil (3) TA800MA TA800MACWT 800 Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil () TA801MA TA801MACWT Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 600 Copper Cu /0 500 kcmil () T600MA1 800 Copper Cu 3/0 300 kcmil (3) T800MA1 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-17

218 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. MD Frame Accessories Reference Two-Pole 1 Three-Pole Description Page Left Right Left Center Right Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T-80 Auxiliary switch (A, B) and alarm switch combination V4-T-80 Shunt trip standard V4-T-83 Shunt trip low energy V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-91 External Accessories Rear fed terminals V4-T-31 Base mounting hardware V4-T-313 Terminal shields V4-T-315 Interphase barriers V4-T-315 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-316 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-317 Key interlock kit V4-T-318 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-319 Walking beam interlock requires two breakers V4-T-319 Electrical (motor) operator V4-T-30 Plug-in adapters V4-T-3 Rear connecting studs V4-T-33 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T-34 Handle mechanisms V4-T-47 Handle extension V4-T-44 Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T-36 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available 1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on MES trip units. V4-T-18 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

219 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Description Electronic portable test kit MTST30V 1 Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01 External neutral sensor LGFCT600 Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 3 Technical Data and Specifications UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 4 Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 56 Type of Poles MDL, MDLB, CMDL, HMDL, HMDLB, CHMDL, IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity Ratings 4 Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity rms (ka Symmetrical Amperes) I CU I CS Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC MDL, MDLB, 3 65/65 50/50 0/10 0/10 CMDL, 3 65/65 50/50 0/10 HMDL, HMDLB, 3 100/100 70/50 5/13 0/10 CHMDL, 3 100/100 70/50 5/13 1 MTST30V applies to Vac. Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers. 3 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated. 4 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 5 Two-pole or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated. 6 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds at ka. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-19

220 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 310+ Specifications 310+ Adjustability Specifications Description Specification MDL Frame Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ Description Specification Breaker Type 310+ settings 800 A I Frame designation MDL r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) I r (All 310+) A 30 Frames available 800 A Continuous current range (A) A B 400 Ground fault pickup (A) A C 450 Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kaic) 50, 65 D % rated Yes E 600 Protection F 630 Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG G 700 Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG H (= I n ) 800 (or Maintenance Mode) t r = long delay time (seconds) Interchangeable trip unit Yes (All 310+) 4 4 High load alarm (suffix B0) 1 Yes 7 7 Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B1) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG 1 1 Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW) 0 0 Thru-cover accessories No 4 4 I sd (x I r ) = short delay pickup Position 1 x (All 310+) Position 3x Position 3 4x Position 4 5x Position 5 6x Position 6 7x Position 7 8x Position 8 8x Position 9 8x t sd = short delay time I t (milliseconds) Fixed (LS and LSG) t sd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) Position 10 Position I g (x I n ) = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position (310+ w/ ground fault) Position 40 Position 3 30 Position Position Position t g = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position 10 Position Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting Maintenance Mode pickup (.5 x I n ) (amperes) (310+ with Maintenance Mode ALSI and ALSIG) Fixed Bx suffixes cannot be combined with Bx suffixes. Not available for MDL. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units. V4-T-0 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

221 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Dimensions and Weights Dimensions in Inches (mm) MD Frame of Poles Width Height Depth, (09.6) (406.4) 4.06 (103.1) MDL-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole R 0.19 (4.8) 1.7 (43.7) 1.50 (38.1) C L Handle Drilling Plan 3.44 (87.3) 3.64 (9.5) 7.8 (184.9) Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg) MD Frame Note 1 Thermal-magnetic only. C L Breaker R 0.5 (6.4) 1.33 (33.7) 3.8 (83.3) 0.97 (4.6) (406.4) Front View 8.5 (09.6) Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit 1 Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole MDL, HMDL (T/M T.U.) 6.5 (1.0) 9.0 (13.) 4.5 (11.1) 6.0 (11.8).5 (1.1) 3.0 (1.4) MDL, HMDL (Elec. T.U.) 30.0 (13.6) 6.0 (11.8) 4.0 (1.8) Side View 4.06 (103.) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-1

222 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Typical N-Frame Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T-3 V4-T-4 V4-T-3 V4-T-33 V4-T-36 V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 N-Frame ( Amperes) Product Description All Eaton N-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use All N-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated V4-T- Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

223 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame ND 3 1 T3 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type ND HND NDC NDU CND CHND CNDC of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating 800 = 800 amperes 1 = 100 amperes Trip Model T3 = Model 310 T5 = Model 550 T7 = Model 750 T10 = Model 1050 Trip Type = LSI 3 = LS 5 = LSG 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA Suffix E = 100% R.P. protected (four-pole) EH = 50% R.P. protected (four-pole) K = High magnetic molded case switch W = Without terminals X = Load only terminals Y = Line only terminals Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-3

224 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac 800 ND3800T5W ND3800T56W ND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ND31T5W ND31T56W ND31T57W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 800 HND3800T5W HND3800T56W HND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A HND31T5W HND31T56W HND31T57W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 V4-T-4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

225 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 800 NDC3800T5W NDC3800T56W NDC3800T57W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A NDC31T5W NDC31T56W NDC31T57W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-5

226 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Fixed Rating Plug LSIG LSIA Ampere Rating Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac 800 ND3800T106W ND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ND31T106W ND31T107W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 800 HND3800T106W HND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A HND31T106W HND31T107W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 800 NDC3800T106W NDC3800T107W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A NDC31T106W NDC31T107W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 V4-T-6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

227 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CND3800T5W CND3800T56W CND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A CND31T5W CND31T56W CND31T57W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CHND3800T5W CHND3800T56W CHND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A CHND31T5W CHND31T56W CHND31T57W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-7

228 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CNDC3800T5W CNDC3800T56W CNDC3800T57W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A CNDC31T5W CNDC31T56W CNDC31T57W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 V4-T-8 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

229 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Fixed Rating Plug LSIG LSIA Ampere Rating Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CND3800T106W CND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A CND31T106W CND31T107W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CHND3800T106W CHND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A CHND31T106W CHND31T107W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-9

230 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM Type ND Molded Case Switches Type ND High Instantaneous (K) 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. 4 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. 5 Neutral is in right pole. Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes. For UL listed, series tested molded case switch application data, refer to Eaton. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Fixed Rating Plug LSIG LSIA Ampere Rating Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CNDC3800T106W CNDC3800T107W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A CNDC31T106W 4 CNDC31T107W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Three-Pole Four-Pole ND3800WK ND4800WK HND3800WK HND4800WK 100 ND31WK ND41WK HND31WK HND41WK V4-T-30 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

231 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Ordering Information N-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required. TA700NB1 TA1000NB1 TA100NB1 TA101NB1 T700NB1 T1000NB1 Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes 1 Terminal rating is AL9CU. Terminal rating is AL7CU. Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 700 Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil () TA700NB Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0 400 kcmil (3) TA1000NB Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0 500 kcmil (4) TA100NB Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil (3) TA101NB1 Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 700 Copper Cu /0 500 kcmil () T700NB Copper Cu 3/0 500 kcmil (3) T1000NB1 100 Copper Cu 3/0 400 kcmil (4) T100NB3 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-31

232 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. ND Frame Accessories Reference Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 1 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T-80 Auxiliary switch (A, B) and alarm switch combination V4-T-80 Shunt trip standard V4-T-84 Shunt trip low energy V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-9 Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T-93 External Accessories Base mounting hardware V4-T-313 Interphase barriers V4-T-315 Terminal shield V4-T-315 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-316 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-317 Key interlock kit V4-T-318 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-319 Walking beam interlock requires two breakers V4-T-319 Electrical (motor) operator V4-T-31 Plug-in adapters V4-T-3 Rear connecting studs V4-T-33 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T-34 Handle mechanisms V4-T-47 Handle extension V4-T-44 Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T-37 OPTIM System Components Three Poles Ground fault alarm unit V4-T-36 Potential transformer module V4-T-36 Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T-37 Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T-37 Auxiliary power module V4-T-37 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available Note 1 OPTIM 550 and 1050 are factory sealed and do not have the right pole available for accessories. V4-T-3 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

233 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Type of Poles ND, 3, CND, 3, HND, 3, CHND, 3, NDC, 3, CNDC, 3, NDU IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Circuit Breaker Type ND of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) I cu, 3, I cs, 3, CND I cu, 3, I cs, 3, HND I cu, 3, I cs, 3, CHND I cu, 3, I cs, 3, NDC I cu, 3, I cs, 3, CNDC I cu, 3, I cs, 3, Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 100% rated breakers amperes maximum rating. 4 Successfully tested at 300 kaic, although UL recognizes maximum of 00 kaic at 40 Vac. 5 Successfully tested at 75 kaic, although UL recognizes maximum of 65 kaic at 600 Vac. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-33

234 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C N-Frame Digitrip Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 rms sensing Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame N N Ampere range A A Interrupting rating at 480 volts 50, 65, 100 (ka) 50, 65, 100 (ka) Protection Ordering options LSI, LSIG, LSI(A) LSI(A), LISG Fixed rated plug (I n ) Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable rating plug (I n ) No No Long delay pickup x (I n ) x (I n ) Long delay time I t 4 seconds 4 seconds Long delay time I 4 t 1 5 seconds 1 5 seconds Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes High load alarm No x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short delay pickup % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short delay time I t ms ms Short delay time flat ms ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator Yes Yes Instantaneous override Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground fault alarm 0 100% x (I s ) 0 100% x (I s ) Ground fault pickup 0 100% x (I s ) 0 100% x (I s ) Ground fault delay I t ms ms Ground fault delay flat ms ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes Remote signal contact ground alarm Yes 1 Yes Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor Rating I n = Rating Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting Note 1 Zone interlock kit. V4-T-34 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

235 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 N-Frame Digitrip, continued Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 System Monitoring Digital display Yes 1 Yes 1 Current Yes Yes Power and energy No Yes Power quality harmonics No Yes Power factor No Yes Communications Eaton PowerNet No Yes Testing Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet PowerNet Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor Rating I n = Rating Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting 1 By OPTIMizer/BIM. Eaton s PowerNet kit. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-35

236 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) ND Frame of Poles Width Height Depth, (09.6) (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) (8.6) (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) ND-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole 1.91 (48.4) 3.68 (93.) 1.50 (38.1) Front Cover Cutout 3.44 (87.3) 1.7 (43.6) C L Handle 3.19 (80.9) 6.38 (161.9) 0.5 R (6.4 R) C L Handle 0.19 R (4.8 R) Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) ND Frame Complete Breaker Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole ND, HND, NDC, NDU 37 (16.8) 45 (0.4) 58 (6.3) Front View (406.4) ON/I OFF/O 8.5 (09.6) Side View 5.50 (139.7) V4-T-36 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

237 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Typical R-Frame Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-38 V4-T-39 V4-T-51 V4-T-5 V4-T-55 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 R-Frame ( Amperes) Product Description Eaton R-Frame circuit breakers are available as frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug and terminals All R-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-37

238 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type RD RDC CRD CRDC 1 For complete list of available trip types, refer to Pages V4-T-39 to V4-T-48. No four-pole for CRD and CRDC. of Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Rating 16 = 1600 amperes 0 = 000 amperes 5 = 500 amperes RD 3 16 T53 W Trip Type 1 T53 = Digitrip RMS 510 LS T65 = Digitrip RMS 610 LSG T86 = Digitrip RMS 810 LSIG T96 = Digitrip RMS 910 LSIG T106 = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIG T107 = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIA Suffix W = Without terminals P = 100% protected neutral pole R = Ground fault remote (310 only) K = Molded case switch V4-T-38 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

239 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Product Selection Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) Maximum I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Ampere Rating LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Digitrip Rating Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Rating Plug 1600 RD316T51W RD316T53W RD316T5W RD316T54W RD316T55W RD316T56W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RD30T51W RD30T53W RD30T5W RD30T54W RD30T55W RD30T56W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RD35T51W RD35T53W RD35T5W RD35T54W RD35T55W RD35T56W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RDC316T51W RDC316T53W RDC316T5W RDC316T54W RDC316T55W RDC316T56W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RDC30T51W RDC30T53W RDC30T5W RDC30T54W RDC30T55W RDC30T56W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RDC35T51W RDC35T53W RDC35T5W RDC35T54W RDC35T55W RDC35T56W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-39

240 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 75 C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) Maximum I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Ampere Rating LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Note Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Digitrip Rating Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Rating Plug 1600 CRD316T51W CRD316T53W CRD316T5W CRD316T54W CRD316T55W CRD316T56W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRD30T51W CRD30T53W CRD30T5W CRD30T54W CRD30T55W CRD30T56W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRDC316T53W CRDC316T5W CRDC316T54W CRDC316T55W CRDC316T56W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRDC30T51W CRDC30T53W CRDC30T5W CRDC30T54W CRDC30T55W CRDC30T56W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 V4-T-40 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

241 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) Maximum I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Ampere Rating LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Digitrip Rating Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Rating Plug 1600 RD316T61W RD316T63W RD316T6W RD316T64W RD316T65W RD316T66W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RD30T61W RD30T63W RD30T6W RD30T64W RD30T65W RD30T66W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RD35T61W RD35T63W RD35T6W RD35T64W RD35T65W RD35T66W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RDC316T61W RDC316T63W RDC316T6W RDC316T64W RDC316T65W RDC316T66W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RDC30T61W RDC30T63W RDC30T6W RDC30T64W RDC30T65W RDC30T66W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RDC35T61W RDC35T63W RDC35T6W RDC35T64W RDC35T65W RDC35T66W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-41

242 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 75 C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) Maximum I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Ampere Rating LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Note Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Digitrip Rating Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Rating Plug 1600 CRD316T61W CRD316T63W CRD316T6W CRD316T64W CRD316T65W CRD316T66W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRD30T61W CRD30T63W CRD30T6W CRD30T64W CRD30T65W CRD30T66W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRDC316T61W CRDC316T63W CRDC316T6W CRDC316T64W CRDC316T65W CRDC316T66W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRDC30T61W CRDC30T63W CRDC30T6W CRDC30T64W CRDC30T65W CRDC30T66W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 V4-T-4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

243 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) Maximum I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Ampere Rating LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Digitrip Rating Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Rating Plug 1600 RD316T81W RD316T83W RD316T8W RD316T84W RD316T85W RD316T86W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RD30T81W RD30T83W RD30T8W RD30T84W RD30T85W RD30T86W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RD35T81W RD35T83W RD35T8W RD35T84W RD35T85W RD35T86W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RDC316T81W RDC316T83W RDC316T8W RDC316T84W RDC316T85W RDC316T86W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RDC30T81W RDC30T83W RDC30T8W RDC30T84W RDC30T85W RDC30T86W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RDC35T81W RDC35T83W RDC35T8W RDC35T84W RDC35T85W RDC35T86W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-43

244 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 75 C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) Maximum I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Ampere Rating LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Note Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Digitrip Rating Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Rating Plug 1600 CRD316T81W CRD316T83W CRD316T8W CRD316T84W CRD316T85W CRD316T86W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRD30T81W CRD30T83W CRD30T8W CRD30T84W CRD30T85W CRD30T86W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRDC316T81W CRDC316T83W CRDC316T8W CRDC316T84W CRDC316T85W CRDC316T86W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRDC30T81W CRDC30T83W CRDC30T8W CRDC30T84W CRDC30T85W CRDC30T86W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 V4-T-44 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

245 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) Maximum I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Ampere Rating LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Digitrip Rating Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Rating Plug 1600 RD316T91W RD316T93W RD316T9W RD316T94W RD316T95W RD316T96W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RD30T91W RD30T93W RD30T9W RD30T94W RD30T95W RD30T96W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RD35T91W RD35T93W RD35T9W RD35T94W RD35T95W RD35T96W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RDC316T91W RDC316T93W RDC316T9W RDC316T94W RDC316T95W RDC316T96W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RDC30T91W RDC30T93W RDC30T9W RDC30T94W RDC30T95W RDC30T96W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RDC35T91W RDC35T93W RDC35T9W RDC35T94W RDC35T95W RDC35T96W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-45

246 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 75 C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) Maximum I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Ampere Rating LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Note Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Digitrip Rating Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Rating Plug 1600 CRD316T91W CRD316T93W CRD316T9W CRD316T94W CRD316T95W CRD316T96W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRD30T91W CRD30T93W CRD30T9W CRD30T94W CRD30T95W CRD30T96W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRDC316T91W CRDC316T93W CRDC316T9W CRDC316T94W CRDC316T95W CRDC316T96W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRDC30T91W CRDC30T93W CRDC30T9W CRDC30T94W CRDC30T95W CRDC30T96W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 V4-T-46 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

247 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LSIA 1050 LSIG 1050 Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RD316T107W RD316T106W 800 ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A RD30T107W RD30T106W 1000 ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A RD35T107W RD35T106W 1600 ORPR5A ORPR5A ORPR5A50 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RDC316T107W RDC316T106W 800 ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A RDC30T107W RDC30T106W 1000 ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A RDC35T107W RDC35T106W 1600 ORPR5A ORPR5A ORPR5A50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-47

248 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C 100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Molded Case Switches Refer to Eaton for UL listed, series tested Molded Case Switch application data. Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LSIA 1050 LSIG 1050 Type RD High Instantaneous (K) 1600 RD316WK RD416WK 000 RD30WK RD40WK 1 Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Molded case switch may trip above 17,500 amperes. Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRD316T107W CRD316T106W 800 ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A CRD30T107W CRD30T106W 1000 ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A00 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRDC316T107W CRDC316T106W 800 ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A CRDC30T107W CRDC30T106W 1000 ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A00 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete without Terminals Three-Pole Four-Pole V4-T-48 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

249 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA C. No. 65M. Unless otherwise specified, R-Frame circuit breaker line load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type Ordering Information R-Frame circuit breakers have Cu/AI terminals as standard and Cu only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation is required. AWG/kcmil Wire Range/ No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm Hardware Wire Terminals 1600 Aluminum Cu/AI English (4) TA1600RD 1600 Copper Cu English (4) T1600RD 000 Aluminum Cu/AI English 600 (6) TA000RD 1 Rear Connectors 000 Copper English B016RD 000 Copper English B016RDL 500 Copper English B500RD 3 1 includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker. For use with 100% rated 1600 A and 000 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 100% rated device is ordered. 3 For use with 500 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 500 A breaker is ordered. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-49

250 V4-T-50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Mounting Hardware Breaker Line/Load Conductors TA000RD

251 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. RD Frame Accessories Reference Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories 1 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-76 Auxiliary switch (4A, 4B) V4-T-76 Shunt trip standard V4-T-84 Shunt trip low energy V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-9 Accessory terminal block V4-T-93 External Accessories Base mounting hardware V4-T-313 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-316 Key interlock kit V4-T-318 Walking beam interlock V4-T-319 Electrical (motor) operator V4-T-31 Handle mechanisms V4-T-47 Handle extension 3 V4-T-44 OPTIM System Components Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T-37 Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T-37 Auxiliary power module V4-T-37 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application Legend Applicable in indicated pole position Accessory available/modification available 1 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch. Mounts outside breaker. 3 Included with breaker. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-51

252 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Technical Data and Specifications UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Type of Poles RD 3, CRD RDC 3, CRDC IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 Circuit Breaker Type RD of Poles 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 100% rated breakers. See Page V4-T-53 for Trip Unit Specifications. Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) I cu 3, I cs 3, RDC I cu 3, I cs 3, V4-T-5 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

253 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Specifications R-Frame Digitrip Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 510 Digitrip RMS 610 Digitrip RMS 810 Digitrip RMS 910 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 rms sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame R R R R R Ampere range A A A A A Interrupting rating at 480 volts 65, 100 (ka) 65, 100 (ka) 65, 100 (ka) 65, 100 (ka) 65, 100 (ka) Protection Ordering options LSI(A), LISG Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor Rating I n = Rating Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting x I n 1 Except 500 ampere frame is %. Varies by frame. 3 LS/LSG only. 4 Not to exceed 100 amperes. LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG Fixed rated plug (I n ) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable rating plug (I n ) No No No No No Long delay pickup x (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) Long delay time I t 4 seconds 4 seconds 4 seconds 4 seconds 4 seconds Long delay time I 4 t No No No No 1 5 Seconds Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes High load alarm No 0.85 x I r 0.85 x I r 0.85 x I r x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short delay pickup % S1 and S x (I r ) % S1 and S x (I r ) % S1 and S x (I r ) % S1 and S x (I r ) % x (I r ) 1 Short delay time I t ms ms ms ms ms Short delay time flat ms ms ms ms ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup % M1and M x (I n ) % M1and M x (I n ) % M1and M x (I n ) % M1and M x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground fault alarm 4 No No No No 5 100% x (I n ) Ground fault pickup % x (I s ) 5-100% x (I s ) 5 100% x (I s ) 5 100% x (I s ) 5 100% x (I n ) Ground fault delay I t ms ms ms ms ms Ground fault delay flat ms ms ms ms ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-53

254 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C R-Frame Digitrip, continued Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 510 Digitrip RMS 610 Digitrip RMS 810 Digitrip RMS 910 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Magnitude of trip information No Yes Yes Yes Yes Remote signal contacts No Yes Yes Yes Yes System Monitoring Digital display No Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 Current No Yes Yes Yes Yes Voltage No No No Yes No Power and energy No No Yes Yes Yes Power quality harmonics No No No Yes Yes Power factor No No Yes (over Yes Yes Eaton PowerNet only) Communications Eaton PowerNet No No Yes Yes Yes Testing Testing method Integral Integral Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor Rating I n = Rating Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting x I n Note 1 By OPTIMizer/BIM. V4-T-54 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

255 Push To Trip Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Dimensions and Weights Dimensions in Inches (mm) RD Frame of Poles Width Height Depth (393.7) (406.4) 9.75 (47.7) (508.0) (406.4) 9.75 (47.7) RD-Frame, Three-Pole, 1600 and 000 Amperes 5.09 (19.4) 9.69 (46.1) 7.5 (184.) CL Handle (368.3) CL Breaker (0.4) Dia. (4 Holes) Use 4, 0.38 (Mil) Dia. Bolts for Mounting Breaker 7.75 (196.9) (381.0) Front View (393.7) Side View 9.00 (8.6) (406.4) 6.65 (166.7) 1.91 (37.8) 0.16 (4.0) R Typ. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) RD Frame Complete Breaker Breaker Type Three-Pole Four-Pole 1600 Amperes RD, CRD 1, RDC, CRDC 1 10 (46.3) 135 (61.) 000 Amperes RD, RDC 10 (46.3) 135 (61.) CRD, CRDC 130 (59.0) 175 (79.4) 500 Amperes RD, RDC 135 (61.) 18 (8.6) Note 1 No four-pole for CRD and CRDC. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-55

256 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Motor Circuit Protectors Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Selection Product Selection Accessories Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-57 V4-T-58 V4-T-59 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Product Description Designated as Eaton s Types GMCP and HMCP, the instantaneous-only motor circuit protector (MCP) is available in ratings from 3 A to 100 A for motor starter sizes 0 through 8. An innovative design of internal components allows higher MCP-starter combination interrupting ratings. The MCP is marked to permit proper electrical application within the assigned equipment ratings. Standards and Certifications The MCP is designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489, Canadian Standards Association Standard C. No. 5.1, and International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC The MCP is a recognized component (UL File E7819) and complies with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. It is also designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Canadian Standards Association Standard C. No. 5.1, International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1, and nameplates bear the CE marking. Note: Interrupting ratings are dependent on starter it is used with. V4-T-56 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

257 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Motor Circuit Protector Motor Circuit Protector Note Motor Circuit Protective Type HMCP = Three-pole HMP = Two-pole 1 HMCPS = Three-pole 1 On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only. Motor Circuit Protective Device GMCP = Three-pole Continuous Ampere Rating Continuous Ampere Rating HMCP 003 A0 C Magnetic Trip Range/ NEMA Starter Size A0 = 9 30/0 C0 = 1 70/0 E0 = /0 D0 = 40 60/0 H1 = /1 G = 80 10/ K = / J = / M = / L3 = /3 R3 = /3 T4 = /4 U4 = /4 A5 = /5 C5 = /5 D5 = /5 F5 = /5 G5 = /5 J5 = /5 K5 = /5 L5 = /5 W5 = /5 N5 = /5 R5 = /5 X5 = /5 Y5 = /5 L6 = /6 (electronic) X6 = /6 (electronic) Y6 = /6 (electronic) X7 = /7 (electronic) Y8 = /8 (electronic) GMCP 003 A0 C Magnetic Trip Range/NEMA Starter Size A0 = 15 30/0 C0 = 35 70/0 E0 = /0 H1 = /1 K = / J = / M = / Suffix C = Non-aluminum terminals W = Without terminals X = Load terminals only Y = Line terminals only S = Stainless steel terminals (150A frame only) No Suffix: Standard terminals on line and load Suffix C = Non-aluminum terminals Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-57

258 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection G-Frame 480 Vac Maximum, 600Y/347 Vac NEMA Starter Size Continuous Amperes Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP 0 3 A GMCP003A0C B C D E.0. 7 F A GMCP007C0C B C D E F A GMCP015E0C B C D E F A GMCP030H1C B C D E F A GMCP050KC B C D E F A GMCP060JC B C D E F A GMCP063MC B D E F Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. All GMCP 3 63A come with line and load steel body terminals for Cu only wire. Refer to Page V4-T-1 under Optional Terminal Types. UL recognized and CSA approved. V4-T-58 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

259 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Accessories Modifications for GMCP Internal accessories must be factory installed. Internal Accessories 1 Electrical Ratings Contact Factory Style Type Accessory Volts Frequency Amperes Arrangement Suffix Shunt trip 10 50/60 Hz 1.1 S5 1373D6G18 Shunt trip 40 50/60 Hz.1 S6 1373D6G19 Auxiliary switch /60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B A3 188C74G03 Auxiliary switch /60 Hz 6.0 A/B A6 188C73G03 Alarm switch /60 Hz 6.0 Make/Break B3 188C75G03 Auxiliary switch/alarm switch combination /60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B Make/Break B13 188C76G09 External Mounted Accessories Description Units in Package Style Lock dog (non-padlockable) 1 194C01H01 Mounting hardware 1 64B375G3 DIN rail adapter C79G0 Modifications for HMCP See Internal Accessories starting on Page V4-T-73. Handle Mechanisms for Series C Frames Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle) GMCP-Frame Rating Type GMCP-Frame Description NEMA IP S01 Blue Handle S01 blue handle, 1/3R/1 54 GMHMVD1B / 68C6039G05 1-inch shaft 4/4X 65 GMHMVD1BX / 68C6039G07 S01 Red Handle S01 red handle, 1-inch shaft Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms 1 Only one accessory may be installed in GMCP. LH only. 3 RH only. 4 For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 15 mm per DIN EN Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame. No UVR available on GMCP. 1/3R/1 54 GMHMVD1R / 68C6039G06 4/4X 65 GMHMVD1RX / 68C6039G08 G Direct 5 Black Handle Yellow Handle With Shroud Without Shroud With Shroud Without Shroud Frame GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMC3S HRGMC30 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-59

260 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C F-Frame 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum, continued Motor Motor NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP 0 3 A HMCP003A0C 70 A HMCP070MC B B C C D D E E F F G.0. 7 G H H A HMCP007C0C A HMCP100R3C B B C C D D E E F F G G H H A HMCP015E0C A HMCP150T4C B B C C D D E D F E G F H G A HMCP030H1C H B A HMCP150U4C C B D C E D F E G F H G A HMCP050KC H B C Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA D value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. E For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 F Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article (a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load G ampere rating. H HMCP A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCP 150A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB. V4-T-60 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

261 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Special Low Magnetic Protection Application MCP 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum Cont. Amps Cam Setting MCP Trip Setting 1 MCP 5 A 40 HMCP05D0C B 43 D 49 E 5 F 55 G 58 H A 80 HMCP050GC B 87 C 93 D 98 E 103 F 109 G 115 H A 115 HMCP070JC B 1 C 130 D 139 E 145 F 153 G 160 H A 160 HMCP100L3C B 174 C 185 D 196 E 07 F 18 G 9 H 40 1 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. HMCP A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-61

262 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum, continued NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP 0 3 A HMCPS003A0C A HMCPS100R3C B B C C D D E E F F G.0. 7 G H H A HMCPS007C0C A HMCPS150T4C B B C C D D E E F F G G H H A HMCPS015E0C A HMCPS150U4C B B C C D D E E F F G G 3 50 H H A HMCPS030H1C B Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA C value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. D For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 E Settings above 130A are for special applications. NEC Article (a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load F ampere rating. G HMCP A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. H HMCPS A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCPS 150A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB. 50 A HMCPS050KC B C D E F G H V4-T-6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

263 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 J-Frame 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum, continued NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP50A5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50C5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50D5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50F5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50G5C B C D E F G H I NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP50J5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50K5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50L5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50W5C B C D E F G H I Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HMP in place of HMCP. All HMCP and HMP 50A come with line and load steel body terminals, T50KB. (With suffix C, without C comes with TA50KB.) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-63

264 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C K-Frame 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum, continued NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP400A5C B C D HMCP400A5C E F G H I A HMCP400D5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400F5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400G5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400J5C B C D E F G H I NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP400K5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400L5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400W5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400N5C B C D E F G H I Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HMP in place of HMCP. All HMCP and HMP 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. numbers with suffix C as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K. V4-T-64 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

265 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Vac Maximum, 50 Vdc Maximum, continued NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP400R5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400X5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400Y5C B C D E F G H I L-Frame 600 Vac Maximum 4 NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP600L6W B C D E F G H A HMCP600X6W B C D E F G H A HMCP600Y6W B C D E F G H Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HMP in place of HMCP. 4 Equipped with electronic trip device. All HMCP and HMP 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. numbers with suffix C as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K. All HMCP 600 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T-17. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-65

266 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C N-Frame 600 Vac Maximum 1 NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP800X7W B C D E F G A HMCP1Y8W B C D E F G Equipped with electronic trip device. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13X the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13X setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. V4-T-66 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

267 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Product Description Motor protection circuit breakers (MPCBs) provide UL 489 branch circuit protection, UL 508 and CSA C. No. 14 motor protection, and meet IEC and requirements. Typical branch motor loads are protected by three-component starters, consisting of breaker, contactor and overload relay, or fuse, contactor and overload relay. The MPCB application-specific protection eliminates the need for motor overload relay found in the traditional three-component starter assembly. The branch motor load protection is simplified to an MPCB and contactor, reducing both space requirements and heat generation in customer panels. Protection is provided by application-specific electronic trip units. The electronic trip unit provides typical motor overload relay functionality and short-circuit protection against potential phase-tophase or phase-to-ground faults. Disconnecting means Branch circuit short-circuit protection Overload protection Class 5, 10, 15 and 0 Phase unbalance protection FDMP breaker trips when there is a 40% difference between any phase compared to the calculated three-phase average Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Product Selection Technical Data and Specifications Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Phase loss protection Active when the maximum phase current is greater than 50% of FLA setting Breaker will trip when minimum phase current is 5% or less than the maximum phase current Time delay of 1 or seconds before breaker trips Thermal memory to prevent immediate restart after overload trip to allow motor to cool down Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-68 V4-T-68 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 The MPCB is based on the Series C F-Frame. Accessories for standard Series C breakers apply to the MPCB. Unlike Motor Circuit Protectors (MCPs), MPCBs are UL 489 listed with 35 ka and 65 ka interruption ratings. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-67

268 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection FDMP and HFDMP Continuous Amperes 35 ka Without Phase Unbalance, Class 10 Motor Protection Only 65 ka Without Phase Unbalance, Class 10 Motor Protection Only 80 FDMP3080L FDMP3080JL HFDMP3080L HFDMP3080JL 100 FDMP3100L FDMP3100JL HFDMP3100L HFDMP3100JL 160 FDMP3160L FDMP3160JL HFDMP3160L HFDMP3160JL 05 FDMP305L FDMP305JL HFDMP305L HFDMP305JL FLA le Dial Setting Technical Data and Specifications Specifications Feature FDMP HFDMP Interruption rating at 40 V 65 ka 100 ka Interruption rating at 480 V 35 ka 65 ka Interruption rating at 600 V 18 ka 5 ka Icu/Ics at 40 V 65 ka/33 ka ka/50 ka 1 Icu/Ics at 415 V 35 ka/18 ka 1 65 ka/33 ka 1 100% rated No No FLA range (A) Motor class protection 5, 10, 15, 0 5, 10, 15, 0 Phase unbalance protection (current) active for phase current 40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds 40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds >0.5 FLA setting Phase loss protection (current) active for phase current Min. phase 0.5 max. phase for 1 second Min. phase 0.5 max. phase for 1 second >0.5 FLA setting Thermal memory protection Yes Yes High load indicator Pre-detection relays Internal accessories Factory installed Factory installed Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR 1 IEC ratings available only on FWMP and HFWMP. For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T ka With Phase Unbalance and Adjustable Motor Class Protection 65 ka With Phase Unbalance and Adjustable Motor Class Protection Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H V4-T-68 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

269 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4) Product Description Eaton s Type ELC current limiter attachment for the MCP is designed to provide increased interrupting capacity. The combination may be used for the application up to 00,000 A symmetrical at 600 Vac, making the MCP suitable for use in network distribution systems or other applications where unusually high fault currents are available. The current limiter connects to the load end of the MCP and is provided with terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. (See table at right.) Limiters are coordinated with the MCP so that normal fault currents are interrupted automatically by the MCP without any damage to the limiter. Only the rare very high fault is opened by the limiter. Faults that are interrupted by the limiter also magnetically trip the MCP, opening all three poles, preventing singlephase operation. Each of the three poles of the Type ELC limiter is equipped with an indicator that extends when a fault is interrupted by the limiter. Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4) Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Product Selection Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment Technical Data and Specifications ELC Current Limiter Attachment Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes 1 MCP Rating (Amperes) Type ELC Current Limiter Maximum Amperes Standard Aluminum Terminals 3 ELC3003R 7 ELC3007R 15 ELC3015R 30 ELC3030R 50 ELC3050R 100 ELC3100R 150 ELC3150R Wire Range AWG Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 Metric (mm ) / / Non-Standard Terminals (Steel) Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes as defined in UL 486A or UL 486B. Optional on special order for copper cable only. All HMCP 800 A and 100 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T-17. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-69

270 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Product Overview Power demand continues to grow in new and existing facilities. To meet increased demand, larger utility supplies, spot networks and large facility transformers are installed. The increased capacity of the electrical source results in increased fault currents in excess of 100 ka short-circuit protection. Eaton manufactures non-fused current limiting modules with interrupting capacities up to 00 ka at 600 Vac. Unlike fused current limiters with a one-time use, a current limiter module provides an automatic reset of the module after a short-circuit event. Resetting the moldedcase circuit breaker is the only action required to restore critical power to the system; there is no time wasted with sourcing the correct replacement fuses or module to bring the system back online. Product Description The current limiting breaker modules use a unique contact design to enhance the system protection similar to that of the circuit breaker. When high short-circuit current is flowing through the contacts of these modules, the design results in very high interrupting capacities and improved current limiting characteristics. Application Description High-performance breakers are most commonly applied when very high fault levels are available and with applications where the current limiting capability is used upstream of the final load to limit current. Typical loads include lighting, power distribution, and motor control applications. Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Product Selection Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights Internal Accessories External Accessories Features and Benefits Superior system protection: Auto reset improves system uptime and eliminates the need for finding replacement parts No fuses to replace, reducing the overall cost of ownership and the waste created by fuses Overloads, by using inverse time current tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker Low-level short circuits, by using instantaneous and/or short-time delay tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker High-level short circuits, by using ultra-high-speed, blow-apart contacts of the current limiting module in series with the circuit breaker contacts Let-through currents, by improved opening speed of the contacts, the resultant rapid rise of arc voltage introduces impedance into the system Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-71 V4-T-7 V4-T-7 V4-T-73 V4-T-306 Standards and Certifications UL 489 CSA C. V4-T-70 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

271 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Product Selection FD Frame Series C High Performance Ratings Type Product Amperes 480 Vac (UL) 600 Vac (UL) FDC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only With limiter FD IC Rating 00 kaic at 600 Vac 1 Ampere Rating Limiter Terminals Breaker Load Terminals (For Line Mounted Limiters Only) Breaker with Line Side Mounted Current Limiter 1 Line and load terminal included. Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJ1PBK. 3 Four interphase barriers provided, () line end of breaker, () load end of limiter. 4 Load side breaker terminations included for units configured with line mounted limiters. Breaker with Load Side Mounted Current Limiter 3 Thermal-Magnetic 40 FDC3040Q01 FDC3040YQ0 45 FDC3045Q01 FDC3045YQ0 50 FDC3050Q01 FDC3050YQ0 60 FDC3060Q01 FDC3060YQ0 70 FDC3070Q01 FDC3070YQ0 80 FDC3080Q01 FDC3080YQ0 90 FDC3090Q01 FDC3090YQ0 100 FDC3100Q01 FDC3100YQ0 110 FDC3110Q01 FDC3110YQ0 15 FDC315Q01 FDC315YQ0 150 FDC3150Q01 FDC3150YQ0 175 FDC3175Q01 FDC3175YQ0 00 FDC300Q01 FDC300YQ0 Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Metric Wire Range mm AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors Wire Type Standard Pressure Type Terminals 50 Aluminum Cu/Al #8 350 (1) TA50FJ 4 Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range mm Package of Three Terminals Wire Type Standard Pressure Type Terminals 100 Steel Cu/AI 14 1/ T100FB 5 Aluminum Cu/AI 4 4/ TA5FD Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-71

272 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Current Limiting Data Frame Circuit Ip (ka) I T (10 6 A S) LDC 40 V/00 ka LDC 480 V/100 ka LDC 600 V/50 ka Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lbs (kg) FD + limiter 1.06 (306.3) 4.13 (104.9) 3.39 (86.1) 8.50 (3.86) FD-Frame With Current Limiter Module 4.1 (104.6) 1.06 (306.3) 4.13 (104.9) 3.96 (100.5) 3.34 (84.8) 3.39 (86.1) V4-T-7 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

273 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Series C Internal Accessories Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories Product Selection Technical Data and Specifications External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-75 V4-T-94 V4-T-306 Internal Accessories Product Overview Alarm Switch For remote indication of automatic trip operation. Does not function with manual switching; however, it will operate when either a shunt trip or undervoltage release is operated. A make contact closes and a break contact opens when the alarm/lockout switch operates. The switch automatically resets when the circuit breaker is reset. Auxiliary Switch The auxiliary switch provides circuit breaker contact status information by monitoring the position of the molded cross bar that contains the moving contact arms. The auxiliary switch is used for remote indication and interlock system verification, and consists of one or two SPDT switches housed in a plug-in module. Each SPDT switch has one a and one b contact. When the circuit breaker contacts are open, the a contact is open and the b contact is closed. Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Each catalog number listed in tables on Pages V4-T-78 and V4-T-79 includes one auxiliary switch and one alarm switch. In an auxiliary switch ASL switch combination, the auxiliary switch is always mounted on the side of the plug-in module next to the center pole of the circuit breaker. Shunt Trip The shunt trip provides remote controlled tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt trip consists of an intermittent rated solenoid with a tripping plunger and a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in module. When required for ground fault protection applications, certain AC rated shunt trips, as noted in the electrical rating table, are suitable for operation at 55 percent of rated voltage. Select shunt trip catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Low Energy Shunt Trip Low energy shunt trip devices are designed to operate from low energy output signals from dedicated current sensors typically applied in ground fault protection schemes. However, with a proper control voltage source, they may be applied in place of conventional trip devices for special applications. Flux paths surrounding permanent magnets used in the shunt trip assembly hold a charged spring poised in readiness to operate the circuit breaker trip mechanism. When a 100 microfarad capacitor charged to 8 Vdc is discharged through the shunt trip coil, the resultant flux opposes the permanent magnet flux field, which releases the stored energy in the spring to trip the circuit breaker. As the circuit breaker resets, the shunt trip reset arm is actuated by the circuit breaker handle, resetting the shunt trip. The plug-in module is mounted in retaining slots in the top of the trip unit. Coil is intermittent-rated only. Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-73

274 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Undervoltage Release Mechanism The undervoltage release mechanism monitors a voltage (typically a line voltage) and trips the circuit breaker when the voltage falls to between 70 and 35 percent of the solenoid coil rating. The undervoltage release mechanism consists of a continuous rated solenoid with a plunger and tripping lever mounted in a plug-in module. The tab on the tripping lever resets the undervoltage release mechanism when normal voltage has been restored and the circuit breaker handle is moved to the reset (or OFF) position. With less than pickup voltage applied to the undervoltage release mechanism, the circuit breaker contacts will not touch when a closing operation is attempted. Note: Undervoltage release mechanism accessories are not designed for, and should not be used as, circuit interlocks. Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) (For fixed-mounted configuration.) Internal accessory wiring leads are normally supplied with pigtail leads (18 AWG) that exit from the right side of the circuit breaker. Where specified, fixed-mounted accessory terminal blocks are available. A maximum of one 4-point terminal block can be installed on the right side of the circuit breaker for the internal accessories. For convenience in determining the appropriate number of terminal block points required, refer to Page V4-T-74. PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 only) K-, L- and N-Frames Eaton s PowerNet Communications Kit can be ordered to add PowerNet communications to an existing OPTIM 550 breaker in the field. An 18-inch (457. mm) wiring pigtail is routed to the rear of the breaker: two wires for PowerNet and two wires for 4 Vdc (45 ma load). It is recommended that the power supply be an isolated high quality unit. V4-T-74 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

275 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Product Selection Alarm Switch Alarm Switch Make Break G-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) 1 Electrical Ratings Contact Factory Volts Frequency Amperes Arrangement Suffix 34 Alarm Switch 40 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break B3 188C75G03 Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switches Combination 40 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break and 1A/1B B13 188C76G09 F-Frame Alarm Switch 1 of Contacts (Make and Break) F-Frame HMCP Alarm Switch 1 J-Frame and HMCP (J) Alarm Switch 1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed; however, this is not recommended for FDE breakers. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Includes 4-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads,18 AWG ( ). 3 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. 4 Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker. 5 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation. 6 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 7 Standard mounting location. 8 Factory installation only. Leads exit load end of circuit breaker. 9 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E j Mounting Location (Pole) Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 5 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Left 7 B01 B0 B03 B04 A1L1LPK A1L1LTK Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L1RPK A1L1RTK Left 7 B09 B10 B11 AL1LPK AL1LTK Right B1 B13 B14 AL1RPK AL1RTK 1 Single-pole B15 8 of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 5 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Left 7 B01 B0 B03 B04 MA1L1LPK MA1L1LTK Right B05 B06 B07 B08 MA1L1RPK MA1L1RTK Left 7 B09 B10 B11 MAL1LPK MAL1LTK Right B1 B13 B14 MAL1RPK MAL1RTK of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 9 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 7 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Left j B01 B0 B03 B04 A1LLPK A1LLTK Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1LRPK A1LRTK 6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-75

276 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C K-Frame and HMCP (K) Alarm Switch of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B) L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Alarm Switch N-Frame and HMCP (N) Alarm Switch R-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E Standard mounting location. 3 Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 4 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E A maximum of three ASL plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. Suffix 1 Left 3 B01 B0 B03 B04 A1L3LPK A1L3LTK Right 4 B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L3RPK A1L3RTK Left 3 B09 B10 B11 AL3LPK AL3LTK Right 4 B1 B13 B14 AL3RPK AL3RTK of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Left 3 B01 B0 B03 B04 A1L4LPK A1L4LTK Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L4RPK A1L4RTK Left 3 B09 B10 B11 AL4LPK AL4LTK Right B1 B13 B14 AL4RPK AL4RTK of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Left B01 B0 B03 B04 A1L5LPK A1L5LTK Right 3 B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L5RPK A1L5RTK Left B09 B10 B11 AL5LPK AL5LTK Right 3 B1 B13 B14 AL5RPK AL5RTK of Contacts (Make and Break) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads Suffix B05 A1L6RPK B1 AL6RPK V4-T-76 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

277 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Auxiliary Switch Auxiliary Switch a b G-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only) Electrical Ratings Contact Factory Volts Frequency Amperes Arrangement Suffix /60 Hz 6 1a/1b A3 188C74G /60 Hz 6 a/b A6 188C73G03 F-Frame and HMCP (F) Auxiliary Switch of Contacts A and B F-Frame with Electronic Trip Unit Auxiliary Switch 9 J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 4 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 3 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Left 5 A01 A0 A03 A04 A1X1PK A1X1LTK Left 5 A15 7 A16 7 A17 7 E1X1PK Right or Neutral 6 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X1PK A1X1RTK 8 Right or Neutral 6 A18 7 A19 7 A0 7 Left 5 A09 A10 A11 AX1LPK AX1LTK Left 5 A1 7 A 7 EX1LPK Right or Neutral 6 A1 A13 A14 AX1RPK AX1RTK 8 Right or Neutral 6 A3 7 A4 7 EX1RPK of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 4 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Trip Unit Type Right A30 A31 A3 Trip Unit Type Right A33 A34 A35 of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit j 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 3 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Left A01 A0 A03 A04 A1XPK A1XLTK Right k A05 A06 A07 A08 A1XPK A1XRTK 4 Left A09 A10 A11 AXPK AXLTK Right k A1 A13 A14 AXPK AXRTK 4 1 Includes 4-inch external pigtail leads, 18 AWG ( ). A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker. 3 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 4 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation. 5 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). 6 Not for use on F-Frame with electronic trip unit volts (max.), 50/60 Hz switch for use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum. 8 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 9 Only for use on three-pole F-Frame breakers with electronic trip unit. Installation auxiliary switch for FD electronic breakers on right pole must be performed at breaker factory. j Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation or interchangeable trip unit breakers under E k Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-77

278 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch of Contacts A and B L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch R-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Left A01 A0 A03 A04 A1X3PK A1X3LTK Right 3 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X3PK A1X3RTK 4 Left A09 A10 A11 AX3PK AX3LTK Right 3 A1 A13 A14 AX3PK AX3RTK 4 Right A1 A 148D8G Left A18 A15 A3X3LPK A3X3LTK Right 3 A17 A16 A3X3RPK A3X3RTK 4 of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 5 A maximum of two auxiliary switches (any combination of a/b or 4a/4b plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. 6 This option is not field installable. 7 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option. 1 Left A01 A0 A03 A04 A1X4PK A1X4LTK Right A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X4PK A1X4RTK 4 Left A09 A10 A11 AX4PK AX4LTK Right A1 A13 A14 AX4PK AX4RTK 4 3 Left A18 A15 A3X4PK A3X4LTK Right A17 A16 A3X4PK A3X4RTK 4 of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Left A01 A0 A03 A04 A1X5PK A1X5LTK Right A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X5PK A1X5RTK 4 Left A09 A10 A11 AX5PK AX5LTK Right A1 A13 A14 AX5PK AX5RTK 4 3 Left A18 A15 A3X5LPK A3X5LTK Right A17 A16 A3X5RPK A3X5RTK 4 of Contacts A and B Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads Suffix 5 5 A1 AX6RPK 4 A19 A4X6RPK V4-T-78 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

279 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination a b F-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 1 Mounting Location (Pole) F-Frame HMCP Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 1 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination options (Cxx) are not available on FDE 310+ with LSG or LSIG trip units due to exit wire limitations. To obtain both features, order a left mounting alarm switch (B01-B04 or B09-B11), and right mounting auxiliary switch (A30-A3). Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation. 3 Standard mounting location. 4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers 5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation of interchangeable trip unit breakers under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 7 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 8 Will not install on OPTIM Trip (RH). 9 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option. j This option is not field installable. Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 3 Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Left 3 C01 C0 C03 AAL1LPK AAL1LTK Right C04 C05 C06 AAL1RPK AAL1RTK 4 Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 3 Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Left 4 C01 C0 C03 MAAL1LPK MAAL1LTK Right C04 C05 C06 MAAL1RPK MAAL1RPK of Sets of Contacts (1A and 1B) (1M 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Left C01 C0 C03 AALLPK AALLTK Right 4 C04 C05 C06 AALRPK AALRTK 4 of Sets of Contacts (1A and 1B) (1M 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Left C01 C0 C03 AAL3LPK AAL3LTK Right 67 C04 C05 C06 AAL3RPK 8 AAL3RTK Right C07 C08 148D8G09 9j Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-79

280 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination of Sets of Contacts 1A, 1B and 1 Make/1 Break A, B and 1 Make/1 Break 3A, 3B and 1 Make/1 Break N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination of Sets of Contacts 1A, 1B and 1 Make/1 Break A, B and 1 Make/1 Break Mounting Location (Pole) 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Not for use on four-pole circuit breaker. Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Left C01 C0 C03 AA114LPK AA114LTK Right C04 C05 C06 AA114RPK AA114RTK 3 Left C07 C08 C1 AA14LPK AA14LTK Right C10 C11 C13 AA14RPK AA14RTK 3 Left C14 AA314LPK Right C15 AA314RPK Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Left C01 C0 C03 AA115LPK AA115LTK Right C04 C05 C06 AA115RPK AA115RTK 3 Left C07 C08 C1 AA15LPK AA15LTK Right C10 C11 C13 AA15RPK AA15RTK 3 V4-T-80 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

281 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Shunt Trip Shunt Trip ST a G-Frame Shunt Trip (LH Three-Pole Only) Electrical Ratings F-Frame and HMCP (F) Shunt Trip Suffix Volts Frequency Amperes 10 50/60 Hz 1.1 S1 1373D6G /60 Hz.1 S 1373D6G0 1 DC.8 S3 1373D6G15 4 DC 5.7 S4 1373D6G Hz S7 1373D6G0 Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 1 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 3 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). 3 Standard pigtail lead exit location Vac marked suitable for ground fault protection devices. 5 Standard mounting location. 6 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. 1 4 Vac or Vdc S01 S0 S03 S04 SNT1LP03K SNT1LT03K Vac or Vdc 4 S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT1LP08K SNT1LT08K Vac or Vdc S09 S10 S11 S1 SNT1LP1K SNT1LT1K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT1LP18K SNT1LT18K Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings Vac or Vdc S17 S18 S19 S0 SNT1RP03K SNT1RT03K Vac or Vdc 4 S1 S S3 S4 SNT1RP08K SNT1RT08K Vac or Vdc S5 S6 S7 S8 SNT1RP1K SNT1RT1K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S9 S30 S31 S3 SNT1RP18K SNT1RT18K 6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-81

282 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C J-Frame and HMCP (J) Shunt Trip Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) K-Frame and HMCP (K) Shunt Trip 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element. 4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 5 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. 6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 1 4 Vac or Vdc S41 S4 S43 S44 SNTP04K SNTT04K Vac or Vdc S49 S50 S51 S5 SNTP06K SNTT06K Vac or Vdc 3 S09 S10 S11 S1 SNTP11K SNTT11K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNTP14K SNTT14K Vac S17 S18 S19 S0 SNTP18K SNTT18K Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 1 4 Vac or Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNTP04K SNTT04K Vac or Vdc S53 S54 S55 S56 SNTP06K SNTT06K Vac or Vdc 3 S9 S30 S31 S3 SNTP11K SNTT11K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNTP14K SNTT14K Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNTP18K SNTT18K 4 Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 4 Vac or Vdc S41 S4 S43 S44 SNT3P04K SNT3T04K Vac or Vdc S49 S50 S51 S5 SNT3P06K SNT3T06K Vac or Vdc 3 S09 S10 S11 S1 SNT3P11K SNT3T11K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT3P14K SNT3T14K Vac S17 S18 S19 S0 SNT3P18K SNT3T18K Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings Vac or Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT3P04K SNT3T04K Vac or Vdc S53 S54 S55 S56 SNT3P06K SNT3T06K Vac or Vdc 3 S9 S30 S31 S3 SNT3P11K SNT3T11K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT3P14K SNT3T14K Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT3P18K SNT3T18K 4 V4-T-8 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

283 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Shunt Trip Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) three-pole trip units only. Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 4 Vac or Vdc S01 S0 S03 S04 SNT4LP03K SNT4LT03K Vac S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT4LP05K SNT4LT05K Vdc S85 S86 S87 SNT4LP3K SNT4LT3K Vac S09 S10 S11 S1 SNT4LP11K SNT4LT11K Vdc S41 S4 S43 S44 SNT4LP6K SNT4LT6K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT4LP14K SNT4LT14K Vac S17 S18 S19 S0 SNT4LP18K SNT4LT18K Right-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings Vac or Vdc S1 S S3 S4 SNT4RP03K SNT4RT03K Vac S5 S6 S7 S8 SNT4RP05K SNT4RT05K Vdc S88 S89 S90 SNT4RP3K SNT4RT3K Vac S9 S30 S31 S3 SNT4RP11K SNT4RT11K Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT4RP6K SNT4RT6K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT4RP14K SNT4RT14K Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT4RP18K SNT4RT18K Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-83

284 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C N-Frame and HMCP (N) Shunt Trip Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings R-Frame Shunt Trip (RH Only) 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. 4 A maximum of two shunt trip plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 9 4 Vac or Vdc S01 S0 S03 S04 SNT5LP03K SNT5LT03K Vac S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT5LP05K SNT5LT05K Vac 3 S09 S10 S11 S1 SNT5LP11K SNT5LT11K Vdc S41 S4 S43 S44 SNT5LP6K SNT5LT6K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT5LP14K SNT5LT14K Vac S17 S18 S19 S0 SNT5LP18K SNT5LT18K Vdc S1 S S3 S4 SNT5LP3K SNT5LT3K Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads Suffix Vac or Vdc S1 SNT6P03K Vac S5 SNT6P05K Vac S9 SNT6P11K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S33 SNT6P14K Vac S37 SNT6P18K Vdc S88 SNT6P3K Vdc S45 SNT6P6K V4-T-84 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

285 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Low Energy Shunt Trip Ordering Information Select shunt trip catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Low Energy Shunt Trip UV F-, J-, K-, L-, M-, N- and R-Frames and HMCPs Low Energy Shunt Trip 1 Mounting Positions (Pole) F-Frame Same Side Rear 3 Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Opposite Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Left NO1 NO NO3 NO4 LST1LPK 4 LST1LTK 4 Right 3 NO5 NO6 NO7 NO8 LST1RPK 4 LST1RTK 4 J-Frame Left NO1 NO NO3 LSTLPK Right 3 NO5 NO6 NO7 LSTRPK K-Frame Left 3 NO1 NO NO3 LST3LPK Right 56 NO5 NO6 NO7 LST3RPK L- and M-Frames Left NO1 NO NO3 LST4LPK Right NO5 NO6 NO7 LST4RPK N-Frame Left 3 NO1 NO NO3 LST5LPK R-Frame Right NO1 LST6RPK 1 Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 4 For F-Frame HMCP, add an M to beginning of catalog number. Field Installation Kit referenced for factory use only, not UL listed for field installation. 5 For use with thermal-magnetic trip units only. 6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-85

286 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Undervoltage Release Mechanism Ordering Information Select handle reset undervoltage release mechanism catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Undervoltage release mechanism coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Undervoltage Release Mechanism UV G-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (LH Three-Pole Only) Electrical Ratings Factory Volts (AC Only) Frequency (Hz) Amperes Style s 13 Suffix 10 50/ D6G03 T1 4 50/ D6G04 T 48 50/ D6G05 T / D6G06 T D6G07 T D6G08 T D6G09 T / D6G10 T D6G11 T D6G1 T D6G13 T D6G14 T1 1 Includes 4-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads, 18 AWG ( ). A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. 3 Suitable for mounting in left pole only of three-pole breaker. G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. V4-T-86 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

287 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 F-Frame Factory Mounted (For F-Frame Breaker and F-Frame HMCP) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings Connection Type and Location 18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 1 Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Vac U01 U0 U03 U04 4 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 48 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 60 Vac U97 U98 U99 U Vac U13 U14 U15 U Vac U17 U18 U19 U Vac U1 U U3 U Vac U5 U6 U7 U8 Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 3 1 Vac U49 U50 U51 U5 4 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 48 Vac U85 U86 U87 U88 60 Vac U101 U10 U103 U Vac U61 U6 U63 U Vac U65 U66 U67 U Vac U69 U70 U71 U Vac U73 U74 U75 U76 Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 1 Vdc U9 U30 U31 U3 4 Vdc U33 U34 U35 U36 48 Vdc U37 U38 U39 U40 60 Vdc U97 U98 U99 U Vdc U41 U4 U43 U Vdc U45 U46 U47 U48 Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 3 1 Vdc U77 U78 U79 U80 4 Vdc U81 U8 U83 U84 48 Vdc U85 U86 U87 U88 60 Vdc U101 U10 U103 U Vdc U89 U90 U91 U Vdc U93 U94 U95 U96 1 Standard pigtail lead exit location. Standard mounting location. 3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-87

288 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C F-Frame Field Mounted Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Standard mounting location. 3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. F-Frame Breaker F-Frame Breaker HMCP Factory Installation Kits 1 Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 1 Vac UVH1LP0K UVH1LT0K MUVH1LP0K MUVH1LT0K 4 Vac UVH1LP03K UVH1LT03K MUVH1LP03K MUVH1LT03K 48 Vac UVH1LPK UVH1LTK MUVH1LPK MUVH1LTK 60 Vac UVH1LP4K UVH1LT4K MUVH1LP4K MUVH1LT4K Vac UVH1LP08K UVH1LT08K MUVH1LP08K MUVH1LT08K Vac UVH1LP11K UVH1LT11K MUVH1LP11K MUVH1LT11K Vac UVH1LP15K UVH1LT15K MUVH1LP15K MUVH1LT15K Vac UVH1LP18K UVH1LT18K MUVH1LP18K MUVH1LT18K Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 3 1 Vac UVH1RP0K UVH1RT0K MUVH1RP0K MUVH1RT0K 4 Vac UVH1RP03K UVH1RT03K MUVH1RP03K MUVH1RT03K 48 Vac UVH1RPK UVH1RTK MUVH1RPK MUVH1RTK 60 Vac UVH1RP4K UVH1RT4K MUVH1RP4K MUVH1RT4K Vac UVH1RP08K UVH1RT08K MUVH1RP08K MUVH1RT08K Vac UVH1RP11K UVH1RT11K MUVH1RP11K MUVH1RT11K Vac UVH1RP15K UVH1RT15K MUVH1RP15K MUVH1RT15K Vac UVH1RP18K UVH1RT18K MUVH1RP18K MUVH1RT18K Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 1 Vdc UVH1LP0K UVH1LT0K MUVH1LP0K MUVH1LT0K 4 Vdc UVH1LP1K UVH1LT1K MUVH1LP1K MUVH1LT1K 48 Vdc UVH1LPK UVH1LTK MUVH1LPK MUVH1LTK 60 Vdc UVH1LP4K UVH1LT4K MUVH1LP4K MUVH1LT4K Vdc UVH1LP6K UVH1LT6K MUVH1LP6K MUVH1LT6K 0 50 Vdc UVH1LP8K UVH1LT8K MUVH1LP8K MUVH1LT8K Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 3 1 Vdc UVH1RP0K UVH1RT0K MUVH1RP0K MUVH1RT0K 4 Vdc UVH1RP1K UVH1RT1K MUVH1RP1K MUVH1RT1K 48 Vdc UVH1RPK UVH1RTK MUVH1RPK MUVH1RTK 60 Vdc UVH1RPK UVH1RTK MUVH1RPK MUVH1RTK Vdc UVH1RP6K UVH1RT6K MUVH1RP6K MUVH1RT6K 0 50 Vdc UVH1RP8K UVH1RT8K MUVH1RP8K MUVH1RT8K V4-T-88 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

289 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Block 1 J-Frame and HMCP (J) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits Terminal 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 3 Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton. Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breakers. 4 Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 4 1 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVHLP0K UVHLT0K 4 Vac U09 U10 U11 U1 UVHLP03K UVHLT03K Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVHLP05K UVHLT05K Vac U17 U18 U19 U0 UVHLP08K UVHLT08K Vac U1 U U3 U4 UVHLP11K UVHLT11K Vac U5 U6 U7 U8 UVHLP15K UVHLT15K Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 3 1 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVHRP0K UVHRT0K 4 Vac U41 U4 U43 U44 UVHRP03K UVHRT03K Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVHRP05K UVHRT05K Vac U49 U50 U51 U5 UVHRP08K UVHRT08K Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVHRP11K UVHRT11K Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVHRP15K UVHRT15K Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 4 1 Vdc T01 T0 T03 T04 UVHLP0K UVHLT0K 4 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVHLP1K UVHLT1K Vdc T09 T10 T11 T1 UVHLP3K UVHLT3K Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVHLP6K UVHLT6K 0 50 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T0 UVHLP8K UVHLT8K Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 3 1 Vdc T1 T T3 T4 UVHRP0K UVHRT0K 4 Vdc T5 T6 T7 T8 UVHRP1K UVHRT1K Vdc T9 T30 T31 T3 UVHRP3K UVHRT3K Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVHRP6K UVHRT6K 0 50 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVHRP8K UVHRT8K Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-89

290 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C K-Frame and HMCP (K) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. 4 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. 5 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 1 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH3LP0K UVH3LT0K 4 Vac U09 U10 U11 U1 UVH3LP03K UVH3LT03K Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH3LP05K UVH3LT05K Vac U17 U18 U19 U0 UVH3LP08K UVH3LT08K Vac U1 U U3 U4 UVH3LP11K UVH3LT11K Vac U5 U6 U7 U8 UVH3LP15K UVH3LT15K Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH3RP0K UVH3RT0K 4 Vac U41 U4 U43 U44 UVH3RP03K UVH3RT03K Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVH3RP05K UVH3RT05K Vac U49 U50 U51 U5 UVH3RP08K UVH3RT08K Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH3RP11K UVH3RT11K Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH3RP15K UVH3RT15K Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 1 Vdc T01 T0 T03 T04 UVH3LP0K UVH3LT0K 4 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH3LP1K UVH3LT1K Vdc T09 T10 T11 T1 UVH3LP3K UVH3LT3K Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH3LP6K UVH3LT6K 0 50 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T0 UVH3LP8K UVH3LT8K Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings Vdc T1 T T3 T4 UVH3RP0K UVH3RT0K 4 Vdc T5 T6 T7 T8 UVH3RP1K UVH3RT1K Vdc T9 T30 T31 T3 UVH3RP3K UVH3RT3K Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH3RP6K UVH3RT6K 0 50 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH3RP8K UVH3RT8K V4-T-90 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

291 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 L-, HMCP (L) and (M)-Frames and Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. 4 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 1 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH4LP0K UVH4LT0K 4 Vac U09 U10 U11 U1 UVH4LP03K UVH4LT03K Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH4LP05K UVH4LT05K Vac U17 U18 U19 U0 UVH4LP08K UVH4LT08K Vac U1 U U3 U4 UVH4LP11K UVH4LT11K Vac U5 U6 U7 U8 UVH4LP15K UVH4LT15K Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 34 1 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH4RP0K UVH4RT0K 4 Vac U41 U4 U43 U44 UVH4RP03K UVH4RT03K Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVH4RP05K UVH4RT05K Vac U49 U50 U51 U5 UVH4RP08K UVH4RT08K Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH4RP11K UVH4RT11K Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH4RP15K UVH4RT15K Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 1 Vdc T01 T0 T03 T04 UVH4LP0K UVH4LT0K 4 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH4LP1K UVH4LT1K Vdc T09 T10 T11 T1 UVH4LP3K UVH4LT3K Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH4LP6K UVH4LT6K 0 50 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T0 UVH4LP8K UVH4LT8K Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 34 1 Vdc T1 T T3 T4 UVH4RP0K UVH4RT0K 4 Vdc T5 T6 T7 T8 UVH4RP1K UVH4RT1K Vdc T9 T30 T31 T3 UVH4RP3K UVH4RT3K Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH4RP6K UVH4RT6K 0 50 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH4RP8K UVH4RT8K Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-91

292 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C N-Frame and HMCP (N) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage Rating (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) R-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (RH only) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Suffix Suffix Suffix 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 500 mechanical operations. 4 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are orange and brown. Suffix Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 1 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH5LP0K UVH5LT0K 4 Vac U09 U10 U11 U1 UVH5LP03K UVH5LT03K Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH5LP05K UVH5LT05K Vac U17 U18 U19 U0 UVH5LP08K UVH5LT08K Vac U1 U U3 U4 UVH5LP11K UVH5LT11K Vac U5 U6 U7 U8 UVH5LP9K UVH5LT9K Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 1 Vdc T01 T0 T03 T04 UVH5LP0K UVH5LT0K 4 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH5LP1K UVH5LT1K Vdc T09 T10 T11 T1 UVH5LP3K UVH5LT3K Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH5LP6K UVH5LT6K 0 50 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T0 UVH5LP8K UVH5LT8K Voltage Rating (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 3 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads Suffix Vac U37 UVH6RP0K 4 Vac U41 UVH6RP03K Vac U45 UVH6RP05K Vac U49 UVH6RP08K Vac U53 UVH6RP11K Vac U57 UVH6RP9K 1 Vdc T1 UVH6RP0K 4 Vdc T5 UVH6RP1K Vdc T9 UVH6RP3K Vdc T33 UVH6RP6K 0 50 Vdc T37 UVH6RP8K V4-T-9 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

293 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) R-Frame Accessory Terminal Block 1 Factory Installed Suffix Q01 of Control Wires for Each Internally Mounted Accessory Type of Accessory Auxiliary switch PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 Only) K-, L- and N-Frames PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits Alarm (Signal)/ Lockout switch PowerNet Interlock Kit Field Mounted TBRDK Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 3 of Contacts per Single Accessory a/b 4a/4b 1m/1b m/b Shunt trip N/A Low energy shunt N/A Undervoltage release mechanism N/A Circuit Breaker Factory Install Suffix PowerNet and Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 3 Required of Wires 1 One 4-point accessory terminal block provided with circuit breaker when ordered factory installed or shipped from warehouse as separate item when ordered for field installation. See Digitrip RMS master connection diagram (IL 9C714). Installation of these kits restrict any other attachments from being installed in the RH pole. 3 Includes a ground fault alarm signal that can drive the ground fault alarm unit (catalog number GFAU) K-Frame PN ICK550K L-Frame PN ICK550L N-Frame PN ICK550N Circuit Breaker Factory Install Suffix K-Frame ZG ZGK550K L-Frame ZG ZGK550L N-Frame ZG ZGK550N Circuit Breaker Factory Install Suffix K-Frame ZGP ZGPK550K L-Frame ZGP ZGPK550L N-Frame ZGP ZGPK550N Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-93

294 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Technical Data and Specifications Alarm Switch F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1 Maximum Voltage Frequency Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 56 K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 67 L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 67 N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 8 R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 9j Maximum Current Amperes /60 Hz DC DC Single-Pole Circuit Breakers 15/50 50/60 Hz DC DC Dielectric Withstand Voltage Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC Auxiliary Switch F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz /60 Hz DC DC J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 5 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 6 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 78 Maximum Voltage Frequency /60 Hz 6 15 DC DC Maximum Current Amperes 1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 000 mechanical operations. 3 Non-inductive load. 4 Inductive (L/R = 0.06). 5 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 000 mechanical operations. 6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). 7 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 8 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. i Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 500 mechanical operations. j Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are red, black and blue. V4-T-94 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

295 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 5 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 7 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 7 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 8 Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage /60 Hz DC DC Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). 3 Non-inductive load. 4 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 000 mechanical operations. 5 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 6 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-95

296 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Shunt Trip F-Frame and HMCP Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 13 Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Voltage (V) Frequency (Hz) Supply Voltage (V) Minimum Operating Voltage (V) I p (A) I rms at 0.5 (A) I rms at 0.33s (A) VA One Minute Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) SNT1LP03K or SNT1LT03K / DC SNT1LP08K or SNT1LT08K / DC SNT1LP1K or SNT1LT1K / DC SNT1LP18K or SNT1LT18K / DC Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds. 3 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. V4-T-96 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

297 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 J-Frame and HMCP (J) Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 13 Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Voltage Frequency Supply Voltage Minimum Operating I p I rms at I rms at One Minute Dielectric (V) (Hz) (V) Voltage (V) (A) 0.5 (A) 0.33s (A) VA Withstand Voltage (V) SNTP04K or SNTT04K / DC SNTP06K or SNTT06K / DC SNTP11K or SNTT11K / DC SNTP14K or SNTT14K / DC SNTP18K or SNTT18K / Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds. 3 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 000 mechanical operations. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-97

298 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C K-Frame and HMCP (K) Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 33 Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Voltage Frequency Supply Voltage Minimum Operating I p I rms at I rms at One Minute Dielectric (V) (Hz) (V) Voltage (V) (A) 0.5 (A) 0.33s (A) VA Withstand Voltage (V) SNT3P04K or SNT3T04K / DC SNT3P06K or SNT3T06K / DC SNT3P11K or SNT3T11K / DC SNT3P14K or SNT3T14K / DC SNT3P18K or SNT3T18K / Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 8 milliseconds. 3 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. V4-T-98 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

299 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 L-Frame and HMCP (L) and M-Frame Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 13 Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Voltage Frequency Supply Voltage Minimum Operating I p I rms at I rms at One Minute Dielectric (V) (Hz) (V) Voltage (V) (A) 0.5 (A) 0.33s (A) VA Withstand Voltage (V) SNT4P03K or SNT4T03K / DC SNT4P05K SNT4T05K / SNT4P11K or SNT4T11K / SNT4P14K or SNT4T14K / DC SNT4P18K or SNT4T18K / SNT4P3K SNT4T3K DC SNT4P6K or SNT4T6K DC Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds. 3 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-99

300 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C N-Frame and HMCP (N) Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 13 Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Voltage Frequency Supply Voltage Minimum Operating I p I rms at I rms at One Minute Dielectric (V) (Hz) (V) Voltage (V) (A) 0.5 (A) 0.33s (A) VA Withstand Voltage (V) SNT5LP03K or SNT5LT03K / DC SNT5LP05K SNT5LT05K / SNT5LP11K or SNT5LT11K / SNT5LP14K or SNT5LT14K / DC SNT5LP18K or SNT5LT18K / SNT5LP3K SNT5LT3K DC SNT5LP6K or SNT5LT6K DC Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds. 3 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. V4-T-300 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

301 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 R-Frame Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Voltage Frequency Supply Voltage Minimum Operating I p I rms at I rms at One Minute Dielectric (V) (Hz) (V) Voltage (V) (A) 0.5 (A) 0.33s (A) VA Withstand Voltage (V) SNT6P03K 4 50/ DC SNT6P05K / SNT6P11K / SNT6P14K / DC SNT6P18K / SNT6P3K DC SNT6P6K DC Approximate unlatching time of 6 milliseconds. Average circuit breaker contact total opening time approximately 6 milliseconds, at rated voltage. 3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations and 500 mechanical operations. 4 Shunt trip can be operated up to a maximum of six times per minute. 5 Maximum operating voltage 110% of maximum voltage range rating. 6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are yellow and white. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-301

302 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Undervoltage Release Mechanism F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1 50/60 Hz DC Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 3 50/60 Hz DC Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 000 mechanical operations. 3 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton. V4-T-30 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

303 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1 50/60 Hz DC Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 1 50/60 Hz DC Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Note 1 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-303

304 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1 50/60 Hz DC Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Note 1 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. V4-T-304 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

305 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 R-Frame AC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 1 R-Frame DC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 1 1 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 500 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are orange and brown. 3 UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the response time shown. 4 Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before circuit breaker contacts begin to separate. 5 For 1 minute. Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Approximate Operating Time (ms) Supply Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup Minimum Initiation Maximum Circuit Dielectric Suffix Voltage (V) Voltage (V) Minimum Maximum Voltage (V) Max. VA UVR Response 3 Circuit Breaker Contact Separation 4 Breaker Contact Opening Withstand Voltage (V) 5 0/0K /03K /05K /08K /11K /9K Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Approximate Operating Time (ms) Supply Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup Minimum Initiation Maximum Circuit Dielectric Suffix Voltage (V) Voltage (V) Minimum Maximum Voltage (V) Max. VA UVR Response 3 Circuit Breaker Contact Separation 4 Breaker Contact Opening Withstand Voltage (V) 5 0/0K /1K /3K /6K /8K Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-305

306 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Series C External Accessories Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( Amperes) F-Frame (10 5 Amperes) J-Frame (70 50 Amperes) K-Frame ( Amperes) L-Frame ( Amperes) M-Frame ( Amperes) N-Frame ( Amperes) R-Frame ( Amperes) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-310 V4-T-38 V4-T-39 V4-T-330 External Accessories Product Overview End Cap Kit The end cap kit slides onto the line or load conductor of the circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for the conductor to accept a ring terminal or other bolt-on connector. The end cap kit is available with English and metric thread sizes. (Field installation only.) Listed per UL File E7819. Keeper Nut The keeper nut slides onto the line or load conductor of the circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for the conductor to accept a ring terminal or other bolt-on connector. The keeper nut is available with English and metric thread sizes. Screws and washers are supplied by customer. (Field installation only.) Listed per UL File E7819. L-, M-, N-Frames Not required. Terminals are threaded. J-Frame Plug Nut The plug nut is used in applications where screwconnected ring-type terminals are preferred to connect cables to circuit breaker conductors. The plug nut is press-fit into the opening in the circuit breaker terminal conductor. Screws and washers are supplied by customer. Terminal Adapter Control Wire Terminal Kit The control wire terminal kit provides a means to tap off control power from a main disconnect, using the provided male end of a quick disconnect. For use with steel or stainless steel terminals only. Note: Terminal Kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Multiwire Connectors Eaton s field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side (OFF) end. Terminal Shields Terminal shields provide protection against accidental contact with live line side terminations. Terminal shields are fabricated from high dielectric insulating material and fasten over the front terminal access openings. Small openings in the shields provide limited access to the terminals for tightening connectors. (Field installation only.) Rear Fed Terminals. Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit. number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal. V4-T-306 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

307 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Terminal End Covers The terminal end covers are designed for use in motor control center applications where, because of confined spaces, line side conductors are normally custom fitted. The molded end covers are made of high dielectric glasspolyester and slide over the line ends of the circuit breaker. Close fitting conductor openings are molded into the end covers. The end cover and circuit breaker case fit together to form terminal compartments that isolate discharged ionizing gases during circuit breaker tripping. Terminal end covers are available with two conductor opening diameters, 0.5-inch (6.4 mm) and inch (10.4 mm), and are listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Interphase Barriers The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance between circuit breaker poles for special termination applications. The barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that are installed in the molded slots between the terminals. (Field installation only.) Two per package. Base Mounting Plate Suitable for mounting six single-pole circuit breakers. DIN Rail Adapter For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 35 x 15 mm per DIN EN500. Adapter mounting screws included are for use with twoand three-pole circuit breakers. Adapters for singlepole circuit breakers clip into the base molding. Key Operated Attachment Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Non-Padlockable Handle Block The non-padlockable handle block secures the circuit breaker handle in either the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle block holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The device is positioned over the circuit breaker handle and secured by a setscrew to deter accidental operation of the circuit breaker handle. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Padlockable Handle Padlockable Handle Lock The device is positioned in the cover opening to prevent handle movement. Will accommodate one 5/16-inch (8 mm) padlock. Snap-on Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp The snap-on padlockable handle lock allows the handle to be locked in the OFF or ON position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) This device was designed for use on the single-pole circuit breaker, but may be used on one-, two-, threeand four-pole styles. The handle lock snaps onto the escutcheon area of the handle with an optional retaining screw for added secureness. The handle lock will accommodate one padlock with a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackle. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp The padlockable handle lock hasp allows the handle to be locked in the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The hasp mounts on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline. The cover is predrilled on both sides of the operating handle so that the hasp can be mounted on either side of the handle. The hasp will accommodate up to three padlocks with 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackles, one per circuit breaker. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Cylinder Lock The cylinder lock internally blocks the trip bar in the tripped position to prevent the circuit breaker from being switched to ON. The cylinder lock is factory installed in the left pole only of the circuit breaker cover. Other internally mounted accessories cannot be installed in the same pole as the cylinder lock. (Factory installation only.) Key Interlock Kit (Lock Not Included) The key interlock is used to externally lock the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. When the key interlock is locked, an extended deadbolt blocks movement of the circuit breaker handle. Uniquely coded keys are removable only with the deadbolt extended. Each coded key controls a group of circuit breakers for a given specific customer installation. The key interlock assembly is Underwriters Laboratories listed for field installation under UL File E7819 and consists of a mounting kit and a purchaser supplied deadbolt lock. The mounting kit comprises a mounting plate, which is secured to the circuit breaker cover in either the left- or right-pole position, key interlock mounting screws, and a wire seal. Specific mounting kits are required for individual key interlock types. Sliding Bar Interlock The sliding bar interlock provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent three-pole circuit breakers. It is installed on the enclosure cover between the circuit breakers. When the sliding bar interlock handle is moved from one side to the other, a bar extends to alternately block movement of the circuit breaker handles and prevents both circuit breakers from being switched to ON at the same time. Sliding bar interlocks are not UL listed. (Field installation only.) Walking Beam Interlock The walking beam Interlock provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent circuit breakers of the same pole configuration. The walking beam interlock mounts on a bracket behind and between the circuit breakers. A plunger on each end of the beam is inserted through an access hole in the back plate and base of each circuit breaker. The walking beam interlock prevents both circuit breakers from being switched ON at the same time. If a walking beam interlock is installed, the wiring troughs in the back of the circuit breaker case are blocked by the plungers and cannot be used for cross wiring. Factory modified circuit breakers are required for this application. UL File E Electrical Operator The electrical (solenoid) operator is a single solenoid mechanism that enables local and remote circuit breaker ON, OFF, and reset switching. The electrical operator is mounted on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline of the circuit breaker. The electrical operator uses a unique bi-stable latch that allows the device to operate using one solenoid. The accessory provides high-speed switching with a maximum operating time of 5 cycles (80 ms), making it suitable for generator synchronizing applications. Means are provided for remote electrical operation and for local manual operation. A special slide includes provisions for padlocking the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. The slide will accept three padlock shackles with a maximum diameter of 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) each. An interlock electrically disconnects the solenoid when the electrical operator cover is removed. The rating data tables provide electrical rating data for the electrical (solenoid) operator. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-307

308 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C The electrical (motor) operator allows the circuit s breaker to be opened, closed or reset remotely. It also has a lock-off capability and provisions for manual operation. The electrical (motor) operator contains a reversible motor connected to a ball screw. The ball screw drives the circuit breaker handle. Limit switches and relays are used to control the motor. Plug-In Adapters Plug-in adapters simplify installation and front removal of circuit breakers. Individual line and load plug-in adapters are available for rear connection applications on two-, three-, and four-pole circuit breakers. Common mounting plates for lineand load-end adapters are available. One plug-in adapter kit is required for line-end and one for load-end. Plug-in adapters are UL approved unless otherwise noted. Rear Connecting Studs Rear connecting studs are available in several sizes to accommodate specific fixedmounted circuit breaker applications. Each rear connecting stud assembly consists of one stud and one tube. To maintain proper clearances between poles, select alternate long and short stud assemblies for circuit breakers with more than one pole. One assembly is required for line-end and one for load-end of each pole. Tubes must be ordered separately. Connecting studs are available only with English thread sizes. Note: Not UL listed. Panelboard Connecting Straps Panelboard connecting straps are used to connect the circuit breaker terminals to the panelboard bus. The panelboard connecting straps are available with various ratings for outside and center poles. (Field installation only.) Panelboard connecting straps are available to meet the needs of most standard panelboard applications. Style numbers for mounting brackets for CDP panelboard installations are also included. Note: Not UL listed. Refer to panelboard manufacturer for compatibility. Type LFD Current Limiter The LFD current limiter is an accessory that bolts to the load end of a standard FDB or FD thermal-magnetic circuit breaker, providing 00,000 A interrupting capacity at up to 600 Vac. LFD current limiters for thermal-magnetic and electronic circuit breakers are listed with Underwriters Laboratories under File E4739. Ground Fault Alarm Unit The ground fault alarm unit is a remotely mounted device with a combination indicating light/test button that will light when the breaker trips or alarms on ground fault. The ground fault alarm unit requires a separate 10 Vac power source to power the light and the internal relay, which has 1NO and 1NC contacts for remote indication. The ground fault alarm unit can be panel mounted for ordering with an optional face mounting bracket. For use on Digitrip 310 only, K- through N- Frame. IQ Energy Sentinel The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly accurate, microprocessor-based, breaker-mounted device designed to monitor power and energy readings. It represents an alternative to watt meters, watt-hour meters, and watt demand meters. Key advantages include savings in space, lower installation costs, and remote monitoring capability. The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of a Series C F-Frame (150 ampere) circuit breaker. It can be applied on threephase, four-wire systems, or single-phase, three-wire systems with voltage connected through Phases A and C. For more information, see Descriptive Bulletin Potential Transformer Module The potential transformer module is required for the Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to provide a voltage input to allow the trip unit to monitor power and energy as well as power factor. The potential transformer module is a 6 VA transformer with a primary voltage input of up to 600 volt line to line. Three 0.1 ampere fuses are provided on the primary of the transformer and can be used for isolation purposes during dielectric testing. The device is normally panel mounted and can feed up to 16 OPTIM trip units. Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit The solid-state (electronic) portable test kit provides verification of performance of all ratings of Digitrip 310 electronic trip units installed in circuit breakers while in service under varying load and/or phase imbalance. The test kit operates on 10-volt, 50/60 Hz power; it includes complete instructions and test times for testing long time, short time/instantaneous operation and optional ground fault operation of the circuit breaker. V4-T-308 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

309 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Breaker Interface Module (BIM) The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) is a panel mounted user interface device that is mounted on the front of an electrical assembly or at a remote location. The BIM is used to access, configure, test and display information for OPTIM trip units and other devices. The BIM consists of four display windows, eight function buttons, 18 LEDs, and a graphical time/current curve to provide breaker status, operational information, protection status and energy monitoring. A 4 Vdc power supply is required to provide power to the BIM. This is supplied by the switchboard builder to Eaton s specifications. The BIM is a member of Eaton s PowerNet family of communicating devices that connects OPTIM trip units, Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip units and energy sentinels as a subnetwork system. The BIM can also be connected to a main network via a PONI module to PowerNet software. Digitrip OPTIMizer The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-held programmer that is used to access, configure, test and display information from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of an OPTIM trip unit via an eight-pin telephone jack and is powered by a nine-volt battery or the auxiliary power module. One highlighted feature is the Copy and Download commands. Setting up multiple OPTIM trips can be finished in minutes and with no errors. An Auxiliary Power Module connection provides a trip test when control power is not present at the breaker. The OPTIMizer is supplied as a standard package to include the programmer, the eightpin connection cord, battery and carrying case. The auxiliary power module is optional. Auxiliary Power Module The auxiliary power module is a power supply requiring 10 Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz that provides a 3 Vdc output. The auxiliary power module provides control power for testing an OPTIM trip unit when other means of control power is not available or for continuous OPTIMizer operation versus temporary with a battery. The auxiliary power module connects into the top of the Digitrip OPTIMizer via a keyed receptacle. The main application for the auxiliary power module would be for the testing of a standalone non-communicating OPTIM breaker that ordinarily would not have control power. Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display The Cause of Trip Display can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides breaker information through an LCD screen, such as cause of trip, phrase current, ground current and low loads. The display is ideal for troubleshooting common trips such as ground fault, long delay, and instantaneous/short delay. The DIGIVIEW version will provide a local display at the breaker without additional wiring by connecting directly onto the trip unit. The DIGIVIEWR06 version has a 6 foot cable that allows users to mount the display on the outside of an enclosure door and connect to the trip unit that is contained inside the enclosure. Cause of Trip LED Module The Cause of Trip LED Module can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides a cause of trip indication via LED. The Cause of Trip LED Module connects directly onto the trip unit. When the breaker trips, the module indicates the cause of trip (long delay, short delay, instantaneous and ground) via LED indication. The module is reset after the breaker is reset. Note: The OPTIMizer can work off of 3 Vdc control power, although 4 Vdc is the standard on OPTIM breakers. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-309

310 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Product Selection Termination Hardware End Cap Kit End Cap Kit End Cap Kit Thread Type Two-Pole F-Frame (5A) Termination Hardware Keeper Nut F-Frame Keeper Nut K-Frame Keeper Nut F-Frame Keeper Nut K-Frame Keeper Nut Thread Size Note L-, M-, N-Frames not required. Terminals are threaded. Imperial 10 3 KPEK1 Metric M 5 KPEKM1 Three-Pole F-Frame (5A) Imperial 10 3 KPEK1 Metric M 5 KPEKM1 Four-Pole F-Frame (5A) Imperial 10 3 KPEK14 Metric M 5 KPEKM14 Three-Pole J-Frame Imperial KPEK Metric M 8 KPEKM Four-Pole J-Frame Imperial KPEK4 Metric M 8 KPEKM4 Three-Pole K-Frame Imperial KPEK3 Metric M 8 KPEKM3 Four-Pole K-Frame Imperial KPEK34 Metric M 8 KPEKM34 Three-Pole L-Frame Imperial KPEK4 Metric M-8 KPEKM4 Four-Pole L-Frame Imperial KPEK44 Metric M 8 KPEKM44 Thread Type Thread Size Imperial 10 3 KPR1A Metric M 5 KPR1AM Thread Type Thread Size Package of 1 (Priced Individually) Line/Load End Package of 3 Imperial Line KPR3A Load KPR3B Metric M 8 Line KPR3AM Load KPR3BM V4-T-310 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

311 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Termination Hardware J-Frame Plug Nut K-Frame Terminal Adapter J-Frame Plug Nut Thread Type K-Frame Terminal Adapter 1 F-Frame Ordering Information Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually. F-Frame Kit F-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit Maximum Description Amperes J- and K-Frame Ordering Information Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually. J- and K-Frame Kit J- and K-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit L-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit 1 K-Frame terminal adapter for use in replacing LB/DA breakers. Not for use with T50KB terminals. 3 Individually packed. 4 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 5 Two-pole kit. 6 Three-pole kit. 7 Four-pole kit. Thread Size Package of 6 Imperial PLN Metric M 6 PLNM Line/Load End Line and load TAD3 Package of 1 control wire terminal tangs. 150 FCWTK 5 FCWTK5 Description Package of 1 control wire terminal tangs. AWG Wire Range/ Conductors Al/Cu 3/0 350 kcmil () Cu kcmil () Al/Cu kcmil () Al/Cu kcmil () Al/Cu kcmil () Metric Wire Range mm KCWTK TA60LDCW T60LDCW TA603LDKCW TA603LDKCW TA603LDKCW 47 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-311

312 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Termination Hardware Multiwire Connectors G-Frame Control Wire Terminal Description Control wire terminal (kit of 1) 565B38G01 GCWTK Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) Maximum Amperes Rear Fed Terminals Wires per Terminal Base Mounting Hardware Ordering Information Hardware for surface mounting of circuit breakers is supplied only on request. Hardware consists of mounting screws and lockwashers. Order hardware for circuit breaker pole configurations as required. Mounting Hardware Wire Size Range AWG Cu Kit 1 G-Frame TA100G3K TA100G6K F-Frame TA150F3K TA150F6K J-Frame TA50J3K TA50J6K K-Frame /0 3TA400K3K TA400K6K Frame Maximum Amperes Wire Size Range AWG Cu 1 FD /0 TA150FDRF /0 3TA150FDRF kcmil TA5FDRF kcmil 3TA5FDRF KD kcmil TA350KRF kcmil 3TA350KRF MDL 800 3/0 MAX (3) TA800MDLRF 800 3/0 MAX (3) 3TA800MDLRF Screw Length in Inches (mm) G-Frame x.63 (3.5 x 66.7 mm) Std. 64B375G x 3.00 (3.5 x 76. mm) 8703C80G05 1 When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit. number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal. GD breakers require special tapping for multiwire lugs, as described in the IL or use with standard aluminum collars. V4-T-31 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

313 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Imperial Thread Mounting Hardware of Poles F-Frame Metric Thread Mounting Hardware Note Description 1 One set of hardware for two circuit breakers. Type of Mounting x inch pan-head steel screws, lockwashers and clamps Individual 64B375G01 Group 1 64B375G x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual 418B80G01 3, x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH1 J-Frame, 3, x.75 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH K-Frame, 3, x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH3 L-Frame, 3, x 1.5 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers Individual BMH4 M-Frame, x 1.5 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers Individual BMH5 N-Frame, 3, x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH5 R-Frame Supplied by customer of Poles F-Frame Description Type of Mounting 1 M4 0.7 x 80 mm pan-head steel screws, lockwashers, and clamps Individual 418B80G09 Group 1 418B80G10 M4 0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual 418B80G11 3, 4 M4 0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH1M J-Frame, 3, 4 M6 0.7 x 70 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMHM K-Frame, 3, 4 M6 0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH3M L-Frame, 3 Individual BMH4M M-Frame, 3 Individual BMH4M N-Frame, 3 Individual BMH5M R-Frame Supplied by customer Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-313

314 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Terminal Shields F-Frame J-Frame G-Frame Terminal Shield Units in Package 10 GTSK3 F-Frame Terminal Shield J-Frame Terminal Shield Standard (Package of 10) (Priced Individually) of Poles Location 1 Line 65B9G06 Line 65B9G07 3 Line 65B9G08 410B95G01 4 Line 65B9G09 410B95G0 of Poles (Package of 10) Location, 3 Line End 166C07G01 4 Line End 6631C01G01, 3 Load End 6641C16G01 4 Load End 6641C16G0 Special For Use When Electrical Operator is Mounted on Circuit Breaker V4-T-314 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

315 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 K-Frame K-Frame Terminal Shield of Poles Location, 3 Line TS33LN 4 Line TS34LN 3 Load TS33LD L-Frame Terminal Shield (Package of 1) 314C40G05 M-Frame Terminal Shield (Package of 1) 08B966G01 N-Frame Terminal Shield (Package of 1) NTS3K Terminal End Covers Ordering Information The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity (one per circuit breaker) when ordering. F-Frame F-Frame Terminal End Covers Conductor Opening Diameter in Inches (mm) (Package of 10) 0.5 (6.35 mm) TEC (10.41 mm) TEC Interphase Barriers Ordering Information Two per package. Interphase Barrier Base Mounting Plate Base Mounting Plate DIN Rail Adapter DIN Rail Adapter Key Operated Attachment Key Operated Attachment Interphase Barriers Frame F IPB1 J, K IPB3 L IPB4 M IPB4 N IPB5 Base Mounting Plate G-Frame GD/GHC of Units in Package DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC All Metal DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC Key Operated Attachment G-Frame GD/GHC Note 1 For use on three-pole breakers only. 1 07B513G01 of Poles of Units in Package 1, 10 15C79G C79G0 1 of Poles of Units in Package 3 1 EGGDDIN of Units in Package 10 GKOA Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-315

316 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Lock Dog (Non- Padlockable) Handle Ties Non-Padlockable Handle Block Non-Padlockable Handle Block Padlockable Handle Padlockable Handle Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB/GMCP of Units in Package 1 194C01H01 Handle Tie Series C, F-Frame of Poles of Units in Package 10 HTBFDP 3 10 HTBFD3P Handle Tie Series C, G-Frame of Poles of Units in Package 10 HTBGDP 3 10 HTBGD3P Non-Padlockable Handle Block Frame F LKD1 J, K LKD3 L, M, N LKD4 Padlockable G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB of Units in Package C77G C77G C77G06 Padlockable Handle Lock Padlockable Handle Lock Padlockable Handle Lock Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Frame G GPHBOFF J, K PHB3 Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Frame F 1 Accepts 0.85 Lock Shank. Padlockable in the OFF position only. PHL1 V4-T-316 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

317 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Cylinder Lock Cylinder Lock Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Description F-Frame Single-pole breakers PHL1 Two-, three- and four-pole breakers PLK1 For left side mounting PLK1LOFF For right side mounting PLK1ROFF J, K-Frames Two-, three- and four-pole breakers PLK3 For left side mounting PLK3LOFF 1 For right side mounting PLK3ROFF 1 L-Frame (Side Mounted) Lock ON or OFF HLK4 Lock OFF only (left-hand mount) HLK4LOFF 1 L-Frame (Top Mounted) Lock ON or OFF HLK4S Lock OFF only HLK4SOFF 1 M-Frame Lock ON or OFF HLK4 Lock OFF only (left-hand mount) HLK4LOFF 1 M-Frame (Vertical Mounting) Lock ON/OFF HLK4S Lock OFF only HLK4SOFF N-Frame Side mounted PLK5 Top mounted (ON/OFF) PLK5S Top mounted (OFF only) PLK5SOFF 1 R-Frame Lock ON/OFF HLK6 Lock OFF only HLK6OFF 1 Cylinder Lock Frame F, J, K Order by description Note 1 For padlockable handle lock hasp to padlock handle in OFF position only, order either catalog number. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-317

318 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Key Interlock Kit Ordering Information Key interlock kits contain the necessary interface and hardware to install a trapped key interlock from one of the listed manufacturers. Key interlocks are not installed or supplied as part of the breaker, and must be obtained separately from the lock manufacturer or through the manufacturer of the equipment on which the breaker will be installed. Select the mounting kit catalog number to match the type of lock used. Key Interlock Kit Key Interlock Kit (Trapped Key Interlock) Lock Manufacturer F-Frame Lock Type Bolt Projection in Withdrawn Position in Inches (mm) Kit Superior B (9.5) KYK1 Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK1 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK1 J, K-Frames Superior B (9.5) KYK3 Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK3 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK3 L-, M-, N-Frames Superior B (9.5) KYK4 Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK4 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK4 R-Frame Superior B (5.4) KYK6 Kirk F 1.0 (5.4) KYK6 Castell 1 K or QK 1.0 (5.4) CTK6 JG-Frame Superior B (9.5) KYKJG Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYKJG Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTKJG LG-Frame Superior B (9.5) KYKLG Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYKLG Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTKLG Note 1 When ordering Castell Interlock, it is necessary for customer to specify that the mounting bolt holes must be 10 mm in diameter V4-T-318 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

319 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Sliding Bar Interlock Ordering Information The sliding bar interlock is available for mounting between two adjacent threepole circuit breakers with circuit breakers centerline Sliding Bar Interlock Sliding Bar Interlock Walking Beam Interlock Ordering Information The walking beam interlock is available for mounting between two adjacent circuit breakers spaced 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) apart and having the same pole configuration. The two circuit breakers must be factory modified to accept the walking beam interlock assembly (suitable for use with either two-, three- or four-pole circuit breakers). Walking Beam Interlock Walking Beam Interlock Note 1 Three-pole only. spacing as indicated in table and enclosure front panel thickness of 1/8 or 3/16 inch (3. or 4.8 mm). (For field installation only.) Frame Centerline Spacing in Inches (mm) F 4.19 (106.4) SBK1 J 4.38 (111.3) SBK K 5.75 (146.0) SBK3 L, M 8.50 (15.9) SBK4 N 8.50 (15.9) SBK5 Frame F WBL1 K WBL3 L, M WBL4A N WBL5 WBL6 R 1 With properly modified circuit breakers, the walking beam interlock is suitable for field installation. Order circuit breakers specifying modification for walking beam (0% price adder) and select walking beam interlock from table below. Circuit breakers and walking beam interlock are boxed and shipped separately. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-319

320 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Electrical Operator F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Terminal Block 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Lead Voltage Frequency 10 AC EOP1T07 EOP1P07 40 AC EOP1T11 EOP1P11 F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator 1 Voltage Frequency 10 50/60 Hz AC MOPFD10C 4 DC MOPFD4D 15 DC MOPFD10C /60 Hz MOPFD40C 0 50 DC MOPFD40C K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Base Mounting Kit Note 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Lead J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Terminal Block Operating Voltage Frequency 10 50/60 Hz AC EOPT /60 Hz AC EOPT11 K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Terminal Block Operating Voltage Frequency 10 50/60 Hz AC EOP3MT /60 Hz AC EOP3MT11 Frame K BBMK3 L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator (310 and OPTIM) Terminal Block Operating Voltage Frequency 10 50/60 Hz EOP4MT /60 Hz EOP4MT /60 Hz EOP4MT11A /60 Hz EOP4MT15 15 DC EOP4MT6 4 DC EOP4MT1 1 Motor operators MOP1P07, MOP1P03DC, MOP1P05DC and MOP1P07DC are replaced by MOPFD motor operators listed in table. V4-T-30 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

321 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Pigtail Leads Operating Voltage Frequency 10 50/60 Hz EOP5T /60 Hz EOP5T /60 Hz EOP5T /60 Hz EOP5T15 4 DC EOP5T1 48 DC EOP5T 15 DC EOP5T6 R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Factory-Installed Terminal Block Operating Voltage Frequency 10 50/60 Hz EOP6T08K 40 50/60 Hz EOP6T11K 48 DC EOP6T1K Plug-In Adapters F-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) J-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) K-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) 600 Vac Maximum ampere maximum. Use three-pole mounting plate for two-pole circuit breaker. Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole D13G D13G0 1480D13G07 1 Mounting plate 176C511H01 507C047H01 Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) Terminal End Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 50 Line 160C86G05 160C86G06 131C67G01 Load 160C86G07 160C86G08 131C67G0 One line and one load 506C144G7 506C144G8 Mounting plate PMP3 Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 400 PAD3 PAD33 Mounting plate PMP33 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-31

322 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C L-Frame (Threaded Stud Type) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) M-Frame (Flat Bar Type) 600 Vac Maximum N-Frame (Flat Bar Type) Plug-In Adapters Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 600 (threaded stud type) 506C059G03 506C059G04 PAD (flat bar type) 188C19G01 188C19G0 6636C55H01 Mounting plate 504C84H01 504C84H01 Two-Pole Three-Pole Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) D53G05 614D53G06 Mounting plate 190C73H01 190C73H01 Two-Pole Three-Pole Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) D53G03 614D53G04 Mounting plate 190C73H01 190C73H01 Frame of Poles Standard Certification FD 3 IEC PAD3F FD 4 IEC PAD4F JD 3 IEC PAD3JD KD 3 IEC PAD3K LD 3 IEC PAD3LD LD 4 IEC PAD4LD V4-T-3 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

323 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Rear Connecting Studs F-Frame 1 Stud Ampere Rating J-Frame 1 K-Frame 1 Stud Tube For 15 to 100 Ampere Circuit Breakers 100 A short 451D874G01 3B9446H0 100 A short 451D874G01 3B9446H1 100 A short 451D874G01 3B9446H 100 A short 451D874G01 3B9446H3 100 A long 451D874G0 3B9446H4 100 A long 451D874G0 3B9446H5 100 A long 451D874G0 3B9446H6 100 A long 451D874G0 3B9446H7 For 110 to 5 Ampere Circuit Breakers 5A short 374D883G01 374D883H06 5A short 374D883G01 374D883H07 5A short 374D883G01 374D883H08 5A short 374D883G01 374D883H09 5A long 374D883G0 374D883H10 5A long 374D883G0 374D883H11 5A long 374D883G0 374D883H1 5A long 374D883G0 374D883H13 Stud Ampere Rating Stud Tube 50A short 5010D3G01 456D983H05 50A short 5010D3G01 456D983H06 50A short 5010D3G01 456D983H07 50A long 5010D3G0 5010D3H05 50A long 5010D3G0 5010D3H06 50A long 5010D3G0 5010D3H07 Stud Ampere Rating Stud Standard Tube 400 A short 664C14G0 313C909H A short 664C14G04 313C909H A short 664C14G06 313C909H A long 664C14G03 313C909H0 400 A long 664C14G05 313C909H1 400 A long 664C14G07 313C909H L-Frame Ordering Information Stud 314C960G07 314C960G08 314C960G09 M-Frame Ordering Information 1 Stud Ampere Rating N-Frame Ordering Information 1 Note 1 Not UL listed. Stud 5 314C960G C960G C960G C960G C960G C960G C960G C960G C960G C960G1 Stud Ampere Rating Stud BG BG BG B375G B375G03 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-33

324 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Panelboard Connecting Straps F-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Pole Connector Type Bus Continuous Spacing Current Center Outside in Inches (mm) Rating (Amperes).75 (69.9) B14G0 673B14G09.75 (69.9) B14G0 673B14G10.75 (69.9) B14G04 673B14G (88.9) C7G01 153C7G (88.9) C73G03 153C73G (88.9) C73G01 153C73G05 F-Frame Mounting Bracket of Poles 64B600H0 3 64B600H01 J-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Pole Connector Type Bus Continuous Spacing Current Center Outside in Inches (mm) Rating (Amperes) 3.50 (88.9) D6G01 600D6G0 K-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Pole Connector Type Bus Continuous Spacing Current Center Outside in Inches (mm) Rating (Amperes) 3.50 (88.9) B78G0 41B77G01 K-Frame Mounting Bracket of Poles, 3 08B64H01 V4-T-34 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

325 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 L-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Pole Connector Type Continuous Current Center Outside Rating (Amperes) B609G01 506C05G01 L-Frame Mounting Bracket of Poles, 3 08B97H01 M-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) M-Frame Mounting Bracket Connector Type N-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps N-Frame Mounting Bracket (Four Required) Pole Connector Type 3.50 (88.9) 800 Short 314C996G01 Medium 314C996G0 Long 314C996G03 315C70H01 Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current Rating (Amperes) Connector Type Pole Connector Type 3.50 (88.9) 100 Short 505C606G04 Medium 505C606G05 Long 505C606G06 315C70H01 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-35

326 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Type LFD Current Limiter The LFD current limiter is an accessory that bolts to the load end of a standard FDB or FD thermal-magnetic and electronic circuit breaker, providing 00,000 A Type LFD Current Limiter Ground Fault Alarm Unit The ground fault alarm unit is a remotely mounted device with a combination indicating light/test button that will light when the breaker trips or alarms on ground fault. The ground fault alarm unit requires a separate 10 Vac power source to power the Ground Fault Alarm Unit interrupting capacity at up to 600 Vac. LFD current limiters for thermal-magnetic circuit breakers are listed with Underwriters Laboratories under File E4739. Type LFD Current Limiter Circuit Breaker Rating Amperes LFD3070R LFD3150R GF Alarm Unit Description Ground fault alarm unit Face mounting bracket IQ Energy Sentinel The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly accurate, microprocessor-based, breaker-mounted device designed to monitor power and energy readings. It represents an alternative to watt meters, watt-hour meters, and watt demand meters. Key advantages include savings in space, lower installation costs, and remote monitoring capability. light and the internal relay, which has 1NO and 1NC contacts for remote indication. The ground fault alarm unit can be panel mounted for ordering with an optional face mounting bracket. For use on Digitrip 310 only, K- through N-Frame. GFAU 164C67G01 The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of a Series C F-Frame (150 ampere) circuit breaker. It can be applied on three-phase, four-wire systems, or singlephase, three-wire systems with voltage connected through Phases A and C. For more information, see Descriptive Bulletin Potential Transformer Module The potential transformer module is required for the Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to provide a voltage input to allow the trip unit to monitor power and energy as well as power factor. The potential transformer module is a 6 VA transformer with a primary voltage input of up to 600 volt Potential Transformer Module line to line. Three 0.1 ampere fuses are provided on the primary of the transformer and can be used for isolation purposes during dielectric testing. The device is normally panel mounted and can feed up to 16 OPTIM trip units. Potential Transformer Module Description Potential transformer module Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit The solid-state (electronic) 50/60 Hz power; it includes portable test kit provides complete instructions and verification of performance of test times for testing long all ratings of Digitrip 310 time, short time/ electronic trip units installed instantaneous operation in circuit breakers while in and optional ground fault service under varying load operation of the circuit and/or phase imbalance. The breaker. test kit operates on 10-volt, Portable Test Kit Description Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit DOPTMLN STK V4-T-36 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

327 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Breaker Interface Module (BIM) The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) is a panel mounted user interface device that is mounted on the front of an electrical assembly or at a remote location. The BIM is used to access, configure, test and display information for OPTIM trip units and other devices. The BIM consists of four display windows, eight function buttons, 18 LEDs, and a graphical time/current curve to provide breaker status, operational information, protection status and energy monitoring. A 4 Breaker Interface Module (BIM) Digitrip OPTIMizer The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-held programmer that is used to access, configure, test and display information from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of an OPTIM trip unit via an eight-pin telephone jack and is powered by a nine-volt battery or the auxiliary power module. One highlighted feature is the Copy and Download commands. Setting up multiple OPTIM trips can be finished in minutes and with no errors. An Auxiliary Power Module connection provides a trip test when control power is not present at the breaker. The OPTIMizer is supplied as a standard package to include Digitrip OPTIMizer Vdc power supply is required to provide power to the BIM. This is supplied by the switchboard builder to Eaton s specifications. The BIM is a member of Eaton s PowerNet family of communicating devices that connects OPTIM trip units, Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip units and energy sentinels as a subnetwork system. The BIM can also be connected to a main network via a PONI module to PowerNet software. Breaker Interface Module (BIM) BIMII Digitrip OPTIMizer OPTIMizer standard package the programmer, the eightpin connection cord, battery and carrying case. The auxiliary power module is optional. Note: 4 Vdc Power Supply A 4 Vdc power supply is required for all Digitrip OPTIM trip units that are required to communicate either on the main Eaton PowerNet network or as a subnetwork to a BIM. The breaker s load is 45 ma of current. Typically one power supply is required per switchboard and can provide control power to a BIM and the OPTIM trip units. The 4 Vdc power supply should be an isolated high quality power supply with a CE label, and is normally provided by the switchboard manufacturer to Eaton s recommendations. Auxiliary Power Module The auxiliary power module is a power supply requiring 10 Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz that provides a 3 Vdc output. The auxiliary power module provides control power for testing an OPTIM trip unit when other means of control power is not available or for continuous OPTIMizer operation versus temporary with a battery. The auxiliary Auxiliary Power Module Auxiliary Power Module PRTBAPMDV power module connects into the top of the Digitrip OPTIMizer via a keyed receptacle. The main application for the auxiliary power module would be for the testing of a standalone non-communicating OPTIM breaker that ordinarily would not have control power. Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display The Cause of Trip Display can The DIGIVIEW version will be field-installed on any provide a local display at the Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. breaker without additional The device provides breaker wiring by connecting directly information through an LCD onto the trip unit. The screen, such as cause of trip, DIGIVIEWR06 version has a phrase current, ground 6 foot cable that allows users current and low loads. The to mount the display on the display is ideal for outside of an enclosure door troubleshooting common and connect to the trip unit trips such as ground fault, that is contained inside the long delay, and enclosure. instantaneous/short delay. Cause of Trip LED Module The Cause of Trip LED Module can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides a cause of trip indication via LED. The Cause of Trip LED Module connects directly onto the trip unit. When the Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display DIGIVIEW DIGIVIEWR06 Cause of Trip LED Module TRIP-LED breaker trips, the module indicates the cause of trip (long delay, short delay, instantaneous and ground) via LED indication. The module is reset after the breaker is reset. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-37

328 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Accessories Flex Shaft Accessories (F- through R-Frame) NEMA 1 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft and C371 1 Handle Length in Inches (mm) Series C Rotary Accessories As an option, an auxiliary switch is offered so that the control panel builder may electrically indicate the status of the breaker. This accessory would be mounted on the mechanism and comes with 4-inch (609.6 mm) pigtail leads. Series C Auxiliary Switch 4 (101.6) C361KJ4 6 (15.4) C361KJ6 Roller Latch 3 C361KR 5108A61G01 Wire Seal The wire seal can be used to secure the cover on the trip unit to prevent adjustments after settings are confirmed. Wire Seal Description Wire seal 5108A03H01 1 Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters required for assembly. The 1/4-inch x 1/-inch (6.35 x 1.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied with these kits. 3 Third roller latch for use with 4- or 6-inch (101.6 or 15.4 mm) handle when 3 point latching is required. V4-T-38 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

329 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Technical Data and Specifications Electrical Operator F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1 Voltage 3 Frequency Inrush Current Amperes Maximum Operating Time 10 50/60 Hz AC 10 5 cycles (80 ms) /60 Hz AC 5 5 cycles (80 ms) F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 567 Voltage 3 Frequency Inrush Current Amperes 10 AC 4 DC 5 48 DC 3 15 DC J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1689 Voltage 3 Inrush Current Amperes Fuse Amperes Fuse Amperes 4 K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1689 Operating Voltage 3 Inrush Current Amperes Fuse Amperes L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 168j Operating Voltage 3 Inrush Current Amperes 10 AC AC AC 1 15 DC 1 4 DC 50 N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 16kl Operating Voltage 3 Frequency Inrush Current Amperes Fuse Amperes 10 50/60 Hz /60 Hz /60 Hz /60 Hz 4 DC DC DC 1 R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data mnop Operating Voltage q Frequency 10 50/60 Hz /60 Hz 7 48 DC 53 4 DC 58 Motor Inrush Current Amperes 1 UL listed under UL File E The electrical operator design is endurance tested for 8000 electrical operations. 3 Tolerance: +10%, 15% of nominal voltage. 4 Use current-limiting type fuse where required. 5 UL listed under UL File E Frequency: 50/60 Hz. 7 Maximum operating time: 3 seconds max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. 8 The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6000 electrical operations. 9 Maximum operating time: 5 cycles (80 ms). j Maximum operating time: 1 cycles. k The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for,500 electrical operations. l Maximum operating time: 1 cycles max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. m Operator is an intermittent duty service. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. n Electric Operating time at rated voltage; (a) To turn breaker ON 1/ second max. (b) To turn breaker OFF 1/ second max. o Motor operating temperature; Class A temperature limits apply. p A minimum 1 kva power source is recommended for motor operation. q Applied voltage should be no less than 85% or no more than 110% of rated voltage. For OPTIM trip, OPEOPCK kit required. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-39

330 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Rear Connecting Studs F-Frame 1 Stud Stud Panel Thickness Tube Length Tube Dimensions Ampere Rating A B C D E F For 15 to 100 Ampere Circuit Breakers 100 A short 451D874G (5.4) 1.06 (6.9) 3B9446H (9.1) 0.31 (7.9) A short 451D874G (17.5 to 3.8) 1.38 (34.9) 3B9446H (9.1) 0.31 (7.9) A short 451D874G (9.5 to 15.9) 1.69 (4.9) 3B9446H 3.63 (9.1) 0.31 (7.9) A short 451D874G (6.4 to 7.9).00 (50.8) 3B9446H (9.1) 0.31 (7.9) A long 451D874G (5.4) 3.44 (87.3) 3B9446H (155.6) 0.31 (7.9) A long 451D874G (17.5 to 3.8) 3.75 (95.) 3B9446H (155.6) 0.31 (7.9) A long 451D874G (9.5 to 15.9) 4.06 (103.1) 3B9446H (155.6) 0.31 (7.9) A long 451D874G (6.4 to 7.9) 4.38 (111.3) 3B9446H (155.6) 0.31 (7.9) 18 For 110 to 5 Ampere Circuit Breakers 5A short 374D883G (5.4) 1.06 (6.9) 374D883H (108.0) 0.44 (11.1) 14 5A short 374D883G (17.5 to 3.8) 1.38 (34.9) 374D883H (108.0) 0.44 (11.1) 14 5A short 374D883G (9.5 to 15.9) 1.69 (4.9) 374D883H (108.0) 0.44 (11.1) 14 5A short 374D883G (6.4 to 7.9).00 (50.8) 374D883H (108.0) 0.44 (11.1) 14 5A long 374D883G (5.4) 3.44 (87.3) 374D883H (190.5) 0.44 (11.1) 14 5A long 374D883G (17.5 to 3.8) 3.75 (95.) 374D883H (190.5) 0.44 (11.1) 14 5A long 374D883G (9.5 to 15.9) 4.06 (103.1) 374D883H (190.5) 0.44 (11.1) 14 5A long 374D883G (6.4 to 7.9) 4.38 (111.3) 374D883H (190.5) 0.44 (11.1) 14 F-Frame Mounting Panel Breaker Mounting Surface.75 (19.1) Note 1 Not UL listed..06 (1.5) A B E C D F Thread V4-T-330 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

331 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C.3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) J-Frame Stud Ampere Rating Stud Panel Thickness A Tube Length B C Tube 50A short 5010D3G ( ) 0.84 (1.4) 456D983H05 50A short 5010D3G ( ) 1.09 (7.7) 456D983H06 50A short 5010D3G ( ) 1.03 (6.) 456D983H07 50A long 5010D3G ( ) 3.88 (98.6) 5010D3H05 50A long 5010D3G ( ) 4.13 (104.9) 5010D3H06 50A long 5010D3G ( ) 4.38 (111.3) 5010D3H (7.9) 18 Thread Do Not Use More Than 10 Ft Lbs Torque to Tighten Nuts K-Frame 1 Stud Stud Panel Thickness Tube Length Standard Tube Dimensions Ampere Rating A B C D E F 400 A short 664C14G ( ) 0.84 (1.3) 313C909H (93.0) ( ) 400 A short 664C14G ( ) 1.09 (7.69) 313C909H A short 664C14G ( ) 1.03 (6.16) 313C909H A long 664C14G ( ) 3.78 (96.0) 313C909H0 400 A long 664C14G ( ) 4.03 (10.4) 313C909H (167.1) 400 A long 664C14G ( ) 4.8 (108.7) 313C909H Mounting Panel Note 1 Not UL listed. Breaker Breaker Mounting Surface Mounting Panel 0.06 (1.5) 1.67 (4.4) 1.59 (40.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.06 (1.5) A B A 0.03 (0.7) E C B D 3.63 (9.) 6.66 (169.) C F Thread 0.50 (1.7) 13 Thread Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-331

332 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Series C Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) L-Frame Stud Stud Length (A) 5.47 (138.9) 314C960G (0.4) 314C960G (65.9) 314C960G09 M-Frame Stud Ampere Rating N-Frame Diameter and Thread Extension Back of Breaker Stud (1.7) (93.0) 314C960G (19.1) (150.1) 314C960G (19.1) (13.6) 314C960G (19.1) (77.0) 314C960G (5.4) (150.1) 314C960G (5.4) (13.6) 314C960G (5.4) (77.0) 314C960G (8.7) (150.1) 314C960G (8.7) (13.6) 314C960G (8.7) (77.0) 314C960G1 Stud Ampere Rating.44 (11.) Circuit Breaker Insulating Panel Diameter and Thread A Insulators Washer Nut Rear Connecting Stud Extension Back of Breaker Stud (8.7) (139.7) 63BG (8.7) (03.) 63BG (8.7) (66.7) 63BG (31.8) (139.7) 373B375G (31.8) (66.7) 373B375G03 V4-T-33 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

333 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose.4 GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Frames Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breaker Family Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breakers Optimized solution for HVAC/R and Pumping Applications. Product Overview GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Frames Amperes NEMA 480 Vac Eaton s Definite Purpose molded case circuit breakers are available in three-pole configurations, and are designed to meet the specific requirements of HVAC/R and pumping applications. As with other members of Eaton s family of molded case circuit breakers, Definite Purpose breakers provide high quality, reliability, unmatched performance and outstanding value. Eaton s Definite Purpose breakers are rated from A and are available in five frame sizes. Each frame size has the same compact outside dimensions as Series C breakers. Additionally, Definite Purpose breakers have been rigorously tested to the UL 489 standard. They are assembled in an ISO certified facility. Contents Description Product Selection Guide Electrical Characteristics Features Base Mounting Hardware Line and Load Termination Optional Line and Load Terminals Selection Product Selection Accessories Dimensions Learn Online Drawings Online Trip Units and Terminals Definite Purpose breakers contain factory-sealed thermal-magnetic trip units. The GP-Frame breaker ( A) includes line and load terminals and breaker mounting hardware. FP (15 5A), KP ( A), LP ( A) and MP ( A) Frames ship standard without mounting hardware. For line and load terminals, add L to the end of the catalog number or W for no terminals. Page V4-T-334 V4-T-334 V4-T-336 V4-T-336 V4-T-336 V4-T-336 V4-T-337 V4-T-338 V4-T-336 V4-T-339 External Accessories Definite Purpose breakers use the same external accessories as Series C breakers: handle mechanisms, motor operators, lock-off devices, busbar extensions and multiple terminal arrangements. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-333

334 .4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose Product Selection Guide Electrical Characteristics Breaker Type GPS FPS FPH KPS KPH Amperage range A 15 5A 15 5A A A Performance level S S H S H Breaker capacity (ka rms) 40 Vac NEMA, UL, CSA 480 Vac Vac of poles Maximum voltage (Vac) Thermal-magnetic V4-T-334 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

335 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose.4 Electrical Characteristics, continued Breaker Type LPS LPH MPS MPH Amperage range A A A A Performance level S H S H Breaker capacity (ka rms) 40 Vac NEMA, UL, CSA 480 Vac Vac of poles Maximum voltage (Vac) Thermal-magnetic Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-335

336 .4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose Features Base Mounting Hardware English base mounting hardware is included with GP frame only. For all other frames, order base mounting hardware separately as per the table to the right. Line and Load Terminals Both line and load terminals are included with GP-Frame Definite Purpose breakers. For all other frames, add L for line and load terminals to be included or W for no terminals. Accessories End Cap Accessory Kit End caps for line and load conductor termination are optional with each breaker. End caps secure the conductor with a ring-type connector. The kit includes one end cap, three cap screws, three nuts and three lock washers. Series C Accessories For internal accessories, see Page V4-T-73. For external accessories, see Page V4-T-306. Base Mounting Hardware Frame English Metric GP Included FP BMH1 BMH1M KP BMH3 BMH3M LP BMH4 BMH4M MP BMH5 BMH5M Note: Base mounting hardware, is included with GP-Frame breakers. A separate catalog number is not required. Line and Load Termination Optional Line and Load Terminals 1 Package of three terminals. Replacement use only. End Cap Accessory Kit Termination Awg Wire Metric Wire Wire Bolt Size Bolt Size Torque Torque Breaker Type Range Range (mm) Type English Metric Lb In Nm GP Wire #14 1/ Cu only Included Breaker Maximum Amperes Awg Wire Range Wire Type with Control Wire Termination FP 100 #14 #10 Cu/Al 3T100FB #8 Cu/Al 3T100FB #6 #4 Cu/Al 3T100FB #3 4/0 Cu/Al 3T100FB 1 00 #3 4/0 Cu only 3T150FB 1 5 #4 4/0 Cu/Al 3TA5FB 1 5 #6 300 Cu/Al 3TA5FDK3 1 5 #6 300 Cu/Al 3TA5FDK 1 KP (1) Cu/Al TA350K 400 3/0 50 () Cu/Al 3TA400K 1 3TA400KCW LP () Cu/Al TA60LD TA60LDCW () Cu/Al 3TA603LDK 1 3TA603LDKCW MP 800 3/0 400 (3) Cu/Al TA800MA TA800MACWT () Cu/Al TA801MA TA801MACWT V4-T-336 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

337 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose.4 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Frame Size GP = GP-Frame FP = FP-Frame KP = KP-Frame LP = LP-Frame MP = LP-Frame of Poles 3 = Three-pole Ampere Rating GP-Frame FP-Frame KP-Frame LP-Frame MP-Frame 015 = 15A 00 = 0 A 05 = 5 A 030 = 30 A 035 = 35A 040 = 40 A 045 = 45A 050 = 50 A 060 = 60 A 070 = 70 A 080 = 80 A 090 = 80 A 100 = 100 A 015 = 15A 00 = 0 A 05 = 5 A 030 = 30 A 035 = 35A 040 = 40 A 045 = 45A 050 = 50 A 060 = 60 A 070 = 70 A 080 = 80 A 100 = 100 A 110 = 110 A 15 = 15A 150 = 150 A 175 = 175A 00 = 00 A 5 = 5A Interrupting Rating S = Standard H = High = 175A 00 = 00 A 50 = 50 A 300 = 300 A 400 = 400 A 450 = 450 A 500 = 500 A 600 = 600 A FP S L 700 = 700 A 800 = 800 A Options K = Molded case switch L = Line and load terminals W = Without terminals or mounting hardware 1 1 Not available on GP-Frame. When choosing a molded case switch, select the highest amperage rating for the frame and the standard interrupting rating. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-337

338 .4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose Product Selection s When ordering Definite Purpose breakers, use the appropriate catalog numbers given below. GP 100 GP-Frame/ A Frame/ Ampere Rating GP/ A circuit breakers Three-Pole GPS3015 FP 5 FP-Frame/15 5 A Frame/ Ampere Rating FP/15 5A circuit breakers Three-Pole FPS3015 GPS300 GPS305 GPS3030 GPS3035 GPS3040 GPS3045 GPS3050 FPS300 FPS305 FPS3030 FPS3035 FPS3040 FPS3045 FPS3050 GPS3060 GPS3070 GPS3080 GPS3090 GPS3100 FPS3060 FPS3070 FPS3080 FPS3090 FPS3100 GP/100 A molded case switch GPS3100K Note: All GP frames come standard with line and load terminals and base mounting hardware. Not available without terminals. FPS3110 FPS315 FPS3150 FPS3175 FPS300 FPS35 FPH3015 FPH300 FPH305 FPH3030 FPH3035 FPH3040 FPH3045 FPH3050 FPH3060 FPH3070 FPH3080 FPH3090 FPH3100 FPH3110 FPH315 FP/5A molded case switch FPH3150 FPH3175 FPH300 FPH35 FPS35K Note: At the end of catalog number, add L for terminals or W for no terminals. V4-T-338 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

339 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Definite Purpose.4 KP 50 KP-Frame/ A Frame/ Ampere Rating KP/ A circuit breakers KP/400 A molded case switch Three-Pole KPS3175 KPS300 KPS350 KPS3300 KPS3400 KPH3175 KPH300 KPH350 KPH3300 KPH3400 KPS3400K Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) All dimensions are provided for guidance and should not be used for construction purposes unless approved. Contact Eaton for detailed outline drawings. GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Definite Purpose Frames Breaker Type GP FP KP LP MP Width 3.00 (76.) 4.13 (104.9) 5.49 (139.4) 8.5 (09.6) 8.5 (09.6) Height 4.88 (14.0) 6.00 (15.4) 10.1 (57.0) (73.1) (406.4) Depth.63 (66.7) 3.38 (85.9) 4.31 (109.6) 3.81 (96.8) 4.06 (103.1) LP 400 LP-Frame/ A Frame/ Ampere Rating LP/ A circuit breakers Three-Pole LPS3450 LP/600 A molded case switch LPS3500 LPS3600 LPH3450 LPH3500 LPH3600 LPS3600K MP 800 MP-Frame/ A Frame/ Ampere Rating MP/ A circuit breakers Three-Pole MPS3700 MP/800 A molded case switch MPS3800 MPH3700 MPH3800 MPS3800K Note: For KP, LP, MP frames above, add L for terminals or W for no terminals to end of catalog number. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-339

340 .5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Metering and Communications PM3 Modules Power Monitoring and Metering with Modbus RTU PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module Product Description Application Description The PM3 is the perfect Communications via solution for main, branch Modbus and Eaton s circuit and standalone INCOM protocol; monitoring/metering compatible with Eaton s applications. With information PXG for Web page and at your fingertips, you can Ethernet capabilities meter, monitor and Works in 40 Vac PM3, communicate phase current 480 Vac and 600 Vac and voltage with calculated applications power and energy. The PM3 is versatile, as it connects to the load side of a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) and communicates easily to a local network or the Internet through Eaton Power Xpert Gateways (PXGs). Cost of ownership is reduced through ease of installation. The PM3 is your ideal MCCB metering solution. 480 Vac PM3 has internal power supply to power electronics 600 Vac PM3 requires 4 Vdc auxiliary power Seamlessly integrates with thermal-magnetic or electronic trip units Contents Description PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module Product Selection Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights Learn Online Drawings Online Features and Benefits Communicates electrical system data and circuit breaker status Calculates power and energy to an accuracy of 1.0% of reading Configurable with thermalmagnetic or electronic trip units Suitable for reverse-feed applications Easy to install PM3 Benefits When Combined with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Alarming: high load and ground fault Zone selective interlocking Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Cause-of-trip localized information through Digiview and TRIP-LED Modbus/INCOM communications HMI connectivity through PXG Current and voltage metering to 0.5% of reading Power and energy monitoring to 1.0% of reading Reduces cost of ownership Page V4-T-341 V4-T-341 V4-T-34 Standards and Certifications Meets ANSI C1.1 revenue grade standard with a current and voltage accuracy of 0.5% of reading UL 489, Annex J IEC ESD IEC EFT IEC SURGE IEC EMC ANSI C1.1 (1% accuracy) UL/cUL/CE V4-T-340 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

341 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Metering and Communications.5 Product Selection PM3 Modules Frame 480 V 600 V Modbus FD PM3FM JG PM3JM KD and LG PM3LM INCOM FD PM3FI480 PM3FI600 JG PM3JI480 PM3JI600 KD and LG PM3LI480 PM3LI600 End Cap Kits (Sold Separately) Frame FD JG KD LG Description Metric end cap kit KPEKM1 for F-Frame English end cap kit KPEK1 for F-Frame Metric end cap kit FJ3RTWK for JG-Frame English end cap kit FJ3RTDK for JG-Frame Metric end cap kit KPEKM3 for K-Frame English end cap kit KPEK3 for K-Frame Metric end cap kit L3RTWK for LG-Frame Technical Data and Specifications Metered parameters I A, I B, I C V AB, V BC, V CA, V an, V bn, V cn Apparent Energy, Forward Real Energy, Reverse Real Energy, Net Real Energy, Lagging Reactive Energy, Leading Reactive Energy, Net Reactive Energy Apparent Power A, B, C; Apparent Power Total; Reactive Power A, B, C; Reactive Power Total; Real Power A, B, C; Real Power Total Frequency, Apparent Power Factor, Apparent PFA, Apparent PFB, Apparent PFC PM3 Power Monitoring and Communications Module Technical Specifications for Modbus RTU Description Specification Current Inputs Pickup current 0.3A rms Maximum reported current FD/JG 50 A rms KD/LD 630 A rms Accuracy 0.5% of reading Voltage Inputs Range Line-to-neutral Vac Line-to-line Vac Supported systems Three-element wye, three-element wye + neutral Two-element delta, four-wire delta systems Input impedance 996 kiloohm/phase Burden per phase 0.36 VA/phase max. at 600 V; VA at 10V Phase voltage connections Internal via screw terminal to busbar For wye system, a neutral is required to be connected to the PM3 on the right Phoenix connector. Neutral connection If neutral is not available, the meter will calculate a virtual neutral based on the phase-to-phase rms voltage. The system voltage must be balanced for this to be accurate. Frequency Frequency 50/60 Hz Accuracy ± 0.1 Hz Resolution 0.1 Hz Power and Energy Accuracy 1% of reading (ANSI C1.1) Isolation All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 500 V. Environmental Ratings Operating temperature 0 C to +50 C Storage temperature 0 C to +50 C Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH noncondensing Sensing Method Voltage, current True rms Sampling rate 13.0K samples per second Update Rate Watts, VAR and VA 1.03 sec at 60 Hz All other parameters 1.07 sec at 60 Hz Power Supply (External) DC voltage Vdc Maximum current 30.0 ma at 4 Vdc Burden 0.7W Standard Communication Format Connection type Three-wire RS-485 (A, B, Common) Com port baud rate 9600 or 19,00 bauds Default: 19,00 bauds Modbus address range Data format Selectable (8, N, 1 8, N, 8, Even, 1 8, Odd, 1) Default: 8, N, Protocols Modbus RTU Internal termination resistor selectable ON or OFF Via DIP switch Default: Enabled Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-341

342 O N Power Monitoring/ Metering Module Tx Rx STATUS Settings Network Address O N A B COM EARTH 4 Vdc (+) 4 Vdc ( ) MODBUS Power Bell Alarm COM COM Aux. Alarm V Neutral See breaker for terminal information. See instruction sheet for high voltage tests. For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector O N Power Monitoring/ Metering Module Tx Rx STATUS Settings Network Address O N A B COM EARTH 4 Vdc (+) 4 Vdc ( ) MODBUS Power Bell Alarm COM COM Aux. Alarm V Neutral See breaker for terminal information. See instruction sheet for high voltage tests. For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector Molded Case Circuit Breakers Metering and Communications Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) FD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus JG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus.88 (73.) 4.50 (114.3) 9.53 (4.1) 1.38 (35.1) On Off 0.69 (17.5) Line End 3.63 (9.) 6.00 (15.4) C L Handle (79.4) 3.50 (88.9) 3.39 (86.1) 3.19 (81.0) SEALED FACTORY 3.63 (9.) C L Handle 3.17 (80.5) 5.50 (139.7) (66.7) PUSH TO TRIP 1.38 (35.1) O N O F F 0.69 (17.5) Line End 3.95 (100.3) (177.8) C L Handle 1.00 (304.8) 3.57 (90.7) 3.44 (87.4) 3.34 (84.8) SEALED FACTORY 3.95 (100.3) C L Handle.06 (5.3) 4.13 (104.9) Load End KD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus 1.7 (43.7) 0.86 (1.8) Line End 3.34 (84.8) 3.4 (86.9) 3.94 (100.1) 4.31 (109.5) 4.06 (103.1) 3.81 (96.8).06 (5.3) 4.13 (104.9) Load End LG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus 1.7 (43.7) 0.86 (1.8) Line End 3.34 (84.8) 3.4 (86.9) 4.41 (11.0) 4.31 (109.5) 4.06 (103.1) 3.98 (101.1) 4.9 (15.0) On/I 5.77 (146.6) 5.77 (146.6) 4.73 (10.1) 5.58 (141.7) 5.58 (141.7) 8.44 (14.4) Off/O C L Handle (57.3) C L Handle 8.44 (14.4) C L Handle (57.3) C L Handle 1.14 (308.4) ON (351.3) 1.14 (308.4) 13.8 ON (351.0).74 (69.6) 5.48 (139.) Load End 3.98 (101.1) 4.06 (103.1) 4.88 (14.0).74 (69.6) 5.48 (139.) Load End PM3 Dimensions and Shipping Weights Description Frame Dimensions and Weights Weight in lbs (kg) FD 1.6 (0.57) JG 1.60 (0.73) KD/LG.5 (1.0) Basic unit in inches (mm) FD 4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 17.0 x 86.1) JG 4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 17.0 x 86.1) KD/LG 5.48 W x 3.70 L x 4.06 H (139. x 94.0 x 103.) Shipping container dimensions in inches (mm) FD/JG 8.00 x 5.13 x 5.50 (03. x x 139.7) KD/LG 6.5 x 8.5 x 7.00 (158.7 x 09.5 x 177.8) 3.98 (101.1) 4.06 (103.1) 5.43 (137.9) V4-T-34 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

343 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Contents Description Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Selection Product Selection Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Options and Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights Direct Current Circuit Breakers PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers 600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series E Mining Service Circuit Breakers Classic Mining Breakers Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFR..... Learn Online Drawings Online Page V4-T-344 V4-T-345 V4-T-347 V4-T-347 V4-T-348 V4-T-348 V4-T-349 V4-T-363 V4-T-37 V4-T-398 V4-T-41 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Product Description Eaton s engine generator molded case circuit breakers are designed specifically for application on diesel engine powered standby generators where high interrupting circuit breakers are not required. The JG through NG breakers are equipped with a special trip unit, that includes standard thermal (overload) protection and special low magnetic pickup range (FG includes a fixed thermalmagnetic pickup). The standard thermal trip unit provides overload protection for conductors per the National Electrical Code. The low magnetic pickup range is approximately two to five times the continuous rating and provides closer low-level short-circuit protection when applied on generators that have very low short-circuit capacity. This combination allows the user to customize the breaker to the generator output. Application Description Engine generator circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed application. Standards and Certifications Engine generator molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards: Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures File E7819 Canadian Standards Association Standard C. No. 5, Service Entrance and Branch Circuit Breakers International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 947-, Circuit Breakers Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-343

344 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers. FG breakers include both line and load side terminals Circuit Breakers FG, JG, KG, LG and NG JG, KG, LG and NG breakers with W catalog number suffix do not include any terminals JG, KG, LG and NG breakers without W catalog number suffix include both line and load terminals Frame FG JG KG LG NG of Poles 3 = Three-pole FG W Contact Eaton for additional ratings and internal/external accessories Reverse feed Trip Amperes Suffix W = Without terminals V4-T-344 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

345 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Product Selection The following table lists FG through NG engine generator breakers with the maximum generator kva and kw rating. Engine generator breakers are applied at 115% of the Thermal-Magnetic Magnetic Pickup Range Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz generator full load current rating (FLA). The maximum kw rating is based on threephase generators at 80% power factor. 1 Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating. Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor. 3 FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units. 4 Breaker includes line and load terminals. 5 Without terminals. The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG315CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW. Engine Generator Breaker 3 40 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac kva 1 kw kva 1 kw kva 1 kw Fixed FG Fixed FG300 4 Fixed FG305 4 Fixed FG Fixed FG Fixed FG Fixed FG Fixed FG Fixed FG Fixed FG Fixed FG Fixed FG Fixed FG Fixed FG Fixed FG315 4 Fixed FG Fixed FG Fixed FG300 4 Fixed FG JG3175W JG JG300W JG JG35W JG JG350W JG KG3300W KG KG3350W KG KG Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-345

346 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Electronic Magnetic Pickup Range Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz 1 Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating. Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor. 3 FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units. 4 Breaker includes line and load terminals. The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG315CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW. Engine Generator Breaker 3 40 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac kva 1 kw kva 1 kw kva 1 kw LG LG LG NG NG NG NG NG V4-T-346 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

347 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Enclosures Type 1 General Purpose Surface or flush mounting ampere range 600 Vac, 500 Vdc Type 1 enclosed breakers are designed for use in commercial buildings, apartment buildings and other areas where a general purpose enclosure is applicable. The breaker is front operable and is capable of being padlocked in either the ON or OFF position. Ratings through 100 amperes are listed with Underwriters Laboratories as approved for service entrance application. Both surface and flush mounted enclosures are available. Type 3R Rainproof Surface Mounting Interchangeable hubs (through 400 amperes) ampere range 600 Vac, 500 Vdc This general purpose outdoor service center employs a circuit breaker inside a weatherproof sheet steel breaker enclosure to serve Enclosure Selection Data Breaker Frame Amperes FG 15 5 JG KG LG NG Enclosure Type Class Type 1 Type 3R Type 1 Type 1 Type 3R Type 1 Type 1 Type 3R Type 1 Type 1 Type 3R Type 1 Type 1 Type 3R Type 1 as a main disconnect and protective device for feeder circuits. Ratings through 100 amperes are listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application. Type 1 Dustproof Surface Mounting No knockouts or other openings ampere range 600 Vac, 500 Vdc The Type 1 enclosure is designed in line with specifications for special industry applications where unusually severe conditions involving oil, coolant, dust and other foreign materials exist in the operating atmosphere. The handle padlocks in the OFF position and the cover is interlocked with the handle mechanism to prevent opening the cover with the circuit breaker in the ON position. Ratings through 100 amperes are listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application. SFDN5 RFDN5 JFDN5 SJDN50 RJDN50 JJDN50 SKDN400 RKDN400 JKDN400 SLDN600 RLDN600 JLDN600 SNDN100 RNDN100 JNDN100 Options and Accessories Standard Terminals Breaker Max. Amp AWG Wire Metric Wire Frame Rating Range Range mm FG / T100FB 1 FG / TA5FD 1 JG kcmil TA50KB KG kcmil TA350K KG 400 3/0 50 kcmil () TA400K 1 LG kcmil () TA603LDK NG kcmil () TA700NB1 NG /0 400 kcmil (3) TA1000NB1 NG 100 4/0 500 kcmil (4) TA100NB1 Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable Max. Enclosure Rating (Amperes) Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch Shunt Trip Main Lug Size Cu/Al Ground Lug Size Cu/Al 1 Package of three terminals. Other accessories are available. Same as standard frame breakers. 3 Field installation on the FG Frame is not UL listed. 100 (1) 14 1/0 (1) 14 1/0 INK (1) kcmil (1) kcmil INK (1) kcmil or (1) kcmil INK400 () 1/0 50 kcmil 600 () kcmil (1) kcmil INK (3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or (4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil (1) 6 50 kcmil INK100 1A-1B A-B Breaker Frame Factory Mounted Field Kit Factory Mounted Field Kit FG 3 A06 A1X1PK A13 AX1RPK JG A06 A1XPK A13 AXPK KG A06 A1X3PK A13 AX3PK LG A06 A1X4PK A13 AX4PK NG A06 A1X5PK A13 AX5PK Breaker Frame Rating Factory Mounted Field Kit FG Vdc S0 SNT1LP03K JG 1 4 Vdc S4 SNTP04K KG 1 4 Vdc S4 SNT3P04K LG 1 4 Vdc S0 SNT4LP03K NG 1 4 Vdc S0 SNT5LP03K Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-347

348 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 40 18, , ,000 IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity Ratings Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Enclosure Selection Data Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 0, 40 18,000/ 9, , ,000/ 7, , ,000/ 9,000 14,000/ 7,000 10,000/5,000 Breaker Frame Amperes FG 15 5 JG KG LG NG Enclosure Type Class A B C D E Approx. Weight Lbs (kg) Type 1 Surface Mounted Type 3R Rainproof Type 1, 1K Dustproof D E B Conduit Sizes, Inches Type (590.6) 8.41 (13.6) 6.8 (159.5) (476.3) 1.0 (30.5) 15 (7) 0.5, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 1.50,,.50 SFDN5 Type 3R 5.66 (651.8) 8.84 (4.7) 9.31 (36.5) 4.8 (616.7) 1.70 (43.) 19 (9) 0.5, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 1.50,,.50 RFDN5 Type (651.8) 8.84 (4.7) 9.31 (36.5) 4.8 (616.7) 1.70 (43.) 18 (8) JFDN5 Type (881.4) 10.9 (77.4) 7.0 (18.9) (76.0) 1.88 (47.8) 31 (14) 0.5, 0.50,,.50, 3 SJDN50 Type 3R (95.5) (93.6) 10. (59.6) (908.6) 1.94 (49.3) 40 (18) 0.5, 0.50,,.50, 3 RJDN50 Type (953.3) (93.6) 10. (59.6) (908.6) 1.94 (49.3) 37 (17) JJDN50 Type (985.8) (80.9) (77.9) (863.6).8 (57.9) 53 (4) 0.5, 0.50, 0.75, 1.50,,.50, 3, 3.50 SKDN400 Type 3R (1058.9) (98.5) (357.1) (1013.5) 1.97 (50.0) 60 (7) 0.5, 0.50, 0.75,.50, 3, 3.50 RKDN400 Type (1058.9) (98.5) (357.1) (1013.5) 1.97 (50.0) 53 (4) JKDN400 Type (1165.4) (363.5) 1.38 (314.5) (118.6) 1.91 (48.5) 81 (37) 0.5, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4 SLDN600 Type 3R (17.1) (378.7) (393.7) (118.6) 1.9 (48.8) 84 (38) 0.5, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4 RLDN600 Type (17.1) (378.7) (393.7) (118.6) 1.9 (48.8) 81 (37) JLDN600 Type (1555.0) 1.44 (544.6) (391.4) (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 178 (81) SNDN100 Type 3R (1615.).00 (558.8) (447.8) (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 175 (79) RNDN100 Type (1615.).00 (558.8) (447.8) (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 170 (77) JNDN100 A C A D E B ON OFF C A D E B ON OFF C V4-T-348 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

349 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Direct Current Circuit Breakers Contents Description Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Direct Current Circuit Breakers Selection Product Selection Accessories Wiring Diagrams Dimensions PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers 600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series E Mining Service Circuit Breakers Classic Mining Breakers Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFR..... Page V4-T-343 V4-T-351 V4-T-35 V4-T-359 V4-T-361 V4-T-36 V4-T-363 V4-T-37 V4-T-398 V4-T-41 Direct Current Circuit Breakers Product Description DC (direct current) systems and applications are becoming commonplace as alternative energy sources have expanded and the number of DC devices and data centers using DC power has swelled. Eaton offers molded case circuit breakers and switches to meet circuit protection and switching requirements for a host of different DC end user requirements. Applications include UPS battery supply circuits, solar systems and electric vehicle charging, as well as commercial and industrial distribution. Current ratings are available from 15 to 3000 A, with a full scale of voltage and interrupting ratings to address needs ranging from standard to the highest performance. Optional internal accessories provide remote tripping and indication of breaker status. The DC breaker family is UL 489 listed and exceeds the requirements in UL 489 Supplement SC for UPS applications. Eaton breakers may be applied in both ungrounded and select grounded applications, with poles connected in series to operate at the maximum voltages shown on Page V4-T-350. To use DC circuit breakers on 600 V grounded systems, three poles in series must be connected on the ungrounded leg. All DC breakers use the same internal and external accessories as their corresponding Series C and Series G AC frame equivalents, except for the NBDC breaker, which uses the same internal and external accessories as the standard NB frame. The HFDDC through HMDLDC and EG to RG DC breakers use the same internal and external accessories as their corresponding Series C and Series G AC Frame equivalents. NBDC uses the same internal and external accessories as standard NB breakers. Many of the Eaton AC molded case circuit breakers carry 50 Vdc ratings for ungrounded systems. Refer to Pages V4-T-9 and V4-T-118 for these interrupting tables. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-349

350 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Quick Reference Direct Current Circuit Breakers UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type IEC Interrupting Capacity Ratings Maximum Amperes Interrupting Capacity (ka) Volts DC 1 15 Poles in Poles in Series 50 Series DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Time constants per UL 489. EGEDC through HMDLDC have been tested up to 300 Vdc to allow for battery charging voltages. 750 Vdc is common in transportation applications. HFDDC, four-pole 750 Vdc is available up to 150 A maximum. 300 Vdc and 750 Vdc are not UL 489 listed voltage ratings. 3 Four-pole frame with two-poles connected in parallel. See Page V4-T-361 for series connection diagrams. Use NEC rated cable to connect/short poles in series as shown. Poles in Series 750 EGEDC EGSDC EGHDC HFDDC JGEDC JGSDC JGHDC HJDDC HKDDC LGEDC LGSDC LGHDC HLDDC HLDDC HMDLDC NBDC RGHDC Poles in Series Circuit Breaker Maximum 15 Volts DC Poles in 50 Volts DC Poles in 600 Volts DC Poles in Type Amperes Icu Ics Series Icu Ics Series Icu Ics Series EGEDC EGSDC EGHDC JGEDC 50 1 JGSDC 50 1 JGHDC HJDDC LGEDC LGSDC LGHDC HLDDC HMDLDC V4-T-350 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

351 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. DC Circuit Breaker Frame EGEDC = Series G E (100 A max.) EGSDC = Series G E (100 A max.) EGHDC = Series G E (100 A max.) HFDDC = Series C F (5 A max.) JGEDC = Series G J (50 A max.) JGSDC = Series G J (50 A max.) JGHDC = Series G J (50 A max.) HJDDC = Series C J (50 A max.) HKDDC = Series C K (400 A max.) LGEDC = Series G L (600 A max.) LGSDC = Series G L (600 A max.) LGHDC = Series G L (600 A max.) HLDDC = Series C L (100 A max.) HMDLDC = Series C M (800 A max.) NBDC = NB (100 A max.) RGHDC = Series G R (3000 A max.) of Poles 1 = Single-pole = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole HFDDC W Trip Unit Ampere Rating 015 =15 A 00 =0 A 05 =5 A 030 =30 A 035 =35 A 040 =40 A 045 =45 A 050 =50 A 060 =60 A 070 =70 A 080 =80 A 090 =90 A 100 =100 A 110 =110 A 15 =15 A 150 =150 A 175 =175 A 00 =00 A 5 =5 A 50 =50 A 300 =300 A 350 =350 A 400 =400 A 450 =450 A 500 =500 A 600 =600 A 700 =700 A 800 =800 A 900 =900 A 1000 = 1000 A 100 = 100 A 1600 = 1600 A 000 = 000 A 500 = 500 A 3000 = 3000 A Suffix Series C, NB Frames K = Molded case switch L = Line and load terminals, F-Frame MW = 135% magnetic trip unit, without terminals W = Without terminals Series G Frames FFG = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, with terminals FFW = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, without terminals FAG = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, with terminals FAW = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, without terminals KSG = Molded case switch, with terminals KSW = Molded case switch, without terminals Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-351

352 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Product Selection Type EGEDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kaic at 500 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Circuit Breaker with Terminals Complete Circuit Breaker without Terminals 5 EGEDC305FFG EGEDC305FFW 30 EGEDC3030FFG EGEDC3030FFW 35 EGEDC3035FFG EGEDC3035FFW 40 EGEDC3040FFG EGEDC3040FFW 45 EGEDC3045FFG EGEDC3045FFW 50 EGEDC3050FFG EGEDC3050FFW 60 EGEDC3060FFG EGEDC3060FFW 70 EGEDC3070FFG EGEDC3070FFW 80 EGEDC3080FFG EGEDC3080FFW 90 EGEDC3090FFG EGEDC3090FFW 100 EGEDC3100FFG EGEDC3100FFW Type EGSDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kaic at 500 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Circuit Breaker with Terminals Complete Circuit Breaker without Terminals 5 EGSDC305FFG EGSDC305FFW 30 EGSDC3030FFG EGSDC3030FFW 35 EGSDC3035FFG EGSDC3035FFW 40 EGSDC3040FFG EGSDC3040FFW 45 EGSDC3045FFG EGSDC3045FFW 50 EGSDC3050FFG EGSDC3050FFW 60 EGSDC3060FFG EGSDC3060FFW 70 EGSDC3070FFG EGSDC3070FFW 80 EGSDC3080FFG EGSDC3080FFW 90 EGSDC3090FFG EGSDC3090FFW 100 EGSDC3100FFG EGSDC3100FFW Type EGHDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kaic at 500 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Circuit Breaker with Terminals Complete Circuit Breaker without Terminals 5 EGHDC305FFG EGHDC305FFW 30 EGHDC3030FFG EGHDC3030FFW 35 EGHDC3035FFG EGHDC3035FFW 40 EGHDC3040FFG EGHDC3040FFW 45 EGHDC3045FFG EGHDC3045FFW 50 EGHDC3050FFG EGHDC3050FFW 60 EGHDC3060FFG EGHDC3060FFW 70 EGHDC3070FFG EGHDC3070FFW 80 EGHDC3080FFG EGHDC3080FFW 90 EGHDC3090FFG EGHDC3090FFW 100 EGHDC3100FFG EGHDC3100FFW V4-T-35 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

353 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 HFDDC Type HFDDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 4 kaic at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Circuit Breaker with Line and Load Terminals 1 Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Type JGEDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kaic at 600 Vdc 1 For breaker without terminals, replace L with W at end of catalog number. For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation. 15 HFDDC1015L HFDDC015L HFDDC3015L HFDDC4015L 0 HFDDC100L HFDDC00L HFDDC300L HFDDC400L 5 HFDDC105L HFDDC05L HFDDC305L HFDDC405L 30 HFDDC1030L HFDDC030L HFDDC3030L HFDDC4030L 35 HFDDC1035L HFDDC035L HFDDC3035L HFDDC4035L 40 HFDDC1040L HFDDC040L HFDDC3040L HFDDC4040L 45 HFDDC1045L HFDDC045L HFDDC3045L HFDDC4045L 50 HFDDC1050L HFDDC050L HFDDC3050L HFDDC4050L 60 HFDDC1060L HFDDC060L HFDDC3060L HFDDC4060L 70 HFDDC1070L HFDDC070L HFDDC3070L HFDDC4070L 80 HFDDC1080L HFDDC080L HFDDC3080L HFDDC4080L 90 HFDDC1090L HFDDC090L HFDDC3090L HFDDC4090L 100 HFDDC1100L HFDDC100L HFDDC3100L HFDDC4100L 110 HFDDC1110L HFDDC110L HFDDC3110L HFDDC4110L 15 HFDDC115L HFDDC15L HFDDC315L HFDDC415L 150 HFDDC1150L HFDDC150L HFDDC3150L HFDDC4150L 175 HFDDC175L HFDDC3175L 00 HFDDC00L HFDDC300L 5 HFDDC5L HFDDC35L Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Breaker Circuit Breaker Frame Only Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals 70 JGEDC3070FAG JGEDC350NN JT3070FA T50FJ 90 JGEDC3090FAG JGEDC350NN JT3090FA T50FJ 100 JGEDC3100FAG JGEDC350NN JT3100FA T50FJ 15 JGEDC315FAG JGEDC350NN JT315FA T50FJ 150 JGEDC3150FAG JGEDC350NN JT3150FA T50FJ 175 JGEDC3175FAG JGEDC350NN JT3175FA T50FJ 00 JGEDC300FAG JGEDC350NN JT300FA T50FJ 5 JGEDC35FAG JGEDC350NN JT35FA T50FJ 50 JGEDC350FAG JGEDC350NN JT350FA T50FJ Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-353

354 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers JGHDC350NN HJDDC350 Type JGSDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kaic at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Breaker Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Type JGHDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kaic at 600 Vdc Type HJDDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 4 kaic at 600 Vdc Note 1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals 70 JGSDC3070FAG JGSDC350NN JT3070FA T50FJ 90 JGSDC3090FAG JGSDC350NN JT3090FA T50FJ 100 JGSDC3100FAG JGSDC350NN JT3100FA T50FJ 15 JGSDC315FAG JGSDC350NN JT315FA T50FJ 150 JGSDC3150FAG JGSDC350NN JT3150FA T50FJ 175 JGSDC3175FAG JGSDC350NN JT3175FA T50FJ 00 JGSDC300FAG JGSDC350NN JT300FA T50FJ 5 JGSDC35FAG JGSDC350NN JT35FA T50FJ 50 JGSDC350FAG JGSDC350NN JT350FA T50FJ Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Breaker Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals 70 JGHDC3070FAG JGHDC350NN JT3070FA T50FJ 90 JGHDC3090FAG JGHDC350NN JT3090FA T50FJ 100 JGHDC3100FAG JGHDC350NN JT3100FA T50FJ 15 JGHDC315FAG JGHDC350NN JT315FA T50FJ 150 JGHDC3150FAG JGHDC350NN JT3150FA T50FJ 175 JGHDC3175FAG JGHDC350NN JT3175FA T50FJ 00 JGHDC300FAG JGHDC350NN JT300FA T50FJ 5 JGHDC35FAG JGHDC350NN JT35FA T50FJ 50 JGHDC350FAG JGHDC350NN JT350FA T50FJ Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals 70 HJDDC350F JT3070T TA50KB 90 HJDDC350F JT3090T TA50KB 100 HJDDC350F JT3100T TA50KB 15 HJDDC350F JT315T TA50KB 150 HJDDC350F JT3150T TA50KB 175 HJDDC350F JT3175T TA50KB 00 HJDDC350F JT300T TA50KB 5 HJDDC350F JT35T TA50KB 50 HJDDC350F JT350T TA50KB V4-T-354 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

355 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 HKDDC3400 LGEDC3630NN Type HKDDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 4 kaic at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Type LGEDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kaic at 600 Vdc Type LGSDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kaic at 600 Vdc 1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation. Three-pole kit. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals 100 HKDDC3400F KT3100T TA300K 15 HKDDC3400F KT315T TA300K 150 HKDDC3400F KT3150T TA300K 175 HKDDC3400F KT3175T TA300K 00 HKDDC3400F KT300T TA300K 5 HKDDC3400F KT35T TA300K 50 HKDDC3400F KT350T TA350K 300 HKDDC3400F KT3300T TA350K 350 HKDDC3400F KT3350T TA350K 400 HKDDC3400F KT3400T 3TA400K Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Breaker Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals 50 LGEDC350FAG LGEDC3630NN LT350FA TA350LK 300 LGEDC3300FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK 350 LGEDC3350FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK 400 LGEDC3400FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK 500 LGEDC3500FAG LGEDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA63LK 600 LGEDC3600FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA63LK Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Breaker Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals 50 LGSDC350FAG LGSDC3630NN LT350FA TA350LK 300 LGSDC3300FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK 350 LGSDC3350FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK 400 LGSDC3400FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK 500 LGSDC3500FAG LGSDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA63LK 600 LGSDC3600FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA63LK Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-355

356 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers HLDDC Type LGHDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kaic at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Breaker Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kaic at 600 Vdc Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers Two-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kaic at 50 Vdc 34 1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation. Three-pole kit. 3 Includes breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. 4 Four-pole breaker with two poles wired in parallel. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals 50 LGHDC350FAG LGHDC3630NN LT350FA TA350LK 300 LGHDC3300FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK 350 LGHDC3350FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK 400 LGHDC3400FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK 500 LGHDC3500FAG LGHDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA63LK 600 LGHDC3600FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA63LK Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals 300 HLDDC3600F LT3300T TA60LD 350 HLDDC3600F LT3350T TA60LD 400 HLDDC3600F LT3400T TA60LD 450 HLDDC3600F LT3450T TA60LD 500 HLDDC3600F LT3500T TA60LD 600 HLDDC3600F LT3600T 3TA603LDK Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Breaker 600 HLDDC HLDDC HLDDC HLDDC HLDDC HLDDC100 V4-T-356 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

357 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 HMDLDC3800F RGHDC3300FFWM Type HMDLDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kaic at 600 Vdc Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only 1 Type NBDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kaic at 600 Vdc Type RGHDC DC Circuit Breakers Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kaic at 600 Vdc 1 Includes frame and trip unit. Order terminals or connectors separately. Six rear connectors included as standard complete circuit breaker. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Standard Terminals 300 HMDLDC3800F MT3300T TA700MA1 350 HMDLDC3800F MT3350T TA700MA1 400 HMDLDC3800F MT3400T TA700MA1 450 HMDLDC3800F MT3450T TA700MA1 500 HMDLDC3800F MT3500T TA700MA1 600 HMDLDC3800F MT3600T TA700MA1 700 HMDLDC3800F MT3700T TA700MA1 800 HMDLDC3800F MT3800T TA800MA Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Circuit Breaker Factory Assembled without Terminals Includes Magnetic Trip Unit Calibrated at 135% Standard Terminals 700 NBDC3700MW Included TA1000NB1 800 NBDC3800MW Included TA1000NB1 900 NBDC3900MW Included TA1000NB NBDC31000MW Included TA1000NB1 100 NBDC3100MW Included TA100NB1 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Complete Circuit Breaker Factory Assembled Imperial Mounting Hardware Metric Mounting Hardware Includes Magnetic Trip Unit Calibrated at 135% Standard Rear Connectors 1600 RGHDC3160FFWE RGHDC3160FFWM Included B016RDM 000 RGHDC300FFWE RGHDC300FFWM Included B016RDM 500 RGHDC350FFWE RGHDC350FFWM Included B500RDM 3000 RGHDC3300FFWE RGHDC3300FFWM Included B3000RDM Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-357

358 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers DC Breaker Terminal Wire Ranges Breaker Frame Maximum Breaker Ampacity Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors Metric Wire Range mm of Terminals Included Standard Terminal EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC 100 Aluminum Cu/Al 14 1/ TA15EF HFDDC 0 Steel Cu/Al (1).5 4 (1) 3 3T0FB 100 Steel Cu/Al 14 1/0 (1).5 50 (1) 3 3T100FB 5 Aluminum Cu/Al 4 4/0 (1) 5 95 (1) 3 3TA5FD JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC 50 Stainless steel Cu (1) (1) 1 T50FJ HJDDC 50 Aluminum Cu/Al kcmil (1) (1) 1 TA50KB HKDDC 5 Aluminum Cu/Al kcmil (1) (1) 1 TA300K 350 Aluminum Cu/Al kcmil (1) (1) 1 TA350K 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0 50 kcmil () (1) 3 3TA400K LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 500 (1) (1) 1 TA350LK 630 Aluminum Cu/Al 500 kcmil () () 1 TA63L 630 Aluminum Cu/Al 500 kcmil () () 3 3TA63LK HLDDC 500 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0 350 kcmil () () 1 TA60LD 600 Aluminum Cu/Al kcmil () () 3 3TA603LDK HMDLDC 600 Aluminum Cu/Al kcmil () 1 TA700MA1 800 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0 400 kcmil (3) 1 TA800MA NBDC 700 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0 400 kcmil (3) (3) 1 TA1000NB1 800 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0 400 kcmil (3) (3) 1 TA1000NB1 900 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0 400 kcmil (3) (3) 1 TA1000NB Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0 400 kcmil (3) (3) 1 TA1000NB1 100 Aluminum Cu/Al 4/0 500 kcmil (4) (4) 1 TA100NB1 Note: RGHDC breakers include six rear connectors as standard. Molded Case Switches Eaton s DC molded case switches are used in applications requiring a compact, high-capacity disconnect. They are UL 489 listed and have automatic high instantaneous current protection. These devices do not provide overload protection. Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Interrupting Capacity (Volts DC) Note 1 Four-pole frame with two-pole connected in parallel. Poles in Series With Line and Load Terminals Without Line and Load Terminals 600 Vdc Maximum HFDDC3100KL HFDDC3100KW HFDDC3150KL HFDDC3150KW HFDDC35KL HFDDC35KW JGKDC350KSG JGKDC350KSW HJDDC350K HJDDC350KW HKDDC3400K HKDDC3400KW 65 3 LGKDC3400KSG LGKDC3400KSW LGKDC3630KSG LGKDC3630KSW 35 3 HLDDC3600K HLDDC3600WK HMDLDC3800K HMDLDC3800WK 500 Vdc Maximum EGK3100KSG EGK3100KSW 50 Vdc Maximum HFDDC100KL HFDDC100KW HFDDC150KL HFDDC150KW 5 50 HFDDC5KL HFDDC5KW HLDDC100K 1 HLDDC100WK 1 V4-T-358 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

359 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Accessories Internal Accessories JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC Field Installation Kits Description Factory Installation (HFDDC) HFDDC 1 EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC HJDDC HKDDC HLDDC HMDLDC NBDC RGHDC Right-Pole Mounting Auxiliary switch 1A-1B A06 A1X1PK AUX1A1BPK AUX1A1BPK A1XPK A1X3PK A1X4PK A1X4PK 4980D16G05 A-B A13 AX1RPK AUXABPK AUXABPK AXPK AX3PK AX4PK AX4PK 4980D16G06 AX6RPK Alarm switch 1 make/1 break B06 A1L1RPK ALM1M1BEPK ALM1M1BJPK A1LRPK A1L3RPK A1L4RPK A1L4RPK A1L6RPK Auxiliary and alarm combo 1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05 AAL1RPK AUXALRMEPK AUXALRMJPK AALRPK AAL3RPK AA114RPK AA114RPK Left-Pole Mounting Shunt trip 1 Vdc S0 SNT1LP03K SNT01CPK SNT01CPK SNTP04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNT4LP03K 606D58G14 4 Vdc S0 SNT1LP03K SNT04CPK SNT04CPK SNTP04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNT4LP03K 606D58G13 SNT6P03K 48 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K SNT4860CPK SNT4860CPK SNTP06K SNT3P06K SNT4LP3K SNT4LP3K 606D58G1 SNT6P3K 60 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K SNT4860CPK SNT4860CPK SNTP06K SNT3P06K SNT4LP3K SNT4LP3K 606D58G11 SNT6P3K 15 Vdc S10 SNT1LP1K SNT10CPK SNT10CPK SNTP11K SNT3P11K SNT4LP6K SNT4LP6K 606D58G10 SNT6P3K 50 Vdc S14 SNT1LP18K SNTP14K SNT3P14K SNT4LP14K SNT4LP14K 606D58G09 SNT6P14K 10 Vac S06 SNT1LP1K SNT10CPK SNT10CPK SNTP11K SNT3P11K SNT4LP11K SNT4LP11K 060D58G05 SNT6P11K Undervoltage release 1 Vdc U30 UVH1LP0K UVR01DPK UVR01DPK UVHLP0K UVH3LP0K UVH4LP0K UVH4LP0K 37D03G06 UVH6RP0K 4 Vdc U34 UVH1LP1K UVR04DPK UVR04DPK UVHLP1K UVH3LP1K UVH4LP1K UVH4LP1K 37D03G07 UVH6RP1K 48 Vdc U38 UVH1LPK UVR048DPK UVR048DPK UVHLPK UVH3LPK UVH4LPK UVH4LPK 37D03G08 UVH6RP3K 15 Vdc U4 UVH1LP6K UVR15DPK UVR15DPK UVHLP6K UVH3LP6K UVH4LP6K UVH4LP6K 37D03G09 UVH6RP6K 50 Vdc U46 UVH1LP8K UVR50DPK UVR50DPK UVHLP8K UVH3LP8K UVH4LP8K UVH4LP8K 37D03G10 UVH6RP8K 10 Vac U14 UVH1LP08K UVR10APK UVR10APK UVHLP08K UVH3LP08K UVH4LP08K UVH4LP08K 373D63G05 UVH6RP08K 1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Right-pole mounted. One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker. Factory installation of accessories is available. Contact Eaton for assistance with part number configuration. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-359

360 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Jumpers Jumpers must be ordered separately. Priced individually. HFDDC Frame Maximum Description Amperes Single copper jumper 60 DC1F060 1 HKDDC Frame LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC Frames Note 100 DC1F DC1F DC1F5 1 Maximum Description Amperes Single copper jumper 400 DC1K400 1 Description Maximum Amperes Package of aluminum jumpers 400 DCLG400A Package of 3 aluminum jumpers 400 DC3LG400A Package of 30 aluminum jumpers 400 DC30LG400A 1 Not UL Listed; Non UL listed jumpers used in a UL application may need to be qualified by the OEM in their assembly. This may take place with UL or another certified testing agency. V4-T-360 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

361 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Wiring Diagrams Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 1 50 Vdc Maximum Two Poles in Series 500 Vdc or 600 Vdc Maximum Three Poles in Series 750 Vdc Maximum Four Poles in Series Load (A) Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. Load (A) Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. 1 Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC. For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal. Load Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. Load (A) Load Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. Load Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-361

362 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) DC Breaker Dimensions Frame of Poles Width Height Depth EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC (76.) 5.50 (139.7).99 (75.9) HFDDC (35.1) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0).75 (70.0) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0) (105.0) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0) (139.7) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0) JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7) HJDDC, (105.0) (54.0) 4.06 (103.1) HKDDC, (139.7) (57.3) 4.10 (104.1) LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC (139.) (57.3) 4.09 (103.9) 600 A Max. HLDDC, (09.6) (73.1) 4.06 (103.1) 100 A Max. HLDDC (79.4) (73.1) 4.06 (103.1) HMDLDC, (09.6) (406.4) 4.06 (103.1) NBDC (09.6) (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) RGHDC (393.7) (406.4) 9.75 (47.7) V4-T-36 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

363 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 PVGard Solar Photovoltaic Circuit Breakers PVGard Solar Circuit Breaker 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series Product Overview PVGard lineup 1000 Vdc poles-in-series breaker and switch. Requires poles in series connection UL 489B listed for solar photovoltaic circuit protection 50 C calibration Offers both 100% and 80% rated breakers Handle bi-directional current flow Product Description Photovoltaic (PV) systems convert the energy of the sun into electrical power that is fed directly into the electric grid. Within the balance of system (BOS), direct current (DC) circuit breakers protect the wiring connected from the PV modules to the combiner or the inverter, while also behaving as a disconnect. Eaton is a global leader in circuit protection and brings this expertise to bear in the photovoltaic market. PVGard solar circuit breakers are part of a product family that combines a disconnect with circuit protection in a single, compact, resettable device to protect and isolate DC circuits as needed in photovoltaic systems. PVGard breakers can replace fuses, fuse holders and disconnects in combiner box and inverter applications saving space, streamlining design, purchasing and receiving, and reducing spare parts requirements. Contents Description Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Direct Current Circuit Breakers PVGard Solar Circuit Breaker 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series Features Standards and Certifications Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions Wiring Diagrams E Mining Service Circuit Breakers Classic Mining Breakers Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFR..... This 1000 Vdc poles-in-series lineup provides reliable and safe disconnect means and overcurrent protection in a single, compact device for commercial and utility scale PV systems. This solution does not require jumpers with the breaker/switch to be a UL 489B listed device, providing reliability and flexibility in design without limitation on implementation of the breaker/switch. If needed, cost-effective Eaton jumpers can be included. Page V4-T-343 V4-T-349 V4-T-364 V4-T-364 V4-T-365 V4-T-366 V4-T-369 V4-T-371 V4-T-371 V4-T-37 V4-T-398 V4-T-41 Application Description Photovoltaic (PV) systems convert the energy of the sun into electrical power that is fed directly into the electric grid. PVGard circuit breakers are used to protect the wiring from the modules to the combiner box or inverter from overcurrents, and to provide an isolation mechanism. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-363

364 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Features PVGard breakers are uniquely designed with these features: Meets the higher voltage and lower fault current levels of solar systems Tested to extreme ambient conditions from 40ºC to +90ºC Full complement of accessories for status, signalling, and on/off operation remotely Can handle bi-directional flow of current Can be applied in grounded, ungrounded or bi-polar systems Meets and exceeds the standards of UL 489B for photovoltaic molded case circuit breakers and molded case switches Available both standard (80%-rated) and 100%- rated breakers 50ºC calibration Ability to open on signal from DC arc or ground fault detector Wide range of current ratings increases options for matching incoming strings Eliminates fuse stocking costs and matching issues Designed specifically for high- and low-temperature demands of PV installations, PVGard circuit breakers undergo extreme ambient cycling tests, and carry a robust operating temperature range. Trip units calibrate at 100% and 80% of nameplate current in a 50ºC ambient, ensuring continuous operation in higher temperature environments typical to solar. Rigorous third-party testing includes limited and standard fault current tests, electrical and mechanical endurance, di-electric voltage withstand and temperature tests. Eaton s PVGard products are stand-alone devices without requiring jumpers to be UL 489B listed devices. PVGard breakers are available with a full complement of accessories to provide string status, enable remote trip, on/off operation, and can be customized to site requirements. Standards and Certifications Designed to meet UL 489B for solar photovoltaic circuit protection UL File E350638, Category Control DIUR V4-T-364 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

365 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Product Selection number includes breaker frame and trip unit. Order terminals separately. See Page V4-T-368. FD PV Frame KD PV Frame LG PV Frame MDL PV Frame FD PV Frame, 100 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 3 ka 1 80% Rated 100% Rated Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit 30 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4030W CFDPV4030W 40 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4040W CFDPV4040W 50 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4050W CFDPV4050W 60 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4060W CFDPV4060W 70 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4070W CFDPV4070W 80 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4080W CFDPV4080W 90 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4090W CFDPV4090W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4100W CFDPV4100W KD PV Frame, 350 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 ka 1 80% Rated 100% Rated Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit 15 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV415W CKDPV415W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4150W CKDPV4150W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4175W CKDPV4175W 00 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV400W CKDPV400W 5 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV45W CKDPV45W 50 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV450W CKDPV450W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4300W CKDPV4300W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4350W CKDPV4350W LG PV Frame, 400 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 ka 1 80% Rated 100% Rated Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit 50 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV450W CLGPV450W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4300W CLGPV4300W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4350W CLGPV4350W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4400W CLGPV4400W MDL PV Frame, 600 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 7.5 ka 1 80% Rated 100% Rated Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3300W CMDLPV3300W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3350W CMDLPV3350W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3400W CMDLPV3400W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3450W CMDLPV3450W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3500W CMDLPV3500W Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3600W CMDLPV3600W Note 1 Terminals not included with frames. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-365

366 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Accessories Available Accessories Auxiliary switch Shunt trip Electrical operator Alarm lockout Undervoltage release Terminals Lock-off devices End cap kits Rotary handle mechanisms Flexible shaft handle mechanisms Optional modifications Freeze testing For complete internal and external accessories, see the accessory section of each frame. External Accessories Description Frame Imperial Base Mounting Hardware x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers FD PV BMH x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers KD PV BMH3 LG PV N/A x 1.5 inch filister-head steel screws and MDL PV BMH5 lockwashers and flat washers Metric Base Mounting Hardware M4 0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers FD PV BMH1M M6 0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers KD PV BMH3M LG PV Included 1 M8-1.5 x 35 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers MDL PV BMH5M Interphase Barriers FD PV IPB1 KD PV IPB3 LG PV IPB3 MDL PV IPB4 Non-Padlockable Handle Block FD PV LKD1 KD PV LKD3 LG PV N/A MDL PV LKD4 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp FD PV PLK1 KD PV PLK3 LG PV LPHL MDL PV HLK4 Factory Modifications Freeze Testing to 40ºC 3 Frame Modification Code FD PV F01 KD PV F01 LG PV F01 MDL PV F01 Special calibration contact Eaton for availability Molded Case Switches Eaton s DC molded case switches (MCS) are used in applications requiring a compact, high capacity disconnect. PVGard 1000 Vdc Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 50 C Interrupting Capacity Vdc MCS are UL 489B listed and have automatic instantaneous current protection. These devices do not provide overload protection. Poles in Series 1000 Vdc Maximum FDPV4100KW KDPV400KW KDPV450KW KDPV4350KW LGPV4400KSW MDLPV3600KSW 1 Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or a molded case switch (included with breaker). If required separately, order 66A546G0. Locks in ON and OFF position. 3 Add 0% to list price. V4-T-366 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

367 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Internal Accessories Right Pole Mounting Internal Accessories Left Pole Mounting FD PV 1 KD PV LG PV MDL PV Factory Modification Code Field Kit Factory Modification Code Field Kit Factory Modification Code Field Kit Factory Modification Code 1 Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories for the FD PV be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker. Field Kit Auxiliary Switch 1A-1B A06 A1X1PK A06 A1X3PK A1 AUX1A1BPK A06 A1X4PK A-B A13 AX1RPK A13 AX3PK A AUXABPK A13 AX4PK Alarm Switch 1 make/1 break B06 A1L1RPK B06 A1L3RPK B1 ALM1M1BJPK B06 A1L4RPK Auxiliary and Alarm Combo 1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05 AAL1RPK C05 AAL3RPK B AUXALRMJPK C05 AA114RPK FD PV 1 KD PV LG PV MDL PV Factory Modification Code Field Kit Factory Modification Code Field Kit Factory Modification Code Field Kit Factory Modification Code Field Kit Shunt Trip 1 Vdc S0 SNT1LP03K S4 SNT3P04K S4 SNT01CPK S0 SNT4LP03K 4 Vdc S0 SNT1LP03K S4 SNT3P04K S6 SNT04CPK S0 SNT4LP03K 48 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K S50 SNT3P06K S7 SNT4860CPK S86 SNT4LP3K 60 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K S50 SNT3P06K S7 SNT4860CPK S86 SNT4LP3K 15 Vdc S10 SNT1LP1K S10 SNT3P11K S SNT10CPK S4 SNT4LP6K 50 Vdc S14 SNT1LP18K S14 SNT3P14K S14 SNT4LP14K 10 Vac S10 SNT1LP1K S10 SNT3P11K S SNT10CPK S10 SNT4LP11K Undervoltage Release 1 Vdc U30 UVH1LP0K T0 UVH3LP0K U1 UVR01DPK T0 UVH4LP0K 4 Vdc U34 UVH1LP1K T0 UVH3LP1K U UVR04DPK T06 UVH4LP1K 48 Vdc U38 UVH1LPK T10 UVH3LPK U4 UVR048DPK T10 UVH4LPK 60 Vdc 15 Vdc U4 UVH1LP6K T14 UVH3LP6K U6 UVR15DPK T14 UVH4LP6K 50 Vdc U46 UVH1LP8K T18 UVH3LP8K U8 UVR50DPK T18 UVH4LP8K 10 Vac U14 UVH1LP08K U18 UVH3LP08K U5 UVR10APK U18 UVH4LP08K Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-367

368 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers PVGard Solar Circuit Breaker Terminal Offering Endcap Kits Maximum Breaker Ampacity of Terminals Included Standard Terminal Breaker Frame Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors Metric Wire Range mm Comments FD PV 50 Steel Cu/Al 14 4 (1).5 5 (1) 3 3TA50FB 100 Aluminum Cu/Al kcmil (1) (1) 3 3TA5FDK3 Includes 3P terminal cover 100 Aluminum Cu/Al kcmil (1) (1) 3 3TA5FDK Includes 3P terminal cover Replacement use only 100 Copper Cu 4 4/0 (1) 5 95 (1) 3 3T5FD JG PVS 50 Aluminum Cu/Al #8 350 kcmil (1) TA50FJ 50 Aluminum Cu/Al () /0 () 4/0 1 3TA51FJK1 50 Aluminum Cu/Al () /0 () 4/0 3TA51FJK 50 Copper Cu #4 350 kcmil (1) T50FJ KD PV 5 Aluminum Cu/Al kcmil (1) (1) 1 TA300K 50 Aluminum Cu/Al kcmil (1) (1) 1 TA350K 50 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0 50 kcmil () (1) 4 4TA400K Contains interphase barriers 50 Aluminum Cu/Al /0 50 kcmil () or /0 500 kcmil (1) () 4 4TA401K 300 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0 50 kcmil () () 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers 350 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0 50 kcmil () () 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers 5 Copper Cu kcmil (1) (1) 1 T300K 50 Copper Cu kcmil (1) (1) 1 T350K 50 Copper Cu 3/0 50 kcmil () (1) 4 4T400K Contains interphase barriers 300 Copper Cu 3/0 50 kcmil () () 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers 350 Copper Cu 3/0 50 kcmil () () 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers LG PV 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 500 kcmil () () 4 4TA63LK Includes 4P terminal cover 50 Copper Cu 500 kcmil (1) (1) 1 T350LK 400 Copper Cu 500 kcmil () () 4 4T63LK Includes 4P terminal cover MDL PV 300 Aluminum Cu/Al kcmil () 1 TA700MA1 600 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0 400 kcmil (3) 1 TA800MA Breaker Frame of Poles Thread Type Thread Size FD PV 4 Imperial 10 3 KPEK14 4 Metric M 5 KPEKM14 KD PV 4 Imperial KPEK34 4 Metric M 8 KPEKM34 LG PV 4 Imperial N/A 4 Metric M-10 L4RTWK MDL PV 3 Imperial 3 Metric V4-T-368 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

369 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Jumpers Jumpers must be ordered separately. Priced individually. FD PV Frame Maximum Description Amperes Single copper jumper 60 DC1F060 1 KD PV Frame LG PV Frame Technical Data and Specifications Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers Designed to meet UL 489B for solar photovoltaic circuit protection 100% rated of the continuous current rating 50 C calibrated Can be applied in grounded, ungrounded or bi-polar systems Quick Reference PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series PVGard 1000 Vdc Current Ratings by Frame UL 489B Interrupting Capacity (ka) 1000 Vdc 100 DC1F DC1F DC1F5 1 Maximum Description Amperes Single copper jumper 400 DC1K400 1 Description Maximum Amperes Package of aluminum jumpers 400 DCLG400A Package of 3 aluminum jumpers 400 DC3LG400A Package of 30 aluminum jumpers 400 DC30LG400A Circuit Breaker Type Minimum Amperes Maximum Amperes Ability to open on signal from DC arc or ground fault detector UL File EE350638, Category Control DIUR 1000 Vdc poles-in-series breaker and switch Requires poles in series connection ka Rating FD PV KD PV LG PV MDL PV Poles in Series Note 1 Not UL Listed; Non UL listed jumpers used in a UL application may need to be qualified by the OEM in their assembly. This may take place with UL or another certified testing agency. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-369

370 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers PVGard 1000 Vdc Solar PV Circuit Breakers (100% and 80% Rated Frames) FD PV KD PV LG PV MDL PV of poles Maximum voltage rating 1000 Vdc 1000 Vdc 1000 Vdc 1000 Vdc Maximum current rating 100 A 350 A 400 A 600 A Interrupting capacity at 1000 Vdc 3 ka 5 ka 5 ka 7.5 ka Time constant 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms Ampere range A A A A Trip unit type Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Rated impulse withstand voltage Main conducting paths Auxiliary circuits Endurance Mechanical operations Electrical operations Maximum switching frequency 1 Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. 8 kv 4 kv 10, per hour 8 kv 4 kv 10, per hour 8 kv 4 kv per hour 8 kv 4 kv per hour Third-party certification UL 489B UL 489B UL 489B UL 489B Environment Design ambient temperature Maximum current at 60 C, as % of rated current Maximum current at 70 C, as % of rated current Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Suitable for freeze temperatures to 40 C Relative humidity 50 C 91% 88% 0 C to +50 C 0 C to +70 C Option 0 to 95% noncondensing 50 C 91% 88% 0 C to +50 C 0 C to +70 C Option 0 to 95% noncondensing 50 C 93% 88% 0 C to +50 C 0 C to +70 C Option 0 to 95% noncondensing Suitable for reverse-feed applications Yes Yes Yes Yes Mounting permissible mounting position Connection diagrams 1 50 C 93% 88% 0 C to +50 C 0 C to +70 C Option 0 to 95% noncondensing Terminations Al/Cu wire #6 300 kcmil () 3/0 50 kcmil () # 500 kcmil (3) 3/0 400 kcmil Cu wire #4 4/0 () 3/0 50 kcmil () # 500 kcmil (3) 3/0 300 kcmil Dimensions in inches (mm) Height Width Depth 6.00 (15.4) 5.50 (139.7) 3.38 (85.9) 90º Load (A) (57.3) 7. (183.4) 4.09 (103.9) (57.3) 7. (183.4) 4.09 (103.9) Weight in lbs º 90º Load (406.4) 8.5 (09.5) 4.06 (103.1) 90º V4-T-370 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

371 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series Frame of Poles Width Height Depth FD PV (139.7) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0) KD PV 4 7. (183.4) (57.3) 4.09 (103.9) LG PV 4 7. (183.4) (57.3) 4.09 (103.9) MDL PV (09.6) (406.4) 4.06 (103.1) Wiring Diagrams Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 1 FD PV, KD PV, LG PV 1000 Vdc Maximum Four Poles-in-Series MDL PV 1000 Vdc Maximum Three Poles in Series Load (A) Load Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. Load (A) Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only. 1 Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC. For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal. Load Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-371

372 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers E Mining Service Breakers Contents Description Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Direct Current Circuit Breakers PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers 600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series E Mining Service Breakers Selection Product Selection Accessories Dimensions Classic Mining Breakers Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFR..... Page V4-T-343 V4-T-349 V4-T-363 V4-T-374 V4-T-378 V4-T-389 V4-T-39 V4-T-398 V4-T-41 E Mining Service Breakers Product Overview State-of-the-art E mining service breakers incorporate the rigid specifications and testing procedures developed by a focus group led by engineers from several large coal companies and Eaton design engineers. Additionally, the performance of these breakers was proven and verified during hundreds of hours of field testing in harsh mine environments. E mining breakers are available in 600 Vac, l000y/ 577 Vac and 100 Vac. Interchangeable trip units can be used on either 600 or 1000 Vac frames. The E mining breaker family is designed especially for trailing cable application per MSHA 30 CFR 75. Field interchangeable electronic rms sensing trip units are available from 150 to 000 amperes with instantaneous pickup settings conforming to the code of Federal Regulations 30 CFR Electromechanical trip units are also available with a wide range of magnetic pickup ranges. E electronic trip units are the first to provide the mining industry with true rms sensing, made possible by the custom ASIC microprocessor in each electronic trip unit. E breakers are designed to be physically and electrically interchangeable with Classic Mining Service Breakers and supersede Series C Mining Service Breakers. The table to the right outlines direct replacements. 600 Vac Mining Breaker Replacement Chart Classic Series C E FBM FDBM E F HFBM FDM E F HFDM (mag. only) E F JDM E J KAM KDM E K KAMH KDM E K LAM LDM E L LAMH LDM E L LCM LDM E L LCMH LDM E L MAM E M MAMH E M MCM E M MCMH E M NBM E N NBMH E N NCM E N NCMH E N Additional Information on Mining Breakers Source TD E BR E TC E Note 1000 Vac Mining Breaker Replacement Chart Classic Series C E M HFM E FM JDCM E JM HKAM KDCM E KM HLAM LDCM E LM HLCM LDCM E LM HMAM E MM HMCM E MM HNBM E NM HNBMH E NM HNCM E NM HLCLM E NM HPBM E RM 1 Description E Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data E Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure E Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves Mining and Metals 1 E R/E RM is a new frame physically different than the HPBM. See DS9-170MS. V4-T-37 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

373 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Eaton s mining service circuit breakers provide short-circuit protection as specified in the code of Federal Regulations 30 CFR Interrupting Capacity Rating Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical ka) E 5/400 A K frame and 400/600 A L frame electronic trip units feature specifically designed instantaneous pickup settings to conform exactly with the code of Federal Regulations 30 CFR Electromechanical trip units are also available with a wide range of magnetic pickup ranges. Circuit Vac (50/60 Hz) Vdc 1 Breaker Type Y/ E F E J E K E LME E L E M E N E R E FM E JM E KM E LMZ E LM E MM E NM E RM E KW E LW E MW 1 1 The tables below list the conductor size maximum allowable circuit breaker instantaneous setting and the E breaker that meets that setting. Trailing Cable Setting Per 30 CFR 75 Conductor Size Auxiliary Switch Electrical Rating Data Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch) Electrical Rating Data Maximum Breaker Instantaneous Setting Maximum Ampere 75 C Insulated Conductor E /E M/E W Instantaneous Only Setting E K 150 A A E K 150 A B E K 150 A C E K 5 A A E K 5 A B E K 5 A / EL 400 A C/A E K 5 A / EL 400 A D/B E K 5 A / EL 400 A E/C E K 5 A / EL 400 A F/D 1/ E K 5 A / EL 400 A G/E / E K 5 A / EL 400 A H/F 3/ E L 400 A G 4/ E L 400 A H E L 400 A H E L 400 A H E L 400 A H E L 400 A H E L 400 A H Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes /60 Hz DC 0.5 (non-inductive load) 50 DC 0.5 (non-inductive load) Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes /60 Hz DC 0.5 (non-inductive load) 50 DC 0.5 (non-inductive load) 1 Two poles in series. DC rating applies to breakers with thermal-magnetic trip unit. Breakers with electronic trip units are not DC rated. Series rated for application with Eaton s E KM and E LM breakers. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-373

374 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. E Mining Service Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology Frame Size EK EL EM EN ER E Mining Service 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Frame Size K L M Electronic Trip E 1 = Electronic trip Voltage Blank = 600 Vac max. M = 1000Y/577 Vac max. Electronic Trip E = Electronic trip Voltage M = 600 V and 1000 V interchangeable 1 All N- and R-Frame breakers equipped with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit. No E suffix required. Not available with instantaneous only. of Poles 3 = Three-pole of Poles 3 = Three-pole EK E M B0 W Current Ampere Rating Magnetic Rating (If Applicable) Blank = Standard mag. = High mag. Trip Unit Function M = 310+ Electronic Inst only (magnetic only) Blank = 310+ Electronic LSI 38 = 310+ Electronic ALSI with maintenance mode K E M T B0 Current Ampere Rating Trip Unit T Trip Unit Function M = 310+ Electronic Inst only (magnetic only) Blank = 310+ Electronic LSI 38 = 310+ Electronic ALSI with maintenance mode Optional Features B0 = High load alarm Magnetic Rating (If Applicable) Blank = Standard mag. = High mag. Terminal W = No terminals Blank = Standard terminals Optional Features B0 1 = High load alarm V4-T-374 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

375 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 E Mining Service Breaker Frame Only 1 Frame Size EJ EK EL EM E Mining Service Breaker with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 Frame Size EF EJ EK EL EM E Mining Service Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 1 Does not apply to ELME/LMZ. Only available in K-, L- and M-Frames. Voltage Blank = 600 Vac max. M = 1000Y/577 Vac max. = 100 Vac max. W Frame Size EJ EK EL EM Voltage Blank = 600 Vac max. M = 1000Y/577 Vac max. of Poles 3 = Three-pole of Poles 3 = Three-pole EK M F of Poles 3 = Three-pole EK M M K W Current Ampere Rating Current Ampere Rating Trip Unit Function M = Magnetic only Blank = Thermal-magnetic EK T M A Current Ampere Rating Trip Unit T Frame Designation F Magnetic Trip Range Suffix See catalog Trip Unit Function M = Magnetic only Blank = Thermal-magnetic Terminal W = No terminals Blank = Standard terminals Magnetic Trip Range Suffix See catalog Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-375

376 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Undervoltage Release Mechanism Electrical Rating Data Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Breaker Type Supply Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA E F/E FM 110 Vac Vac Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc 1.9 E J/E JM 110 Vac Vac.1 17 Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc. E K/E KM/E KW 110 Vac Vac.1 17 Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc. E LME/E LMZ 110 Vac Vac Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc 1.1 E L/E LM/E LW/E M/ 110 Vac E MM/E MW 10 Vac.1 17 Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc. E N/E NM 110 Vac Vac.1 17 Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc. E R/E RM 110 Vac Vac Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc 3.8 V4-T-376 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

377 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data Operating Voltage Breaker Type Supply Voltage Minimum VA E F/E FM 48 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc 71 E J/E JM 110 Vac Vac Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc 150 E K/E KM/E KW 110 Vac Vac Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc Vac Vac Vac 10 E LME/E LMZ 110 Vac Vac 9 17 Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc 11 Operating Voltage Breaker Type Supply Voltage Minimum VA E L/E LM/E LW/E M/ 48 Vac E MM/E MW 60 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc 140 E N/E NM 110 Vac Vac Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc 140 E R/E RM 110 Vac Vac Vac Vdc Vdc Vdc 480 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-377

378 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Product Selection 3 A 150 A E F/E FM E F/E FM Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Include Line/Load Terminals, Non-Electronic Trip Units 1 Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Thermal-Magnetic Magnetic Trip Range Note 1 For two-pole application, use outer poles. Trip Unit Only 600 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 35 ka at 480 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 10 ka at 1000 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker 15 EF EF300 EFM300 5 EF305 EFM EF EF EF3040 EFM EF EF3050 EFM EF3060 EFM EF3070 EFM EF3080 EFM EF3090 EFM EF3100 EFM EF315 EFM EF3150 EFM3150 Magnetic Only EF003AM EF007CM EF015EM EF030HM EF030EM EF050KM EFM050KM EF050YM EFM050YM EF070MM EFM070MM EF100KM EFM100KM EF100RM EFM100RM EF150TM EFM150TM EF150UM EFM150UM V4-T-378 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

379 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 70 A 50 A E J/E JM E J/E JM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Thermal-Magnetic 1 Frame only: EJ350F. Frame only: EJM350F. Magnetic Trip Range Trip Unit Only 600 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 35 ka at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1 Complete Breaker 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 10 ka at 1000 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker EJ3070T EJ3070W EJM3070W EJ3090T EJ3090W EJM3090W EJ3100T EJ3100W EJM3100W EJ315T EJ315W EJM315W EJ3150T EJ3150W EJM3150W EJ3175T EJ3175W EJM3175W EJ300T EJ300W EJM300W EJ35TA EJ35AW EJM35AW EJ35TD EJ35DW EJM35DW EJ35T EJ35W EJM35W EJ350T EJ350W EJM350W Magnetic Only EJ350TMA EJ350MAW EJM350MAW EJ350TMC EJ350MCW EJM50MCW EJ350TMD EJ350MDW EJM350MDW EJ350TMF EJ350MFW EJM350MFW EJ350TMG EJ350MGW EJM350MGW EJ350TMJ EJ350MJW EJM350MJW EJ350TMK EJ350MKW EJM350MKW EJ350TML EJ350MLW EJM350MLW EJ350TM EJ350MW EJM350MW Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-379

380 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 100 A 400 A E K/E KM/E KW E K/E KM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Thermal-Magnetic Magnetic Trip Range 1 Frame only: EK3400F. Frame only: EKM3400F V breakers are sold as complete breakers only. 4 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 C. Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. Trip Unit Only 600 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 35 ka at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1 Complete Breaker 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 14 ka at 1000 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker 100 Vac Maximum 10 ka at 100 Vac Three-Pole 34 Complete Breaker EK3100T EK3100W EKM3100W EKW3100W EK315T EK315W EKM315W EKW315W EK3150T EK3150W EKM3150W EKW3150W EK3175T EK3175W EKM3175W EKW3175W EK300T EK300W EKM300W EKW300W EK35TA EK35AW EKM35AW EKW35AW EK35TD EK35DW EKM35DW EKW35DW EK35T EK35W EKM35W EKW35W EK350T EK350W EKM350W EKW350W EK3300T EK3300W EKM3300W EKW3300W EKW330W EK3350T EK3350W EKM3350W EKW3350W EK3400T EK3400W EKM3400W Magnetic Only EK3400TMA EK3400MAW EKM350MAW EKW350MAW EK3400TMD EK3400MDW EKM3400MDW EKW3350MDW EK3400TMF EK3400MFW EKM3400MFW EKW3350MFW EK3400TMG EK3400MGW EKM3400MGW EKW3350MGW EK3400TMJ EK3400MJW EKM3400MJW EKW3350MJW EK3400TMK EK3400MKW EKM3400MKW EKW3350MKW EK3400TML EK3400MLW EKM3400MLW EKW3350MLW EK3400TMW EK3400MWW EKM3400MWW EKW3350MWW EK3400TMN EK3400MNW EKM3400MNW EKW3350MNW EKW3350MVW EK3400TMR EK3400MRW EKM3400MRW EKW3350MRW EK3400TM EK3400MW EKM3400MW V4-T-380 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

381 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers A 400 A E KE/E KEM E KM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Magnetic Trip Range 1 Frame only: EK3400F. Frame only: EKM3400F. 3 For High Load Alarm option (B0): EKE340038B0W, KEM3400TB0. Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. Trip Unit Only 600 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 35 ka at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1 Complete Breaker 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 14 ka at 1000 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker 310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only KEM3150TM EKE3150MW EKEM3150MW KEM35TM EKE35MW EKEM35MW KEM35TM EKE35MW EKEM35MW KEM3400TM EKE3400MW EKEM3400MW KEM3400TM EKE3400MW EKEM3400MW 310+ Electronic LSI KEM3100T EKE3100W EKEM3100W KEM315T EKE315W EKEM315W KEM3150T EKE3150W EKEM3150W KEM300T EKE300W EKEM300W KEM35T EKE35W EKEM KEM35T EKE35W EKEM35W KEM3400T EKE3400W EKEM3400W KEM3400T EKE3400W EKEM3400W 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode KEM310038T EKE310038W EKEM310038W KEM31538T EKE31538W EKEM31538W KEM315038T EKE315038W EKEM315038W KEM30038T EKE30038W EKEM30038W KEM3538T EKE3538W EKEM KEM3538T EKE3538W EKEM3538W KEM340038T EKE340038W EKEM340038W KEM340038T EKE340038W EKEM340038W Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-381

382 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 160 A 400 A E LME/E LMZ (Series G) Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Magnetic Only Magnetic Trip Range 1 Frame only: ELME3400NN. Frame only: ELMZ3400NN. Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. Trip Unit Only 600 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 35 ka at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1 Complete Breaker 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 14 ka at 1000 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker LT3400KM ELME3400KMW ELMZ3400KMW Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit LT340031M ELME340031W ELMZ340031W LT340031M ELME340031W ELMZ340031W LT340031M ELME340031W ELMZ340031W LT340031M ELME340031W ELMZ340031W LT340031M ELME340031W ELMZ340031W LT340031M ELME340031W ELMZ340031W LT340031M ELME340031W ELMZ340031W LT340031M ELME340031W ELMZ340031W V4-T-38 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

383 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers A 600 A E L/E LM/E LW Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Thermal-Magnetic Magnetic Trip Range 1 Frame only: EL3600F. Frame only: ELM3600F. 3 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 C A thermal T.A. Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. Trip Unit Only 600 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 35 ka at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1 Complete Breaker 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 18 ka at 1000 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker 100 Vac Maximum 10 ka at 100 Vac Three-Pole 3 Complete Breaker EL3300T EL3300W ELM3300W ELW3300W EL3450T EL3450W ELM3450W ELW330W ELW3350W EL3350T EL3350W ELM3350W ELW3400W EL3400T EL3400W ELM3400W ELW3450W EL3500T EL3500W ELM3500W EL3600T EL3600W ELM3600W EL3600TL 4 Magnetic Only ELW3450MVW ELW3450MLW ELW3450MNW ELW3450MRW ELW3450MXW ELW3450MYW EL3600TML EL3600MLW ELM3600MLW EL3600TMN EL3600MNW ELM3600MNW EL3600TMR EL3600MRW ELM3600MRW EL3600TMX EL3600MXW ELM3600MXW EL3600TMY EL3600MYW ELM3600MYW EL3600TMP EL3600MPW ELM3600MPW EL3600TM EL3600MW ELM3600MW Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-383

384 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 300 A 600 A E LE/E LEM E LM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Magnetic Trip Range 1 Frame only: EL3600F. Frame only: ELM3600F. 3 For High Load Alarm option (B0): ELE360038B0W, LEM3600TB0. Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. Trip Unit Only 600 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 35 ka at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1 Complete Breaker 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 18 ka at 1000 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker 310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only LEM3400TM ELE3400MW ELEM3400MW LEM3400TM ELE3400MW ELEM3400MW LEM3600TM ELE3600MW ELEM3600MW LEM3600TM ELE3600MW ELEM3600MW 310+ Electronic LSI LEM3300T ELE3300W ELEM3300W LEM3350T ELE3350W ELEM3350W LEM3400T ELE3400W ELEM3400W LEM3400T ELE3400W ELEM3400W LEM3600T ELE3600W ELEM3600W LEM3600T ELE3600W ELEM3600W 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode LEM330038T ELE330038W ELEM330038W LEM335038T ELE335038W ELEM335038W LEM340038T ELE340038W ELEM340038W LEM340038T ELE340038W ELEM340038W LEM360038T ELE360038W ELEM360038W LEM360038T ELE360038W ELEM360038W V4-T-384 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

385 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers A 800 A E M/E MM/E MW E M/E MM/E MW Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Thermal-Magnetic Magnetic Trip Range 1 Frame only: EM3800F. Frame only: EMM3800F V breakers are sold as complete breakers only. 4 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 C. Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. Trip Unit Only 600 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 35 ka at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1 Complete Breaker 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 18 ka at 1000 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker 100 Vac Maximum 1 ka at 100 Vac Three-Pole 34 Complete Breaker EMW3400W EMW3500W EM3600TN EM3600W EMM3600W EMW3600W EMW3630W EM3800TX EM3800W EMM3800W EMW3800W Magnetic Only EM3800TMN EM3800MNW EMM3800MNW EMW3800MNW EMW3800MVW EM3800TMX EM3800MXW EMM3800MXW EMW3800MXW EM3800TMP EM3800MPW EMM3800MPW EM3800TMW EM3800MWW EMM3800MWW Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-385

386 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 800 A E ME/E MEM E MN Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Magnetic Trip Range 1 Frame only: EM3800F. Frame only: EMM3800F. 3 For High Load Alarm option (B0): EME380038B0W, MEM3800TB0. Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. Trip Unit Only 600 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 35 ka at 480 Vac Three-Pole 1 Complete Breaker 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 18 ka at 1000 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker 310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only MEM3800TM EME3800MW EMEM3800MW MEM3800TM EME3800MW EMEM3800MW 310+ Electronic LSI MEM3800T EME3800W EMEM3800W MEM3800T EME3800W EMEM3800W 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode MEM380038T EME380038W EMEM380038W MEM380038T EME380038W EMEM380038W V4-T-386 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

387 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers A 100 A E N/E NM E NM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C Magnetic Trip Range 1 For High Load Alarm option (B0): EN380038B0W. Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. Trip Unit Only 600 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 35 ka at 480 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 18 ka at 1000 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker 310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only EN3800MW ENM3800MW EN31MW ENM31MW 310+ Electronic LSI EN3400W ENM3400W EN3500W EN3M500W EN3600W ENM3600W EN3700W ENM3700W EN3800W ENM3800W EN3900W ENM3900W EN310W ENM310W EN31W ENM31W 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode EN340038W ENM340038W EN350038W ENM350038W EN360038W ENM360038W EN370038W ENM370038W EN380038W ENM380038W EN390038W ENM390038W EN31038W ENM31038W EN3138W ENM3138W Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-387

388 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers 1600 A 000 A E R/E RM E RM Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40 C 310+ Electronic LSI 1 Magnetic Trip Range 1 For High Load Alarm option (B0): ER1638B0W. Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. Trip Unit Only 600 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 35 ka at 480 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 50 Vdc 18 ka at 1000 Vac Three-Pole Complete Breaker x I n ER316W ERM316W x I n ER30W ERM30W 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode x I n ER31638W ERM31638W x I n ER3038W ERM3038W V4-T-388 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

389 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Accessories Line and Load Terminals Breaker Type End Cap Terminals For Use with Ring Type Terminals External Accessories Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Maximum Breaker Amperes Wire Type AWG Wire Range (No. Conductors) E F/E FM 100 Cu/AI #14 1/0 (1) 3T100FB (package of three) 150 Cu #4 4/0 (1) 3T150FB (package of three) E J/E JM 50 Cu #4 350 (1) T50KB E K/E KM/E KW 5 Cu #3 350 (1) T300K 350 Cu (1) T350K 400 Cu /0 50 () 3T400K (three-pole kit) E LME/E LMZ 400 Cu/AI (1) 3TA631LK E L/E LM/E LW 400 Cu/AI 4/0 600 (1) 3TA401LDK (three-pole kit) 600 Cu () T60LD E M/E MM/E MW 600 Cu () /0 500 kcmil T600MA1 600 Cu/AI () kcmil TA700MA1 800 std. Cu/AI (3) 3/0 400 kcmil TA800MA 800 Cu/AI () kcmil TA801MA 800 Cu (3) 3/0 300 kcmil T800MA1 E N/E NM 700 Cu /0 500 () T700NB Cu 3/0 500 (3) T1000NB1 100 Cu 3/0 400 (4) T100NB Cu/AI (4) TA1600RD 000 Cu/AI 600 (6) TA000RD Breaker Type Maximum Breaker Amperes Metric Imperial E F/E FM 150 KPEK1 KPEMK1 E J/E JM 50 KPEK KPEMK E K/E KM/E KW 400 KPEK3 KPEMK3 E LME/E LMZ 400 L3RTWK E L/E LM/E LW 600 KPEK4 KPEMK4 Breaker Type E F/E FM E J/E JM E K/E KM/E KW E LME/E LMZ E L/E LM/E LW E M/E MM/E MW E N/E NM E R/E RM PLK1 PLK3 PLK3 LPHL HLK4 HLK4 PLK5 HLK6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-389

390 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release 1 Breaker Type UVR Type Voltage Rating Mounting Location E F/E FM Handle reset Vac Left pole UVH1LP11K (thermal/magnetic only) U18 Handle reset Vdc Left pole UVH1LP6K (thermal/magnetic only) U4 E J/E JM Handle reset Vac Left pole UVHLP08K U18 Handle reset Vac Left pole UVHLP11K U Handle reset Vdc Left pole UVHLP6K T14 E K/E KM/E KW 10 volt handle reset with LED 10 Vac Left pole UVM3LP08K 3 U66 10 volt handle reset with LED 10 Vac Left pole UVM3LP08KT 4 U68 Handle reset Vac Left pole UVH3LP08K U18 Handle reset Vac Left pole UVH3LP11K U Handle reset Vdc Left pole UVH3LP6K T14 E LME/E LMZ Handle reset Vac Left pole UVR10APK U5 Handle reset Vdc Left pole UVR15DPK U6 E L/E LM/E LW/E M/E MM/ 10 volt handle reset with LED 10 Vac Left pole UVM4LP08K 3 U66 E MW 10 volt handle reset with LED 10 Vac Left pole UVM4LP08KT 4 U68 Handle reset Vac Left pole UVH4LP08K U18 Handle reset Vac Left pole UVH4LP11K U Handle reset Vdc Left pole UVH4LP6K T14 E N/E NM 10 volt handle reset with LED 10 Vac Left pole UVM5LP08K 3 U66 10 volt handle reset with LED 10 Vac Left pole UVM5LT08K 4 U68 Handle reset Vac Left pole UVH5LP08K U18 Handle reset Vac Left pole UVH5LP11K U Handle reset Vdc Left pole UVH5LP6K T14 E R/E RM 10 volt handle reset with LED 10 Vac Right pole UVM6RP08K 35 U58 Handle reset Vac Right pole UVH6RP08K 5 U49 Handle reset Vac Right pole UVH6RP11K 5 U53 Handle reset Vdc Right pole UVH6RP6K 5 T33 1 Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed. LH (RH also available). 3 Pigtail leads. 4 Terminal blocks. 5 RH only. Factory Modification Code V4-T-390 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

391 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Shunt Trip 1 Breaker Type E F/E FM E J/E JM E K/E KM/E KW Auxiliary Switch Voltage Rating Vac or Vdc Vac or Vdc Vac or Vdc Vac or Vdc Mounting Location Left pole SNT1LP08K S06 Left pole SNT1LP1K S10 Left pole SNTP11K 3 S10 Left pole SNT3P11K 3 S10 ELME/ELMZ 4 Vac/Vdc Left pole SNT04CPK S Vac/Vdc Left pole SNT4860CPK S Vac/Vdc Left pole SNT10CPK S E L/E LM/E LW/E M/ Vac Left pole SNT4LP05K S06 E MM/E MW Vdc Left pole SNT4LP3K S Vac Left pole SNT4LP11K S Vdc Left pole SNT4LP6K S4 E N/E NM Vac Left pole SNT5LP11K S Vdc Left pole SNT5LP6K S4 E R/E RM Vac Right pole SNT6P11K 4 S Vdc Right pole SNT6P6K 4 S45 Breaker Type of Sets of Contacts (1A and 1B) Mounting Location E F/E FM 1 Right A1X1PK A06 Right AX1RPK A13 E J/E JM 1 Right A1XPK A06 Right AXPK A13 E K/E KM/E KW 1 Right A1X3PK A06 Right AX3PK A13 E LME/E LMZ 1 Right AUX1A1BPK A1 Right AUXABPK A E L/E LM/E LW/E M/ 1 Right A1X4PK A06 E MM/E MW Right AX4PK A13 E N/E NM 1 Right A1X5PK A06 Right AX5PK A13 E R/E RM Right AX6RPK A1 4 Right A4X6RPK A19 Factory Modification Code Factory Modification Code Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch) Breaker Type 1 Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed. LH (RH also available). 3 LH or RH. 4 RH only. of Sets of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location E F/E FM 1 Right A1L1LPK/A1L1RPK B06 Right AL1LPK/AL1RPK B13 E J/E JM 1 Right A1LLPK/A1LRPK B06 E K/E KM/E KW 1 Right A1L3LPK/A1L3RPK B06 Right AL3LPK/AL3RPK B13 E LME/E LMZ 1 Right ALM1M1BJPK B1 Right ALMMBJPK B3 E L/E LM/E LW/E M/ 1 Right A1L4LPK/A1L4RPK B06 E MM/E MW Right AL4LPK/AL4RPK B13 E N/E NM 1 Right A1L5LPK/A1L5RPK B06 Right AL5LPK/AL5RPK B13 E R/E RM 1 Right A1L6RPK B05 Right AL6RPK B1 Factory Modification Code Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-391

392 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. 3 A 150 A E F/E FM Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Include Line/Load Terminals Non-Electronic Trip Units A On Off Front View Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 4.13 (104.9) B 6.00 (15.4) C 3.38 (85.9) D 3.50 (88.9) B D C Side View 70 A 50 A E J/E JM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units A ON/ OFF/ Front View Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 4.13 (104.9) B (54.0) C 4.06 (103.1) D 4.31 (109.5) B C D Side View V4-T-39 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

393 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. 100 A 400 A E K/E KM/E KW Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units A ON OFF Front View Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 5.49 (139.4) B (57.3) C 4.06 (103.1) D 4.31 (109.5) B C D Side View 100 A 400 A E KE/E KEM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units A ON OFF Front View Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 5.49 (139.4) B (57.3) C 4.06 (103.1) D 4.31 (109.5) B C D Side View Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-393

394 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. 160 A 400 A E LME/E LMZ Circuit Breakers On/I Off/O A Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 5.48 (139.) B (57.3) C 4.00 (101.6) D 4. (107.1) On/I Off/O Trip Unit May Be Either Thermal/Magnetic or Electronic Front View B D C Side View 300 A 600 A E L/E LM/E LW Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units On/I Off/O A Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 8.5 (09.6) B (73.1) C 4.06 (103.1) D 4.38 (111.3) On/I Off/O Trip Unit May Be Either Thermal/Magnetic or Electronic Front View B C D Side View V4-T-394 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

395 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. 300 A 600 A E LE/E LEM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units On/I Off/O A Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 8.5 (09.6) B (73.1) C 4.06 (103.1) D 4.38 (111.3) On/I Off/O Trip Unit May Be Either Thermal/Magnetic or Electronic Front View B D C Side View 300 A 800 A E M/E MM/E MW Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units On/I Off/O A On/I Off/O Front View Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 8.5 (09.6) B (406.4) C 4.06 (103.1) D 4.38 (111.3) B C D Side View Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-395

396 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Please see TD E for detailed dimensions. 800 A E ME/E MEM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units On/I Off/O A On/I Off/O Front View Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 8.5 (09.6) B (406.4) C 4.06 (103.1) D 4.38 (111.3) B C D Side View 400 A 100 A E N/E NM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units A ON/I OFF/O Front View Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 8.5 (09.6) B (406.4) C 5.50 (139.7) D 6.00 (15.4) B C D Side View V4-T-396 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

397 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Please see TD E for detailed dimensions A 000 A E R/ E RM Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units A Front View Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) A (393.7) B (406.4) C 9.00 (8.6) D (54.0) B D C Side View Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-397

398 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Classic Mining Breakers Product Overview Classic mining service circuit breakers continue to be manufactured and are primarily applied to achieve an exact physical and electronic replacement of previously Cutler-Hammer installed Westinghouse equipment. To upgrade to the current offering of E mining circuit breakers, consult the cross reference information on Page V4-T-407. AC Interrupting Capacity, Symmetrical Amperes Special DC Interrupting Capacity 1 Based on circuit power factor of 50% or greater. HLAM must be rear stud connected. If front connected, interrupting capacity rating is 10,000 amperes. 3 Resistive circuit. 4 Two poles in electrical series in ungrounded leg of circuit. Contents Breaker Type 60 Hz AC Volts KAM LAM, MAM, NBM HKAM HLAM All Other 1000 Volt Breakers 40 5,000 4, ,000 30, ,000, ,000 1,000 14,000 Description Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Direct Current Circuit Breakers PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers 600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series E Mining Service Breakers Classic Mining Breakers Product Selection Accessories Reference Information Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFR..... Interrupting Capacity (Amperes) at Vdc Single-Pole Two Poles in Series 4 Breaker Type Maximum Ampere Rating mh Inductance mh Inductance mh Inductance.4 mh Inductance KAM 5 15,000 10,000 15, LAM 400/600 15,000 10,000 15, MAM ,000 10,000 15, NBM ,000 10,000 15, Page V4-T-343 V4-T-349 V4-T-363 V4-T-37 V4-T-400 V4-T-405 V4-T-407 V4-T-41 V4-T-398 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

399 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Classic Circuit Breakers For Mining Service Undervoltage Release Data Undervoltage releases are calibrated to pick up at 7 to 85% of rated voltage dropout between 35 to 70% of rated voltage. Breaker Type Volts Line Amperes Series Resistors 1 Total VA KAM, HKAM 1 480/ , / / / LAM, HLAM, MAM, 480/ , HMAM, NBM, HNBM 1 40/ , / / Shunt Trip Coil Data Breaker Type Volts Amperes VA KAM, HKAM, LAM, HLAM, MAM, 480/ HMAM, NBM, HNBM 40/ / DC Supplied for external customer mounting. New design electrical reset UVR. 3 16,000 for Type MAM and HMAM. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-399

400 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Product Selection For reference only. Replace these frames with E Series. See Cross-Reference information beginning on Page V4-T-407. Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers Breaker Type Frame Style s 1 Poles Amperes 1 Terminals not included in style number. All breakers listed are complete with accessories indicated. 3 Rated 10 volts/60 Hz: undervoltage release is handle reset type. 4 UVR is auto-reset type, 10 Vac. M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic. Trip Type Accessories (Included in Frame) Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes 3 KAM 609D60G M None C6G M UVR D60G M Standard shunt trip C6G01 5 TM UVR C6G0 5 TM UVR D60G M None C6G M UVR D60G M Standard shunt trip D48G TM None D48G TM None C6G TM UVR C6G TM UVR D60G TM Standard shunt trip D60G0 3 5 TM Standard shunt trip D60G M None D60G M None C6G M UVR C6G M UVR LAM 191C3G TM UVR D60G M Shunt trip (48 Vdc) C3G TM UVR D48G TM None C3G TM UVR D60G TM Standard shunt trip D60G M None C3G M UVR V4-T-400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

401 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 For reference only. Replace these frames with E Series. See Cross-Reference information beginning on Page V4-T-407. Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers, continued Breaker Type Frame Style s 1 Poles Amperes MAM 609D60G TM UVR D60G TM UVR D60G TM UVR D48G TM None D60G TM UVR D60G TM Standard shunt trip D60G TM Standard shunt trip D48G TM None D60G TM UVR D60G M None D60G M UVR D60G M None D60G M UVR NBM 19C37G TM UVR C37G TM UVR C36G TM None C37G TM UVR C36G TM Standard shunt trip C36G TM Standard shunt trip C36G TM None C37G TM UVR C36G M None C37G M UVR Terminals not included in style number. All breakers listed are complete with accessories indicated. 3 Rated 10 volts/60 Hz: undervoltage release is handle reset type. 4 UVR is auto-reset type, 10 Vac. M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic. Trip Type Accessories (Included in Frame) Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes 3 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-401

402 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers HKAM HLAM HMAM HNAM 1000 Volt Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers Breaker Type Frame Style s Poles Amperes 1 The magnetic trip range does not change when rating plug is changed. 10 volt, 60 Hz electrical reset type. 3 Rated 10 volts, 60 Hz; undervoltage release is handle reset type. M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic. Trip Type Accessories (Included in Frame) HKAM 609D60G M None C6G M UVR D48G TM None C6G1 3 5 TM UVR D48G TM None C6G TM UVR C6G M UVR C6G M UVR HLAM 5685D48G TM None C3G TM UVR C3G M UVR Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes 1 HMAM 5685D48G TM None D60G TM UVR D48G TM None D60G TM UVR D60G M UVR D60G M UVR HNBM 17C36G TM None C37G TM UVR C36G TM None C37G TM UVR C37G M UVR V4-T-40 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

403 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Classic Mining Service Breaker Frames Only Breaker Type Trip Units for Classic Mining Circuit Breakers 1 Frame modified for left-hand mounting of UVR attachment. Frame modified for right-hand mounting of UVR attachment. 3 Three-pole trip units only are suitable for replacement in 1000 volt mining service circuit breakers amperes. Frame Size, Amperes of Poles Style s Breaker Type Frame Size, Amperes of Poles Style s KAM D86G11 MAM D43G D86G D43G1 KAMH D86G13 MAMH D43G D86G D43G14 HKAM C99G05 HMAM C99G03 LAM D99G05 NBM D64G D99G D64G08 LAMH D99G07 NBMH D64G D99G D64G10 HLAM C99G0 HNBM D64G13 LAM3600F D48G07 LAMH3600F D48G08 HLAM3600F D48G09 Breaker Type Conductor Size Magnetic Trip Range, Amperes Maximum Continuous Amperes Thermal-Magnetic Three-Pole 3 Style s Magnetic Only Three-Pole Style s HKAM # D99G #4 # D48G40 611D75G01 #4 # D48G34 611D75G0 HLAM #4 # D48G97 609D99G1 # #/ D48G8 611D75G03 HLAM600 # / D99G0 /0 500 kcmil D99G19 HMAM # #/ /0 500 kcmil D48G 611D75G04 4 #1 3/ /0 500 kcmil D48G16 611D75G05 HNBM /0 500 kcmil /0 500 kcmil D48G10 3/0 500 kcmil /0 500 kcmil D48G04 611D75G07 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-403

404 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Terminals For Classic Mining Service Breakers Terminals are UL listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. Breaker Type Terminal Type Terminals For Mining Service Breakers Maximum Amperes Package of 3 Line Terminals Style Wire Range, Type FBM, HFBM Style pressure type terminals B100G0 #14 1/0 Al/Cu Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 50 64B100G10 #14 #4 Al/Cu B100G17 # 4 4/0 Al/Cu Breaker Type Terminal Type Maximum Amperes Terminal Wire Range, Type of Cables KAM, HKAM Standard pressure terminals (copper only) 5 T5LA (1) #6 350 kcmil Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 5 TA5LA1 (1) #6 350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4 350 kcmil Al LAM Standard copper pressure terminals 5 T5LA (1) #6 350 kcmil Cu 400 T401LA (1) #4 50 kcmil Cu plus (1) 3/0 600 kcmil Cu Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 5 TA5LA1 (1) #6 350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4 350 kcmil Al 400 TA400LA1 (1) #4 50 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0 600 kcmil Al/Cu 400 TA401LA (1) kcmil Al LAM-600, LAMH-600, HLAM-600 Standard copper pressure terminals 600 T600LA () kcmil Cu Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 600 TA600LA () kcmil Al/Cu MAM, HMAM, MAMH Standard copper pressure terminals 350 T350MA (1) #1 600 kcmil Cu 600 T600MA1 () /0 500 kcmil Cu 800 T800MA1 (3) 3/0 300 kcmil Cu Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 600 TA700MA1 () #1 500 kcmil Al/Cu 800 TA800MA (3) 3/0 400 kcmil Al/Cu 800 TA801MA () kcmil Al/Cu NBM, HNBM, NBMH Standard copper pressure terminals 1000 T1000NB1 (3) 3/0 500 kcmil Cu 100 T100NB1 (4) 3/0 400 kcmil Cu Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 1000 TA1000NB1 (3) 3/0 400 kcmil Al/Cu 100 TA100NB1 (4) 4/0 500 kcmil Al/Cu 100 TA101NB1 (3) kcmil Al/Cu V4-T-404 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

405 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Accessories Classic Mining Circuit Breakers Rear Connected Studs 1 For complete stud assembly, order a stud and tube based on thickness of customer s mounting panel. A short stud must be assembled adjacent to a long stud to maintain Mounting Panel Stud Thickness In Inches (mm) Length KAM, HKAM Breakers Style s clearances required by Underwriters Laboratories. Two studs required per pole. For List Prices, see Eaton s Price and Availability Digest. Tube Length In Inches (mm) Style s 0.75 (19.1) 1.00 (5.4) Short 656D565G (1.3) 456D983H05 Long 656D565G (96.0) 456D983H (1.7) 0.75 (19.1) Short 656D565G (7.7) 456D983H06 Long 656D565G (10.4) 456D983H (6.4) 0.50 (1.7) Short 656D565G (34.0) 456D983H07 Long 656D565G0 4.8 (108.7) 456D983H10 Rear Connected Studs For Insulated Panels Only: Two Per Pole Stud Ampere Line and Load Terminal Shields 5 Diameter, In Inches (mm) and Thread Extension Back of Breaker In Inches (mm) Stud Style s LAM, HLAM Breakers (1.7) (81.8) (1.7) (159.5) (1.7) (16.) (19.1) (138.9) 05B7383G 0.75 (19.1) (0.4) 05B7383G (19.1) (65.9) 05B7383G (5.4) (150.1) 314C960G (5.4) (13.6) 314C960G (5.4) (77.1) 314C960G18 MAM, HMAM, MAMH Breakers (1.7) (93.0) 314C960G (19.1) (150.1) 314C960G (19.1) (13.6) 314C960G (19.1) (77.1) 314C960G (5.4) (150.1) 314C960G (5.4) (13.6) 314C960G (5.4) (77.1) 314C960G (8.7) (14.7) 314C960G (8.7) (13.6) 314C960G (8.7) (77.1) 314C960G1 NBM, HNBM, NBMH Breakers (8.7) (139.7) 63BG (8.7) (03.) 63BG (8.7) (66.7) 63BG (31.8) (139.7) 373B375G (31.8) (66.7) 373B375G03 Breaker Type Description Style s KAM Line terminals 161C93G01 Load terminals 16C46G01 LAM-400 Line terminals 161C95G01 Load terminals 16C48G01 MAM Line terminals 161C97G01 Load terminals 161C97G0 1 Not UL Iisted. 400 ampere LA studs of the same length have sufficient clearance; however, customer connections may make it necessary to use a short stud adjacent to a long stud , 300 and 400 ampere frames only. 4 This is a special stud that includes six contact nuts for use where bus contact nuts must be used. 5 For breakers used with terminals and cable connections. Sold in packages of 10. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-405

406 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Standard Handle Reset Undervoltage Release For Classic breakers field mountable on special frames listed on Page V4-T-407, or replacement on breakers originally equipped with this type UVR. For undervoltage protection. A solenoid device mounts within breaker case. Coil must be energized before closing breaker. Trips breaker Breaker Type Volts Style s Right-Hand Mounting LAM, HLAM 10 Vac 4995D1G11 10 Vac 1 18C76G03 40 Vac 4995D1G Vac 4995D1G14 15 Vdc 4995D1G09 MAM, HMAM, 10 Vac 567D69G11 MAMH 10 Vac 1 40 Vac 567D69G Vac 567D69G14 NBM, HNBM, 10 Vac 4995D11G11 NBMH 10 Vac 1 19C35G03 40 Vac 4995D11G Vac 4995D11G14 Left-Hand Mounting KAM, HKAM 10 Vac 4995D10G01 10 Vac 1 18C76G03 40 Vac 4995D10G Vac 4995D10G04 when voltage drops below 35 to 70% of coil rating. Picks up and seals in at 7 to 85% of coil rating. For line voltages up to 50 Vdc or 600 Vac. Externally mounted resistors are supplied for certain ratings. Standard leads extend inches (457. mm) outside of breaker. Longer leads may be specified. Shunt Trips For tripping breaker from a remote point. A solenoid device mounts within breaker case. Breaker trips when coil is energized. A cutoff switch breaks the circuit to the momentary rated coil when breaker opens. Available for Breaker Type 1 Electrical reset UVR. Auto reset type. Volts (50 60 Hz) control voltages up to 50 Vdc or 600 Vac. Voltage and frequency must be specified. Standard leads extend inches (457. mm) outside of breaker. Longer leads may be specified. Style s Right-Hand Mounting KAM, HKAM 480 Vac 605D15G16 40 Vac 605D15G17 10 Vac 605D15G19 LAM, HLAM 480 Vac 606D56G16 40 Vac 606D56G17 10 Vac 606D56G19 48 Vdc 606D56G07 MAM, HMAM, 480 Vac 606D57G16 MAMH 40 Vac 606D57G17 10 Vac 606D57G19 NBM, HNBM, 480 Vac 606D58G16 NBMH 40 Vac 606D58G17 10 Vac 606D58G19 Left-Hand Mounting KAM, HKAM 480 Vac 605D15G0 40 Vac 605D15G03 10 Vac 605D15G05 LAM, HLAM 480 Vac 606D56G0 40 Vac 606D56G03 10 Vac 606D56G05 MAM, HMAM, 480 Vac 606D57G0 MAMH 40 Vac 606D57G03 10 Vac 606D57G05 NBM, HNBM, 480 Vac 606D58G0 NBMH 40 Vac 606D58G03 10 Vac 606D58G05 V4-T-406 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

407 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Reference Information E Cross-Reference Series C Mining 1491D7G D7G3 1491D7G33 Superseded by E Mining EJ3070T EJ3090T EJ3100T Series C Mining FDBM3040 FDBM3045 FDBM3050 Superseded by E Mining EF3040 EF3045 EF D7G37 66C87G7 66C87G8 66C87G3 EKM3100 EKM3100U66 EKM315 EKM315U66 EKM3150 EKM3150MU66 EKM3150TM EKM3150U66 EKM300 EKM300U66 EKM35 EKM35F EKM35FUV EKM35MU66 EKM35TM EJ300T EK35AWU66 EK35DWU66 EK3400GWU66 EKEM3100W EKEM3100WU66 EKEM315W EKEM315WU66 EKEM3150W EKEM3150WU66 EKEM3150MW EKEM3150MWU66 EKEM300W EKEM300WU66 EKEM35W EKM3400F EKM3400F EKEM35MWU66 EKEM35TM FDBM3050U6 FDBM3050WU6 FDBM3060 FDBM3070 FDBM3070WU6 FDBM3080 FDBM3090 FDBM3100 FDBM3100LM04U6 FDBM315 FDBM3150 FDBM3150L FDM3015 FDM3015L FDM3015LU6 FDM300 FDM300LU6 FDM305 FDM305L EF3050U6 EF3050WU6 EF3060 EF3070 EF3070WU6 EF3080 EF3090 EF3100 EF3100M04U6 EF315 EF3150 EF3150L EF3015 EF3015L EF3015LU6 EF300 EF300LU6 EF305 EF305L EKM35U66 ELM3300U66 ELM3350U66 ELM3400U66 ELM3400F ELM3400FUV ELM3400MU66 ELM3400MU66 ELM3400U66 FDBM3015 FDBM3015WU6 FDBM300 FDBM305 FDBM305U6 FDBM3030 FDBM3030U6 FDBM3030WU6 FDBM3035 EKEM35WU66 ELEM3300WU66 ELEM3350WU66 ELEM3400WU66 ELM3600F ELM3600F ELEM3400MWU66 ELEM3400MWU66 ELEM3400WU66 EF3015 EF3015WU6 EF300 EF305 EF305U6 EF3030 EF3030WU6 EF3030WU6 EF3035 FDM305LS FDM305LU6 FDM3030 FDM3030LS FDM3040 FDM3040L FDM3040LU6 FDM3050 FDM3050LU6 FDM3050U6 FDM3060 FDM3060LU6 FDM3070 FDM3070A0U6 FDM3080 FDM3090 FDM3100 FDM3100LS EF305LS EF305LU6 EF3030 EF3030LS EF3040 EF3040L EF3040LU6 EF3050 EF3050LU6 EF3050U6 EF3060 EF3060LU6 EF3070 EF3070A0U6 EF3080 EF3090 EF3100 EF3100LS Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-407

408 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers E Cross-Reference, continued Series C Mining Superseded by E Mining FDM3100LU6 EFLU6 FDM315 EF315 FDM315LU6 EF315LU6 FDM3150 EF3150 HFDM003AM EF003AM HFDM003AMLU6 EF003AMLU6 HFDM007CM EF007CM HFDM007CMU6 EF007CMU6 HFDM015EM EF015EM HFDM015EMA0 EF015EMA0 Series C Mining JDCM3150W JDCM3175W JDCM300W JDCM35A5W JDCM35D5W JDCM35W JDCM350A5MW JDCM350A5MWU18 JDCM350A5W JDCM350C5MW Superseded by E Mining EJM3150W EJM3175W EJM300W EJM35AW EJM35DW EJM35W EJM350MAW EJM350MAWU18 EJM350AW EJM350MCW HFDM015EMLU6 HFDM015EMU6 HFDM030HM HFDM030HMLU6 HFDM030HMU6 HFDM050KM HFDM050KML HFDM050KMLU6 HFDM050KMU6 HFDM070MM HFDM070MMU6 HFDM1001M HFDM1001MS HFDM100LM HFDM100LMA0 HFDM100LMU6 HFDM 100RM HFDM100RML HFDM100RMS EF015EMLU6 EF015EMU6 EF030HM EF030HMLU6 EF030HMU6 EF050KM EF050KML EF050KMLU6 EF050KMU6 EF070MM EF070MMU6 EF1001M EF1001MS EF100LM EF100LMA0 EF100LMU6 EF100RM EF100RML EF100RMS JDCM350D5MW JDCM350D5MWA06 JDCM350D5W JDCM350D5WS10 JDCM350F JDCM350F5MD01 JDCM350F5MW JDCM350G5MW JDCM350G5WA0D01 JDCM350J5MW JDCM350J5MWA0 JDCM350J5WA0D01 JDCM350J5WD01 JDCM350K5MW JDCM350L5MW JDCM350MW JDCM350W JDCMAAD1 JDCMDD1S30 EJM350MDW EJM350MDWA06 EJM350DW EJM350DWS10 EJM350F EJM350MFD01 EJM350MFW EJM350MGW EJM350MGA0D01 EJM350MJW EJM350MJA0 EJM350MJA0D01 EJM350MJD01 EJM350MKW EJM350MLW EJM350MW EJM350W EJM350MM0D01 EJM350MDS30D01 HFDM100RMU6 HFDM150TM HFDM150TML HFDM150TMU6 HFDM150UM JCDAD1S30 JCMAD1S30 JDCM3070W JDCM3090W JDCM3100W JDCM315W EF100RMU6 EF150TM EF150TML EF150TMU6 EF150UM EJM50MDAD1S30 EJM50MFAD1S30 EJM3070W EJM3090W EJM3100W EJM315W JDCMFD01 JDCMGA0D1 JDCMJAD1 JDCMJD01 JDM50F JDM3070W JDM3090W JDM3100W JDM315W JDM3150W JDM3150WU18 EJM350MFD01 EJM350MGA0D01 EJM350MJA0D01 EJM350MJD01 EJM350F EJ3070W EJ3090W EJ3100W EJ315W EJ3150W EJ3150WU18 V4-T-408 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

409 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 E Cross-Reference, continued Series C Mining Superseded by E Mining JDM3175W EJ3175W JDM300W EJ300W JDM300WA06 EJ300WA06 JDM35A5W EJ35AW JDM35D5W EJ35DW JDM35W EJ35W JDM350A5MW EJ350MAW JDM350A5W EJ350AW JDM350C5MW EJ350CW JDM350D5MW EJ350MDW Series C Mining JM350TL5M_ JM350TM KDCM3100W KDCM315W KDCM3150W KDCM3175W KDCM300W KDCM35A5MW KDCM35D5MW KDCM35W Superseded by E Mining EJ350TML EJ350TM EKM3100W EKM315W EKM3150W EKM3175W EKM300W EKM300MAW EKM300MDW EKM35W JDM350D5W JDM350F JDM350F5MW JDM350G5MW JDM350J5MW JDM350K5MW JDM350L5MW EJ350DW EJ350F EJ350MFW EJ350MGW EJ350MJW EJ350MKW EJ350MLW KDCM350W KDCM350WU18 KDCM3300W KDCM3350W KDCM3400D5MA0D09H04 KDCM3400D5MW KDCM3400D5MWA0D07 EKM350W EKM350WU18 EKM3300W EKM3350W EKM3400MDA0D09H04 EKM3400MDW EKM3400MDA0D07 JDM350MW JDM350W JDM350WS10 JM5T JM3070T JM3090T JM3100T JM315T JM3150T JM3175T JM300T JM35T EJ350MW EJ350W EJ350WS10 EJ35T EJ3070T EJ3090T EJ3100T EJ315T EJ3150T EJ3175T EJ300T EJ35T KDCM3400D5W KDCM3400D5WD09 KDCM3400F KDCM3400F5MW KDCM3400FD09G04 KDCM3400G5MW KDCM3400G5MWD09H04 KDCM3400G5W KDCM3400G5WD07 KDCM3400J5MA0D09 KDCM3400J5MAD9G4S30 KDCM3400J5MD09 EKM3400DW EKM3400DD09 EKM3400F EKM3400MFW EKM3400MFD09G04 EKM3400MGD09G05 EKM3400MGD09H04 EKM3400MGW EKM3400MGD07 EKM3400MJA0D09 EKM3400MJAD9G4S30 EKM3400MJD09 JM35TA5 JM35TD5 JM350T JM350TA5 JM350TA5M_ JM350TC5M JM350TD5_ EJ35TA EJ35TD EJ350T EJ350TA EJ350TMA EJ350TMC EJ350TMD KDCM3400J5MD09H04S30 KDCM3400J5MW KDCM3400J5MWA0D07 KDCM3400J5MWA06 KDCM3400J5MWD07S30 KDCM3400J5WD07 KDCM3400K5MW EKM3400MJD09H04S30 EKM3400MJW EKM3400MJA0D07 EKM3400MJWA06 EKM3400MJD07S30 EKM3400MJD07 EKM3400MKW JM350TF5M_ JM350TG5M_ JM350TJ5M_ JM350TK5M_ EJ350TMF EJ350TMG EJ350TMJ EJ350TMK KDCM3400K5MWS10 KDCM3400K5MWU18 KDCM3400L5MW KDCM3400L5MWD09H04 EKM3400MKWS10 EKM3400MKWU18 EKM3400MLW EKM3400MLD09H04 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-409

410 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers E Cross-Reference, continued Series C Mining KDCM3400L5MWS10 KDCM3400L5WD07 KDCM3400MW KDCM3400N5MW KDCM3400N5MWA06 KDCM3400N5WA0D07 KDCM3400R5MW KDCM3400W KDCM3400W5MW KDCMDMD07 Superseded by E Mining EKM3400MLWS10 EKM3400MLD07 EKM3400MW EKM3400MNW EKM3400MNWA06 EKM3400MNA0D07 EKM3400MRW EKM3400W EKM3400MWW EKM3400MDD07 Series C Mining KDM3300WS10 KDM3350W KDM3400D5MW KDM3400D5W KDM3400D5WU18 KDM3400F KDM3400F5MW KDM3400FK37A06D09D18 KDM3400G5A06D09U18 KDM3400G5A13D09U18 Superseded by E Mining EK3300WS10 EK3350W EK3400MDW EK3400DW EK3400DWU18 EK3400F EK3400MFW EKE3400A06D09D18 EK3400GA06D09U18 EK3400GA13D09U18 KDCMNAD7 KDM400F KDM400G5MS50 KDM400G5MW KDM400W5MW KDM400W5MWA06D07S10 KDM400W5MWA06D10S10 KDM400W5MWD07 KDM400W5MWD07S10 KDM400W5MWD10 KDM400W5MWD10S10 KDM400W5MWS10 KDM3100W KDM315W KDM3150W KDM3150WA06 KDM3175W KDM300W KDM35A5W EKM3400MNA0D07 EK400F EK400MGWS50 EK400MGW EK400MWW EK400MWA06D07S10 EK400MWA06D10S10 EK400MWD07 EK400MWD07S10 EK400MWD10 EK400MWD10S10 EK400MWWS10 EK3100W EK315W EK3150W EK3150WA06 EK3175W EK300W EK35AW KDM3400G5MW KDM3400G5W KDM3400G5WA06 KDM3400G5WS10 KDM3400G5WU18 KDM3400J5MW KDM3400K5MS54 KDM3400K5MW KDM3400L5MW KDM3400MW KDM3400MWA06U18 KDM3400N5MW KDM3400R5MW KDM3400W KDM3400W5MW KEM3100T KEM315T KEM3150T KEM3150TM EK3400MGW EK3400GW EK3400GWS10 EK3400GWS10 EK3400GWU18 EK3400MJW EK3400MKWS54 EK3400MKW EK3400MLW EK3400MW EK3400MWA06U18 EK3400MNW EK3400MRW EK3400W EK3400MWW KEM3100T KEM315T KEM3150T KEM3150TM KDM35D5A13D09U18 KDM35D5MW KDM35D5W KDM35F KDM35W KDM35WK37 KDM35WK37U18 KDM35WK38 KDM350W KDM3300W KDM3300WA06U18 EK35DA13D09U18 EK3400MDW EK35DW EK3400F EK35W EKE35W EKE35WU18 EKE35MW EK350W EK3300W EK3300WA06U18 KEM300T KEM35T KEM35T KEM35TM KEM35TM KM5TA5 KM5TA5M KM5TD5 KM5TD5M KM400TD5 KM400TD5M KEM300T KEM35T KEM35T KEM35TM KEM35TM EK5TA EK400TMA EK5TD EK400TMD EK400TD EK400TMD V4-T-410 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

411 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 E Cross-Reference, continued Series C Mining KM400TG5M KM400TN5M KM400TW5M KM3100T KM315T KM3150T KM3175T KM300T KM35T KM35TA5 KM35TA5M KM35TD5 KM35TD5M KM350T KM3300T KM3350T KM3400T KM3400TD5 KM3400TF5M KM3400TG5M KM3400TJ5M KM3400TK5M KM3400TL5M KM3400TM KM3400TN5M KM3400TR5M KM3400TW5M LDCM3600EMA05W LDCM3600F LDM3600F Superseded by E Mining EK400TMG EK400TMN EK400TMW EK3100T EK315T EK3150T EK3175T EK300T EK35T EK35TA EK3400TMA EK35TD EK3400TMD EK350T EK3300T EK3350T EK3400T EK3400TD EK3400TMF EK3400TMG EK3400TMJ EK3400TMK EK3400TML EK3400TM EK3400TMN EK3400TMR EK3400TMW ELEM3600MA05W ELM3600F EL3600F Series C Mining LEM3300T LEM3350T LEM3400T LEM3400T LEM3400TM LEM3400TM LEM3600T LEM3600TM LM3600TL6M LM3600TN6M LM3600TP6M LM3600TR6M LM3600TS6M LM3600TX6M UVE3LP08K UVE4LP08K Superseded by E Mining LEM3300T LEM3350T LEM3400T LEM3400T LEM3400TM LEM3400TM LEM3600T LEM3600TM EL3600TML EL3600TMN EL3600TMP EL3600TMR EL3600TM EL3600TMX UVE3LP08K UVE4LP08K Additional Information on Mining Breakers Source TD E BR E TC E Description E Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data E Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure E Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves Mining and Metals Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-411

412 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers GFR Relay Contents Description Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Direct Current Circuit Breakers PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers 600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series E Mining Service Circuit Breakers Classic Mining Breakers Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFR Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Page V4-T-343 V4-T-349 V4-T-363 V4-T-37 V4-T-398 V4-T-413 V4-T-414 V4-T-414 Add-On Ground Fault Protection Type GFR Product Description A Type GFR ground fault protection system, when properly installed on a grounded electrical system, will sense phase-to-ground fault currents. When the level of fault current is in excess of the pre-selected current pickup and time delay settings, the GFR relay will initiate a trip action of a disconnect device, which will open the faulted circuit and clear the fault. The GFR devices are UL Class I devices designed to protect electrical equipment against extensive damage from arcing ground faults. A basic Type GFR ground fault protection system consists of a ground fault relay, a ground fault current sensor and a disconnect device equipped with a shunt trip device. This disconnect device can be a molded case circuit breaker, a power circuit breaker, a bolted pressure switch or other fusible disconnect device, suitable for application with UL Class I ground fault sensing and relaying equipment. Note: Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting. Standards and Certifications Eaton s GFR ground fault relays, current sensors, test panels and accessory devices are UL listed by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with their standard for ground fault sensing and relaying equipment, UL 1053, under File E Note: Relays are also listed with CSA under their file number V4-T-41 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

413 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers.6 Product Selection Each installation requires: One relay unit (select trip ampere as required) One current sensor (select configuration required) GFR Relay Typical Current Sensor GFR Relay GFR Relay Types Current Sensor One circuit breaker or disconnect device with shunt trip, or a shunt trip attachment for mounting in existing breaker Test panel (optional) 1 Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting. One end removable for installation. Ground Fault Pickup Amperes For 10 Volt 50/60 Hz Control Electrical reset with zone interlocking GFR1EI GFR60EI GFR100EI Electrical reset without zone interlocking GFR1E GFR60E GFR100E Mechanical reset with zone interlocking GFR1MI GFR60MI GFR100MI Mechanical reset without zone interlocking GFR1M GFR60M GFR100M For 10 Vdc Control Electrical reset with zone interlocking GFR100EID Electrical reset without zone interlocking GFR100ED Mechanical reset with zone interlocking GFR100MID Mechanical reset without zone interlocking GFR100MD Window Size in Inches (mm) Used with Relays Rated 1 1 Amperes 5.50 (139.7) I.D. 183C45G01 Used with Relays Rated 5 60 Amperes.50 (63.5) I.D. 179C768G (139.7) I.D. 156C13G x (198.4 x 79.4) Rect. 157C88G x 4.94 (84.1 x 760.5) Rect. 157C9G03 Used with Relays Rated Amperes.50 (63.5) I.D. 179C768G (139.7) I.D. 156C13G0 8.5 (09.6). I.D. 179C767G x (198.4 x 79.4) Rect. 157C88G x (5.5 x 430.3) Rect. 157C90G x 3.94 (5.5 x 608.1) Rect. 157C91G x (404.9 x 506.4) Rect. 157C89G x 4.94 (84.1 x 633.5) Rect. 157C9G x 9.64 (171.5 x 75.9) Rect. 155C39G03 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-413

414 .6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Specialty Breakers Accessories Options Additional optional equipment can be added to the protection system to meet the requirements of the specifying engineer, including: Ground fault test panel Ground fault warning indicator relay Ground fault indicating ammeter GFR relays are available with zone selective interlocking circuitry to interlock several relays within the same system. This allows the relay which detects a ground fault to instantly clear the fault by tripping the disconnect device. The relay simultaneously sends a signal to relay units upstream from the fault to time delay or to block their operation completely. Current sensors in various designs provide a range of window sizes to accommodate standard bus and cable arrangements. Shunt trip attachments may be ordered for field mounting in Eaton s molded case circuit breakers, or may be ordered factory installed in the breaker. Test Panel (10 Vac) Used to test the ground fault system, to give an indication the relay has tripped the breaker, and to reset the relay after tripping. These functions may be separately mounted pilot devices. Note: When a mechanically reset relay is used with a test panel, both the relay and test panel must be reset following either a simulated ground fault test or actual ground fault. Not UL listed. Optional Test Panel Control 10 Volt 50/60 Hz Test 10 Volt 50/60 Hz GFRTP Ground Fault Warning Indicator This is an accessory item for use with GFR relays with interlocking circuitry. At approximately 30 50% of the relay pickup setting, the indicator switches separate 10 Vac control power to a lamp or relay, (not included) to give an indication of a ground fault. The indicator is rated 110/10 Vac 50/60 Hz for a maximum indicator load of 0.5 amperes. Ground Fault Warning Indicator Description Manual reset Self-resetting 134C67G01 134C67G0 Indicating Ammeter The optional indicating ammeter connects to the sensor terminals through a momentary contact pushbutton, and will indicate (in amperes) any ground fault current flowing through the sensor. Kit includes the ammeter and pushbutton. Note: Not UL listed. Ammeter Kit GFR System Kit Used with 1 1 ampere 75B80G ampere 75B80G ampere 75B80G03 Shunt Trip Attachments Use 10 Vac shunt trips. Faceplate Recommended when these relays are semi-flush mounted, to close the door cutout opening. Face Plate Description Faceplate 75B410G01 Technical Data and Specifications Sensor 600 volt, 50/60 Hz maximum system voltage Electrical Ratings GFR Relay Ground fault detection ranges: 1 to 1, 5 to 60 or 100 to 100 amperes Output contacts: 40 volt, 50/60 Hz: 3.0 amperes 10 volt, 50/60 Hz: 6.0 amperes 8 Vdc: 3.0 amperes 15 Vdc: 0.5 amperes Control power requirements: 10 volt, 50/60 Hz or 15 Vdc (optional) V4-T-414 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

415 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Handle Mechanisms Contents Description Handle Mechanisms Series G High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms.. Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Series C Rotary Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Extension Page V4-T-416 V4-T-41 V4-T-43 V4-T-44 V4-T-49 V4-T-433 V4-T-435 V4-T-437 V4-T-439 V4-T-44 Handle Mechanisms Series G Product Overview Handle mechanisms are used to operate molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. They are available in three basic configurations Flange Mounted, Throughthe-Door and Direct (Close- Coupled) providing safe, dependable operation and ease of installation. Through-the-Door High-Performance Rotary Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Universal Direct Flange Mounted Flex Shaft Handle mechanisms are used on enclosed circuit breakers, control panels and motor control centers in many different applications. Eaton has a handle mechanism for virtually any need. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-415

416 .7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms Handle Mechanisms High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms Product Description The high-performance rotary handle mechanism uses a simple, yet robust design to make installation and operation easy. The external handle s key functional components are all metallic, ensuring reliability. The metalon-metal interface between the handle and shaft prevents contaminant buildup that could impede operation, while UV and chemical agent resistant materials protect the handle from heat and fading in direct sunlight, as well as chemicals that may be introduced in harsh environments. In addition to its robust design features, the handle mechanism has stand-off support that allows for easy operation with a gloved hand. With a shallow profile, the handle can easily be used in applications where an internal or double door is required. The high-performance external handle can accept padlocks or multi-hasp locks. The door is interlocked when padlocked and cannot be bypassed. Contents Description Handle Mechanisms Series G High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms Product Selection Dimensions Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms.... Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms.. Series C Rotary Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms.... Flex Shaft Handle Extension Features NEMA Type 1/3R/1 (IP54) and NEMA Type 4/4X (IP65) ratings Black/Blue or Red/Yellow external handle colors Three shaft lengths 6, 1 and 4 inches, which can be cut to size to match enclosure depth Conveniently packaged as kit containing handle, shaft and mechanism Replacement parts are available separately Metallic functional components ensure reliability Metal-on-metal interface between handle and shaft UV and chemical agentresistant materials protect the handle Shallow profile Compatible with both Series C and Series G molded case circuit breakers and molded case switch platforms Page V4-T-415 V4-T-417 V4-T-40 V4-T-41 V4-T-43 V4-T-44 V4-T-49 V4-T-433 V4-T-435 V4-T-437 V4-T-439 V4-T-44 Same handle can be used on multiple frame sizes, reducing the number of parts needed Red and yellow handles to designate emergency disconnecting means All handle mechanisms can accept padlocks or multihasp locks for added flexibility Fast, easy installation (see video on website for step-by-step instructions) Standards and Certifications The mechanisms for EG, JG and LG breakers have an internal handle that can be operated independent of door position, and locked-out to meet one of the key NFPA requirements (NFPA 79) and UL 508A disconnect requirements. NEMA 1/3R/1, IP54 NEMA 4/4X, IP65 V4-T-416 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

417 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Product Selection Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames S01 Blue Handle S01 Red Handle S Blue Handle S Red Handle Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle) EG-, JG- and LG-Frame Rating Type EG-Frame JG-Frame LG-Frame Description NEMA IP S01 blue handle, 1/3R/1 54 EGHMVD06B0 / 68C6040G5 JGHMVD06B0 / 68C6041G13 6-inch shaft 4/4X 65 EGHMVD06BX0 / 68C6040G8 JGHMVD06BX0 / 68C6041G16 S01 blue handle, 1-inch shaft 1/3R/1 54 EGHMVD1B0 / 68C6040G6 JGHMVD1B0 / 68C6041G14 4/4X 65 EGHMVD1BX0 / 68C6040G9 JGHMVD1BX0 / 68C6041G17 S01 blue handle, 1/3R/1 54 EGHMVD4B0 / 68C6040G7 JGHMVD4B0 / 68C6041G15 4-inch shaft 1 4/4X 65 EGHMVD4BX0 / 68C6040G30 JGHMVD4BX0 / 68C6041G18 S01 red handle, 6-inch shaft S01 red handle, 1-inch shaft 1/3R/1 54 EGHMVD06R0 / 68C6040G31 JGHMVD06R0 / 68C6041G19 4/4X 65 EGHMVD06RX0 / 68C6040G34 JGHMVD06RX0 / 68C6041G 1/3R/1 54 EGHMVD1R0 / 68C6040G3 JGHMVD1R0 / 68C6041G0 4/4X 65 EGHMVD1RX0 / 68C6040G35 JGHMVD1RX0 / 68C6041G3 S01 red handle, 1/3R/1 54 EGHMVD4R0 / 68C6040G33 JGHMVD4R0 / 68C6041G1 4-inch shaft 1 4/4X 65 EGHMVD4RX0 / 68C6040G36 JGHMVD4RX0 / 68C6041G4 S blue handle, 6-inch shaft S blue handle, 1-inch shaft 1/3R/1 54 EGHMVD06B / 68C6040G13 JGHMVD06B / 68C6041G01 LGHMVD06B / 68C604G01 4/4X 65 EGHMVD06BX / 68C6040G16 JGHMVD06BX / 68C6041G04 LGHMVD06BX / 68C604G04 1/3R/1 54 EGHMVD1B / 68C6040G14 JGHMVD1B / 68C6041G0 LGHMVD1B / 68C604G0 4/4X 65 EGHMVD1BX / 68C6040G17 JGHMVD1BX / 68C6041G05 LGHMVD1BX / 68C604G05 S blue handle, 1/3R/1 54 EGHMVD4B / 68C6040G15 JGHMVD4B / 68C6041G03 LGHMVD4B / 68C604G03 4-inch shaft 1 4/4X 65 EGHMVD4BX / 68C6040G18 JGHMVD4BX / 68C6041G06 LGHMVD4BX / 68C604G06 S red handle, 1/3R/1 54 EGHMVD06R / 68C6040G19 JGHMVD06R / 68C6041G07 LGHMVD06R / 68C604G07 6-inch shaft 4/4X 65 EGHMVD06RX / 68C6040G JGHMVD06RX / 68C6041G10 LGHMVD06RX / 68C604G10 S red handle, 1/3R/1 54 EGHMVD1R / 68C6040G0 JGHMVD1R / 68C6041G08 LGHMVD1R / 68C604G08 1-inch shaft 4/4X 65 EGHMVD1RX / 68C6040G3 JGHMVD1RX / 68C6041G11 LGHMVD1RX / 68C604G11 S red handle, 1/3R/1 54 EGHMVD4R / 68C6040G1 JGHMVD4R / 68C6041G09 LGHMVD4R / 68C604G09 4-inch shaft 1 4/4X 65 EGHMVD4RX / 68C6040G4 JGHMVD4RX / 68C6041G1 LGHMVD4RX / 68C604G1 1 4-inch handle comes with support bracket. Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-417

418 .7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames S3 Blue Handle S3 Red Handle S4 Blue Handle S4 Red Handle Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle) NG- and RG-Frame Rating Type NG-Frame RG-Frame Description NEMA IP S3 blue handle, 1/3R/1 54 NGHMVD08B / 68C6043G01 10-inch shaft 4/4X 65 NGHMVD08BX / 68C6043G03 S3 red handle, 10-inch shaft S4 blue handle, 10-inch shaft S4 red handle, 10-inch shaft 1/3R/1 54 NGHMVD08R / 68C6043G0 4/4X 65 NGHMVD08RX / 68C6043G04 1/3R/1 54 NGHMVD08BT / 68C6043G05 RGHMVD08B / 68C6044G01 4/4X 65 NGHMVD08BTX / 68C6043G07 RGHMVD08BX / 68C6044G03 1/3R/1 54 NGHMVD08RT / 68C6043G06 RGHMVD08R / 68C6044G0 4/4X 65 NGHMVD08RTX / 68C6043G08 RGHMVD08RX / 68C6044G04 Note Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance. V4-T-418 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

419 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Separate Components for Series G Frames Series G Components Shafts and Mechanisms Frame Shaft Width Shaft Length Series G Components Handles Only Series G Components Optional Caps As an alternative to blue or red, a black, replaceable cap is available. Series G Replacement Hardware This kit provides replacement parts for Series G high performance handle only. 6-Inch 10-Inch 1-Inch 4-Inch inch handle comes with support bracket. Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance. Mechanism Only EG 8 mm 66A6010G95 66A6010G96 66A6010G D66G17 JG 8 mm 66A6010G95 66A6010G96 66A6010G98 69D605G17 LG 8 mm 66A6010G95 66A6010G96 66A6010G99 69D6051G30 NG 1 mm 66A6013H01 69D9101G30 RG 1 mm 66A6013H01 69D9101G31 Rating Type Handles Only S01 S01 S S S3 S3 S4 S4 Frame NEMA IP Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow EG 1/3R/ C6048G41 68C6048G4 68C6048G01 68C6048G0 4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 JG 1/3R/ C6048G41 68C6048G4 68C6048G01 68C6048G0 4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 LG 1/3R/ C6048G01 68C6048G0 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 4/4X 65 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 NG 1/3R/ C6048G05 68C6048G06 68C6048G09 68C6048G10 4/4X 65 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 68C6048G11 68C6048G1 RG 1/3R/ C6048G09 68C6048G10 4/4X 65 68C6048G11 68C6048G1 S01 66A603H01 Black handle cap HPHC0DGX S 66A603H0 Black handle cap HPHCDGX S3 66A603H03 Black handle cap HPHC3DGX High-performance handle replacement parts kit 66A609G01 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-419

420 .7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in mm (Inches) High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms Handle Type Type S01 Type S Type S3 Type S4 Front Operation Direction of Operation Door Drilling V4-T-40 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

421 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Handle Mechanisms Universal Rotary Product Description Eaton s Universal Rotary is suitable for use with Type 1 or 1 enclosure types. All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle lock off to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position, and indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/ Reset positions. The Universal Rotary has the added feature of international markings for ON (I) and OFF (O). The Universal Rotary is made of molded material. Features The Universal Rotary mechanisms for EG-, JG- and LG-Frame MCCBs can be operated by hand with the door open or locked off to prevent operation with the door open. Contents Description Handle Mechanisms Series G High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Universal Rotary Product Selection Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Series C Rotary Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Extension Standards and Certifications Universal Rotary is UL listed and meets CSA requirements. Universal Rotary also meets IEC and IEC for international compliance. Rotary UL File is E Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism Rotary of Poles NEMA Enclosure Type 1 3R 1 4/4X 1 Handle Lock-Off Handle Indication: ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET International Markings ON (I) OFF (O) 1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See Ordering Information. All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle Lock Off to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position. Handle Material Available Handle Colors Handle Rotation Page V4-T-415 V4-T-416 V4-T-4 V4-T-43 V4-T-44 V4-T-49 V4-T-433 V4-T-435 V4-T-437 V4-T-439 V4-T-44 Shaft Lengths (Inches) Series C rotary Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 1, 16, 4 Universal rotary Molded plastic Yellow/Red/Black 90 deg. 6, 1, 4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-41

422 .7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms Product Selection Universal Rotary Series G Rotary Universal Rotary Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms Handle Color UL Rating Shaft Length in Inches (mm) 1 Complete catalog number includes handle, mechanism, shaft and mounting hardware. Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket. 3 Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 1 enclosures. Use style number 6648CG03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number. Handle is cast aluminum. 4 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (1.7 mm). 5 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 4-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension. 6 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware. 7 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft. Complete 1 EG-Frame Black 1, (15.4) EHMVD06B 1.00 (304.8) EHMVD1B 4.00 (609.6) EHMVD4B Red 1, (15.4) EHMVD06R 1.00 (304.8) EHMVD1R 4.00 (609.6) EHMVD4R JG-Frame Black 1, (15.4) FJHMVD06B 1.00 (304.8) FJHMVD1B 4.00 (609.6) FJHMVD4B Red 1, (15.4) FJHMVD06R 1.00 (304.8) FJHMVD1R 4.00 (609.6) FJHMVD4R LG-Frame Black 1, (15.4) KLHMVD06B 1.00 (304.8) KLHMVD1B 4.00 (609.6) KLHMVD4B Red 1, (15.4) KLHMVD06R 1.00 (304.8) KLHMVD1R 4.00 (609.6) KLHMVD4R NG-Frame Black (15.4) HMVD5B RG-Frame Black (8.6) HMVD6B Series G Rotary Ordering Information Shaft Complete Separate Length Standard Breaker Inches (mm) Handle 3 Mechanism 4 Shaft 5 IEC IP65 67 IEC IP66 67 N-Frame (ND and NG) 6.00 (15.4) HM5R CG1 6648C3G08 417B37G08 WHM5R06 WHM5R06X 1.00 (304.8) HM5R1 6648CG1 6648C3G08 417B37G05 WHM5R1 WHM5R1X (406.4) HM5R CG1 6648C3G08 417B37G06 WHM5R16 WHM5R16X 4.00 (609.6) HM5R4 6648CG1 6648C3G08 417B37G07 WHM5R4 WHM5R4X V4-T-4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

423 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Handle Mechanisms Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Product Description Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms mount directly to the circuit breaker. They are used in shallow enclosures where the standard variable depth Through-the-door type mechanism is not practical or cannot be used. Product Selection Universal Direct (EG LG) The Universal Direct handle mechanisms are rated Type 1 and Type 1. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is available as standard with a door interlock to prevent opening the enclosure while the circuit breaker is in the ON position. It is also available without a door interlock. Contents Description Handle Mechanisms Series G High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Series C Rotary Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Extension Application Description Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms are typically used for applications where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated. Page V4-T-415 V4-T-416 V4-T-41 V4-T-44 V4-T-49 V4-T-433 V4-T-435 V4-T-437 V4-T-439 V4-T-44 Standards and Certifications The Universal Direct handle mechanism is UL listed, IEC and IEC compliant, and meets CSA requirements. Universal Direct Handle Mechanisms Black Handle Color Red Handle Color With Interlock Without Interlock With Interlock Without Interlock Frame EG EHMCCBI EHMCCB EHMCCRI EHMCCR JG JHMCCBI JHMCCB JHMCCRI JHMCCR LG LHMCCBI LHMCCB LHMCCRI LHMCCR Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-43

424 .7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms Handle Mechanisms Contents Description Handle Mechanisms Series G High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms.. Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms.... Flex Shaft Product Selection Accessories Dimensions Handle Mechanisms Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms.. Series C Rotary Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms.... Flex Shaft Handle Extension Page V4-T-415 V4-T-416 V4-T-41 V4-T-43 V4-T-45 V4-T-46 V4-T-46 V4-T-49 V4-T-433 V4-T-435 V4-T-437 V4-T-439 V4-T-44 Flex Shaft Product Description Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms Flange-mounted handle mechanisms mount on the flange of an enclosure door. The Flex Shaft is an extra heavy-duty mechanism that includes a flexible shaft in various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) through 10 feet (3m) for use with various size enclosures. The Flex Shaft handle will accept up to three padlock shackles, each with a maximum diameter of 3/8 inches (9.5 mm). It can be used with Type1 fabricated enclosures. An optional handle is available for Flex Shaft that is suitable for use with Type 4 environments. Flex Shaft comes preset from the factory, requiring only minor field adjustments on installation, which takes about 10 minutes a significant time savings compared to installation of other types of flange handle mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism also takes up less interior enclosure space than competitive designs, and the handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex Shaft handle can be remotely mounted from breaker, where an operator can use it by funneling the cable through conduit. Standards and Certifications Flex Shaft is UL listed under File E64983 and meets CSA requirements. V4-T-44 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

425 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Product Selection Note: Type 4X handle mechanisms are available. Add Suffix X to the complete. Flex Shaft High-Performance Flex Shaft Note: When selecting the length of shaft, ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches (101.6 mm) is maintained to operate properly. Flex Shaft Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms 1 Breaker Frame Note: The standard method of shipment includes the mechanism preset at the factory; however, minor field adjustments may be required. High-Performance Flex Shaft Flange Mounted Handle Mechanism 1 Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) (0.6) 3 (0.9) 4 (1.) 5 (1.3) 6 (1.8) 1 Three-pole only for EG-; three- and four-pole for JG- and LG-Frame. EG-, JG- and LG-Frame can be left- or right-hand mounted. EG EHMFS0 EHMFS03 EHMFS04 EHMFS05 EHMFS06 JG N/A JHMFS03 JHMFS04 JHMFS05 JHMFS06 LG N/A LHMFS04 NG N/A N/A F5S04C F5S05C F5S06C RG N/A N/A F6S04 F6S05 F6S06 Breaker Frame Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) 7 (.1) 8 (.4) 9 (.7) 10 (3.1) EG EHMFS07 EHMFS08 EHMFS09 EHMFS10 JG JHMFS07 JHMFS08 JHMFS09 JHMFS10 LG LHMFS07 LHMFS10 NG N/A N/A N/A F5S10C RG N/A N/A N/A N/A Breaker Frame Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) (0.6) 3 (0.9) 4 (1.) 5 (1.3) 6 (1.8) EG EGFS0HP EGFS03HP EGFS04HP EGFS05HP EGFS06HP JG N/A JGFS03HP JGFS04HP JGFS05HP JGFS06HP LG N/A N/A LGFS04HP N/A N/A NG N/A N/A F5S04HP F5S05HP F5S06HP RG N/A N/A F6S04HP F6S05HP F6S06HP Breaker Frame Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) 7 (.1) 8 (.4) 9 (.7) 10 (3.1) EG EGFS07HP EGFS08HP EGFS09HP EGFS10HP JG JGFS07HP JGFS08HP JGFS09HP JGFS10HP LG LGFS07HP N/A N/A LGFS10HP NG N/A N/A N/A F5S10HP RG N/A N/A N/A N/A Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-45

426 .7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms Accessories Handle Auxiliary Switch Early Break Design, 1A 1B Contact for Flex Shaft Breaker Frame EG JG LG Auxiliary contact changes state prior to parting of breaker contacts to allow for shutdown of equipment. Contacts mounted on breaker mechanism customer supplied wiring. Dimensions AUX1EBFSEG AUX1EBFSJG AUX1EBFSLG Type 1 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft (E- through R-Frame) 1 Handle Length in Inches (mm) C361KJ (101.6) C361KJ (15.4) C361KR Roller latch 3 1 Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters required for assembly. The 1/4-inch x 1/-inch (6.35 x 1.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied with these kits. 3 Third roller latch for use with or 6.00-inch (101.6 or 15.4 mm) handle when three-point latching is required. Type 1 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft (E- through R-Frame) 1 C361KJ4 C361KJ6 C361KR V4-T-46 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

427 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Handle Mechanisms Contents Description Handle Mechanisms Series G High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Series C Rotary Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Extension Page V4-T-415 V4-T-416 V4-T-41 V4-T-43 V4-T-44 V4-T-49 V4-T-433 V4-T-435 V4-T-437 V4-T-439 V4-T-44 Handle Mechanisms Series C Product Overview Handle mechanisms are used to operate molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. They are available in three basic configurations Flange Mounted, Throughthe-Door and Direct (Close- Coupled) providing safe, dependable operation and ease of installation. Through-the-Door High-Performance Rotary Series C Rotary Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Universal Direct Euro IEC G Direct Flange Mounted Flex Shaft C371 Handle mechanisms are used on enclosed circuit breakers, control panels and motor control centers in many different applications. Eaton has a handle mechanism for virtually any need. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-47

428 .7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms Eaton s through-the-door handle mechanisms mount on the front of an enclosure or cabinet door and externally operate the circuit breaker via a variable depth shaft or a linear operator (Type MC). Each rotary type handle mechanism includes a handle, base operating mechanism and shaft that can be cut to various lengths. Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary handle mechanisms are for use with molded case circuit breakers (G, F, J, K, L, MDL), molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. Type 4/4X handles are similar to standard handles except they include an internal neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X handle style number is 6648CG03. Due to gasketing effect between the handle and the housing, the handle may not indicate a tripped position. Universal Rotary F-Frame Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms mount directly to the circuit breaker. They are used in shallow enclosures where the standard variable depth Through-the-door type mechanism is not practical or cannot be used. They are typically for applications where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated. The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism can be used on F- through R-Frames. The G Direct is available with a black or the yellow handle, and with or without a shroud. It is suitable for use with NEMA 1 enclosures. It is for use only with the G-Frame (GD, GC, GHC, GMCP). An escutcheon ring and interlock clip are provided as standard. The standard design includes a lock-off feature. Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms Flange-mounted handle mechanisms mount on the flange of an enclosure door. The Flex Shaft is an extra heavy-duty mechanism that includes a flexible shaft in various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) through 10 feet (3m) for use with various size enclosures. The Flex Shaft handle will accept up to three padlock shackles, each with a maximum diameter of 3/8-inch (9.5 mm). Can be used with NEMA 1, 3R and 1 fabricated enclosures. An optional handle is available for Flex Shaft that is suitable for use with NEMA 4 and 4X environments. Flex Shaft comes preset from the factory, requiring only minor field adjustments on installation, which takes about 10 minutes a significant time savings compared to installation of other types of flange handle mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism also takes up less interior enclosure space than competitive designs and the handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex Shaft handle can be remotely mounted from breaker, where an operator can use it by funneling the cable through conduit. The Type C371 circuit breaker operating mechanisms are designed for installation in control enclosures where main or branch circuit protective devices are required. All circuit breaker mechanisms are suitable for right-hand mounting. Auxiliary contacts are not available for mounting on operating mechanisms. Where required, have them installed in circuit breaker. Handle Extension Handle extension is not included with J, K, L, M and N-Frame breakers. It must be purchased separately. Standards and Certifications Type C371 is UL Listed under File E6635. Flex Shaft is UL Listed under File E64983 and meets CSA requirements. Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary, are UL Listed and meet CSA requirements. Universal Rotary also meets IEC and IEC for international compliance. Rotary UL File is E The Universal Direct handle mechanism is UL 489 Listed, IEC and IEC , and meets CSA requirements. The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism is IEC G Direct is UL Listed and meets CSA requirements. V4-T-48 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

429 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Handle Mechanisms High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms Product Description The high-performance rotary handle mechanism uses a simple, yet robust design to make installation and operation easy. The external handle s key functional components are all metallic, ensuring reliability. The metalon-metal interface between the handle and shaft prevents contaminant buildup that could impede operation, while UV and chemical agent resistant materials protect the handle from heat and fading in direct sunlight, as well as chemicals that may be introduced in harsh environments. In addition to its robust design features, the handle mechanism has stand-off support that allows for easy operation with a gloved hand. With a shallow profile, the handle can easily be used in applications where an internal or double door is required. The high-performance external handle can accept padlocks or multi-hasp locks. The door is interlocked when padlocked and cannot be bypassed. Contents Description Handle Mechanisms Series G High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Product Selection Dimensions Series C Rotary Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Extension Features NEMA Type 1/3R/1 (IP54) and NEMA Type 4/4X (IP65) ratings Black/Blue or Red/Yellow external handle colors Three shaft lengths 6, 1 and 4 inches, which can be cut to size to match enclosure depth Conveniently packaged as kit containing handle, shaft and mechanism Replacement parts are available separately Metallic functional components ensure reliability Metal-on-metal interface between handle and shaft UV and chemical agentresistant materials protect the handle Shallow profile Compatible with both Series C and Series G molded case circuit breakers and molded case switch platforms Page V4-T-415 V4-T-416 V4-T-41 V4-T-43 V4-T-44 V4-T-49 V4-T-430 V4-T-43 V4-T-433 V4-T-435 V4-T-437 V4-T-439 V4-T-44 Same handle can be used on multiple frames sizes reducing the number of parts needed Red and yellow handles to designate emergency disconnecting means All handle mechanisms can accept padlocks or multihasp locks for added flexibility Fast, easy installation (see video on website for step-by-step instructions) Standards and Certifications The mechanisms for EG, JG and LG breakers have an internal handle that can be operated independent of door position, and locked-out to meet one of the key NFPA requirements (NFPA 79) and UL 508A disconnect requirements. NEMA 1/3R/1, IP54 NEMA 4/4X, IP65 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-49

430 .7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms Product Selection Handle Mechanisms for Series C Frames S01 Blue Handle S01 Red Handle Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle) GC/GD- and GMCP-Frame Separate Components for Series C Frames Series C Components Shaft and Mechanism Rating Type GC/GD-Frame GMCP-Frame Description NEMA IP S01 blue handle, 1/3R/1 54 GCHMVD1B / 68C6039G01 GMHMVD1B / 68C6039G05 1-inch shaft 4/4X 65 GCHMVD1BX / 68C6039G03 GMHMVD1BX / 68C6039G07 S01 red handle, 1-inch shaft 1/3R/1 54 GCHMVD1R / 68C6039G0 GMHMVD1R / 68C6039G06 4/4X 65 GCHMVD1RX / 68C6039G04 GMHMVD1RX / 68C6039G08 Shaft Shaft Length Mechanism Frame Width 6-Inch 10-Inch 1-Inch Only GC/GD 6 mm 66A6013H0 GCHMVD / A9095G15 GMCP 6 mm 66A6013H0 GMHMVD / A9095G16 GD 8 mm 66A6010G95 66A6010G D34G90 FD 8 mm 66A6010G95 66A6010G D34G91 JD 10 mm 66A601G15 66A601G D34G9 KD 10 mm 66A601G15 66A601G D34G93 LD 10 mm 66A601G15 66A601G D34G94 MDL 10 mm 66A601G15 66A601G D34G95 ND 1 mm 66A6013H01 69D9101G30 RD 1 mm 66A6013H01 69D9101G31 Note Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance. V4-T-430 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

431 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Series C Components Handles Only Rating Type Handles Only S01 S01 S S S3 S3 S4 S4 Frame NEMA IP Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow GC/GD 1/3R/ C6048G41 68C6048G4 4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 GMCP 1/3R/ C6048G41 68C6048G4 4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 GD 1/3R/ C6048G41 68C6048G4 68C6048G01 68C6048G0 4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 FD 1/3R/ C6048G41 68C6048G4 68C6048G01 68C6048G0 4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 JD 1/3R/ C6048G01 68C6048G0 4/4X 65 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 KD 1/3R/ C6048G01 68C6048G0 4/4X 65 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 LD 1/3R/ C6048G01 68C6048G0 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 4/4X 65 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 MDL 1/3R/ C6048G01 68C6048G0 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 4/4X 65 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 ND 1/3R/ C6048G05 68C6048G06 68C6048G09 68C6048G10 4/4X 65 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 68C6048G11 68C6048G1 RD 1/3R/ C6048G09 68C6048G10 4/4X 65 68C6048G11 68C6048G1 Note Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-431

432 .7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in mm (Inches) High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms Handle Type Type S01 Type S Type S3 Type S4 Front Operation Direction of Operation Door Drilling V4-T-43 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

433 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Handle Mechanisms Series C Rotary Product Description Eaton s through-the-door handle mechanisms mount on the front of an enclosure or a cabinet door and externally operate the circuit breaker via a variable depth shaft or a linear operator (Type MC). Each rotary type handle mechanism includes a handle, a base operating mechanism and a shaft that can be cut to various lengths. Series C Rotary handle mechanisms are used with molded case circuit breakers (F, J, K, L, MDL), molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. Features These rotary handles are robust and durable, made entirely of metal parts. It also has a lock-out tag-out level at the tip of the handle for padlocking. NEMA Type 4/4X handles are similar to standard handles except they include an internal neoprene gasket. NEMA Type 4/4X handle style number is 6648CG03. Due to gasketing effect between the handle and the housing, the handle may not indicate a tripped position. Contents Description Handle Mechanisms Series G High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Series C Rotary Product Selection Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Extension Standards and Certifications Series C Rotary is UL listed and meets CSA requirements. Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism Rotary of Poles NEMA Enclosure Type 1 3R 1 4/4X 1 Handle Lock-Off Handle Indication: ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET International Markings ON (I) OFF (O) 1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See Ordering Information. All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle Lock Off to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position. Handle Material Available Handle Colors Handle Rotation Page V4-T-415 V4-T-416 V4-T-43 V4-T-44 V4-T-49 V4-T-433 V4-T-434 V4-T-435 V4-T-437 V4-T-439 V4-T-44 Shaft Lengths (Inches) Series C rotary Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 1, 16, 4 Universal rotary Molded plastic Yellow/Red/Black 90 deg. 6, 1, 4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-433

434 .7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms Product Selection Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms Series C Rotary Series C Rotary Ordering Information Shaft Complete Separate Length Standard Breaker Inches (mm) 1 Handle Mechanism 3 Shaft 4 IEC IP65 56 IEC IP66 56 F-Frame 6.00 (15.4) HM1R CG5 6648C3G11 417B37G08 WHM1R06 WHM1R06X 1.00 (304.8) HM1R1 6648CG5 6648C3G11 417B37G05 WHM1R1 WHM1R1X (406.4) HM1R CG5 6648C3G11 417B37G06 WHM1R16 WHM1R16X 4.00 (609.6) HM1R4 6648CG5 6648C3G11 417B37G07 WHM1R4 WHM1R4X J-Frame 6.00 (15.4) HMR CG C3G1 417B37G08 WHMR06 WHMR06X 1.00 (304.8) HMR1 6648CG C3G1 417B37G05 WHMR1 WHMR1X (406.4) HMR CG C3G1 417B37G06 WHMR16 WHMR16X 4.00 (609.6) HMR4 6648CG C3G1 417B37G07 WHMR4 WHMR4X K-Frame 6.00 (15.4) HM3R CG C3G5 417B37G08 WHM3R06 WHM3R06X 1.00 (304.8) HM3R1 6648CG C3G5 417B37G05 WHM3R1 WHM3R1X (406.4) HM3R CG C3G5 417B37G06 WHM3R16 WHM3R16X 4.00 (609.6) HM3R4 6648CG C3G5 417B37G07 WHM3R4 WHM3R4X L- and MDL-Frame 6.00 (15.4) HM4R CG C3G19 417B37G08 WHM4R06 WHM4R06X 1.00 (304.8) HM4R1 6648CG C3G19 417B37G05 WHM4R1 WHM4R1X (406.4) HM4R CG C3G19 417B37G06 WHM4R16 WHM4R16X 4.00 (609.6) HM4R4 6648CG C3G19 417B37G07 WHM4R4 WHM4R4X MD/MDS 6.00 (15.4) HM7R CG1 6648C3G17 417B37G (304.8) HM7R1 6648CG1 6648C3G17 417B37G (406.4) HM7R CG1 6648C3G17 417B37G (609.6) HM7R4 6648CG1 6648C3G17 417B37G07 N-Frame (ND and NG) 6.00 (15.4) HM5R CG1 6648C3G08 417B37G08 WHM5R06 WHM5R06X 1.00 (304.8) HM5R1 6648CG1 6648C3G08 417B37G05 WHM5R1 WHM5R1X (406.4) HM5R CG1 6648C3G08 417B37G06 WHM5R16 WHM5R16X 4.00 (609.6) HM5R4 6648CG1 6648C3G08 417B37G07 WHM5R4 WHM5R4X 1 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket. Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 1 enclosures. Use style number 6648CG03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number. Handle is cast aluminum. 3 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (1.7 mm). 4 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 4-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension. 5 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware. 6 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft. V4-T-434 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

435 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Handle Mechanisms Universal Rotary Product Description Eaton s Universal Rotary is suitable for use with Type 1 or 1 enclosure types. All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle lock off to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position, and indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/ Reset positions. The Universal Rotary has the added feature of international markings for ON (I) and OFF (O). The Universal Rotary is made of molded material. Features The Universal Rotary mechanisms for EG-, JG- and LG-Frame MCCBs can be operated by hand with the door open or locked off to prevent operation with the door open. Contents Description Handle Mechanisms Series G High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Universal Rotary Product Selection Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Series C Rotary Universal Rotary Product Selection Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Extension Standards and Certifications Universal Rotary is UL listed and meets CSA requirements. Universal Rotary also meets IEC and IEC for international compliance. Rotary UL File is E Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism Rotary of Poles NEMA Enclosure Type 1 3R 1 4/4X 1 Handle Lock-Off Handle Indication: ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET International Markings ON (I) OFF (O) 1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See Ordering Information. All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle Lock Off to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position. Handle Material Available Handle Colors Handle Rotation Page V4-T-415 V4-T-416 V4-T-4 V4-T-43 V4-T-44 V4-T-49 V4-T-433 V4-T-435 V4-T-436 V4-T-437 V4-T-439 V4-T-44 Shaft Lengths (Inches) Series C rotary Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 1, 16, 4 Universal rotary Molded plastic Yellow/Red/Black 90 deg. 6, 1, 4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-435

436 .7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms Product Selection Universal Rotary F-Frame Universal Rotary F-Frame Series C Universal Rotary 1 Handle Color G-Frame Note Shaft Length in Inches (mm) Complete Black 6.00 (15.4) GHMVD06B 1.00 (304.8) GHMVD1B Red 6.00 (15.4) GHMVD06R 1.00 (304.8) GHMVD1R F-Frame Black 6.00 (15.4) FHMVD06B 1.00 (304.8) FHMVD1B Red 6.00 (15.4) FHMVD06R 1.00 (304.8) FHMVD1R 4.00 (609.6) FHMVD4R J-Frame Black 6.00 (15.4) JHMVD06B 1.00 (304.8) JHMVD1B Red 6.00 (15.4) JHMVD06R 1.00 (304.8) JHMVD1R K-Frame Black 6.00 (15.4) KHMVD06B 1.00 (304.8) KHMVD1B Red 6.00 (15.4) KHMVD06R 1.00 (304.8) KHMVD1R L-Frame Black 6.00 (15.4) LHMVD06B 1.00 (304.8) LHMVD1B Red 6.00 (15.4) LHMVD06R 1.00 (304.8) LHMVD1R 1 Only available as complete handle mechanism. Parts not sold separately. V4-T-436 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

437 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Handle Mechanisms Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Product Description Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms mount directly to the circuit breaker. They are used in shallow enclosures where the standard variable depth Through-the-door type mechanism is not practical or cannot be used. The Universal Direct handle mechanisms are rated Type 1 and Type 1. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is available as standard with a door interlock to prevent opening the enclosure while the circuit breaker is in the ON position. It is also available without a door interlock. Contents Description Handle Mechanisms Series G High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Series C Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Product Selection Flex Shaft Handle Extension Application Description Direct (close-coupled) handle mechanisms are typically used for applications where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated. Page V4-T-415 V4-T-416 V4-T-41 V4-T-44 V4-T-49 V4-T-433 V4-T-437 V4-T-438 V4-T-439 V4-T-44 Standards and Certifications The Universal Direct handle mechanism is IEC and IEC compliant. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-437

438 .7 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms Product Selection Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Euro IEC Direct Frame F K L and M N R Note Black Handle HMCC1B HMCC3B HMCC4B HMVD5B HMVD6B G Direct 1 Black Handle Yellow Handle With Shroud Without Shroud With Shroud Without Shroud Frame GD/GHC HRGCC1S HRGCC10 HRGCC3S HRGCC30 GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMC3S HRGMC30 1 Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame. V4-T-438 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August 017

439 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms.7 Handle Mechanisms Contents Description Handle Mechanisms Series G High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms Series C High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. Series C Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms... Flex Shaft Product Selection Handle Extension Page V4-T-415 V4-T-416 V4-T-41 V4-T-43 V4-T-49 V4-T-433 V4-T-437 V4-T-439 V4-T-440 V4-T-44 Flex Shaft Product Description Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms Flange-mounted handle mechanisms mount on the flange of an enclosure door. The Flex Shaft is an extra heavy-duty mechanism that includes a flexible shaft in various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) through 10 feet (3m) for use with various size enclosures. The Flex Shaft handle will accept up to three padlock shackles, each with a maximum diameter of 3/8 inches (9.5 mm). It can be used with Type1 fabricated enclosures. An optional handle is available for Flex Shaft that is suitable for use with Type 4 environments. Flex Shaft comes preset from the factory, requiring only minor field adjustments on installation, which takes about 10 minutes a significant time savings compared to installation of other types of flange handle mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism also takes up less interior enclosure space than competitive designs, and the handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex Shaft handle can be remotely mounted from breaker, where an operator can use it by funneling the cable through conduit. Standards and Certifications Flex Shaft is UL listed under File E64983 and meets CSA requirements. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E August V4-T-439

L-Frame LD F. Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating. Trip Unit Rating/ Plug Ampere Rating LD T5 7 W

L-Frame LD F. Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Rating. Trip Unit Rating/ Plug Ampere Rating LD T5 7 W July 07 5 Amperes -111 Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

More information

Table Line and Load Terminals. Terminal Body Material. Wire Type. Aluminum Copper Aluminum. English English English.

Table Line and Load Terminals. Terminal Body Material. Wire Type. Aluminum Copper Aluminum. English English English. -174 Series C Molded Case Circuit s July 7 Molded Case Switches Refer to Eaton for UL listed, series tested Molded Case Switch application data. Table -278. Molded Case Switches Cont. Amp Rating at 40

More information

Cutler-Hammer. January 2001

Cutler-Hammer. January 2001 Vol. 12-2 Product Line Overview Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0468] 12 Product Line Description Cutler-Hammer Molded Case Circuit Breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems.

More information

Cutler-Hammer. Molded Case Circuit Breakers Amperes. Product Selection January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No ) J-Frame

Cutler-Hammer. Molded Case Circuit Breakers Amperes. Product Selection January 2001 Vol. 1, Ref. No ) J-Frame Vol. 1, Ref. No. 10499) Product Selection Table 12-56. Types 12-33 12-2 Product Line Overview Vol. 1, Ref. No. [0468] 12 Product Line Description Cutler-Hammer Molded Case Circuit Breakers are designed

More information

PVGard 600 and 1000 Vdc solar photovoltaic circuit breakers

PVGard 600 and 1000 Vdc solar photovoltaic circuit breakers Supersedes October 2013 photovoltaic circuit breakers Contents Description Page Product description........................ 1 PVGard 600 Vdc........................... 2 Technical data...........................

More information

MULTI 9 System Catalog IEC Rated C60N/H/L Circuit Breakers

MULTI 9 System Catalog IEC Rated C60N/H/L Circuit Breakers IEC Rated C60N/H/L Circuit Breakers Standard Features Fast Closing Allows increased withstand to the high inrush currents of some loads Trip-free mechanism: Contacts cannot be held in the on position when

More information

Protection Equipment. 5/2 Introduction

Protection Equipment. 5/2 Introduction Protection Equipment /2 Introduction SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/ Circuit Breakers up to 40 A /6 General data /12 For motor protection /14 For motor protection with overload relay function /1

More information

Application guide. Tmax Link OEM UL 891 Switchboard Program

Application guide. Tmax Link OEM UL 891 Switchboard Program Application guide Tmax Link OEM UL 891 Switchboard Program 04 Tmax Link Overview 04 Standards 04 UL File Extension Process Overview 05 Electrical Data 05 Technical Data 05 Ambient Conditions 08 Circuit

More information

VL Circuit Breaker DG 150A frame

VL Circuit Breaker DG 150A frame VL Circuit Breaker DG 150A frame Breaker type Defined by the 3rd character of the catalog number G Global (UL, CSA, IEC, CE, CCC), interchangeable K Global, non-interchangeable W Global, 100% rated, non-interchangeable,

More information

.1 Power Circuit Breakers Power Circuit Breaker Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Product Overview Magnum Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers for Glob

.1 Power Circuit Breakers Power Circuit Breaker Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Product Overview Magnum Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers for Glob Power Breakers, Contactors and Fuses Family.1 Power Circuit Breakers Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers.......................... Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers................ Magnum MDSL

More information

Series L9 UL-489 Miniature Circuit Breakers

Series L9 UL-489 Miniature Circuit Breakers Series UL-489 iniature Breakers Industrial Breakers for Branch up to 40 Amps Sprecher+Schuh includes a line of circuit breakers approved for branch circuit applications in the United States and Canada

More information

VL Circuit Breaker FG 250A frame Breaker type Defined by the 3rd character of the catalog number K Global, Non-interchangeable

VL Circuit Breaker FG 250A frame Breaker type Defined by the 3rd character of the catalog number K Global, Non-interchangeable VL Circuit Breaker FG 250A frame Breaker type Defined by the 3rd character of the catalog number K Global, Non-interchangeable Trip unit type Defined by the 5th character of the catalog number B Thermal-magnetic,

More information

MS /27/2015. ABB contact for United States of America. General Information Extended Product Type: Categories

MS /27/2015. ABB contact for United States of America. General Information Extended Product Type: Categories Page 1 of 5 MS132-10 ABB contact for United States of America General Information Extended Product Type: Product ID: EAN: Catalog Description: Long Description: MS132-10 1SAM350000R1010 4013614400100 MS132-10

More information

Tmax Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Tmax Molded Case Circuit Breakers Tmax Molded Case Circuit s Introduction ABB is once again demonstrating its commitment to new product development and its superiority in product technology. Never before has the industry seen such high

More information

Siemens AG Price groups PG 14O, 41B, 41E, 41F, 41G, 41H, 41J, 42F, 42J

Siemens AG Price groups PG 14O, 41B, 41E, 41F, 41G, 41H, 41J, 42F, 42J Protection Equipment Siemens AG 2015 Click on the Article No. in the catalog PDF to access it in the Industry Mall and get all related information. Article-No. 3RA1943-2C 3RA1943-2B 3RA1953-2B 3RA1953-2N

More information

Modular Metering - Trip Unit for >1200A Mains DEH41187 Application Guide

Modular Metering - Trip Unit for >1200A Mains DEH41187 Application Guide GE Industrial Solutions Modular Metering - Trip Unit for >1200A Mains DEH41187 Application Guide TABLE OF CONTENTS Description Page 1.0 General Information...... 1 1.1 Protection..... 1 2.0 UL Listed Devices...

More information

3. Coils shall be of molded construction

3. Coils shall be of molded construction .7-4 Motor Starters & Contactors Low Voltage Enclosures General Non-Combination Starters January 00 Sheet 8 0 7 8 9 4 Non-Combination Starters Maximum hp, Volts Typical Non-Combination Starter Application

More information

Low voltage Direct Current Network. Compact NSX DC PV. Circuit breakers and switch disconnectors for solar application.

Low voltage Direct Current Network. Compact NSX DC PV. Circuit breakers and switch disconnectors for solar application. Low voltage Direct Current Network Compact NSX DC PV Circuit breakers and switch disconnectors for solar application Catalogue 2012 Compact NSX DC PV A complete DC offer for solar application from 80

More information

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers LMD 800A Frame Sentron Series Type LMXD6 Non-Interchangeable Trip (Assembled Circuit Breaker without Lugs) Blue Label Continuous 2-Pole (3 Pole Width) 3-Pole Current Rating

More information

MCBs and accessories are certified under CSA C22.2 No. 235 per File LR Tripping characteristics

MCBs and accessories are certified under CSA C22.2 No. 235 per File LR Tripping characteristics Miniature circuit breakers General information General information Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) are used throughout the world in all types of electrical installations. ABB MCBs are recognized for

More information

Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches

Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches Outdoor Medium Voltage Switch.1 Introduction Product Selection Guide....................................2 Medium Voltage Switch MVS Product Description......................................

More information

Air Circuit Breakers

Air Circuit Breakers Siemens AG 204 /2 Introduction 3WL air circuit breakers/ non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC), IEC /8 Introduction /9 3-pole, fixed-mounted versions /6 3-pole, withdrawable versions /23

More information

PRICING. Multi 9, Compact, Masterpact, Interpact, and Vigirex Circuit Protection Products. Class 600. October 2004

PRICING. Multi 9, Compact, Masterpact, Interpact, and Vigirex Circuit Protection Products. Class 600. October 2004 PRICING October 2004 Multi 9, Compact, Masterpact, Interpact, and Vigirex Circuit Protection Products Class 600 CONTENTS Description Page Multi 9 Supplementary Protectors and Miniature Circuit Breakers.............3

More information

PowerPact B. Molded case circuit breakers and switches from A

PowerPact B. Molded case circuit breakers and switches from A PowerPact B Molded case circuit breakers and switches from 15-125 A 2 schneider-electric.us Efficiency that clicks. PowerPact B molded case circuit breakers Schneider Electric introduces a new family member

More information

XT IEC Power Control Manual Motor Protectors

XT IEC Power Control Manual Motor Protectors May 07 Product Selection Table 7. Rotary with Screw Terminals Global Ratings and North American Ratings Type and Type 2 Coordination Motor Protective Device with Thermal and Magnetic Trip Rated Uninterrupted

More information

OTEC Transfer switch open transition

OTEC Transfer switch open transition Specification sheet OTEC Transfer switch open transition 40 1200 amp Description OTEC transfer switches are designed for operation and switching of electrical loads between primary power and Standby generator

More information

3VT Kompaktleistungsschalter bis 630A

3VT Kompaktleistungsschalter bis 630A Katalog LV 36 AT Österreich - Auszug 2012 3VT Kompaktleistungsschalter bis 630A SENTRON Schutz-, Schalt- und Messtechnik www.siemens.com/lowvoltage 3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A 1 Technical

More information

Data sheet. CI-TI TM Contactors and Motor Starters Circuit Breakers CTI B1427

Data sheet. CI-TI TM Contactors and Motor Starters Circuit Breakers CTI B1427 Data sheet CI-TI TM Contactors and Motor Starters Circuit Breakers November 2002 DKACT.PD.C00.L2.02 520B1427 Introduction Circuit breakers/manual motor starters cover the power ranges 0.09-12.5 kw This

More information

BETA Switching Switches and Light Indicators

BETA Switching Switches and Light Indicators Siemens AG 2008 BETA Switching /2 Product overview /3 5TE8 control switches / 5TE4 pushbuttons /2 5TE5 light indicators /5 5TE8 ON/OFF switches /22 5TE9 busbars /24 5TE switch disconnectors Siemens ET

More information

SECTION ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SECTION ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers rated 600V AC and less: 1. Fusible switches.

More information

30 ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules. Product Description

30 ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules. Product Description August 2006 0 ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules 5-0 ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules Clockwise from Left:,, MCCBs Shown with Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules Product Description Eaton

More information

White Paper. Ground Fault Application Guide. WL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

White Paper. Ground Fault Application Guide. WL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers White Paper Ground Fault Application Guide WL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Table of Contents Introduction 3 Need for ground fault tripping 3 Requirements from industry standards 3 National Electrical

More information

Page 2 DS LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS Digitrip Trip Unit Inside Wiring Guide Outside Wiring Guide Shutter Drawout Unit Position Indicator Escut

Page 2 DS LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS Digitrip Trip Unit Inside Wiring Guide Outside Wiring Guide Shutter Drawout Unit Position Indicator Escut Page 1 Supersedes Renewal Parts Data 33-790-1G pages 1-20 dated December, 1988 Mailed to: C, D, E/33-700 Westinghouse DS and DSL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and Cell Parts Contents Pages DS Breaker

More information

AF40... AF96 3-pole contactors Technical data

AF40... AF96 3-pole contactors Technical data Main pole - Utilization characteristics according to IEC Standards IEC 60947- / 60947-4- and EN 60947- / 60947-4- Rated operational voltage Ue max. 690 V Rated frequency (without derating) 50 / 60 Hz Conventional

More information

3VT5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 1600 A

3VT5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 1600 A VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog General data Siemens AG Overview Connecting sets 4 Switching unit 6 7 8 9 6 4 Accessories 7 8 9 4 NSO_9a 4 6 7 8 9 Molded case circuit breaker Multiple

More information

Compact Circuit Protector (CCP) Application Note

Compact Circuit Protector (CCP) Application Note Compact Circuit Protector (CCP) Application Note Table Of Contents Application Note Description Page Objective............................................... 3 Compact Circuit Protector (CCP).............................

More information

Siemens AG WT Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A. Catalog LV SENTRON. Answers for infrastructure.

Siemens AG WT Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A. Catalog LV SENTRON. Answers for infrastructure. 3WT Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A Catalog LV 35 011 SENTRON Answers for infrastructure. Related catalogs Low-Voltage Power Distribution and LV 10.1 Electrical Installation Technology Protection, Switching,

More information

System pro M compact Miniature Circuit Breaker S 200 M UC for DC and AC applications

System pro M compact Miniature Circuit Breaker S 200 M UC for DC and AC applications System pro M compact Miniature Circuit Breaker S 200 M UC for DC and AC applications 2CDC021031S0011 2CDC021033S0011 The miniature circuit breaker S 200 M UC extends the established ABB System pro M compact

More information

Phone: Fax: Web: -

Phone: Fax: Web:  - HK1-11 HKF1-11 HK-11 HKS-20 uxiliary contacts Mounting uxiliary contacts position Pilot duty rating Instantaneous Lagging / leading / max. 116 132 5x 9x quantity ac dc NO NC NO NC 2 - - - HK1-20 Right

More information

Selective main circuit breakers S 750 series Technical Data

Selective main circuit breakers S 750 series Technical Data Selective main circuit breakers S 750 series Technical Data When connecting aluminium conductors ( 4 mm 2 ) ensure that the contact surfaces of the conductors are cleaned, brushed and treated with grease.

More information

Product Selection 3-Pole Contactors

Product Selection 3-Pole Contactors - Contactors and January 0 Vol., Ref. No. [06] Product Selection -Pole Contactors When Ordering Specify Select required contactor by Catalog Number and replace the magnet coil alpha designation in the

More information

AF09... AF30 3-pole Contactors up to 20 HP / 480 VAC

AF09... AF30 3-pole Contactors up to 20 HP / 480 VAC AF0... AF0 -pole Contactors up to 20 HP / 480 VAC Contactors and Overload Relays Overview...2 AF0... AF0 -pole Contactors Ordering Details...4 Main Technical Data...20 DC Circuit switching...2 Main Accessory

More information

Metal-Enclosed Switches. Medium Voltage. Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches Contents

Metal-Enclosed Switches. Medium Voltage. Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches Contents January 2003 Vol. 1, Ref. No. [1011] -1 Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches Contents Description Page MVS................................... -2 and Breaker MSB........................ -3 Metal-Enclosed

More information

Circuit Protection. Circiut Protection

Circuit Protection. Circiut Protection Circuit Protection Series L8 UL1077 Supplementary Protectors...2 Selection Guide - Trip Curve "B"...4 Selection Guide - Trip Curve "C"...5 Selection Guide - Trip Curve "D"...6 Accessories...7 Technical

More information

SIRIUS 3RU2 Thermal Overload Relays

SIRIUS 3RU2 Thermal Overload Relays Overview 1 2 3 4 6 1 2 NSB0_0207a Connection for mounting onto contactors: Optimally adapted in electrical, mechanical and design terms to the contactors. The overload relay can be connected directly to

More information

Basic function. Rated current. Appropriate for three-phase motors of output 2) [kw] I n. = 400 V a.c. 2) Appropriate for three-phase motors

Basic function. Rated current. Appropriate for three-phase motors of output 2) [kw] I n. = 400 V a.c. 2) Appropriate for three-phase motors MOTOR STARTERS SM Basic function Switching and protection of motors up to A Protection against short-circuit and protection against overload The device responds to phase failure The device is provided

More information

Mar H: SUPPLEMENTAL PARALLELING GEAR (16315-H)

Mar H: SUPPLEMENTAL PARALLELING GEAR (16315-H) 2101 Commonwealth Blvd, Suite B Ann Arbor, MI 48105-5759 www.med.umich.edu/facilities/plan/ 263010-H: SUPPLEMENTAL PARALLELING GEAR (16315-H) Related Sections Basis Guideline: N/A For an explanation of

More information

System pro M compact Supplementary protector S 200 PR for ring-tongue applications acc. to UL1077

System pro M compact Supplementary protector S 200 PR for ring-tongue applications acc. to UL1077 Data Sheet System pro M compact Supplementary protector S 200 PR for ring-tongue applications acc. to UL1077 2CDC021026S0011 2CDC021016S0012 The S 200 PR is a high-performance supplementary protector with

More information

Michigan State University Construction Standards SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS PAGE

Michigan State University Construction Standards SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS PAGE PAGE 261116-1 SECTION 261116 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,

More information

Magnetic Overcurrent Circuit Breaker

Magnetic Overcurrent Circuit Breaker Magnetic Overcurrent Circuit Breaker 808-... Description ngle pole miniaturised magnetic circuit breakers with unique highspeed operating mechanism and push/pull on/off manual actuation. Fitted with electrically

More information

Selection and Application Guide Supplement. WL UL Pole Circuit Breakers. usa.siemens.com/wlbreaker

Selection and Application Guide Supplement. WL UL Pole Circuit Breakers. usa.siemens.com/wlbreaker Selection and Application Guide Supplement WL UL1066 4-Pole Circuit Breakers usa.siemens.com/wlbreaker WL Power Circuit Breaker Table of Contents Ratings for UL 1066 (ANSI C37) Circuit Breakers Frame size

More information

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces.

1. The term withstand means the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces. SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Receptacle switches. 4. Shunt trip switches. 5.

More information

Contactors & Fuses. Power Breakers, Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses Contents

Contactors & Fuses. Power Breakers, Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses Contents - December 00 Power Breakers, Contactors & Fuses Contents Description Page Power Circuit Breakers Low Voltage Power Breakers.................................... - Magnum Family...........................................

More information

US CATALOG. Miniature Circuit Breakers

US CATALOG. Miniature Circuit Breakers US CATALOG Miniature Circuit Breakers Miniature circuit breakers Table of contents S(U)200 series miniature circuit breakers UL 489 series Description and features 2 SU200M-C 3 SU200M-K 4 SU200M-Z 5 SU200MR-K

More information

01 Spectra Plus - Introduction

01 Spectra Plus - Introduction 01 Spectra Plus - Introduction Standard features Conforming to IS13947-2/EN60947 2 Compact dimensions Available in 3P & 4P High performance microprocessor protection release Wide overload setting from

More information

Power systems Protection course

Power systems Protection course Al-Balqa Applied University Power systems Protection course Department of Electrical Energy Engineering Dr.Audih 1 Part 3 Protective Devices Fuses & Circuit Breakers 2 Introduction: Fuse Is advice used

More information

WL Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear. Selection and Application Guide.

WL Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear. Selection and Application Guide. WL Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Selection and Application Guide www.sea.siemens.com/switchgear 3 Table of Contents General Information...............................................................................................

More information

Manual Motor Starters

Manual Motor Starters Leader in Electrics & Automation Meta-MEC Manual Motor Starters Electric Equipment LG Meta-MEC Manual Motor Starters provide completed ranges up to 100A 45 mm 55 mm 32AF 2 45 mm 70 mm 63AF 100AF 3 LG Meta-MEC

More information

3VT2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 250 A

3VT2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 250 A VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 5 A Catalog VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 5 A General data / - Overview Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors / - Overview / - Selection and ordering data

More information

Section Contents. Disconnect Switches

Section Contents. Disconnect Switches Section Contents Page Compact Circuit Protector (CCP) fused disconnect switches....................326-329 Fused, dead front disconnect switches...........329 Fusible Disconnect Switch Overview............330

More information

2018 Consultant s Handbook Division 26 Electrical 2413 Switchboards

2018 Consultant s Handbook Division 26 Electrical 2413 Switchboards 1 General 1.1 Switchboards shall be U.L. listed and labeled. 1.2 Each switchboard shall have its own main disconnecting means unless it is located in the same room as its source of origin. In most cases

More information

.1 Low Voltage Switchgear Magnum DS Switchgear with Molded Case Circuit Breaker Feeder Section Cross-Reference Eaton s Electrical Sector has an organi

.1 Low Voltage Switchgear Magnum DS Switchgear with Molded Case Circuit Breaker Feeder Section Cross-Reference Eaton s Electrical Sector has an organi Low Voltage Switchgear Magnum DS Switchgear.1 Cross-Reference................................................ 102 Product Description............................................. 102 Application Description...........................................

More information

MULTIBLOC 3.ST8 Size 3, 630A, 690VAC, Design for Bottom Fitting, 3-,4-pole

MULTIBLOC 3.ST8 Size 3, 630A, 690VAC, Design for Bottom Fitting, 3-,4-pole MULTIBLOC 3.ST8 IEC FUSE SWITCH DISCONNECTORS NH FUSE SWITCH DISCONNECTOR The production programme of MULTIBLOC series 3.ST8 comprises NH fuse switch disconnectors for 630A. They are designed for bottom

More information

Low Voltage A GE Power Controls Company. General catalogue

Low Voltage A GE Power Controls Company. General catalogue Low Voltage A GE Power Controls Company General catalogue this is a blanc page Miniature circuit breakers A Miniature circuit breakers AC miniature circuit breakers Benefits of the new MCB s A 3 The AEG

More information

Molded Case Circuit Breaker Selection Guide. Replacement Breakers for Eaton Panelboards

Molded Case Circuit Breaker Selection Guide. Replacement Breakers for Eaton Panelboards Molded Case Selection Guide Replacement s for Eaton Panelboards Molded Case Selection Guide Product Range in Stock and Ready to Go Range KAIC @ 240Vac KAIC @ 277Vac KAIC @ 347Vac KAIC @ 600Vac Terminals

More information

Compact Circuit Protector (CCP)

Compact Circuit Protector (CCP) Supersedes March 2016 BUSSMANN SERIES UL Class CC, CF (CUBEFuse ), midget and IEC 10x38mm DIN-Rail 2011/65/EU Contents Description Page Description Page 1-, 2- and 3-pole Class CC, Midget, 10x38mm Description

More information

Breakers and Switches. Switches Switch-disconnectors OT and OTM

Breakers and Switches. Switches Switch-disconnectors OT and OTM Breakers and Switches Switches Switch-disconnectors OT and OTM Switch-disconnectors OT16...4000 and OTM40...2500 Features Product overview 4 High performance, compact solution 6 Technical data Switch-disconnectors,

More information

Electronic Circuit Breaker ESS20-0..

Electronic Circuit Breaker ESS20-0.. Electronic Circuit Breaker ES-0.. Description Electronic circuit breaker type ES-0.. is designed to ensure selective disconnection of individual loads in systems which are powered by a DC 4 V switch-mode

More information

Leadership in Circuit Protection

Leadership in Circuit Protection Leadership in Circuit Protection Bussmann is now a part of Eaton Learn more at Eaton.com/Cooper Leadership in Circuit Protection. The only company that can provide a complete circuit protection solution

More information

Bussmann series Quik-Spec Power Module Switch elevator disconnect

Bussmann series Quik-Spec Power Module Switch elevator disconnect Supersedes January 2016 Agency information UL 98 enclosed and dead-front switch - Guide WIAX, WIAX7 (Canada), File E182262 culus, NEMA 1, UL 50, Listed enclosure cul per Canadian Standards C22.2, No. 0-M91-CAN/

More information

Selective Coordination

Selective Coordination Circuit Breaker Curves The following curve illustrates a typical thermal magnetic molded case circuit breaker curve with an overload region and an instantaneous trip region (two instantaneous trip settings

More information

Approved Standards. Motor Contactor. Main contactor. Accessoires. 21 Motor Contactor J7KN

Approved Standards. Motor Contactor. Main contactor. Accessoires. 21 Motor Contactor J7KN Motor Contactor Main contactor AC & DC operated Integrated auxiliary contacts Screw fixing and snap fitting (35 mm DIN rail) up to 45 kw Range from 4 to 110 kw (AC 3, 380/415V) Finger proof ( VBG 4) Accessoires

More information

Motor Starter Protectors

Motor Starter Protectors Motor Starter Protectors Industrial Controls Product Catalog 207 Section contents Section Overview /2 - /3 Motor Starter Protectors 3RV20 MSP, Class 0/20 /4 - /5 Circuit Breakers 3RV27, 3RV28 Circuit Breaker

More information

Multi-Pak Group Control

Multi-Pak Group Control Multi-Pak Grouping.1 Product....................................... Application.................................... Features Enclosures........................................... V-T-2 V-T-2 V-T-2 Feeder

More information

Technical Data. Miniature circuit-breakers for branch circuit protection according to UL 489, CSA C 22.2 No. 5

Technical Data. Miniature circuit-breakers for branch circuit protection according to UL 489, CSA C 22.2 No. 5 Technical Data Miniature circuit-breakers for branch circuit protection according to UL 489, CSA C 22.2 No. 5 When connecting aluminum conductors, ensure that the contact surfaces of the conductors are

More information

AF09... AF38 4-pole Contactors AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals

AF09... AF38 4-pole Contactors AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals AF09... AF38 4-pole Contactors AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals 25 to 55 A culus CE Application AF09... AF38 4-pole contactors are used for controlling power circuits up to 600 V AC and 240 V DC.

More information

FUSE TECHNOLOGY Ambient temperature

FUSE TECHNOLOGY Ambient temperature This fuse technology guide will discuss basic fuse operating, application, and selection criteria concepts. The intended purpose of this section is to aid designers with the operation and characteristics

More information

Digitrip Retrofit System for ITE K-3000, K-3000 S, K-4000 and K-4000 S Breakers

Digitrip Retrofit System for ITE K-3000, K-3000 S, K-4000 and K-4000 S Breakers Supersedes IL 33-858-4 Dated 05/02 Digitrip Retrofit System for ITE K-3000, K-3000 S, K-4000 and K-4000 S Breakers Digitrip Retrofit System for ITE K-3000, Digitrip Retrofit System for ITE K-3000, K-3000

More information

Single Pole Circuit Protectors 55. Multi-Pole Circuit Protectors 56. Configurations 58. Operating Characteristics 59.

Single Pole Circuit Protectors 55. Multi-Pole Circuit Protectors 56. Configurations 58. Operating Characteristics 59. Single Pole Circuit Protectors 55 Multi-Pole Circuit Protectors 56 Configurations 58 Operating Characteristics 59 Delay Curves 60 Specifications 61 Decision Tables 62 SINGLE POLE CIRCUIT PROTECTORS The

More information

Instruction Bulletin. DS/DSL and DSII/DSLII Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Replacement Parts Class 6035

Instruction Bulletin. DS/DSL and DSII/DSLII Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Replacement Parts Class 6035 Instruction Bulletin 4402-997-0 February 999 Middletown, OH, USA DS/DSL and DSII/DSLII Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Replacement Parts Class 605 DS/DSL and DSII/DSLII Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker

More information

AF40... AF96 3-pole contactors 30 to 60 hp at 480 V AC AC / DC operated with 1 N.O. + 1 N.C. auxiliary contacts

AF40... AF96 3-pole contactors 30 to 60 hp at 480 V AC AC / DC operated with 1 N.O. + 1 N.C. auxiliary contacts AF4... AF96 -pole contactors to 6 hp at 48 V AC AC / DC operated with N.O. N.C. auxiliary contacts Description AF4... AF96 contactors are mainly used for controlling -phase motors and power circuits up

More information

WL Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear

WL Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear www.usa.siemens.com/switchgear WL Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Selection and Application Guide Answers for industry. Table of Contents General Information... 2 Construction Details... 3-5 WL

More information

4.1. Definite Purpose Contactors and Starters. Contents

4.1. Definite Purpose Contactors and Starters. Contents . Definite Purpose and Starters Product Overview and Starters Definite Purpose and Starters Contents Description Page 20 0A, Compact Single- and Two-Pole C25................................ V5-T- 5 360A,

More information

High Performance Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers 410/520/

High Performance Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers 410/520/ High Performance Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers 0/0/30-... Description Single, double and three pole high performance thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with tease-free, trip-free, snap action mechanism

More information

Single Pole Circuit Protectors 67 Multi-Pole Circuit Protectors 68 Printed Circuit Board Mounting 70 Configurations 72 Operating Characteristics 73

Single Pole Circuit Protectors 67 Multi-Pole Circuit Protectors 68 Printed Circuit Board Mounting 70 Configurations 72 Operating Characteristics 73 Single Pole Circuit Protectors 67 Multi-Pole Circuit Protectors 68 Printed Circuit Board Mounting 70 Configurations 72 perating Characteristics 73 Delay Curves 74 Specifications 76 Decision Tables 78 SIGLE

More information

DATA SHEET FOR 1 TYPE COMPARTMENTALISED / NON - COMPARTMENTALISED. ( a ) CIRCUIT BREAKER FEEDERS FULLY DRAWOUT / NON DRAWOUT

DATA SHEET FOR 1 TYPE COMPARTMENTALISED / NON - COMPARTMENTALISED. ( a ) CIRCUIT BREAKER FEEDERS FULLY DRAWOUT / NON DRAWOUT 44LK-500/E.04/002A/A4 PROJECT NO 44LK-500 CHKD. BY VDV VDV A CLIMATIC CONDITIONS THIS DATA SHEET IS APPLICABLE FOR IN UTILITY BOILER PACKAGE DESIGN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 45 C 2 ALTITUDE ( ABOVE MSL ) 6.7

More information

Interruption Technology of Breakers for High-voltage Direct Current

Interruption Technology of Breakers for High-voltage Direct Current Interruption Technology of Breakers for High-voltage Direct MORIAI Hiroshi ABSTRT Applications for direct current () electric distribution have been spreading along with the increase of data centers and

More information

Series C, F-frame molded case circuit breaker, 15A, Two-pole, Thermal Magnetic Trip, FD Breaker

Series C, F-frame molded case circuit breaker, 15A, Two-pole, Thermal Magnetic Trip, FD Breaker FD2015 2 Pole 15A FD Eaton Corp Catalog Number Manufacturer Description Weight per unit Product Category Features amperage rating 15 Frame Size F-frame interrupt rating 35 kaic at 480V Poles 2 Trip Type

More information

Fusetron FRN-R Class RK5 250Vac/125Vdc A, dual element, time-delay fuses

Fusetron FRN-R Class RK5 250Vac/125Vdc A, dual element, time-delay fuses Technical Data1019 Supersedes July 2013 Fusetron FRN-R Class RK5 250Vac/125Vdc Catalog symbols: FRN-R-_ (non-indicating) FRN-R-_ID (indicating) Description: Eaton Bussmann series advanced protection, energy

More information

Circuit Breakers Naval Shipboard Use

Circuit Breakers Naval Shipboard Use Circuit Breakers Naval Shipboard Use Circuit Breakers for Naval Shipboard Use Contents Description Page Description Page Description Page Description Page Selector Guide for Navy Circuit Breakers......

More information

Solid Dielectric, Three Phase Reclosers CATALOG VS11

Solid Dielectric, Three Phase Reclosers CATALOG VS11 Solid Dielectric, Three Phase Reclosers Providing electronic, three phase overcurrent protection for systems rated through 38kV, 800A continuous current, 12.5kA symmetrical interrupting Reliable performance

More information

Thermal overload relays Type TA Class 10

Thermal overload relays Type TA Class 10 Thermal overload relays Type TA Class Thermal Overload relays Description Available for starter construction with A Line contactors and separate panel mounting Designed for close couple mounting Separate

More information

US Brochure. Tmax XT Molded case circuit breakers Simply XTraordinary

US Brochure. Tmax XT Molded case circuit breakers Simply XTraordinary US Brochure Tmax XT Molded case circuit breakers Simply XTraordinary XTraordinary benefits ABB, a global leader in circuit breaker technology is making major investments in the United States to bring extraordinary

More information

Low-Peak LPJ Class J 600Vac/300Vdc, 1-60A, dual element, time-delay fuses

Low-Peak LPJ Class J 600Vac/300Vdc, 1-60A, dual element, time-delay fuses Technical Data 6 Supersedes August 2015 Low-Peak LPJ Class J 600Vac/Vdc, 1-60A, Catalog symbol: LPJ-(amp)SP (non-indicating) LPJ-(amp)SPI (indicating) Description: Bussmann series Ultimate protection LPJ

More information

CHCC_ (Class CC) CHM_ (UL midget/iec 10x38) CHPV_ (13/32 x 1-1/2 and 10x38 photovoltaic)

CHCC_ (Class CC) CHM_ (UL midget/iec 10x38) CHPV_ (13/32 x 1-1/2 and 10x38 photovoltaic) Supersedes August 2016 BUSSMANN SERIES Specifications: 2011/65/EU Volts 600 V (or less) UL 690 V (or less) IEC 1000 Vdc (or less) photovoltaic (PV) Amps 30 A UL 32 A IEC Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)

More information

Flexible. Intelligent. Trendsetting.

Flexible. Intelligent. Trendsetting. www.eaton.com www.moeller.net Flexible. Intelligent. Trendsetting. The easy way to connect. Product Information Motor-protective circuit-breaker PKE with electronic wide-range overload protection. Obliged

More information

R-MAG Vacuum Circuit Breaker with Magnetic Actuator Mechanism 15.5 kv - 27 kv; 1200 A A

R-MAG Vacuum Circuit Breaker with Magnetic Actuator Mechanism 15.5 kv - 27 kv; 1200 A A R-MAG Vacuum Circuit Breaker with Magnetic Actuator Mechanism 15.5 kv - 27 kv; 1200 A - 3700 A R-MAG The R-MAG is truly the next generation in vacuum circuit breakers, combining industry recognized magnetic

More information

WORKSHOP SPECIFICATIONS

WORKSHOP SPECIFICATIONS WORKSHOP SPECIFICATIONS DPX 3 160 & 250 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS THE GLOBAL SPECIALIST IN ELECTRICAL AND DIGITAL BUILDING INFRASTRUCTURES DPX 3 RANGE Not only do DPX³ 160 and DPX 3 250 MCCBs provide

More information

PowerPact M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact NS630b NS3200 Circuit Breakers

PowerPact M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact NS630b NS3200 Circuit Breakers PowerPact M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact NS630b NS3200 Circuit Breakers Catalog 0612CT0101 R02/16 2015 Class 0612 CONTENTS Description............................................. Page General Information..........................................

More information

Gas Insulated Metal-clad Switchgear, HMGS!

Gas Insulated Metal-clad Switchgear, HMGS! Medium Voltage HMGS-G10 HYUNDAI Medium Voltage Gas Insulated Metal-clad Switchgear, HMGS! SF6 Gas Insulated Metal-clad Switchgear is an integrated assembly of vacuum circuit breaker, 3-position switch,

More information